Cisco Systems Network Router 15454 SDH User Manual
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual  
Product and Documentation Release 5.0  
Last Updated: April 2009  
Corporate Headquarters  
Cisco Systems, Inc.  
170 West Tasman Drive  
San Jose, CA 95134-1706  
USA  
http://www.cisco.com  
Tel: 408 526-4000  
800 553-NETS (6387)  
Fax: 408 526-4100  
Customer Order Number: DOC-7816305=  
Text Part Number: 78-16305-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O N T E N T S  
About this Guide xxix  
Revision History xxix  
Document Objectives xxx  
Audience xxx  
Document Organization xxx  
Related Documentation xxxi  
Document Conventions xxxi  
Obtaining Optical Networking Information xxxviii  
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information xxxviii  
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM xxxviii  
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request xxxviii  
CHAPTER  
1
Shelf and FMEC Hardware 1-1  
1.1 Overview 1-1  
1.2 Front Door 1-3  
1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connection 1-7  
1.4 E1-75/120 Conversion Panel 1-9  
1.5 Coaxial Cable 1-10  
1.6 Twisted-Pair Balanced Cable 1-10  
1.7 Cable Routing and Management 1-11  
1.8 Fiber Management 1-12  
1.9 Fan-Tray Assembly 1-13  
1.9.1 Fan Speed 1-14  
1.9.2 Air Filter 1-14  
1.10 Power and Ground Description 1-14  
1.11 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections 1-14  
1.12 Cards and Slots 1-15  
1.12.1 Card Slot Requirements 1-15  
1.12.2 Card Replacement 1-18  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility 1-18  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CHAPTER  
2
Common Control Cards 2-1  
2.1 Common Control Card Overview 2-1  
2.1.1 Card Summary 2-1  
2.1.2 Card Compatibility 2-2  
2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility 2-3  
2.2 TCC2 Card 2-4  
2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality 2-6  
2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators 2-6  
2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators 2-7  
2.3 TCC2P Card 2-7  
2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality 2-8  
2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators 2-9  
2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators 2-10  
2.4 XC10G Card 2-10  
2.4.1 XC10G Functionality 2-12  
2.4.2 XC10G Card-Level Indicators 2-12  
2.5 XC-VXL-10G Card 2-12  
2.5.1 XC-VXL-10G Functionality 2-14  
2.5.2 XC-VXL-10G Card-Level Indicators 2-14  
2.6 XC-VXL-2.5G Card 2-14  
2.6.1 XC-VXL-2.5G Card Functionality 2-16  
2.6.2 XC-VXL-2.5G Card-Level Indicators 2-16  
2.7 AIC-I Card 2-16  
2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 2-17  
2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls 2-18  
2.7.3 Orderwire 2-19  
2.7.4 Power Monitoring 2-20  
2.7.5 User Data Channel 2-20  
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel 2-21  
CHAPTER  
3
Electrical Cards 3-1  
3.1 Electrical Card Overview 3-1  
3.1.1 Card Summary 3-2  
3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-4  
3.2 E1-N-14 Card 3-4  
3.2.1 E1-N-14 Card Functionality 3-5  
3.2.2 E1-N-14 Card-Level Indicators 3-6  
3.2.3 E1-N-14 Port-Level Indicators 3-6  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3.3 E1-42 Card 3-6  
3.3.1 E1-42 Card Functionality 3-7  
3.3.2 E1-42 Card-Level Indicators 3-8  
3.3.3 E1-42 Port-Level Indicators 3-8  
3.4 E3-12 Card 3-8  
3.4.1 E3-12 Card Functionality 3-9  
3.4.2 E3-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-10  
3.4.3 E3-12 Port-Level Indicators 3-10  
3.5 DS3i-N-12 Card 3-10  
3.5.1 DS3i-N-12 Card Functionality 3-11  
3.5.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-12  
3.5.3 DS3i-N-12 Port-Level Indicators 3-12  
3.6 STM1E-12 Card 3-13  
3.6.1 STM 1E-12 Card Functionality 3-13  
3.6.2 STM1E-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-14  
3.6.3 STM1E-12 Port-Level Indicators 3-14  
3.7 BLANK Card 3-14  
3.8 FMEC-E1 Card 3-15  
3.9 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card 3-16  
3.9.1 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Connector Pinout 3-17  
3.10 FMEC E1-120NP Card 3-18  
3.10.1 FMEC E1-120NP Connector Pinout 3-19  
3.11 FMEC E1-120PROA Card 3-21  
3.11.1 FMEC E1-120PROA Connector Pinout 3-21  
3.12 FMEC E1-120PROB Card 3-23  
3.12.1 FMEC E1-120PROB Connector Pinout 3-24  
3.13 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel 3-26  
3.13.1 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Functionality 3-28  
3.14 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card 3-28  
3.15 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card 3-29  
3.16 FMEC-BLANK Card 3-29  
3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC 3-30  
3.17.1 MIC-A/P Connector Pinouts 3-31  
3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC 3-33  
3.18.1 MIC-C/T/P Port-Level Indicators 3-34  
CHAPTER  
4
Optical Cards 4-1  
4.1 Optical Card Overview 4-1  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4.1.1 Card Summary 4-2  
4.1.2 Card Compatibility 4-3  
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card 4-4  
4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Functionality 4-6  
4.2.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-7  
4.2.3 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-7  
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card 4-7  
4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators 4-10  
4.3.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Port-Level Indicators 4-10  
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card 4-11  
4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-12  
4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-12  
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card 4-12  
4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-14  
4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-15  
4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card 4-15  
4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Functionality 4-16  
4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-17  
4.6.3 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators 4-17  
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card 4-17  
4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Functionality 4-19  
4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators 4-20  
4.7.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Port-Level Indicators 4-20  
4.8 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card 4-20  
4.8.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Functionality 4-22  
4.8.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-22  
4.8.3 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-23  
4.9 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card 4-23  
4.9.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Functionality 4-25  
4.9.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-25  
4.9.3 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators 4-26  
4.10 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards 4-26  
4.10.1 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Functionality 4-28  
4.10.2 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators 4-29  
4.10.3 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Port-Level Indicators 4-29  
4.11 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card 4-29  
4.11.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Functionality 4-31  
4.11.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-31  
4.11.3 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-32  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4.12 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card 4-32  
4.12.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Functionality 4-34  
4.12.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-35  
4.12.3 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators 4-35  
4.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card 4-35  
4.13.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Functionality 4-37  
4.13.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-38  
4.13.3 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators 4-38  
4.14 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card 4-39  
4.14.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Functionality 4-40  
4.14.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators 4-41  
4.14.3 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators 4-41  
CHAPTER  
5
Ethernet Cards 5-1  
5.1 Ethernet Card Overview 5-1  
5.1.1 Cards Summary 5-2  
5.1.2 Card Compatibility 5-2  
5.2 E100T-G Card 5-2  
5.2.1 E100T-G Slot Compatibility 5-4  
5.2.2 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators 5-4  
5.2.3 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators 5-4  
5.3 E1000-2-G Card 5-4  
5.3.1 E1000-2-G Compatibility 5-6  
5.3.2 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators 5-6  
5.3.3 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators 5-6  
5.4 G1000-4 Card 5-7  
5.4.1 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-8  
5.4.2 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-8  
5.4.3 G1000-4 Compatibility 5-8  
5.5 G1K-4 Card 5-8  
5.5.1 G1K-4 Compatibility 5-9  
5.5.2 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-10  
5.5.3 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-10  
5.6 ML100T-12 Card 5-10  
5.6.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators 5-11  
5.6.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators 5-12  
5.6.3 ML100T-12 Slot Compatibility 5-12  
5.7 ML1000-2 Card 5-12  
5.7.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators 5-13  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5.7.2 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators 5-14  
5.7.3 ML1000-2 Slot Compatibility 5-14  
5.8 GBICs and SFPs 5-14  
5.8.1 Compatibility by Card 5-15  
5.8.2 GBIC Description 5-15  
5.8.2.1 DWDM and CWDM GBICs 5-16  
5.8.3 SFP Description 5-18  
CHAPTER  
6
Storage Access Networking Cards 6-1  
6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview 6-1  
6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators 6-2  
6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators 6-3  
6.1.3 FC_MR-4 Compatibility 6-3  
6.2 FC_MR-4 Card Modes 6-3  
6.2.1 Line-Rate Card Mode 6-3  
6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode 6-4  
6.2.2.1 Mapping 6-4  
6.2.2.2 SW-LCAS 6-4  
6.2.3 Distance Extension (Enhanced Mode Only) 6-4  
6.2.4 Interoperability Features (Enhanced Mode Only) 6-5  
6.2.5 Link Integrity 6-5  
6.2.6 Link Recovery 6-5  
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application 6-5  
CHAPTER  
7
Card Protection 7-1  
7.1 Electrical Card Protection 7-1  
7.1.1 1:1 Protection 7-1  
7.1.2 1:N Protection 7-2  
7.1.2.1 Revertive Switching 7-3  
7.1.2.2 1:N Protection Guidelines 7-3  
7.2 STM-N Card Protection 7-4  
7.3 Unprotected Cards 7-4  
7.4 External Switching Commands 7-5  
CHAPTER  
8
Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8-1  
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods 8-1  
8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card 8-1  
8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation 8-3  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8.2 CTC Installation Overview 8-3  
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements 8-3  
8.4 ONS 15454 SDH Connection 8-5  
8.5 CTC Window 8-6  
8.5.1 Node View 8-7  
8.5.1.1 CTC Card Colors 8-7  
8.5.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts 8-10  
8.5.1.3 Node View Tabs 8-10  
8.5.2 Network View 8-11  
8.5.3 Card View 8-13  
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset 8-15  
8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database 8-15  
8.8 Software Revert 8-15  
CHAPTER  
9
Security and Timing 9-1  
9.1 Users and Security 9-1  
9.1.1 Security Requirements 9-1  
9.1.2 Security Policies 9-5  
9.1.2.1 Idle User Timeout 9-5  
9.1.2.2 User Password, Login, and Access Policies 9-6  
9.1.2.3 Audit Trail 9-6  
9.2 Node Timing 9-7  
9.2.1 Network Timing Example 9-7  
9.2.2 Synchronization Status Messaging 9-8  
CHAPTER 10  
Circuits and Tunnels 10-1  
10.1 Overview 10-1  
10.2 Circuit Properties 10-2  
10.2.1 Circuit Status 10-4  
10.2.2 Circuit States 10-5  
10.2.3 Circuit Protection Types 10-7  
10.2.4 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window 10-7  
10.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth 10-9  
10.4 DCC Tunnels 10-10  
10.4.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels 10-10  
10.4.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels 10-11  
10.5 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits 10-12  
10.6 Monitor Circuits 10-12  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
10.7 SNCP Circuits 10-12  
10.7.1 Open-Ended SNCP Circuits 10-13  
10.7.2 Go-and-Return SNCP Routing 10-13  
10.8 MS-SPRing Protection Channel Access Circuits 10-14  
10.9 Path Trace 10-15  
10.10 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte 10-15  
10.11 Automatic Circuit Routing 10-16  
10.11.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing 10-17  
10.11.2 Secondary Sources and Destinations 10-17  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing 10-18  
10.13 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing 10-22  
10.14 Virtual Concatenated Circuits 10-22  
10.14.1 VCAT Member Routing 10-22  
10.14.2 Software-Link Capacity Adjustment 10-23  
10.14.3 VCAT Circuit Size 10-23  
10.15 Merge Circuits 10-24  
10.16 Reconfigure Circuits 10-25  
CHAPTER 11  
SDH Topologies and Upgrades 11-1  
11.1 SDH Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards 11-1  
11.2 Multiplex Section-Shared Protection Rings 11-2  
11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings 11-2  
11.2.2 Four-Fiber MS-SPRings 11-6  
11.2.3 MS-SPRing Bandwidth 11-8  
11.2.4 MS-SPRing Application Sample 11-10  
11.2.5 MS-SPRing Fiber Connections 11-12  
11.2.6 Two-Fiber MS-SPRing to Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Conversion 11-13  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection 11-13  
11.4 Dual Ring Interconnect 11-18  
11.4.1 MS-SPRing DRI 11-18  
11.4.2 SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect 11-22  
11.4.3 SNCP/MS-SPRing DRI Handoff Configurations 11-25  
11.5 Subtending Rings 11-26  
11.6 Linear ADM Configurations 11-28  
11.7 Extended SNCP Mesh Networks 11-29  
11.8 Four Node Configurations 11-31  
11.9 STM-N Speed Upgrades 11-31  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
11.9.1 Span Upgrade Wizard 11-32  
11.9.2 Manual Span Upgrades 11-32  
CHAPTER 12  
CTC Network Connectivity 12-1  
12.1 IP Networking Overview 12-1  
12.2 IP Addressing Scenarios 12-2  
12.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes on Same Subnet 12-2  
12.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Connected to a Router 12-3  
12.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 SDH Gateway 12-4  
12.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer 12-6  
12.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 12-7  
12.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF 12-9  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server 12-11  
12.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet 12-17  
12.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 12-19  
12.3 Provisionable Patchcords 12-21  
12.4 Routing Table 12-23  
12.5 External Firewalls 12-25  
12.6 Open GNE 12-27  
CHAPTER 13  
Alarm Monitoring and Management 13-1  
13.1 Overview 13-1  
13.2 Documenting Existing Provisioning 13-1  
13.3 Viewing Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Slot, or Port 13-2  
13.4 Viewing Alarms 13-3  
13.4.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone 13-5  
13.4.2 Controlling Alarm Display 13-5  
13.4.3 Filtering Alarms 13-5  
13.4.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits 13-6  
13.4.5 Conditions Tab 13-7  
13.4.6 Controlling the Conditions Display 13-7  
13.4.6.1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions 13-7  
13.4.6.2 Conditions Column Descriptions 13-8  
13.4.6.3 Filtering Conditions 13-8  
13.4.7 Viewing History 13-8  
13.4.7.1 History Column Descriptions 13-9  
13.4.7.2 Retrieving and Displaying Alarm and Condition History 13-10  
13.5 Alarm Severities 13-10  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
13.6 Alarm Profiles 13-10  
13.6.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles 13-11  
13.6.2 Alarm Profile Buttons 13-12  
13.6.3 Alarm Profile Editing 13-12  
13.6.4 Alarm Severity Options 13-12  
13.6.5 Row Display Options 13-13  
13.6.6 Applying Alarm Profiles 13-13  
13.7 Suppressing Alarms 13-14  
13.8 Provisioning External Alarms and Controls 13-15  
13.8.1 External Alarm Input 13-15  
13.8.2 External Control Output 13-15  
13.9 Audit Trail 13-16  
13.9.1 Audit Trail Log Entries 13-16  
13.9.2 Audit Trail Capacities 13-16  
CHAPTER 14  
Ethernet Operation 14-1  
14.1 G-Series Application 14-1  
14.1.1 G1K-4 and G1000-4 Comparison 14-2  
14.1.2 G-Series Example 14-2  
14.1.3 IEEE 802.3z Flow Control and Frame Buffering 14-3  
14.1.4 Ethernet Link Integrity Support 14-4  
14.1.5 Gigabit EtherChannel/IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation 14-4  
14.2 G-Series Gigabit Ethernet Transponder Mode 14-5  
14.2.1 Two-Port Bidirectional Transponder 14-7  
14.2.2 One-Port Bidirectional Transponder 14-8  
14.2.3 Two-Port Unidirectional Transponder 14-8  
14.2.4 G-Series Transponder Mode Characteristics 14-9  
14.3 E-Series Application 14-10  
14.3.1 E-Series Modes 14-10  
14.3.1.1 E-Series Multicard EtherSwitch Group 14-10  
14.3.1.2 E-Series Single-Card EtherSwitch 14-11  
14.3.1.3 Port-Mapped (Linear Mapper) 14-11  
14.3.2 E-Series IEEE 802.3z Flow Control 14-12  
14.3.3 E-Series VLAN Support 14-13  
14.3.4 E-Series Q-Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q) 14-13  
14.3.5 E-Series Priority Queuing (IEEE 802.1Q) 14-15  
14.3.6 E-Series Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1D) 14-16  
14.3.6.1 E-Series Multi-Instance Spanning Tree and VLANs 14-17  
14.3.6.2 Spanning Tree on a Circuit-by-Circuit Basis 14-18  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
14.3.6.3 E-Series Spanning Tree Parameters 14-18  
14.3.6.4 E-Series Spanning Tree Configuration 14-18  
14.4 G-Series Circuit Configurations 14-19  
14.4.1 G-Series Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits 14-19  
14.4.2 G-Series Manual Cross-Connects 14-19  
14.5 E-Series Circuit Configurations 14-20  
14.5.1 Port-Mapped Mode and Single-card EtherSwitch Circuit Scenarios 14-20  
14.5.2 E-Series Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits 14-21  
14.5.3 E-Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuits 14-22  
14.5.4 E-Series Hub-and-Spoke Ethernet Circuit Provisioning 14-22  
14.5.5 E-Series Ethernet Manual Cross-Connects 14-23  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds 14-23  
APPENDIX  
A
Hardware Specifications A-1  
A.1 Shelf Specifications A-1  
A.1.1 Bandwidth A-1  
A.1.2 Configurations A-1  
A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller A-2  
A.1.4 External LAN Interface A-2  
A.1.5 Alarm Interface A-2  
A.1.6 Database Storage A-2  
A.1.7 Timing Interface A-2  
A.1.8 System Timing A-3  
A.1.9 System Power A-3  
A.1.10 System Environmental Specifications A-3  
A.1.11 Dimensions A-3  
A.2 SFP Specifications A-3  
A.3 General Card Specifications A-4  
A.3.1 Power Consumption A-4  
A.3.2 Temperature Ranges A-6  
A.4 Common Control Card Specifications A-8  
A.4.1 TCC2 Card Specifications A-8  
A.4.2 TCC2P Card Specifications A-8  
A.4.3 XC10G Card Specifications A-9  
A.4.4 XC-VXL-10G Card Specifications A-10  
A.4.5 XC-VXL-2.5G Card Specifications A-10  
A.4.6 AIC-I Specifications A-10  
A.5 Electrical Card and FMEC Specifications A-12  
A.5.1 E1-N-14 Card Specifications A-12  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
A.5.2 E1-42 Card Specifications A-13  
A.5.3 E3-12 Card Specifications A-14  
A.5.4 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications A-15  
A.5.5 STM1E-12 Card Specifications A-16  
A.5.6 BLANK Card A-17  
A.5.7 FMEC-E1 Specifications A-17  
A.5.8 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Specifications A-18  
A.5.9 FMEC E1-120NP Card Specifications A-18  
A.5.10 FMEC E1-120PROA Card Specifications A-19  
A.5.11 FMEC E1-120PROB Card Specifications A-20  
A.5.12 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Specifications A-21  
A.5.13 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card Specifications A-21  
A.5.14 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card Specifications A-23  
A.5.15 FMEC-BLANK Card Specifications A-24  
A.5.16 MIC-A/P Card Specifications A-24  
A.5.17 MIC-C/T/P Card Specifications A-25  
A.6 Optical Card Specifications A-26  
A.6.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card Specifications A-26  
A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card Specifications A-27  
A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications A-28  
A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications A-29  
A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications A-29  
A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Specifications A-30  
A.6.7 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications A-31  
A.6.8 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications A-32  
A.6.9 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications A-33  
A.6.10 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications A-34  
A.6.11 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications A-35  
A.6.12 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications A-36  
A.6.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Specifications A-38  
A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications A-39  
A.7.1 E100T-G Card Specifications A-39  
A.7.2 E1000-2-G Card Specifications A-40  
A.7.3 G1000-4 Card Specifications A-40  
A.7.4 G1K-4 Card Specifications A-41  
A.7.5 ML100T-12 Card Specifications A-41  
A.7.6 ML1000-2 Card Specifications A-42  
A.8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications A-42  
A.8.1 FC_MR-4 Card Specifications A-42  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
APPENDIX  
B
Administrative and Service States B-1  
B.1 Service States B-1  
B.2 Administrative States B-2  
B.3 Service State Transitions B-3  
B.3.1 Card Service State Transitions B-3  
B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions B-5  
APPENDIX  
C
Network Element Defaults C-1  
C.1 Network Element Defaults Description C-1  
C.2 Card Default Settings C-1  
C.2.1 E1 Card Default Settings C-3  
C.2.2 E1-42 Card Default Settings C-4  
C.2.3 E3 Card Default Settings C-6  
C.2.4 FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings C-8  
C.2.5 DS3I Card Default Settings C-8  
C.2.6 Data Card Default Settings C-11  
C.2.7 STM1 Card Default Settings C-11  
C.2.8 STM1-8 Card Default Settings C-13  
C.2.9 STM1E-12 Card Default Settings C-16  
C.2.10 STM4 Card Default Settings C-18  
C.2.11 STM4-4 Card Default Settings C-20  
C.2.12 STM16 Card Default Settings C-22  
C.2.13 STM64 Card Default Settings C-25  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings C-27  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings C-31  
C.2.16 MXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings C-35  
C.2.17 MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings C-38  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings C-41  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings C-45  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings C-50  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings C-56  
C.2.22 OSCM Card Default Settings C-63  
C.2.23 OSC-CSM Card Default Settings C-64  
C.3 Node Default Settings C-65  
C.4 CTC Default Settings C-68  
INDEX  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F I G U R E S  
Figure 1-1  
Figure 1-2  
Figure 1-3  
Figure 1-4  
Figure 1-5  
Figure 1-6  
Figure 1-7  
Figure 1-8  
Figure 1-9  
Figure 1-10  
Figure 2-1  
Figure 2-2  
Figure 2-3  
Figure 2-4  
Figure 2-5  
Figure 2-6  
Figure 2-7  
Figure 2-8  
Figure 2-9  
Figure 2-10  
Figure 3-1  
Figure 3-2  
Figure 3-3  
Figure 3-4  
Figure 3-5  
Figure 3-6  
Figure 3-7  
Figure 3-8  
Figure 3-9  
Figure 3-10  
Figure 3-11  
ONS 15454 SDH Dimensions 1-3  
The ONS 15454 SDH Front Door 1-4  
Removing the ONS 15454 SDH Front Door 1-5  
Front-Door Erasable Label 1-6  
Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label 1-7  
Mounting the E1-75/120 Conversion Panel in a Rack 1-10  
Managing Cables on the Front Panel 1-11  
Fiber Capacity 1-12  
Position of the Fan-Tray Assembly 1-13  
Installing Cards in the ONS 15454 SDH 1-15  
TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-5  
TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-8  
XC10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-11  
XC10G Card Cross-Connect Matrix 2-11  
XC-VXL-10G Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-13  
XC-VXL-10G Cross-Connect Matrix 2-13  
XC-VXL-2.5G Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-15  
XC-VXL-2.5G Cross-Connect Matrix 2-15  
AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-17  
RJ-11 Cable Connector 2-20  
E1-N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-5  
E1-42 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-7  
E3-12 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-9  
DS3i-N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-11  
STM1E-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-13  
FILLER Faceplate 3-15  
FMEC-E1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-16  
FMEC-DS1/E1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-16  
FMEC E1-120NP Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-19  
FMEC E1-120PROA Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-21  
FMEC E1-120PROB Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-24  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 3-12  
Figure 3-13  
Figure 3-14  
Figure 3-15  
Figure 3-16  
Figure 3-17  
Figure 3-18  
Figure 3-19  
Figure 4-1  
Figure 4-2  
Figure 4-3  
Figure 4-4  
Figure 4-5  
Figure 4-6  
Figure 4-7  
Figure 4-8  
Figure 4-9  
Figure 4-10  
Figure 4-11  
Figure 4-12  
Figure 4-13  
Figure 4-14  
Figure 4-15  
Figure 4-16  
Figure 4-17  
Figure 4-18  
Figure 4-19  
Figure 4-20  
Figure 4-21  
Figure 4-22  
Figure 4-23  
Figure 4-24  
Figure 5-1  
Figure 5-2  
Figure 5-3  
E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Faceplate 3-26  
E1-75/120 with Optional Rackmount Brackets 3-27  
E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Block Diagram 3-27  
FMEC-E3/DS3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-28  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-29  
FMEC-BLANK Faceplate 3-30  
MIC-A/P Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-30  
MIC-C/T/P Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-33  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Faceplate 4-5  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Block Diagram 4-6  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Faceplate 4-8  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Block Diagram 4-9  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-11  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Faceplate 4-13  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Block Diagram 4-14  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-16  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Faceplate 4-18  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Block Diagram 4-19  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Faceplate 4-21  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Block Diagram 4-22  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Faceplate 4-24  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Block Diagram 4-25  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Faceplate 4-27  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Block Diagram 4-28  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Faceplate 4-30  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Block Diagram 4-31  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Faceplate 4-33  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Block Diagram 4-34  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-36  
Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Faceplate 4-37  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Faceplate 4-39  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Block Diagram 4-40  
E100T-G Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-3  
E1000-2-G Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-5  
G1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-7  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 5-4  
Figure 5-5  
Figure 5-6  
Figure 5-7  
Figure 5-8  
Figure 5-9  
Figure 5-10  
Figure 5-11  
Figure 5-12  
Figure 6-1  
Figure 7-1  
Figure 7-2  
Figure 7-3  
Figure 8-1  
Figure 8-2  
Figure 8-3  
Figure 8-4  
Figure 8-5  
Figure 8-6  
Figure 8-7  
Figure 9-1  
Figure 10-1  
Figure 10-2  
Figure 10-3  
Figure 10-4  
Figure 10-5  
Figure 10-6  
Figure 10-7  
Figure 10-8  
Figure 10-9  
Figure 10-10  
Figure 10-11  
Figure 11-1  
Figure 11-2  
Figure 11-3  
G1K-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-9  
ML100T-12 Faceplate 5-11  
ML1000-2 Faceplate 5-13  
GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right) 5-16  
CWDM GBIC with Wavelength Appropriate for Fiber-Connected Device 5-17  
G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network 5-18  
Mylar Tab SFP 5-18  
Actuator/Button SFP 5-19  
Bail Clasp SFP 5-19  
FC_MR-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in a 1:1 Protection Configuration 7-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in a 1:N Protection Configuration 7-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in an Unprotected Configuration 7-5  
CTC Software Versions, Node View 8-2  
CTC Software Versions, Network View 8-2  
Node View (Default Login View) 8-7  
Terminal Loopback Indicator 8-9  
Facility Loopback Indicator 8-9  
Network in CTC Network View 8-11  
Card View 8-13  
ONS 15454 SDH Timing Example 9-8  
ONS 15454 SDH Circuit Window in Network View 10-4  
Terminal Loopback in the Edit Circuits Window 10-9  
Traditional DCC Tunnel 10-11  
VC4 Monitor Circuit Received at an STM-1 Port 10-12  
SNCP Go-and-Return Routing 10-14  
Secondary Sources and Destinations 10-17  
Alternate Paths for Virtual SNCP Segments 10-18  
Mixing 1+1 or MS-SPRing Protected Links with an SNCP 10-19  
Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing 10-19  
Ethernet and SNCP 10-20  
VCAT Common Fiber Routing 10-23  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing 11-3  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Traffic Pattern 11-4  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Traffic Pattern After Line Break 11-5  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 11-4  
Figure 11-5  
Figure 11-6  
Figure 11-7  
Figure 11-8  
Figure 11-9  
Figure 11-10  
Figure 11-11  
Figure 11-12  
Figure 11-13  
Figure 11-14  
Figure 11-15  
Figure 11-16  
Figure 11-17  
Figure 11-18  
Figure 11-19  
Figure 11-20  
Figure 11-21  
Figure 11-22  
Figure 11-23  
Figure 11-24  
Figure 11-25  
Figure 11-26  
Figure 11-27  
Figure 11-28  
Figure 11-29  
Figure 11-30  
Figure 12-1  
Figure 12-2  
Figure 12-3  
Figure 12-4  
Figure 12-5  
Figure 12-6  
Figure 12-7  
Figure 12-8  
Four-Node, Four-Fiber MS-SPRing 11-6  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Span Switch 11-7  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Switch 11-8  
MS-SPRing Bandwidth Reuse 11-9  
Five-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing 11-10  
Shelf Assembly Layout for Node 0 in Figure 11-8 11-11  
Shelf Assembly Layout for Nodes 1 to 4 in Figure 11-8 11-11  
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing 11-12  
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Four-Fiber MS-SPRing 11-13  
Basic Four-Node SNCP Ring 11-14  
SNCP Ring with a Fiber Break 11-15  
STM-1 SNCP Ring 11-16  
Card Setup of Node A in the STM-1 SNCP Ring Example 11-17  
Card Setup of Nodes B-D in the STM-1 SNCP Ring Example 11-17  
ONS 15454 SDH Traditional MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect (Same-Side Routing) 11-19  
ONS 15454 SDH Traditional MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect (Opposite-Side Routing) 11-20  
ONS 15454 SDH Integrated MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect 11-21  
ONS 15454 Traditional SDH Dual Ring Interconnect 11-23  
ONS 15454 SDH Integrated Dual Ring Interconnect 11-24  
ONS 15454 SDH SNCP to MS-SPRing Traditional DRI Handoff 11-25  
ONS 15454 SDH SNCP to MS-SPRing Integrated DRI Handoff 11-26  
ONS 15454 SDH with Multiple Subtending Rings 11-27  
SNCP Ring Subtending from an MS-SPRing 11-27  
MS-SPRing Subtending from an MS-SPRing 11-28  
Linear (Point-to-Point) ADM Configuration 11-29  
Extended SNCP Mesh Network 11-30  
Extended SNCP Virtual Ring 11-30  
Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet 12-3  
Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Connected to Router 12-4  
Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP 12-5  
Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing 12-6  
Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer 12-7  
Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination 12-8  
Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations 12-9  
Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled 12-10  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 12-9  
Figure 12-10  
Figure 12-11  
Figure 12-12  
Figure 12-13  
Figure 12-14  
Figure 12-15  
Figure 12-16  
Figure 12-17  
Figure 12-18  
Figure 12-19  
Figure 13-1  
Figure 13-2  
Figure 13-3  
Figure 13-4  
Figure 14-1  
Figure 14-2  
Figure 14-3  
Figure 14-4  
Figure 14-5  
Figure 14-6  
Figure 14-7  
Figure 14-8  
Figure 14-9  
Figure 14-10  
Figure 14-11  
Figure 14-12  
Figure 14-13  
Figure 14-14  
Figure 14-15  
Figure 14-16  
Figure 14-17  
Figure 14-18  
Figure 14-19  
Figure 14-20  
Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled 12-11  
Proxy Server Gateway Settings 12-13  
Scenario 7: SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet 12-14  
Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets 12-15  
Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings 12-16  
Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet 12-18  
Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets 12-19  
Scenario 9: ONS 15454 SDH GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode Enabled 12-20  
Scenario 9: ONS 15454 SDH GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode Enabled 12-21  
Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations 12-28  
Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port 12-29  
Shelf LCD Panel 13-3  
Select Affected Circuits Option 13-6  
Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits 13-6  
Card View Port Alarm Profile for an OPT-BST Card 13-14  
Data Traffic on a G-Series Point-to-Point Circuit 14-2  
End-to-End Ethernet Link Integrity Support 14-4  
G-Series Gigabit EtherChannel (GEC) Support 14-5  
Card Level Overview of G-Series One Port Transponder Mode Application 14-6  
G-Series in Default SDH Mode 14-6  
G-Series Card in Transponder Mode (Two-Port Bidirectional) 14-7  
One-Port Bidirectional Transponding Mode 14-8  
Two-Port Unidirectional Transponder 14-9  
Multicard EtherSwitch Configuration 14-11  
Single-Card EtherSwitch Configuration 14-11  
E-Series Mapping Ethernet Ports To SDH STM Circuits 14-12  
Q-Tag Moving through VLAN 14-14  
Priority Queuing Process 14-15  
An STP Blocked Path 14-16  
Spanning Tree Map on the Circuit Window 14-17  
G-Series Point-to-Point Circuit 14-19  
G-Series Manual Cross-Connects 14-20  
Multicard EtherSwitch Point-to-Point Circuit 14-21  
Single-Card EtherSwitch or Port-Mapped Point-to-Point Circuit 14-21  
Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuit 14-22  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 14-21  
Hub-and-Spoke Ethernet Circuit 14-23  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E S  
Table 1  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Chapters xxx  
Slot and FMEC Symbols 1-8  
Table 1-1  
Table 1-2  
Table 1-3  
Table 1-4  
Table 1-5  
Table 1-6  
Table 1-7  
FMEC, Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors 1-8  
Fiber Channel Capacity (One Side of the Shelf) 1-12  
Slot and Card Symbols 1-16  
Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors 1-16  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC-VXL-2.5G Configurations 1-18  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXL-10G  
Configurations 1-19  
Table 2-1  
Table 2-2  
Table 2-3  
Table 2-4  
Table 2-5  
Table 2-6  
Table 2-7  
Table 2-8  
Table 2-9  
Table 2-10  
Table 2-11  
Table 2-12  
Table 2-13  
Table 2-14  
Table 2-15  
Table 2-16  
Table 2-17  
Table 3-1  
Table 3-2  
Table 3-3  
Table 3-4  
Table 3-5  
Table 3-6  
Common Control Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH 2-2  
Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility 2-2  
Common-Control Card Cross-Connect Compatibility 2-3  
Electrical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility 2-3  
Optical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility 2-4  
Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility 2-4  
TCC2 Card-Level Indicators 2-7  
TCC2 Network-Level Indicators 2-7  
TCC2P Card-Level Indicators 2-9  
TCC2P Network-Level Indicators 2-10  
XC10G Card-Level Indicators 2-12  
XC-VXL-10G Card-Level Indicators 2-14  
XC-VXL-2.5G Card-Level Indicators 2-16  
AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 2-17  
Orderwire Pin Assignments 2-20  
UDC Pin Assignments 2-20  
GCC Pin Assignments 2-21  
Electrical Cards 3-2  
Electrical Card Software Release Compatibility 3-4  
E1-N-14 Card-Level Indicators 3-6  
E1-42 Card-Level Indicators 3-8  
E3-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-10  
DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-12  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Table 3-7  
Table 3-8  
Table 3-9  
Table 3-10  
Table 3-11  
Table 3-12  
Table 3-13  
Table 3-14  
Table 3-15  
Table 3-16  
Table 4-1  
Table 4-2  
Table 4-3  
Table 4-4  
Table 4-5  
Table 4-6  
Table 4-7  
Table 4-8  
Table 4-9  
Table 4-10  
Table 4-11  
Table 4-12  
Table 4-13  
Table 4-14  
Table 4-15  
Table 5-1  
Table 5-2  
Table 5-3  
Table 5-4  
Table 5-5  
Table 5-6  
Table 5-7  
Table 5-8  
Table 5-9  
Table 5-10  
STM1E-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-14  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 7 3-17  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 8 to 14 3-17  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21 3-19  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 3-20  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21 3-22  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 3-22  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21 3-24  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 3-25  
Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector 3-31  
Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH 4-2  
Optical Card Software Release Compatibility 4-3  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-7  
OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators 4-10  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-12  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-14  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-17  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators 4-20  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-22  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-25  
OC48 ELR Card-Level Indicators 4-29  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-32  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-35  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-38  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators 4-41  
Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH 5-2  
Ethernet Card Software Compatibility 5-2  
E100T-G Card-Level Indicators 5-4  
E100T-G Port-Level Indicators 5-4  
E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators 5-6  
E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators 5-6  
G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-8  
G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-8  
G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-10  
G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-10  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Table 5-11  
Table 5-12  
Table 5-13  
Table 5-14  
Table 5-15  
Table 5-16  
Table 5-17  
Table 6-1  
Table 8-1  
Table 8-2  
Table 8-3  
Table 8-4  
Table 8-5  
Table 8-6  
Table 8-7  
Table 8-8  
Table 8-9  
Table 8-10  
Table 8-11  
Table 8-12  
Table 9-1  
Table 9-2  
Table 9-3  
Table 9-4  
Table 9-5  
Table 10-1  
Table 10-2  
Table 10-3  
Table 10-4  
Table 10-5  
Table 10-6  
Table 10-7  
Table 10-8  
Table 10-9  
Table 10-10  
ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators 5-12  
ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators 5-12  
ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators 5-14  
ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators 5-14  
GBIC and SFP Card Compatibility 5-15  
Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs 5-17  
Supported Wavelengths for DWDM GBICs 5-17  
FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators 6-2  
JRE Compatibility 8-4  
CTC Computer Requirements 8-4  
ONS 15454 SDH Connection Methods 8-6  
Node View Card Colors 8-7  
Node View FMEC Color 8-8  
Node View Card Port Colors and Service States 8-8  
Node View Card States 8-9  
Node View Port Graphics 8-10  
Node View Tabs and Subtabs 8-10  
Node Status Shown in Network View 8-12  
Network View Tabs and Subtabs 8-12  
Card View Tabs and Subtabs 8-14  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Node View 9-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Network View 9-4  
ONS 15454 SDH Default User Idle Times 9-5  
Audit Trail Window Columns 9-6  
SDH SSM Message Set 9-8  
ONS 15454 SDH Circuit Status 10-4  
Circuit Protection Types 10-7  
Port State Color Indicators 10-8  
DCC Tunnels 10-10  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards Capable of Path Trace 10-15  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards Capable of J2 Path Trace 10-15  
STM Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals 10-16  
Bidirectional VC/TUG/Regular Multicard EtherSwitch/Point-to-Point (Straight) Ethernet Circuits 10-20  
Unidirectional Circuit 10-21  
Multicard Group Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Circuit 10-21  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Table 10-11  
Table 10-12  
Table 10-13  
Table 11-1  
Table 11-2  
Table 11-3  
Table 12-1  
Table 12-2  
Table 12-3  
Table 12-4  
Table 12-5  
Table 12-6  
Table 12-7  
Table 12-8  
Table 12-9  
Table 13-1  
Table 13-2  
Table 13-3  
Table 13-4  
Table 13-5  
Table 13-6  
Table 13-7  
Table 13-8  
Table 13-9  
Table 14-1  
Table 14-2  
Table 14-3  
Table 14-4  
Table A-1  
Table A-2  
Table A-3  
Table B-1  
Bidirectional Low-Order Tunnels 10-21  
ONS 15454 SDH Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members 10-24  
ONS 15454 SDH VCAT Card Capabilities 10-24  
ONS 15454 SDH Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards 11-1  
Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Capacity 11-8  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Capacity 11-9  
General ONS 15454 SDH IP Troubleshooting Checklist 12-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Gateway and Element NE Settings 12-14  
Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules 12-16  
Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to ONS 15454 SDH 12-17  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Client/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords 12-22  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Client/Client Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords 12-22  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Trunk/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords 12-23  
Sample Routing Table Entries 12-24  
Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P 12-25  
Alarms Column Descriptions 13-3  
Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities 13-4  
Release 4.0 and Later Port-Based Alarm Numbering Scheme 13-4  
Alarm Display 13-5  
Conditions Display 13-7  
Conditions Column Description 13-8  
History Column Description 13-9  
Alarm Profile Buttons 13-12  
Alarm Profile Editing Options 13-12  
Priority Queuing 14-15  
Spanning Tree Parameters 14-18  
Spanning Tree Configuration 14-18  
Ethernet Threshold Variables (MIBs) 14-24  
SFP Specifications A-4  
Individual Card Power Requirements A-5  
Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names A-6  
ONS 15454 SDH Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers B-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Secondary States B-1  
Table B-2  
Table B-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Administrative States B-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Card Service State Transitions B-3  
Table B-4  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Table B-5  
Table C-1  
Table C-2  
Table C-3  
Table C-4  
Table C-5  
Table C-6  
Table C-7  
Table C-8  
Table C-9  
Table C-10  
Table C-11  
Table C-12  
Table C-13  
Table C-14  
Table C-15  
Table C-16  
Table C-17  
Table C-18  
Table C-19  
Table C-20  
Table C-21  
Table C-22  
Table C-23  
Table C-24  
Table C-25  
ONS 15454 SDH Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions B-5  
E1 Card Default Settings C-3  
E1-42 Card Default Settings C-4  
E3 Card Default Settings C-6  
FC-MR Card Default Settings C-8  
DS3I Card Default Settings C-8  
Data Card Default Settings C-11  
STM1 Card Default Settings C-11  
STM1-8 Card Default Settings C-13  
STM1E-12 Card Default Settings C-16  
STM4 Card Default Settings C-18  
STM4-4 Card Default Settings C-20  
STM16 Card Default Settings C-22  
STM64 Card Default Settings C-25  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings C-27  
MXP-2.5G-10E Card Default Settings C-32  
MXP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings C-35  
MXPP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings C-38  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings C-41  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings C-45  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings C-50  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings C-56  
OSCM Card Default Settings C-63  
OSC-CSM Card Default Settings C-64  
Node Default Settings C-65  
CTC Default Settings C-69  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
xxviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Note  
The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms  
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.  
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s  
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not  
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.  
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and  
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.  
Revision History  
Date  
Notes  
March 2007  
October 2007  
April 2008  
Revision History Table added for the first time  
Updated the About this Guide chapter  
Added a Note in the “User Password, Login, and Access  
Policies” section of the Security chapter.  
April 2009  
Updated the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH bandwidth specifications  
section in “A.1.1 Bandwidth” of Appendix A, Hardware  
Specifications.  
This section provides the following information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Document Objectives  
Audience  
Document Organization  
Related Documentation  
Document Conventions  
Obtaining Optical Networking Information  
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About this Guide  
Document Objectives  
This manual provides reference information for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH.  
Audience  
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware  
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and  
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician.  
Document Organization  
Table 1 lists the chapter titles and provides a summary for each chapter.  
Table 1  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Chapters  
Title  
Summary  
Chapter 1, “Shelf and FMEC Hardware”  
Includes descriptions of the rack, ferrites, power  
and ground, fan-tray assembly, air filter, card slots,  
cable, cable connectors, and cable routing.  
Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards”  
Chapter 3, “Electrical Cards”  
Includes descriptions of the TCC2P, XC10G,  
XC-VXL, and AIC-I cards.  
Includes descriptions of E1-N-14, E1-42, E3-12,  
DS3i-N-12, STM1E-12, FMEC cards, MIC cards,  
card temperature ranges, and compatibility.  
Chapter 4, “Optical Cards”  
Chapter 5, “Ethernet Cards”  
Includes descriptions of the STM1-4, STM1-8,  
STM-4, STM4-4, STM-16, STM-64, TXP_MR,  
TXPP_MR, and MXP cards, as well as card  
temperature ranges and card compatibility.  
Includes descriptions of the E100T-G, E1000-2-G,  
G1000-4, G1K-4, ML100T-12, and ML1000-2  
cards and gigabit interface converters.  
Chapter 6, “Storage Access Networking Cards”  
Chapter 7, “Card Protection”  
Includes the FC_MR-4 card description and  
application.  
Includes electrical, optical, and transponder and  
muxponder card protection methods, as well as  
external switching commands.  
Chapter 8, “Cisco Transport Controller  
Operation”  
Includes information about CTC delivery,  
installation, computer requirements, connection,  
the CTC window, and database reset and revert.  
Chapter 9, “Security and Timing”  
Includes user set up and security, and  
node/network timing.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
About this Guide  
Table 1  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Chapters (continued)  
Title  
Summary  
Chapter 10, “Circuits and Tunnels”  
Includes descriptions of circuit properties,  
cross-connect card bandwidth usage, data  
communications channel (DCC) and  
IP-encapsulated tunnels, multiple destination  
circuits, circuit monitoring, subnetwork  
connection protection (SNCP) and multiplex  
section-shared protection rings (MS-SPRing)  
circuits, J1 path trace, path signal labels, manual  
and automatic circuit routing, and virtual  
concatenated (VCAT) circuits.  
Chapter 11, “SDH Topologies and Upgrades”  
Chapter 12, “CTC Network Connectivity”  
Includes the SDH configurations used by the  
ONS 15454 SDH; including MS-SPRings, SNCPs,  
subtending rings, linear ADMs, and optical bus  
configurations, as well as information about  
upgrading optical speeds within any configuration.  
Includes IP addressing scenarios and information  
about IP networking with the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Chapter 13, “Alarm Monitoring and  
Management”  
Explains alarm, condition, and history display;  
severities; profiles; suppression; external alarms;  
and the audit trail.  
Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications”  
Provides specifications for the ONS 15454 SDH  
shelf assembly and cards.  
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” Describes the extended state model for cards,  
ports, and cross-connects.  
Related Documentation  
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual with the following referenced publications:  
•
•
•
•
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide—Provides procedures to install, turn up, provision, and  
maintain a Cisco ONS 15454 SDH node and network.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide—Provides general troubleshooting procedures,  
alarm descriptions and troubleshooting procedures, and hardware replacement instructions.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide—Provides test access TL1 commands, configurations,  
and parameter types.  
Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 5.0—Provides caveats, closed issues, and new  
feature and functionality information.  
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to  
http://cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html.  
Document Conventions  
This publication uses the following conventions:  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About this Guide  
Convention  
boldface  
italic  
Application  
Commands and keywords in body text.  
Command input that is supplied by the user.  
[
]
Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.  
{ x | x | x }  
Ctrl  
A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by  
vertical bars. The user must select one.  
The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the  
Control key while pressing the D key.  
screen font  
Examples of information displayed on the screen.  
boldface screen font  
Examples of information that the user must enter.  
<
>
Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.  
Note  
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the  
document.  
Caution  
Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment  
damage or loss of data.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this Guide  
Warning  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you  
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar  
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of  
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this  
device. Statement 1071  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
Waarschuwing  
BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES  
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan  
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij  
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard  
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de  
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt  
raadplegen.  
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES  
Varoitus  
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA  
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin  
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu  
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen  
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien  
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.  
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET  
Attention  
IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ  
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant  
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez  
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures  
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des  
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,  
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.  
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS  
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE  
Warnung  
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen  
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und  
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder  
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten  
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.  
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Avvertenza  
IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA  
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle  
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli  
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.  
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le  
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.  
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI  
Advarsel  
VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER  
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du  
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med  
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten  
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne  
enheten.  
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE  
Aviso  
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA  
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de  
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos  
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de  
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para  
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.  
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES  
¡Advertencia!  
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD  
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular  
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los  
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el  
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña  
a este dispositivo.  
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES  
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR  
Varning!  
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.  
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och  
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av  
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna  
anordning.  
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Aviso  
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA  
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões  
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os  
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o  
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de  
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.  
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES  
Advarsel  
VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER  
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for  
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de  
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til  
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de  
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.  
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
Obtaining Optical Networking Information  
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that  
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section.  
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information  
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and  
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the  
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also  
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.  
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM  
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is  
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product  
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.  
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request  
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional  
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and  
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:  
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html  
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS)  
feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds  
are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2009  
xxxviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C H A P T E R  
1
Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
This chapter provides a description of Cisco ONS 15454 SDH shelf and backplane hardware. Card and  
cable descriptions are provided in Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards,” Chapter 3, “Electrical Cards,”  
Chapter 4, “Optical Cards,” and Chapter 14, “Ethernet Operation.” To install equipment, refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.1 Overview, page 1-1  
1.2 Front Door, page 1-3  
1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connection, page 1-7  
1.4 E1-75/120 Conversion Panel, page 1-9  
1.5 Coaxial Cable, page 1-10  
1.6 Twisted-Pair Balanced Cable, page 1-10  
1.7 Cable Routing and Management, page 1-11  
1.9 Fan-Tray Assembly, page 1-13  
1.10 Power and Ground Description, page 1-14  
1.11 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections, page 1-14  
1.12 Cards and Slots, page 1-15  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility, page 1-18  
Note  
The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH assembly is intended for use with telecommunications equipment only.  
Caution  
Unused card slots should be filled with a blank faceplate (Cisco P/N 15454E-BLANK). The blank  
faceplate ensures proper airflow when operating the ONS 15454 SDH without the front door attached,  
although Cisco recommends that the front door remain attached.  
1.1 Overview  
When installed in an equipment rack, the ONS 15454 SDH assembly is typically connected to a fuse and  
alarm panel to provide centralized alarm connection points and distributed power for the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Fuse and alarm panels are third-party equipment and are not described in this  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.1 Overview  
documentation. If you are unsure about the requirements or specifications for a fuse and alarm panel,  
consult the user documentation for the related equipment. The front door of the ONS 15454 SDH allows  
access to the shelf assembly, fan-tray assembly, and cable-management area. The FMEC cover at the top  
of the shelf allows access to power connectors, external alarms and controls, timing input and output,  
and craft interface terminals.  
You can mount the ONS 15454 SDH in an ETSI rack. The shelf assembly weighs approximately 26 kg  
(57 pounds) with no cards installed. The shelf assembly includes a front door and a Front Mount  
Electrical Connection (FMEC) cover for added security, a fan tray module for cooling, and extensive  
cable-management space.  
All ONS 15454 SDH optical cards have SC connectors on the card faceplate, except the  
STM-1SH 1310-8 card, which has LC connectors. Fiber-optic cables are routed into the front of the  
optical and Ethernet cards. Electrical cards (E-1, E-3, DS3i, STM-1E) require FMEC cards to provide  
the cable connection points for the shelf assembly.  
The ONS 15454 SDH is powered using –48VDC power. Negative, return, and ground power terminals  
are connected via the MIC-A/P and the MIC-C/T/P cards.  
Note  
In this chapter, the terms “ONS 15454 SDH” and “shelf assembly” are used interchangeably. In the  
installation context, these terms have the same meaning. Otherwise, shelf assembly refers to the physical  
steel enclosure that holds cards and connects power, and ONS 15454 SDH refers to the entire system,  
both hardware and software.  
Install the ONS 15454 SDH in compliance with your local and national electrical codes:  
•
United States: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70; United States National Electrical  
Code  
•
•
Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, CSA C22.1  
Other countries: If local and national electrical codes, are not available, refer to IEC 364, Part 1  
through Part 7.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.2 Front Door  
Figure 1-1 provides the dimensions of the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Figure 1-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Dimensions  
Top View  
535 mm (21.06 in.) total width  
280 mm  
(11.02 in.)  
40 mm (1.57 in.)  
Side View  
Front View  
616.5 mm  
(24.27 in.)  
280 mm (11.02 in.)  
535 mm (21.06 in.) total width  
1.2 Front Door  
The Critical, Major, and Minor alarm LEDs visible through the front door indicate whether a critical,  
major, or minor alarm is present anywhere on the ONS 15454 SDH. These LEDs must be visible so  
technicians can quickly determine if any alarms are present. You can use the LCD to further isolate  
alarms.  
The ONS 15454 SDH features a locked door to the front compartment. A pinned hex key that unlocks  
the front door ships with the ONS 15454 SDH. A button on the right side of the shelf assembly releases  
the door. The front door provides access to the shelf assembly, cable-management tray, fan-tray  
assembly, and LCD screen (Figure 1-2).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.2 Front Door  
Figure 1-2  
The ONS 15454 SDH Front Door  
CISCO ONS 15454  
Optical Network System  
Door lock  
Door button  
Viewholes for Critical, Major and Minor alarm LEDs  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.2 Front Door  
You can remove the front door of the ONS 15454 SDH to provide unrestricted access to the front of the  
shelf assembly (Figure 1-3).  
Figure 1-3  
Removing the ONS 15454 SDH Front Door  
FA  
N
FA  
I
L
CRIT  
MAJ  
MIN  
Translucent  
circles  
for LED  
viewing  
Door hinge  
Assembly hinge pin  
Assembly hinge  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.2 Front Door  
An erasable label is pasted on the inside of the front door (Figure 1-4). You can use the label to record  
slot assignments, port assignments, card types, node ID, rack ID, and serial number for the  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
Figure 1-4  
Front-Door Erasable Label  
P/N 47-12460-01  
The front door label also includes the Class I and Class 1M laser warning (Figure 1-5).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connection  
Figure 1-5  
Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label  
1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connection  
The positive and negative power terminals are located on FMEC cards in the Electrical Facility  
Connection Assembly (EFCA). The ground connection is the grounding receptacle on the side panel of  
the shelf.  
The ONS 15454 SDH EFCA at the top of the shelf has 12 FMEC slots numbered sequentially from left  
to right (18 to 29). Slots 18 to 22 and 25 to 29 provide electrical connections. Slots 23 and 24 host the  
MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P cards, respectively.  
FMEC-E1, FMEC-DS1/E1, FMEC E1-120NP, and FMEC E1-120PROA cards can be installed in  
Slots 18 to 21; the FMEC E1-120PROB card can be installed in Slots 26 to 29; and FMEC-E3/DS3, and  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 cards can be installed in Slots 18 to 21 or Slots 26 to 29. FMEC electrical card  
assignment is as follows:  
•
•
FMEC Slot 18 supports an electrical card in Slot 1.  
FMEC Slot 19 supports an electrical card in Slot 2.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connection  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FMEC Slot 20 supports an electrical card in Slot 3.  
FMEC Slot 21 supports an electrical card in Slot 4.  
FMEC Slot 22 supports an electrical card in Slot 5.  
FMEC Slot 23 hosts the MIC-A/P alarm and power FMEC.  
FMEC Slot 24 supports the MIC-C/T/P timing, craft, and power FMEC.  
FMEC Slot 25 supports an electrical card in Slot 13.  
FMEC Slot 26 supports an electrical card in Slot 14.  
FMEC Slot 27 supports an electrical card in Slot 15.  
FMEC Slot 28 supports an electrical card in Slot 16.  
FMEC Slot 29 supports an electrical card in Slot 17.  
FMEC slots have symbols indicating the type of cards that you can install in the slots. Each  
ONS 15454 SDH FMEC has a corresponding symbol. The symbol on the FMEC must match the symbol  
on the slot. Table 1-1 shows the slot-FMEC symbol definitions.  
Table 1-1  
Slot and FMEC Symbols  
Color/Shape  
Definition  
Orange/Circle  
Electrical 75-ohm E-1 connection via 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors. Only  
install ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a circle symbol on the faceplate.  
Electrical 120-ohm E-1 connection via DB-37 connectors. Only install  
ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a circle symbol on the faceplate.  
Electrical 75-ohm E3/DS3 connection via 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors.  
Only install ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a circle symbol on the faceplate.  
Green/Star  
Electrical 75-ohm E1-42 and STM-1e connections via 1.0/2.3 miniature coax  
connectors. Only install ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a star symbol on the  
faceplate.  
Red/Vertical ellipse Node power and interface for environmental alarms. Only install  
ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a vertical ellipse symbol on the faceplate.  
Red/Horizontal  
ellipse  
Node power and LAN timing. Only install ONS 15454 SDH FMECs with a  
horizontal ellipse symbol on the faceplate.  
Table 1-2 lists the number of ports, line rates, connector options, and connector locations for  
ONS 15454 SDH electrical FMECs.  
Table 1-2  
FMEC, Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors  
FMEC  
Ports  
Line Rate per Port  
Connector Type  
Connector Location  
FMEC-E1  
14  
2.048 Mbps  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax EFCA  
connector  
FMEC-DS1/E1  
14  
42  
2.048 Mbps  
2.048 Mbps  
DB-37  
EFCA  
EFCA  
FMEC E1-120NP  
Molex 96-pin LFH  
connector  
FMEC  
E1-120PROA  
3 to 42  
2.048 Mbps  
Molex 96-pin LFH  
connector  
EFCA,  
Slots 18 to 21  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.4 E1-75/120 Conversion Panel  
Table 1-2  
FMEC, Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued)  
FMEC  
Ports  
Line Rate per Port  
Connector Type  
Connector Location  
FMEC  
E1-120PROB  
3 to 42  
2.048 Mbps  
Molex 96-pin LFH  
connector  
EFCA,  
Slots 26 to 29  
FMEC-E3/DS3  
12  
34.368 Mbps  
44.736 Mbps  
155.52 Mbps  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax EFCA  
connector  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 12 (protected) or  
24 (nonprotected)  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax EFCA  
connector  
Note  
The E1-120NP FMEC can only be used in Slots 18–21 and Slots 26–29. The STM1E 1:1 FMEC can only  
be used in Slots 18 and 19, 20 and 21, 26 and 27, or 28 and 29.  
1.4 E1-75/120 Conversion Panel  
You need an E1-75/120 conversion panel if you want to convert the balanced 120-ohm interfaces of the  
E1-42 card and the corresponding FMECs to unbalanced 75-ohm interfaces.  
The E1-75/120 contains eighty-four 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors (42 for transmit, 42 for receive)  
to the customer side and two Molex 96-pin LFH connectors to the E1-42 FMEC 120-ohm side. Each of  
the Molex 96-pin LFH connectors connects 21 inputs and 21 outputs. The E1-75/120 conversion panel  
is intended to be used in digital distribution frames (DDFs), ETSI racks, and ANSI racks.  
You can install the E1-75/120 conversion panel in the rack of your ONS 15454 SDH or in a nearby rack.  
If you install the E1-75/120 conversion panel in a place where a longer cable is required, make sure that  
the total cable loss of the balanced 120-ohm cable and the unbalanced 75-ohm cable does not exceed the  
maximum allowed value. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual for details. To ensure  
that the E1-75/120 conversion panel is secure, use one or two M6 mounting screws for each side of the  
shelf assembly. Figure 1-6 on page 1-10 shows the rack-mounting for the E1-75/120 conversion panel.  
Note  
If required, the mounting brackets of the E1-75/120 conversion panel can be uninstalled, rotated  
90 degrees, and reinstalled to enable 19-inch (482.6 mm) rack mounting.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.5 Coaxial Cable  
Figure 1-6  
Mounting the E1-75/120 Conversion Panel in a Rack  
Equipment rack  
1.5 Coaxial Cable  
Caution  
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 SDH. Plug the  
wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.  
All interfaces that are listed in Table 1-2 on page 1-8 with 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors (E-1, E-3,  
DS-3, and STM-1E) must be connected using a 75-ohm coaxial cable.  
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) performance of the node depends on good-quality coaxial  
cables, such as Shuner Type G 03233 D or the equivalent.  
1.6 Twisted-Pair Balanced Cable  
Caution  
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 SDH. Plug the  
wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.7 Cable Routing and Management  
All E-1 interfaces that are listed in Table 1-2 on page 1-8 with DB-37 or with Molex 96-pin LFH  
connectors must be connected using a 120-ohm twisted-pair balanced cable. For the interfaces that use  
Molex 96-pin LFH connectors Cisco offers ready-made cables.  
1.7 Cable Routing and Management  
The ONS 15454 SDH cable management facilities include the following:  
•
A cable-routing channel (behind the fold-down door) that runs the width of the shelf assembly,  
Figure 1-7  
•
Plastic horseshoe-shaped fiber guides at each side opening of the cable-routing channel that ensure  
the proper bend radius is maintained in the fibers, Figure 1-8 on page 1-12  
Note  
You can remove the fiber guide if necessary to create a larger opening (if you need to route  
CAT-5 Ethernet cables out the side, for example). To remove the fiber guide, take out the  
three screws that anchor it to the side of the shelf assembly.  
•
•
A fold-down door that provides access to the cable-management tray  
Reversible jumper routing fins that enable you to route cables out either side by positioning the fins  
as desired  
Note  
To remove the jumper slack storage reels, take out the screw in the center of each reel.  
•
Optional fiber management tray (recommended for DWDM nodes)  
Figure 1-7 shows the cable management facilities that you can access through the fold-down front door,  
including the cable-routing channel and the jumper routing fins.  
Figure 1-7  
Managing Cables on the Front Panel  
F
AN  
F
AIL  
CRIT  
MAJ  
MIN  
Reversible jumper  
routing fins  
Fold down  
front door  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.8 Fiber Management  
1.8 Fiber Management  
The jumper routing fins are designed to route fiber jumpers out of both sides of the shelf. Slots 1 to 6  
exit to the left, and Slots 12 to 17 exit to the right. Figure 1-8 shows fibers routed from cards in the left  
slots, down through the fins, then exiting out the fiber channel to the left. The maximum capacity of the  
fiber routing channel depends on the size of the fiber jumpers.  
Figure 1-8  
Fiber Capacity  
Fiber guides  
Table 1-3 provides the maximum capacity of the fiber channel for one side of a shelf, depending on fiber  
size and number of Ethernet cables running through that fiber channel.  
Table 1-3  
Fiber Channel Capacity (One Side of the Shelf)  
Maximum Number of Fibers Exiting Each Side  
Fiber Diameter  
No Ethernet Cables  
One Ethernet Cable  
Two Ethernet Cables  
1.6 mm (0.6 inch)  
2 mm (0.7 inch)  
3 mm (0.11 inch)  
126  
80  
110  
70  
94  
60  
26  
36  
31  
Plan your fiber size according to the number of cards/ports installed in each side of the shelf. For  
example, if your port combination requires 36 fibers, 3 mm (0.11 inch) fiber is adequate. If your port  
combination requires 68 fibers, you must use 2 mm (0.07 inch) or smaller fibers.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.9 Fan-Tray Assembly  
1.9 Fan-Tray Assembly  
The fan-tray assembly is located at the bottom of the ONS 15454 SDH. After you install the fan-tray  
assembly, you only need to open the drawer if a fan fails, or if you need to replace or clean the fan-tray  
air filter. Do not operate an ONS 15454 SDH without a fan-tray air filter. Refer to the “Maintain the  
Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for information about cleaning and  
maintaining the fan-tray air filter.  
The fan-tray assembly is a removable drawer that holds fans and fan-control circuitry for the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Cisco recommends removing the front door of the chassis when removing or installing  
the fan-tray assembly. The front of the fan-tray assembly has an LCD screen that provides slot and  
port-level information for all ONS 15454 SDH card slots, including the number of critical, major, and  
minor alarms. For STM-N cards, you can use the LCD to determine if a port is in working or protect  
mode and is active or standby. It also displays whether the software load is SONET or SDH and the  
software version number.  
The temperature measured by the TCC2/TCC2P sensors is displayed on the LCD screen.  
See Figure 1-9 for the position of the fan tray assembly.  
Figure 1-9  
Position of the Fan-Tray Assembly  
F
AN  
F
A
IL  
CRIT  
MAJ  
MIN  
LCD  
Fan tray  
assembly  
Caution  
Do not operate an ONS 15454 SDH without a fan-tray air filter. A fan-tray air filter is mandatory.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.9.1 Fan Speed  
1.9.1 Fan Speed  
If one or more fans fail on the fan-tray assembly, replace the entire assembly. You cannot replace  
individual fans. The red Fan Fail LED on the front of the fan tray illuminates when one or more fans fail.  
For fan tray replacement instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide. The  
red Fan Fail LED clears after you install a working fan-tray assembly.  
Fan speed is controlled by TCC2/TCC2P card temperature sensors. The sensors measure the input air  
temperature at the fan-tray assembly. Fan speed options are low, medium, and high. If the TCC2 card  
fails, the fans automatically shift to high speed. The temperature measured by the TCC2 sensors is  
displayed on the LCD screen.  
1.9.2 Air Filter  
The ONS 15454 SDH contains a reusable air filter that is installed beneath the fan-tray assembly.  
The reusable filter is made of a gray, open-cell, polyurethane foam that is specially coated to provide fire  
and fungi resistance. Spare filters should be kept in stock. Clean the filter every three to six months.  
Replace the air filter every two to three years. Avoid cleaning the air filter with harsh cleaning agents or  
solvents.  
1.10 Power and Ground Description  
Ground the equipment according to standards or local practices.  
The ONS 15454 SDH has redundant –48 VDC power connectors on the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P  
faceplates.  
To install redundant power feeds, use the two power cables shipped with the ONS 15454 SDH and one  
ground cable.  
For details, see the “3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC” section on page 3-30 and the “3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC”  
section on page 3-33.  
Caution  
Only use the power cables shipped with the ONS 15454 SDH.  
1.11 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections  
Caution  
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 SDH. Plug the  
wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.  
The MIC-A/P and the MIC-C/T/P FMECs in the EFCA area at the top of the ONS 15454 SDH shelf are  
used to connect alarm, timing, LAN, and craft connections to the ONS 15454 SDH.  
For details, see the “3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC” section on page 3-30 and the “3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC”  
section on page 3-33.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.12 Cards and Slots  
1.12 Cards and Slots  
ONS 15454 SDH cards have electrical plugs at the back that plug into electrical connectors on the shelf  
assembly backplane. When the ejectors are fully closed, the card plugs into the assembly backplane  
Figure 1-10 shows card installation.  
Figure 1-10  
Installing Cards in the ONS 15454 SDH  
F
A
N
F
AIL  
CRIT  
MAJ  
MIN  
Guide rail  
Ejector  
1.12.1 Card Slot Requirements  
The ONS 15454 SDH shelf assembly has 17 card slots numbered sequentially from left to right. Slots 1  
through 6 and 12 through 17 are for traffic-bearing cards.  
Slots 7 and 11 are dedicated to TCC2/TCC2P cards. Slots 8 and 10 are dedicated to cross-connect  
(XC-VXL-2.5G, XC-VXL-10G, XC10G) cards. Slot 9 is reserved for the optional AIC-I card. Slots 3  
and 15 can also host protect cards that are used in 1:N protection.  
Caution  
Do not operate the ONS 15454 SDH with a single TCC2/TCC2P card or a single  
XC-VXL-2.5G/XC-VXL-10G/XC10G card installed. Always operate the shelf assembly with one  
working and one protect card of the same type.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.12.1 Card Slot Requirements  
Shelf assembly slots have symbols indicating the type of cards that you can install in them. Each  
ONS 15454 SDH card has a corresponding symbol. The symbol on the card must match the symbol on  
the slot.  
Table 1-4 shows the slot and card symbol definitions.  
Table 1-4  
Slot and Card Symbols  
Symbol  
Color/Shape  
Definition  
Orange/Circle  
Blue/Triangle  
Purple/Square  
Green/Cross  
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with a circle symbol  
on the faceplate.  
Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13. Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with circle or a triangle  
symbol on the faceplate.  
TCC2/TCC2P slot, Slots 7 and 11. Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with a  
square symbol on the faceplate.  
Cross-connect (XC-VXL-2.5G/XC-VXL-10G/XC10G) slot, that is, Slots 8 and 10.  
Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with a cross symbol on the faceplate.  
Red/P  
Protection slot in 1:N protection schemes.  
Red/Diamond  
AIC-I slot, that is, Slot 9. Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with a diamond  
symbol on the faceplate.  
Gold/Star  
Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. Only install ONS 15454 SDH cards with a star symbol on  
the faceplate.  
Table 1-5 lists the number of ports, line rates, connector options, and connector locations for  
ONS 15454 SDH optical and electrical cards.  
Table 1-5  
Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors  
Connector  
Location  
Card  
Ports  
Line Rate per Port  
Connector Types  
E1-N-14  
14  
2.048 Mbps  
1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector  
or  
EFCA  
DB-37  
E1-42  
14  
2.048 Mbps  
1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector  
or  
EFCA  
Molex 96-pin LFH  
connector  
E3-12  
12  
12  
12  
34.386 Mbps  
44.736 Mbps  
1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector  
EFCA  
EFCA  
EFCA  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector  
Configurable  
155.52 Mbps  
or  
1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector  
139.264 Mbps  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.12.1 Card Slot Requirements  
Table 1-5  
Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued)  
Connector  
Card  
Ports  
12  
2
Line Rate per Port  
100 Mbps  
Connector Types  
Location  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
E100T-G  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
RJ-45  
1 Gbps  
SC (GBIC)  
SC (GBIC)  
SC (GBIC)  
RJ-45  
4
1 Gbps  
4
1 Gbps  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
12  
2
100 Mbps  
1 Gbps  
LC (SFP)  
SC  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 4  
155.52 Mbps (STM-1)  
1310  
OC3IR/STM1SH  
1310-8  
8
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
155.52 Mbps (STM-1)  
622.08 Mbps (STM-4)  
622.08 Mbps (STM-4)  
622.08 Mbps (STM-4)  
622.08 Mbps (STM-4)  
2488.32 Mbps (STM-16)  
2488.32 Mbps (STM-16)  
2488.32 Mbps (STM-16)  
9.95 Gbps (STM-64)  
9.95 Gbps (STM-64)  
9.95 Gbps (STM-64)  
9.95 Gbps (STM-64)  
LC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
SC  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
Faceplate  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310  
OC12 LR/STM4  
LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4  
LH 1550  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310-4  
OC48 IR/STM16  
SH AS 1310  
OC48 LR/STM16  
LH AS 1550  
OC48 ELR/STM16  
EH 100 GHz  
OC192 SR/STM64  
IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64  
SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64  
LH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64  
LH ITU 15xx.xx  
FC_MR-4  
4 (only 2 1.0625 Gbps  
available  
in R4.6)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.12.2 Card Replacement  
1.12.2 Card Replacement  
To replace an ONS 15454 SDH card with another card of the same type, you do not need to make any  
changes to the database; remove the old card and replace it with a new card. To replace a card with a card  
of a different type, physically remove the card and replace it with the new card, then delete the original  
card from CTC. For specifics, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Caution  
Removing any active card from the ONS 15454 SDH can result in traffic interruption. Use caution when  
replacing cards and verify that only inactive or standby cards are being replaced. If the active card needs  
to be replaced, switch it to standby prior to removing the card from the node. For traffic switching  
procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Note  
Note  
An improper removal (IMPROPRMVL) alarm is raised whenever a card pull (reseat) is performed,  
unless the card is deleted in CTC first. The alarm clears after the card replacement is complete.  
In a subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), pulling the active XC10G without a lockout causes  
SNCP circuits to switch.  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility  
Table 1-6 shows ONS 15454 SDH software and hardware compatibility for systems configured with  
XC-VXL-2.5G cards for Releases 3.4, 4.0, 4.1, 4.6, and 5.0.  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC-VXL-2.5G Configurations  
4.0.0x (4.0)  
Table 1-6  
Hardware  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
TCC2  
3.40.0x (3.4)  
4.1.0x (4.1)  
4.6.0x (4.6)  
5.0.0x (5.0)  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
TCC2P  
Not Supported  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
TCC2 or TCC2P  
Required  
AIC-I  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
E1N-14  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
E1-42  
Not Supported  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
E3-12  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 5, 13–17  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility  
Table 1-6  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC-VXL-2.5G Configurations (continued)  
4.0.0x (4.0)  
4.1.0x (4.1)  
Hardware  
3.40.0x (3.4)  
4.6.0x (4.6)  
5.0.0x (5.0)  
E100T-G  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC3IR/STM1SH 1310-8  
Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
Supported in Slots  
1– 4, 14–17  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Fully Compatible  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU  
15xx.xx  
FC_MR-4  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Table 1-7 shows ONS 15454 SDH software and hardware compatibility for systems configured with  
XC10G and XC-VXL-10G cards for Releases 3.4, 4.0, 4.1, 4.6, and 5.0. Release 4.5 is not supported on  
the XC10G and XC-VXL-10G cards.  
Table 1-7  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXL-10G  
Configurations  
4.0.0x (4.0)  
4.1.0x (4.1)  
Hardware  
XC-VXL-10G  
XC10G  
3.40.0x (3.4)  
4.6.0x (4.6)  
5.0.0x (5.0)  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Required  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Required  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Required  
TCC2/TCC2P  
AIC-I  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility  
Table 1-7  
ONS 15454 SDH Software Release/Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXL-10G  
Configurations (continued)  
4.0.0x (4.0)  
4.1.0x (4.1)  
Hardware  
3.40.0x (3.4)  
4.6.0x (4.6)  
5.0.0x (5.0)  
E1N-14  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17  
E1-42  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17  
E3-12  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible, Fully Compatible, Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17  
Fully Compatible, Fully Compatible, Fully Compatible, Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17 Slots 1 to 5, 13 to 17  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17  
E100T-G  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Not Supported  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
Not Supported  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC3IR/STM1SH 1310-8  
Fully Compatible  
Not Supported  
Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible,  
Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17 Slots 1 to 4, 14 to 17  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Fully Compatible  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
Supported in Slots  
5-6, 12-13  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU  
15xx.xx  
TXP_MR_10G  
MXP_2.5G_10G  
FC_MR-4  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Fully Compatible  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility  
If an upgrade is required for compatibility, go to the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (Cisco TAC)  
website at http://www.cisco.com/tac.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Shelf and FMEC Hardware  
1.13 Software and Hardware Compatibility  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
2
Common Control Cards  
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH common control card functions. It includes  
descriptions, hardware specifications, and block diagrams for each card. For installation and card  
turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.1 Common Control Card Overview, page 2-1  
2.2 TCC2 Card, page 2-4  
2.3 TCC2P Card, page 2-7  
2.4 XC10G Card, page 2-10  
2.5 XC-VXL-10G Card, page 2-12  
2.6 XC-VXL-2.5G Card, page 2-14  
2.7 AIC-I Card, page 2-16  
2.1 Common Control Card Overview  
The card overview section summarizes card functions and compatibility.  
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 SDH shelf  
assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the “1.12.1 Card Slot  
Requirements” section on page 1-15 for a list of slots and symbols.  
2.1.1 Card Summary  
Table 2-1 shows the ONS 15454 SDH common control cards and summarizes card functions.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 2-1  
Common Control Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH  
For Additional  
Information...  
Card  
TCC2  
Description  
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control See the “2.2 TCC2 Card”  
(TCC2) card is the main processing center of the  
ONS 15454 SDH and provides system initialization,  
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, and  
diagnostics.  
section on page 2-4.  
TCC2P  
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control See the “2.3 TCC2P Card”  
Plus (TCC2P) card is the main processing center of the section on page 2-7.  
ONS 15454 SDH and provides system initialization,  
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, and  
diagnostics. This card also has Ethernet security  
features.  
XC10G  
The 10 Gigabit Cross Connect (XC10G) card is the  
central element for switching; it establishes  
connections and performs time-division switching  
(TDS).  
See the “2.4 XC10G  
Card” section on  
page 2-10.  
XC-VXL-10G  
The International Cross Connect 10 Gigabit AU3/AU4 See the  
High-Capacity Tributary (XC-VXL-10G) card is the  
central element for switching; it establishes  
connections and performs TDS. It supports cards with  
speeds up to 10 Gbps.  
“2.5 XC-VXL-10G Card”  
section on page 2-12.  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
AIC-I  
The International Cross Connect 2.5 Gigabit AU3/AU4 See the  
High-Capacity Tributary (XC-VXL-2.5G) card is the “2.6 XC-VXL-2.5G Card”  
central element for switching; it establishes  
connections and performs TDS. It supports cards with  
speeds up to 2.5 Gbps.  
section on page 2-14.  
The Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) See the “2.7 AIC-I Card”  
card provides customer-defined alarm input/output  
(I/O), supports user data, and supports local and  
express orderwire.  
section on page 2-16.  
2.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 2-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software release compatibility for each  
common-control card. In the tables below, “Yes” means cards are compatible with the listed software  
versions. Table cells with dashes mean cards are not compatible with the listed software versions.  
Table 2-2  
Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility  
Card  
TCC2  
TCC2P  
R4.0  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.1  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.5  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.6  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.7  
Yes  
Yes  
R5.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility  
Table 2-2  
Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility (continued)  
Card  
R4.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.1  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.5  
—
R4.6  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.7  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R5.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
XC10G  
XC-VXL-10G  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
AIC-I  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility  
The following tables list the compatible cross-connect cards for each Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
common-control card. The tables are organized according to type of common-control card. In the tables  
below, “Yes” means cards are compatible with the listed cross-connect card. Table cells with dashes  
mean cards are not compatible with the listed cross-connect card.  
Table 2-3 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each common-control card.  
Table 2-3  
Common-Control Card Cross-Connect Compatibility  
Card  
XC10G Card  
XC-VXL-2.5G Card XC-VXL-10G Card  
TCC2  
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
TCC2P  
XC-VXL-10G  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
XC10G  
—
Yes1  
Yes  
—
—
AIC-I  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1. The XC10G card requires a TCC2/TCC2P card and Software R3.1 or later to operate.  
Table 2-4 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each electrical card.  
Table 2-4  
Electrical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility  
Electrical Card  
E1-N-14  
XC10G Card1  
Yes  
XC-VXL-2.5G Card XC-VXL-10G Card  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
E1-42  
Yes  
E3-12  
Yes  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
Yes  
Yes  
1. The XC10G card requires a TCC2/TCC2P card and Software R3.1 or later to operate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.2 TCC2 Card  
Table 2-5 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each optical card.  
Table 2-5  
Optical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility  
Optical Card  
XC10G Card  
Yes  
XC-VXL-2.5G Card XC-VXL-10G Card  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC3 IR /STM1SH 1310-8  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
Table 2-6 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each Ethernet card.  
Table 2-6 Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility  
Ethernet Cards XC10G Card XC-VXL-2.5G Card XC-VXL-10G Card  
E100T-G  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
2.2 TCC2 Card  
The TCC2 card, which requires Software Release 4.0 or later, performs system initialization,  
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SDH section  
overhead (SOH) data communications channel/generic communication channel (DCC/GCC)  
termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454 SDH. The TCC2 card also ensures that the  
system maintains Stratum 3 (ITU-T G.812) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the  
system.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.2 TCC2 Card  
Note  
Note  
The LAN interfaces of the TCC2 card meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable  
length of 100 m (328 ft.) at temperatures from 0 to 65 degrees Celsius (32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit).  
The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 10 m (32.8 ft) maximum at temperatures from  
–40 to 0 degrees Celsius (–40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit).  
The TCC2 card supporst both –48 VDC and –60 VDC input requirements.  
Figure 2-1 shows the TCC2 card faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 2-1  
TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
TCC2  
FAIL  
RAM  
Flash  
PWR  
10BaseT  
Modem  
A
B
DCC  
Processor  
ACT/STBY  
CRIT  
MAJ  
Ethernet  
Hub  
MIN  
REM  
SYNC  
ACO  
B
a
c
k
p
l
Timing  
Controller  
RAM  
Flash  
10BaseT  
Craft  
Control  
Processor  
ACO  
LAMP  
a
n
e
Framer/  
LIU  
Voltage  
Monitoring  
Message  
Router  
RS-232  
TCP/IP  
TDM/SCC Mux  
TDM  
Crossconnect  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality  
2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality  
The TCC2 card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the  
DCC/GCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC2 card and up to 84 section DCCs can be  
terminated at the TCC2 card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels). The  
TCC2 card selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces.  
The TCC2 card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports  
links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer  
communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards.  
The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2 card nonvolatile memory, which  
allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.  
The TCC2 card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454 SDH. It monitors the  
recovered clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2 card  
selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You  
can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking  
loop allows the TCC2 card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the  
reference is lost.  
The TCC2 card monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the  
supply voltage inputs has a voltage outside of the specified range.  
Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 card fails, traffic switches to the  
protect TCC2 card. All TCC2 card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when  
the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms.  
The TCC2 card has two built-in interface ports for accessing the system: an RJ-45 10BaseT LAN  
interface and an EIA/TIA-232 interface for local craft access. It also has a 10BaseT LAN port for user  
interfaces via the backplane to the port accessible on the MIC-C/T/P Front Mount Electrical Connection  
(FMEC).  
Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 SDH with only one TCC2 card. For full  
functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate each ONS 15454 SDH with two TCC2 cards.  
Note  
Note  
CTC software does not monitor for the absence of FMECs unless the TCC2 card(s) have reached the  
Active/Standby state. During transitional states such as power-up or TCC2 card reset, CTC ignores the  
FMEC inventory displayed in node view.  
When a second TCC2 card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and  
its database with the active TCC2 card. If the software version of the new TCC2 card does not match the  
version on the active TCC2 card, the newly inserted TCC2 card copies from the active TCC2 card, taking  
about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2 card does not match  
the version on the active TCC2 card, the newly inserted TCC2 card copies the backup software from the  
active TCC2 card again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2 card  
takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2 card started  
with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes.  
2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 2-7 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2 card faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators  
Table 2-7  
TCC2 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Definition  
Red FAIL LED  
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card  
if the FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
The ACT/STBY (Active/Standby) LED indicates the TCC2 card is active  
(green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the  
timing reference and shelf control. When the TCC2 card is writing to the  
active or standby TCC2 card, its active or standby LED blinks. To avoid  
memory corruption, do not remove the TCC2 card when the active or standby  
LED is blinking.  
Amber (Standby)  
2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators  
Table 2-8 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2 card faceplate.  
Table 2-8  
TCC2 Network-Level Indicators  
System-Level LEDs  
Red CRIT LED  
Red MAJ LED  
Amber MIN LED  
Red REM LED  
Definition  
Indicates Critical alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Indicates Major alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Indicates Minor alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when  
an alarm is present in one or several of the remote terminals.  
Green SYNC LED  
Green ACO LED  
Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference.  
After pressing the alarm cutoff (ACO) button, the green ACO LED  
illuminates. The ACO button opens the audible closure on the backplane.  
ACO state is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is  
cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.  
2.3 TCC2P Card  
The TCC2P card, which requires Software R4.0 or later, is an enhanced version of the TCC2 card. The  
primary enhancements are Ethernet security features.  
The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance,  
diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault  
detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3  
(Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.  
Note  
The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable  
length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius).  
The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to  
32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality  
Figure 2-2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P.  
Figure 2-2 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram  
TCC2P  
FAIL  
Secure  
10BaseT  
RAM  
Flash  
PWR  
A
B
DCC  
Processor  
ACT/STBY  
Modem  
CRIT  
MAJ  
Ethernet  
Switch  
MIN  
REM  
SYNC  
ACO  
B
a
Timing  
Controller  
RAM  
Flash  
10BaseT  
Craft  
c
k
p
l
Control  
Processor  
ACO  
LAMP  
a
n
e
Framer/  
LIU  
Voltage  
Monitoring  
Message  
Router  
RS-232  
TCP/IP  
TDM/SCC Mux  
TDM  
Crossconnect  
2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality  
The TCC2P card supports multichannel, HDLC processing for the DCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed  
over the TCC2P card and up to 84 section DCCs can be terminated at the TCC2P card (subject to the  
available optical digital communication channels). The TCC2P selects and processes 84 DCCs to  
facilitate remote system management interfaces.  
The TCC2P also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links  
between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer  
communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators  
The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2P nonvolatile memory, which  
allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.  
The TCC2P card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. It monitors the recovered  
clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2P card selects a  
recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can  
provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop  
allows the TCC2P to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is  
lost.  
The TCC2P monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply  
voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.  
Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P fails, traffic switches to the  
protect TCC2P. All TCC2P protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the  
BER counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms.  
The TCC2P card has two built-in RJ-45 Ethernet interface ports for accessing the system: one on the  
front faceplate for on-site craft access and a second on the backplane for user interfaces. The rear  
Ethernet interface is for permanent LAN access and all remote access via TCP/IP as well as for  
Operations Support System (OSS) access. The front and rear Ethernet interfaces have different IP  
addresses that are in different subnets.  
Two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports, one on the faceplate and a second on the backplane, allow for craft  
interface in TL1 mode.  
Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 SDH with only one TCC2P card. For full  
functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2P cards.  
Note  
When a second TCC2P card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and  
its database with the active TCC2P. If the software version of the new TCC2P does not match the version  
on the active TCC2P, the newly inserted TCC2P copies from the active TCC2P, taking about 15 to 20  
minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2P does not match the version on  
the active TCC2P, the newly inserted TCC2P copies the backup software from the active TCC2P again,  
taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2P takes about 3 minutes.  
Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2P started with, the entire process  
can take between 3 and 40 minutes.  
2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators  
The TCC2P faceplate has eight LEDs. Table 2-9 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2P  
faceplate.  
Table 2-9  
TCC2P Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Definition  
Red FAIL LED  
This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and  
write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Indicates the TCC2P is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The  
ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When  
the active TCC2P is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2P  
database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove  
the TCC2P when the active or standby LED is blinking.  
Amber (Standby)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators  
2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators  
Table 2-10 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate.  
Table 2-10 TCC2P Network-Level Indicators  
Definition  
System-Level LEDs  
Red CRIT LED  
Red MAJ LED  
Amber MIN LED  
Red REM LED  
Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal.  
Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when  
an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals.  
Green SYNC LED  
Green ACO LED  
Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference.  
After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button  
opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new  
alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and  
audible alarm control are reset.  
2.4 XC10G Card  
The XC10G card cross connects STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64 signal rates. The XC10G card  
provides a maximum of 384 x 384 VC-4 nonblocking cross connections. Any STM-1 on any port can be  
connected to any other port, meaning that the STM cross-connections are nonblocking.  
The lowest level cross-connect with the XC10G card is STM-1. Lower level signals, such as E-1, DS-3,  
or E-3, can be dropped, which can leave part of the bandwidth unused.  
Note  
The XC10G card has been designed to support both –48 VDC and –60 VDC input requirements.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.4 XC10G Card  
Figure 2-3 shows the XC10G card faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 2-3  
XC10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram  
XC10G  
Line 1  
Line 2  
Line 3  
Line 4  
Span 1  
Span 2  
Span 3  
Span 4  
Line 5  
Line 6  
Line 7  
Line 8  
FAIL  
uP Interface  
ACT/STBY  
Cross-Connect  
Matrix  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Ref Clk A  
Flash  
RAM  
Ref Clk B  
TCCA  
ASIC  
uP Interface  
Main SCL  
uP  
Protect  
SCL  
SCL link  
Figure 2-4 shows the XC10G card cross-connect matrix.  
Figure 2-4  
XC10G Card Cross-Connect Matrix  
XC10G Cross-connect ASIC (384x384 VC-4)  
Input Ports  
1
Output Ports  
1
8X  
STM-16  
2
.
2
8X  
STM-16  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4X  
4X  
STM-64  
STM-64  
25  
25  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.4.1 XC10G Functionality  
2.4.1 XC10G Functionality  
The XC10G card manages up to 192 bidirectional STM-1 cross-connects. The TCC2/TCC2P card  
assigns bandwidth to each slot on a per STM-1 basis. The XC10G card works with the TCC2/TCC2P  
card to maintain connections and set up cross-connects within the system. You can establish  
cross-connect and provisioning information through the CTC.  
Note  
Cisco does not recommend operating the ONS 15454 SDH with only one XC10G card. To safeguard  
your system, always operate in a redundant configuration. Install XC10G cards in Slots 8 and 10.  
2.4.2 XC10G Card-Level Indicators  
Table 2-11 describes the two card-level LEDs on the XC10G card faceplate.  
Table 2-11  
XC10G Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Definition  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset.  
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red  
FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Indicates whether the XC10G card is active and carrying traffic (green) or in  
standby mode to the active XC10G card (amber).  
Amber (Standby)  
2.5 XC-VXL-10G Card  
The XC-VXL-10G card cross connects E-1, E-3, DS-3, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64 signal  
rates. The XC-VXL-10G provides a maximum of 384 x 384 VC-4 nonblocking cross-connections,  
384 x 384 VC-3 nonblocking cross-connections, or 2016 x 2016 VC-12 nonblocking cross-connections.  
It is designed for 10-Gbps solutions.  
Note  
The XC-VXL-10G card has been designed to support both –48 VDC and –60 VDC input requirements.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.5 XC-VXL-10G Card  
Figure 2-5 shows the XC-VXL-10G faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 2-5  
XC-VXL-10G Faceplate and Block Diagram  
XCVXL  
10G  
Line 1  
Line 2  
Line 3  
Line 4  
Span 1  
Span 2  
Span 3  
Span 4  
Line 5  
FAIL  
uP Interface  
ACT/STBY  
Cross-Connect  
Matrix  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Line 6  
Line 7  
Line 8  
Ref Clk A  
Flash  
RAM  
Ref Clk B  
TCCA  
ASIC  
uP Interface  
Main SCL  
uP  
Protect  
SCL  
SCL link  
Figure 2-6 shows the XC-VXL-10G cross-connect matrix.  
Figure 2-6 XC-VXL-10G Cross-Connect Matrix  
XC-VXL-10G Cross-connect ASIC (384x384 VC-3/4, 2016x2016 VC-12)  
Input Ports  
1
Output Ports  
1
8X  
STM-16  
2
2
8X  
STM-16  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4X  
4X  
STM-64  
STM-64  
25  
25  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.5.1 XC-VXL-10G Functionality  
2.5.1 XC-VXL-10G Functionality  
The XC-VXL-10G card manages up to 192 bidirectional STM-1 cross-connects, 192 bidirectional E-3  
or DS-3 cross-connects, or 1008 bidirectional E-1 cross-connects. The TCC2/TCC2P card assigns  
bandwidth to each slot on a per STM-1 basis. The XC-VXL-10G card works with the TCC2/TCC2P card  
to maintain connections and set up cross-connects within the node. You can establish cross-connect and  
provisioning information through CTC.  
Note  
Cisco does not recommend operating the ONS 15454 SDH with only one XC-VXL-10G card. To  
safeguard your node, always operate in a redundant configuration. Install the XC-VXL-10 cards in  
Slots 8 and 10.  
2.5.2 XC-VXL-10G Card-Level Indicators  
Table 2-12 describes the two card-level LEDs on the XC-VXL-10G card faceplate.  
Table 2-12  
XC-VXL-10G Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Definition  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL  
LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Indicates whether the XC-VXL-10G card is active and carrying traffic  
(green) or in standby mode to the active XC-VXL-10G card (amber).  
Amber (Standby)  
2.6 XC-VXL-2.5G Card  
The XC-VXL-2.5G card cross-connects E-1, E-3, DS-3, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64 signal  
rates. The XC-VXL-2.5G card provides a maximum of 192 x 192 VC-4 nonblocking cross-connections,  
384 x 384 VC-3 nonblocking cross-connections, or 2016 x 2016 VC-12 nonblocking cross-connections.  
The card is designed for 2.5-Gbps solutions.  
Note  
The XC-VXL-2.5G card has been designed to support both –48 VDC and –60 VDC input requirements.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.6 XC-VXL-2.5G Card  
Figure 2-7 shows the XC-VXL-2.5G card faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 2-7  
XC-VXL-2.5G Faceplate and Block Diagram  
XCVXL  
2.5G  
Line 1  
Line 2  
Line 3  
Line 4  
Span 1  
Span 2  
Span 3  
Span 4  
Line 5  
FAIL  
uP Interface  
ACT/STBY  
Cross-Connect  
Matrix  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Line 6  
Line 7  
Line 8  
Ref Clk A  
Flash  
RAM  
Ref Clk B  
TCCA  
ASIC  
uP Interface  
Main SCL  
uP  
Protect  
SCL  
SCL link  
Figure 2-8 shows the XC-VXL-2.5G cross-connect matrix.  
Figure 2-8 XC-VXL-2.5G Cross-Connect Matrix  
XC-VXL-2.5G Cross-connect ASIC (192x192 VC-4, 384x384 VC-3, 2016x2016 VC-12)  
Input Ports  
1
Output Ports  
1
2
2
.
.
.
.
12X  
STM-16  
12X  
STM-16  
.
.
.
.
25  
25  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.6.1 XC-VXL-2.5G Card Functionality  
2.6.1 XC-VXL-2.5G Card Functionality  
The XC-VXL-2.5G card manages up to 192 bidirectional STM-1 cross-connects, 192 bidirectional E-3  
or DS-3 cross-connects, or 1008 bidirectional E-1 cross-connects. The TCC2/TCC2P card assigns  
bandwidth to each slot on a per STM-1 basis. The XC-VXL-2.5G card works with the TCC2/TCC2P  
card to maintain connections and set up cross-connects within the node. You can establish cross-connect  
and provisioning information through CTC.  
Note  
Cisco does not recommend operating the ONS 15454 SDH with only one XC-VXL-2.5G card. To  
safeguard your system, always operate in a redundant configuration. Install the XC-VXL-2.5G cards in  
Slots 8 and 10.  
2.6.2 XC-VXL-2.5G Card-Level Indicators  
Table 2-13 describes the two card-level LEDs on the XC-VXL-2.5G faceplate.  
Table 2-13  
XC-VXL-2.5G Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Definition  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
The ACT/STBY (Active/Standby) LED indicates whether the  
XC-VXL-2.5G is active and carrying traffic (green) or in standby mode to  
the active XC-VXL-2.5G card (amber).  
Amber (Standby)  
2.7 AIC-I Card  
The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined alarm  
inputs and outputs, user data channels, and supports local and express orderwire. It provides  
16 customer-defined input contacts and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. It requires the  
MIC-A/P for connection to the alarm contacts.  
Note  
The AIC-I card supports both –48 VDC and –60 VDC input requirements.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators  
Figure 2-9 shows the AIC-I card faceplate and a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 2-9  
AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram  
AIC-1  
Fail  
FAIL  
ACT  
PWR  
A
B
AIC-I  
Act  
UDC-A  
UDC-B  
ACC  
INPUT/OUTPUT  
DCC-A  
DCC-B  
Express orderwire  
(DTMF)  
ACC  
Ring  
Ring  
Local orderwire  
(DTMF)  
12/16 x IN  
UDC-A  
4 x  
IN/OUT  
UDC-B  
DCC-A  
Ringer  
Power  
Monitoring  
DCC-B  
RING  
LOW  
Input  
LED x2  
AIC-I FPGA  
Output  
EOW  
RING  
EEPROM  
SCL links  
2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators  
Table 2-14 describes the eight card-level LEDs on the AIC-I card.  
Table 2-14  
AIC-I Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL  
LED persists.  
Green ACT LED  
Indicates that the AIC-I card is provisioned for operation.  
Green/Red PWR A LED When green, indicates that a supply voltage within the specified range has  
been sensed on supply input A. It is red when the input voltage on supply  
input A is out of range.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls  
Table 2-14  
AIC-I Card-Level Indicators (continued)  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Green/Red PWR B LED When green, indicates that a supply voltage within the specified range has  
been sensed on supply input B. It is red when the input voltage on supply  
input B is out of range.  
Amber INPUT LED  
When amber, indicates that there is an alarm condition on at least one of the  
alarm inputs.  
Amber OUTPUT LED When amber, indicates that there is an alarm condition on at least one of the  
alarm outputs.  
Green RING LED  
The green RING LED on the local orderwire (LOW) side is flashing when a  
call is received on the LOW.  
Green RING LED  
The green RING LED on the express orderwire (EOW) side is flashing when  
a call is received on the EOW.  
2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls  
The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to 16 external alarm  
inputs and four external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made  
using the MIC-A/P. The alarms are defined using CTC. For instructions, refer to the “Manage Alarms”  
chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm contacts: one LED representing all  
the inputs and one LED representing all the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used  
for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental  
conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such  
as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans.  
You can program each of the sixteen input alarm contacts separately. Choices include:  
•
•
•
•
Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open  
Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported)  
Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level  
63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log. You cannot assign the fan-tray  
abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts. The  
alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you unprovision  
the alarm input.  
You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of  
the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact  
or you provision the alarm input.  
The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a  
local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire, as follows:  
•
Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical  
alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a  
Minor alarm or above is the trigger.  
•
Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local NE alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.3 Orderwire  
•
Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any  
virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a  
signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output.  
You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to  
provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual  
operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present.  
2.7.3 Orderwire  
Orderwire allows a craftsperson to plug a phone set into an ONS 15454 SDH and communicate with  
craftspeople working at other ONS 15454 SDHs or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse  
code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in the multiplex section  
overhead and in the regenerator section overhead.  
The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead  
signal) orderwire channels on an SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also allows  
communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device.  
You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for GCC  
channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up so that all  
NEs on the ring can communicate with one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities  
that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can  
be configured as on or off on a particular SDH facility. The ONS 15454 SDH supports up to four  
orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small  
hub-and-spoke configurations. Keep in mind that orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as  
multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing) and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).  
Caution  
Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel.  
The ONS 15454 SDH implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The  
line acts as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other  
participants on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the  
express orderwire party line. Up to four STM-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are  
provisionable as orderwire paths.  
Note  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card does not support the express orderwire (EOW) channel.  
The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity,  
which causes specific or all ONS 15454 SDH AIC-Is on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The  
ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes  
when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on  
the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the  
DTMF pad. The station number of the node is provisioned in CTC.  
The orderwire ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. The pins on the orderwire ports correspond to the  
tip and ring orderwire assignments.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.4 Power Monitoring  
Table 2-15 describes the orderwire pin assignments.  
Table 2-15 Orderwire Pin Assignments  
RJ-11 Pin Number  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Four-wire receive ring  
Four-wire transmit tip  
Two-wire ring  
Two-wire tip  
Four-wire transmit ring  
Four-wire receive tip  
When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops  
cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel.  
Figure 2-10 shows the standard RJ-11 connectors used for orderwire ports. Use a shielded RJ-11 cable.  
Figure 2-10  
RJ-11 Cable Connector  
RJ-11  
Pin 1  
Pin 6  
2.7.4 Power Monitoring  
The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for  
presence, undervoltage, or overvoltage.  
2.7.5 User Data Channel  
The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes  
in an ONS 15454 SDH network. Each AIC-I card provides two UDCs, UDC-A and UDC-B, through  
separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I. Each UDC can be routed to an individual optical  
interface in the ONS 15454 SDH system. For instructions, refer to th “Create Circuits and Low-Order  
Tunnels” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. Table 2-16 lists the UDC pin assignments.  
Table 2-16  
UDC Pin Assignments  
RJ-11 Pin Number  
Description  
For future use  
TXN  
1
2
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel  
Table 2-16  
UDC Pin Assignments (continued)  
RJ-11 Pin Number  
Description  
RXN  
3
4
5
6
RXP  
TXP  
For future use  
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel  
The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an  
ONS 15454 SDH network. Each AIC-I card provides two DCCs, DCC-A and DCC-B, through separate  
RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I. Each DCC can be routed to an individual optical interface  
in the ONS 15454 SDH system.  
Note  
DCC connection cannot be provisioned if DCC tunneling is configured on this span.  
The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles. Table 2-17 describes the GCC pin assignments.  
Table 2-17  
GCC Pin Assignments  
RJ-45 Pin Number  
Description  
TCLKP  
TCLKN  
TXP  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TXN  
RCLKP  
RCLKN  
RXP  
RXN  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards  
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
3
Electrical Cards  
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH electrical card features and functions. It includes  
descriptions, hardware specifications, and block diagrams for each card. For installation and card  
turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.1 Electrical Card Overview, page 3-1  
3.2 E1-N-14 Card, page 3-4  
3.3 E1-42 Card, page 3-6  
3.4 E3-12 Card, page 3-8  
3.5 DS3i-N-12 Card, page 3-10  
3.6 STM1E-12 Card, page 3-13  
3.7 BLANK Card, page 3-14  
3.8 FMEC-E1 Card, page 3-15  
3.9 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card, page 3-16  
3.10 FMEC E1-120NP Card, page 3-18  
3.11 FMEC E1-120PROA Card, page 3-21  
3.12 FMEC E1-120PROB Card, page 3-23  
3.13 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel, page 3-26  
3.14 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card, page 3-28  
3.15 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card, page 3-29  
3.16 FMEC-BLANK Card, page 3-29  
3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC, page 3-30  
3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC, page 3-33  
3.1 Electrical Card Overview  
The card overview section summarizes card functions and compatibility.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.1.1 Card Summary  
Note  
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.  
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the “1.12.1 Card Slot  
Requirements” section on page 1-15 for a list of slots and symbols.  
3.1.1 Card Summary  
Table 3-1 shows available electrical cards for the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Table 3-1  
Electrical Cards  
Card  
Description  
For Additional Information...  
E1-N-14  
Provides 14 E-1 ports and supports 1:0, See the “3.2 E1-N-14 Card”  
1:1, and 1:N protection. It operates in  
Slots 1 to 5 and Slots 13 to 17.  
section on page 3-4.  
E1-42  
Provides 42 E-1 ports and supports 1:3 See the “3.3 E1-42 Card”  
protection. It operates in Slots 1 to 4 and section on page 3-6.  
Slots 14 to 17.  
E3-12  
Provides 12 E-3 ports and supports 1:0 See the “3.4 E3-12 Card”  
and 1:1 protection. It operates in Slots 1 section on page 3-8.  
to 5 and Slots 13 to 17.  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
BLANK  
FMEC-E1  
Provides 12 DS-3 ports and supports 1:0, See the “3.5 DS3i-N-12  
1:1, and 1:N protection. It operates in  
Slots 1 to 5 and Slots 13 to 17.  
Card” section on page 3-10.  
Provides 12 electrical STM-1 ports and See the “3.6 STM1E-12  
supports 1:1 protection. It operates in  
Slots 1 to 4 and Slots 14 to 17.  
Card” section on page 3-13.  
Assures fulfillment of EMC  
See the “3.7 BLANK Card”  
requirements in case of empty interface section on page 3-14.  
card slots.  
Provides electrical connection into the  
system for 14 pairs of 75-ohm 1.0/2.3  
miniature coax connectors for  
unbalanced E-1 ports from the E1-N-14  
card.  
See the “3.8 FMEC-E1 Card”  
section on page 3-15.  
FMEC-DS1/E1  
Provides electrical connection into the  
See the “3.9 FMEC-DS1/E1  
system for 14 pairs of 120-ohm balanced Card” section on page 3-16.  
E-1 ports from the E1-N-14 card. It uses  
high-density 37-pin DB connectors.  
FMEC E1-120NP  
Provides electrical connection into the  
See the “3.10 FMEC  
system for 42 pairs of 120-ohm balanced E1-120NP Card” section on  
E-1 ports from the E1-42 card. It uses  
Molex 96-pin LFH connectors.  
page 3-18.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.1.1 Card Summary  
Table 3-1  
Card  
Electrical Cards (continued)  
Description  
For Additional Information...  
FMEC E1-120PROA  
FMEC E1-120PROB  
E1-75/120  
Provides electrical connection into the  
See the “3.11 FMEC  
system for 42 pairs of 120-ohm balanced E1-120PROA Card” section  
E-1 ports from the E1-42 card. It is for on page 3-21.  
1:3 protection from the A side (left side  
of the shelf). It occupies four slots,  
Slots 18 to 21. It uses Molex 96-pin LFH  
connectors.  
Provides electrical connection into the  
See the “3.12 FMEC  
system for 42 pairs of 120-ohm balanced E1-120PROB Card” section  
E-1 ports from the E1-42 card. It is for on page 3-23.  
1:3 protection from the B side (right side  
of the shelf). It occupies four slots,  
Slots 26 to 29. It uses Molex 96-pin LFH  
connectors.  
Installed in the rack to provide a  
See the “3.13 E1-75/120  
balanced 120-ohm connection for 42 E-1 Impedance Conversion Panel”  
interfaces that have a 75-ohm  
unbalanced connection. It uses Molex  
96-pin LFH connectors and  
section on page 3-26.  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors.  
FMEC-E3/DS3  
Provides electrical connection into the  
system for 12 pairs of 75-ohm 1.0/2.3  
miniature coax connectors for  
See the “3.14 FMEC-E3/DS3  
Card” section on page 3-28.  
unbalanced E-3 or DS-3 ports.  
FMEC STM1E 1:1  
Provides electrical connection into the  
See the “3.15 FMEC STM1E  
system for 2 x 12 pairs of 75-ohm 1.0/2.3 1:1 Card” section on  
miniature coax connectors for  
unbalanced electrical STM-1 ports from  
two STM1E-12 cards in case of 1:1  
protected operation. The FMEC STM1E  
1:1 card is two slots wide and is  
recognized in Slots 18–19, 20–21,  
26–27, and 28–29.  
page 3-29.  
FMEC-BLANK  
MIC-A/P  
Assures fulfillment of EMC  
requirements in case of empty FMEC  
slots.  
See the “3.16 FMEC-BLANK  
Card” section on page 3-29.  
Provides connection for one of the two See the “3.17 MIC-A/P  
redundant inputs of system power and  
system connection for input and output  
alarms.  
FMEC” section on page 3-30.  
MIC-C/T/P  
Provides connection for one of the two See the “3.18 MIC-C/T/P  
redundant inputs of system power and  
system connection for LAN ports and  
system timing input/output.  
FMEC” section on page 3-33.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.1.2 Card Compatibility  
3.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 3-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each electrical card. See Table 2-4 on page 2-3 for a  
list of cross-connect cards that are compatible with each electrical card.  
Table 3-2  
Electrical Card Software Release Compatibility  
Electrical  
Card  
R3.3 R3.4 R4.0  
R4.1  
Yes  
—
R4.5  
—
R4.6  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.7  
—
R5.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
E1-N-14  
E1-42  
Yes  
—
Yes Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
E3-12  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes  
—
—
DS3i-N-12  
Yes  
—
—
(4.1.2)  
STM1E-12  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
3.2 E1-N-14 Card  
The 14-port ONS 15454 SDH E1-N-14 card provides 14 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. Each port of  
the E1-N-14 card operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm, twisted-pair copper cable (with FMEC-E1)  
or over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (with FMEC-E1). Figure 3-1 shows the E1-N-14 faceplate  
and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to Safety Extreme Low Voltage (SELV) circuits. The interface is  
not intended for connection to any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent  
of the network manager.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.2.1 E1-N-14 Card Functionality  
Figure 3-1  
E1-N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
E1-N  
14  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
Protection  
Relay  
Matrix  
14 Line  
Interface  
Units  
AU-3 to  
14 E1  
Mapper  
BTC  
ASIC  
AU-3 / STM-4  
Mux/Demux FPGA  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
uP  
DRAM  
FLASH  
3.2.1 E1-N-14 Card Functionality  
Each E1-N-14 port features ITU-T G.703 compliant outputs and inputs supporting cable losses of up to  
6 dB at 1024 kHz. The E1-N-14 card supports 1:N (N <= 4) protection. You can also provision the  
E1-N-14 card to monitor line and frame errors in both directions.  
The E1-N-14 card can function as a working or protect card in 1:1 or 1:N protection schemes. If you use  
the E1-N-14 card as a standard E-1 card in a 1:1 protection group, you can install the E1-N-14 card in  
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454 SDH. If you use the card’s 1:N functionality, you must install  
an E1-N-14 card in Slot 3 (for bank A) or Slot 15 (for bank B).  
You can group and map E1-N-14 card traffic in VC-12 as per ITU-T G.707 to any other card in an  
ONS 15454 SDH node. For performance-monitoring purposes, you can gather bidirectional E-1  
frame-level information (for example, loss of frame, parity errors, or cyclic redundancy check [CRC]  
errors).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.2.2 E1-N-14 Card-Level Indicators  
Note  
The lowest level cross-connect with the XC10G card is STM-1. Lower level signals, such as E-1, DS-3,  
or E-3, can be dropped. This might leave part of the bandwidth unused. The lowest level cross-connect  
with the XC-VXL-10G card and with the XC-VXL-2.5G card is VC-12 (2.048 Mbps).  
3.2.2 E1-N-14 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 3-3 describes the three E1-N-14 card faceplate LEDs.  
Table 3-3  
E1-N-14 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED  
persists in flashing.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
Indicates that the E1-N-14 card is operational and ready to carry traffic  
(green) or that the card is in Standby mode (amber).  
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of signal (LOS), loss of  
frame (LOF), or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports.  
3.2.3 E1-N-14 Port-Level Indicators  
You can obtain the status of the 14 E-1 ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray  
assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and  
severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a  
complete description of the alarm messages.  
3.3 E1-42 Card  
The 42-port ONS 15454 SDH E1-42 card provides 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. Each port of the  
E1-42 card operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm, twisted-pair copper cable. Front mount electrical  
connection is done using the FMEC E1-120 NP card for unprotected operation, the FMEC E1-120PROA  
for 1:3 protection in the left side of the shelf, or the FMEC E1-120PROB for 1:3 protection in the right  
side of the shelf.  
Caution  
Note  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
If you need 75-ohm unbalanced interfaces, you must additionally use the E1-75/120 conversion panel.  
Figure 3-2 shows the E1-42 card faceplate and block diagram.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.3.1 E1-42 Card Functionality  
Figure 3-2  
E1-42 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
E1-42  
Protection  
Relay  
Matrix  
6 * 7 Line  
Interface  
Units  
FAIL  
AU-4 to  
2 * 21 E1  
Mapper  
BTC  
ASIC  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
AU-4 / STM-4  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
uP  
DRAM  
FLASH  
3.3.1 E1-42 Card Functionality  
Each E1-42 port features ITU-T G.703 compliant outputs and inputs supporting cable losses of up to  
6 dB at 1024 kHz. The E1-42 card supports 1:3 protection. You can also provision the E1-42 card to  
monitor line and frame errors in both directions.  
The E1-42 card can function as a working or protect card in 1:3 protection schemes. If you use the  
E1-42 card as a standard E-1 card, you can install the E1-42 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. If you use the card’s 1:3 functionality, you must install an E1-42 card as the protect  
card in Slot 3 (for bank A) or in Slot 15 (for bank B).  
You can group and map E1-42 card traffic in VC-12 as per ITU-T G.707 to any other card in an  
ONS 15454 SDH node. For performance-monitoring purposes, you can gather bidirectional E-1  
frame-level information (for example, loss of frame, parity errors, or CRC errors).  
Note  
The lowest level cross-connect with the XC10G card is STM-1. Lower level signals, such as E-1, DS-3,  
or E-3, can be dropped. This might leave part of the bandwidth unused. The lowest level cross-connect  
with the XC-VXL-10G card and the XC-VXL-2.5G card is VC-12 (2.048 Mbps).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.3.2 E1-42 Card-Level Indicators  
3.3.2 E1-42 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 3-4 describes the three LEDs on the E1-42 card faceplate.  
Table 3-4  
E1-42 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED  
persists in flashing.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
Indicates that the E1-42 card is operational and ready to carry traffic (green)  
or that the card is in Standby mode (amber).  
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on  
one or more of the card’s ports.  
3.3.3 E1-42 Port-Level Indicators  
You can obtain the status of the 42 E-1 ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray  
assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and  
severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide  
for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
3.4 E3-12 Card  
The 12-port ONS 15454 SDH E3-12 card provides 12 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-3 ports per card. Each  
interface operates at 34.368 Mbps over a 75-ohm coaxial cable (with the FMEC-E3/DS3 card). The  
E3-12 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:1 protection schemes.  
Caution  
Note  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
The E3-12 card can be deployed in a central office or a carrier’s exchange.  
Figure 3-3 shows the E3-12 card faceplate and block diagram.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.4.1 E3-12 Card Functionality  
Figure 3-3  
E3-12 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram  
E3  
12  
B
a
c
k
p
l
12  
Line  
Interface  
Units  
Protection  
Relay  
Matrix  
E3  
ASIC  
BTC  
ASIC  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
a
n
e
3.4.1 E3-12 Card Functionality  
You can install the E3-12 card in Slots 1 to 5 and 14 to 17 on the ONS 15454 SDH. Each E3-12 port  
features ITU-T G.703 compliant outputs supporting cable losses of up to 12 dB at 17184 kHz. The  
E3-12 card supports 1:1 protection.  
Note  
Note  
The lowest level cross-connect with the XC10G card is STM-1. Lower level signals, such as E-1, DS-3,  
or E-3, can be dropped. This might leave part of the bandwidth unused. The lowest level cross-connect  
with the XC-VXL-10G card and the XC-VXL-2.5G card is VC-12 (2.048 Mbps).  
When a protection switch moves traffic from the E3-12 working/active card to the E3-12 protect/standby  
card, ports on the now active/standby card cannot be taken out of service. Lost traffic can result if you  
take a port out of service, even if the E3-12 active/standby card no longer carries traffic.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.4.2 E3-12 Card-Level Indicators  
3.4.2 E3-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 3-5 describes the three LEDs on the E3-12 card faceplate.  
Table 3-5  
E3-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED  
persists in flashing.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the E3-12 card is operational and ready  
to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the E3-12 card is  
operational and in Standby (protect) mode.  
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as port LOS.  
3.4.3 E3-12 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the twelve E3-12 card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH  
fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number  
and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting  
Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
3.5 DS3i-N-12 Card  
The 12-port ONS 15454 SDH DS3i-N-12 card provides 12 ITU-T G.703, ITU-T G.704, and  
Telcordia GR-499-CORE compliant DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a  
75-ohm coaxial cable (with the FMEC-E3/DS3 card). The DS3i-N-12 can operate as the protect card in  
a 1:N (N <= 4) DS-3 protection group. It has circuitry that allows it to protect up to four working  
DS3i-N-12 cards. In a 1:N protection group the DS3i-N-12 card must reside in either the Slot 3 or 15.  
Figure 3-4 shows the DS3i-N-12 faceplate and block diagram.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.5.1 DS3i-N-12 Card Functionality  
Figure 3-4  
DS3i-N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
DS3I-  
12  
N
main DS3-m1  
protect DS3-p1  
Line  
Interface  
Unit #1  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
B
BERT  
FPGA  
DS3  
ASIC  
BTC  
ASIC  
a
c
k
p
l
main DS3-m12  
protect DS3-p12  
Line  
Interface  
Unit #1  
a
n
e
OHP  
FPGA  
uP bus  
Processor  
SDRAM  
Flash  
3.5.1 DS3i-N-12 Card Functionality  
The DS3i-N-12 can detect several different errored logic bits within a DS-3 frame. This function lets the  
ONS 15454 SDH identify a degrading DS-3 facility caused by upstream electronics (DS-3 Framer). In  
addition, DS-3 frame format autodetection and J1 path trace are supported. By monitoring additional  
overhead in the DS-3 frame, subtle network degradations can be detected.  
The DS3i-n-12 can also aggregate DS3 and E1 traffic and transport it between SONET and SDH  
networks through AU4/STS 3 trunks, with the ability to add and drop DS3s to an STS3 trunk at  
intermediate nodes.  
The following list summarizes the DS3i-N-12 card features:  
•
•
•
•
•
Provisionable framing format (M23, C-bit, or unframed)  
Autorecognition and provisioning of incoming framing  
VC-3 payload mapping as per ITU-T G.707  
Idle signal (“1100”) monitoring as per Telcordia GR-499-CORE  
P-bit monitoring  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.5.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C-bit parity monitoring  
X-bit monitoring  
M-bit monitoring  
F-bit monitoring  
Far-end block error (FEBE) monitoring  
Far-end alarm and control (FEAC) status and loop code detection  
Path trace byte support with TIM-P alarm generation  
You can install the DS3i-N-12 card in Slots 1 to 5 and 13 to 17. Each DS3i-N-12 port features DS-N-level  
outputs supporting distances up to 137 m (450 feet). With FMEC-E3/DS3, the card supports  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax nonbalanced connectors.  
Note  
The lowest level cross-connect with the XC10G card is STM-1. Lower level signals, such as E-1, DS-3,  
or E-3, can be dropped. This might leave part of the bandwidth unused. The lowest level cross-connect  
with the XC-VXL-10G card and the XC-VXL-2.5G card is VC-12 (2.048 Mbps).  
3.5.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 3-6 describes the three LEDs on the DS3i-N-12 card faceplate.  
Table 3-6  
DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL  
LED persists in flashing.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3i-N-12 card is operational and  
ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the DS3i-N-12  
card is operational and in Standby (protect) mode.  
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS or LOF on one or more  
of the card’s ports.  
3.5.3 DS3i-N-12 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the DS3i-N-12 card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH  
fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number  
and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide  
for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.6 STM1E-12 Card  
3.6 STM1E-12 Card  
The 12-port ONS 15454 SDH STM1E-12 card provides 12 ITU-compliant, G.703 STM-1 ports per card.  
Ports 9 to 12 can each be either E-4 or STM-1. Each interface operates at 155.52 Mbps for STM-1 or  
139.264 Mbps for E-4 over a 75-ohm coaxial cable (with the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card). In E-4 mode,  
framed or unframed signal operation is possible. The STM1E-12 card operates as a working or protect  
card in 1:1 protection schemes. Figure 3-5 shows the STM1E-12 faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 3-5  
STM1E-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
STM1E  
12  
Ports 1-8 (STM1E only)  
B
a
c
k
p
l
12  
Line  
Interface  
Units  
OCEAN  
ASIC  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
MUX  
FPGA  
Ports 9-12 (STM1E only)  
a
n
e
3.6.1 STM 1E-12 Card Functionality  
You can install the STM1E-12 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 on the ONS 15454 SDH. Each STM1E-12  
port features ITU-T G.703 compliant outputs supporting cable losses of up to 12.7 dB at 78 MHz. The  
STM1E-12 card supports non-protection and 1:1 protection. In both cases, the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card  
is used. Up to two non-protected active STM1E cards use the same FMEC STM1E 1:1 card, and one  
active plus one protect STM1E cards use the same FMEC STM1E 1:1 card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.6.2 STM1E-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Note  
When a protection switch moves traffic from the STM1E-12 working/active card to the STM1E-12  
protect/standby card, ports on the now active/standby card cannot be taken out of service. Lost traffic  
can result if you take a port out of service, even if the STM1E-12 active/standby card no longer carries  
traffic.  
Note  
Use an external clock when doing service disruption time measurements on the STM1E-12.  
3.6.2 STM1E-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 3-7 describes the three LEDs on the STM1E-12 card faceplate.  
Table 3-7  
STM1E-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during  
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED  
persists in flashing.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the STM1E-12 card is operational and  
ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the STM1E-12  
card is operational and in Standby (protect) mode.  
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as port LOS.  
3.6.3 STM1E-12 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the 12 STM1E-12 card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH  
fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number  
and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting  
Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
3.7 BLANK Card  
The BLANK card provides EMC emission control for empty interface card slots. It also provides a way  
to close off the subrack front area, thus allowing air flow and convection to be maintained through the  
subrack. Figure 3-6 shows the BLANK card faceplate.  
Caution  
You must install the BLANK card in every empty interface card slot to maintain EMC requirements of  
the system and proper air flow.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.8 FMEC-E1 Card  
Figure 3-6  
FILLER Faceplate  
3.8 FMEC-E1 Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-E1 card provides front mount electrical connection for 14 ITU-compliant,  
G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC-E1 card, each E1-N-14 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 75-ohm  
unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connector. Figure 3-7 shows the FMEC-E1 card faceplate and  
block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.9 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card  
Figure 3-7  
FMEC-E1 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC  
E1  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
1
14 Input  
Coaxial  
Connectors  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
formers  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
14 Output  
Coaxial  
Connectors  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
10  
Rx  
11  
Rx  
12  
Rx  
13  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
14  
Rx  
You can install the FMEC-E1 card in any Electrical Facility Connection Assembly (EFCA) slot from  
Slot 18 to 22 or Slot 25 to 29 on the ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC-E1 card port features E1-level inputs  
and outputs supporting cable losses of up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz.  
3.9 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-DS1/E1 card provides front mount electrical connection for  
14 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC-DS1/E1 card, each E1-N-14 port operates at  
2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced cable via two 37-pin DB connectors. Figure 3-8 shows the  
FMEC-DS1/E1 card faceplate and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Figure 3-8  
FMEC-DS1/E1 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC  
DS1/E1  
14  
14  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Ch 1-7  
In/Out DB  
Connector  
Pairs of  
Transient  
Suppr.  
Pairs of  
Imped.  
Transf.  
14  
Pairs of  
common  
mode  
Ch 8 - 14  
In/Out DB  
Connector  
chokes  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.9.1 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Connector Pinout  
You can install the FMEC-DS1/E1 card in any EFCA slot from Slot 18 to 22 or Slot 25 to 29 on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC-DS1/E1 card interface features E1-level inputs and outputs supporting  
cable losses of up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz.  
3.9.1 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Connector Pinout  
Use Table 3-8 to make the connection from the E-1 37-pin DB connector for Ports 1 to 7 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-8  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 7  
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No.  
Signal Name  
RX 7 P  
RX 7 N  
GND  
1
GND  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
—
2
TX 7 P  
TX 7 N  
TX 6 P  
TX 6 N  
GND  
3
4
RX 6 P  
RX 6 N  
RX 5 P  
RX 5 N  
GND  
5
6
7
TX 5 P  
TX 5 N  
TX 4 P  
TX 4 N  
GND  
8
9
RX 4 P  
RX 4 N  
RX 3 P  
RX 3 N  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
TX 3 P  
TX 3 N  
TX 2 P  
TX 2 N  
GND  
RX 2 P  
RX 2 N  
RX 1 P  
RX 1 N  
GND  
TX 1 P  
TX 1 N  
GND  
—
Use Table 3-9 to make the connection from the E-1 37-pin DB connector for Ports 8 to 14 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-9  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 8 to 14  
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No.  
Signal Name  
RX 14 P  
RX 14 N  
GND  
1
2
3
4
GND  
20  
21  
22  
23  
TX 14 P  
TX 14 N  
TX 13 P  
RX 13 P  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.10 FMEC E1-120NP Card  
Table 3-9  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 8 to 14 (continued)  
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No.  
Signal Name  
RX 13 N  
RX 12 P  
RX 12 N  
GND  
5
TX 13 N  
GND  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
—
6
7
TX 12 P  
TX 12 N  
TX 11 P  
TX 11 N  
GND  
8
9
RX 11 P  
RX 11 N  
RX 10 P  
RX 10 N  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
TX 10 P  
TX 10 N  
TX 9 P  
TX 9 N  
GND  
RX 9 P  
RX 9 N  
RX 8 P  
RX 8 N  
GND  
TX 8 P  
TX 8 N  
GND  
—
3.10 FMEC E1-120NP Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120NP card provides front mount electrical connection for  
42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120NP card, each E1-42 port operates at  
2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common  
Molex 96-pin LFH connector. Figure 3-9 shows the FMEC E1-120NP faceplate and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.10.1 FMEC E1-120NP Connector Pinout  
Figure 3-9  
FMEC E1-120NP Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC E1-120NP  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Port 1 to 21  
Connector  
2 * 21  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
PORT  
1-21  
formers  
Port 22 to 42  
Connector  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
PORT  
22-42  
You can install the FMEC E1-120NP card in any EFCA slot from Slot 18 to 22 or Slot 25 to 29 on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC E1-120NP card port features E1-level inputs and outputs supporting  
cable losses of up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz.  
3.10.1 FMEC E1-120NP Connector Pinout  
Use Table 3-10 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 1 to 21 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-10  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
25  
Pin No.  
49  
Pin No.  
73  
1
TX 11 N  
TX 11 P  
TX 10 N  
TX 10 P  
TX 9 N  
TX 9 P  
TX 8 N  
TX 8 P  
TX 7 N  
TX 7 P  
TX 6 N  
TX 6 P  
TX 5 N  
TX 5 P  
TX 4 N  
RX 11 N  
RX 11 P  
RX 10 N  
RX 10 P  
RX 9 N  
RX 9 P  
RX 8 N  
RX 8 P  
RX 7 N  
RX 7 P  
RX 6 N  
RX 6 P  
RX 5 N  
RX 5 P  
RX 4 N  
TX 21 N  
TX 21 P  
TX 20 N  
TX 20 P  
TX 19 N  
TX 19 P  
TX 18 N  
TX 18 P  
TX 17 N  
TX 17 P  
TX 16 N  
TX 16 P  
TX 15 N  
TX 15 P  
TX 14 N  
RX 21 N  
RX 21 P  
RX 20 N  
RX 20 P  
RX 19 N  
RX 19 P  
RX 18 N  
RX 18 P  
RX 17 N  
RX 17 P  
RX 16 N  
RX 16 P  
RX 15 N  
RX 15 P  
RX 14 N  
2
26  
50  
74  
3
27  
51  
75  
4
28  
52  
76  
5
29  
53  
77  
6
30  
54  
78  
7
31  
55  
79  
8
32  
56  
80  
9
33  
57  
81  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
34  
58  
82  
35  
59  
83  
36  
60  
84  
37  
61  
85  
38  
62  
86  
39  
63  
87  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.10.1 FMEC E1-120NP Connector Pinout  
Table 3-10  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21 (continued)  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Name  
Pin No.  
16  
Pin No.  
40  
Pin No.  
64  
Pin No.  
88  
TX 4 P  
TX 3 N  
TX 3 P  
TX 2 N  
TX 2 P  
TX 1 N  
TX 1 P  
NC  
RX 4 P  
RX 3 N  
RX 3 P  
RX 2 N  
RX 2 P  
RX 1 N  
RX 1 P  
NC  
TX 14 P  
TX 13 N  
TX 13 P  
TX 12 N  
TX 12 P  
NC  
RX 14 P  
RX 13 N  
RX 13 P  
RX 12 N  
RX 12 P  
NC  
17  
41  
65  
89  
18  
42  
66  
90  
19  
43  
67  
91  
20  
44  
68  
92  
21  
45  
69  
93  
22  
46  
70  
NC  
94  
NC  
23  
47  
71  
NC  
95  
NC  
24  
NC  
48  
NC  
72  
NC  
96  
NC  
Use Table 3-11 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 22 to 42 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-11  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
1
TX 32 N  
RX 32 N  
RX 32 P  
RX 31 N  
RX 31 P  
RX 30 N  
RX 30 P  
RX 29 N  
RX 29 P  
RX 28 N  
RX 28 P  
RX 27 N  
RX 27 P  
RX 26 N  
RX 26 P  
RX 25 N  
RX 25 P  
RX 24 N  
RX 24 P  
RX 23 N  
RX 23 P  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
TX 42 N  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
RX 42 N  
2
TX 32 P  
TX 31 N  
TX 31 P  
TX 30 N  
TX 30 P  
TX 29 N  
TX 29 P  
TX 28 N  
TX 28 P  
TX 27 N  
TX 27 P  
TX 26 N  
TX 26 P  
TX 25 N  
TX 25 P  
TX 24 N  
TX 24 P  
TX 23 N  
TX 23 P  
TX 42 P  
TX 41 N  
TX 41 P  
TX 40 N  
TX 40 P  
TX 39 N  
TX 39 P  
TX 38 N  
TX 38 P  
TX 37 N  
TX 37 P  
TX 36 N  
TX 36 P  
TX 35 N  
TX 35 P  
TX 34 N  
TX 34 P  
TX 33 N  
TX 33 P  
RX 42 P  
RX 41 N  
RX 41 P  
RX 40 N  
RX 40 P  
RX 39 N  
RX 39 P  
RX 38 N  
RX 38 P  
RX 37 N  
RX 37 P  
RX 36 N  
RX 36 P  
RX 35 N  
RX 35 P  
RX 34 N  
RX 34 P  
RX 33 N  
RX 33 P  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.11 FMEC E1-120PROA Card  
Table 3-11  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 (continued)  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
45  
21  
22  
23  
24  
TX 22 N  
RX 22 N  
RX 22 P  
NC  
69  
70  
71  
72  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
93  
94  
95  
96  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
TX 22 P  
NC  
46  
47  
NC  
48  
NC  
3.11 FMEC E1-120PROA Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROA card provides front mount electrical connection for 126 ITU  
compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROA card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps  
over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Each Molex 96-pin LFH connector supports 21 E1 interfaces.  
Figure 3-10 shows the FMEC E1-120PROA faceplate and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Figure 3-10  
FMEC E1-120PROA Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC E1-120PROA  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Protect  
Switch  
Relay  
4 x 42  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
PORT  
1-21  
PORT  
1-21  
PORT  
1-21  
6 Interface  
Connectors  
Matrix  
formers  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
PORT  
22-42  
PORT  
22-42  
PORT  
22-42  
You can install the FMEC E1-120PROA card in the EFCA in the four far-left slots (Slots 18 to 21) on  
the ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC E1-120PROA card port features E1-level inputs and outputs  
supporting cable losses of up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz.  
3.11.1 FMEC E1-120PROA Connector Pinout  
Use Table 3-12 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 1 to 21 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.11.1 FMEC E1-120PROA Connector Pinout  
Table 3-12  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
1
TX 11 N  
RX 11 N  
RX 11 P  
RX 10 N  
RX 10 P  
RX 9 N  
RX 9 P  
RX 8 N  
RX 8 P  
RX 7 N  
RX 7 P  
RX 6 N  
RX 6 P  
RX 5 N  
RX 5 P  
RX 4 N  
RX 4 P  
RX 3 N  
RX 3 P  
RX 2 N  
RX 2 P  
RX 1 N  
RX 1 P  
NC  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
TX 21 N  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
RX 21 N  
RX 21 P  
RX 20 N  
RX 20 P  
RX 19 N  
RX 19 P  
RX 18 N  
RX 18 P  
RX 17 N  
RX 17 P  
RX 16 N  
RX 16 P  
RX 15 N  
RX 15 P  
RX 14 N  
RX 14 P  
RX 13 N  
RX 13 P  
RX 12 N  
RX 12 P  
NC  
2
TX 11 P  
TX 10 N  
TX 10 P  
TX 9 N  
TX 9 P  
TX 8 N  
TX 8 P  
TX 7 N  
TX 7 P  
TX 6 N  
TX 6 P  
TX 5 N  
TX 5 P  
TX 4 N  
TX 4 P  
TX 3 N  
TX 3 P  
TX 2 N  
TX 2 P  
TX 1 N  
TX 1 P  
NC  
TX 21 P  
TX 20 N  
TX 20 P  
TX 19 N  
TX 19 P  
TX 18 N  
TX 18 P  
TX 17 N  
TX 17 P  
TX 16 N  
TX 16 P  
TX 15 N  
TX 15 P  
TX 14 N  
TX 14 P  
TX 13 N  
TX 13 P  
TX 12 N  
TX 12 P  
NC  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
Use Table 3-13 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 22 to 42 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-13  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
25  
1
2
3
4
5
TX 32 N  
RX 32 N  
RX 32 P  
RX 31 N  
RX 31 P  
RX 30 N  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
TX 42 N  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
RX 42 N  
TX 32 P  
TX 31 N  
TX 31 P  
TX 30 N  
26  
TX 42 P  
TX 41 N  
TX 41 P  
TX 40 N  
RX 42 P  
RX 41 N  
RX 41 P  
RX 40 N  
27  
28  
29  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.12 FMEC E1-120PROB Card  
Table 3-13  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 (continued)  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
6
TX 30 P  
RX 30 P  
RX 29 N  
RX 29 P  
RX 28 N  
RX 28 P  
RX 27 N  
RX 27 P  
RX 26 N  
RX 26 P  
RX 25 N  
RX 25 P  
RX 24 N  
RX 24 P  
RX 23 N  
RX 23 P  
RX 22 N  
RX 22 P  
NC  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
TX 40 P  
TX 39 N  
TX 39 P  
TX 38 N  
TX 38 P  
TX 37 N  
TX 37 P  
TX 36 N  
TX 36 P  
TX 35 N  
TX 35 P  
TX 34 N  
TX 34 P  
TX 33 N  
TX 33 P  
NC  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
RX 40 P  
RX 39 N  
RX 39 P  
RX 38 N  
RX 38 P  
RX 37 N  
RX 37 P  
RX 36 N  
RX 36 P  
RX 35 N  
RX 35 P  
RX 34 N  
RX 34 P  
RX 33 N  
RX 33 P  
NC  
7
TX 29 N  
TX 29 P  
TX 28 N  
TX 28 P  
TX 27 N  
TX 27 P  
TX 26 N  
TX 26 P  
TX 25 N  
TX 25 P  
TX 24 N  
TX 24 P  
TX 23 N  
TX 23 P  
TX 22 N  
TX 22 P  
NC  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
3.12 FMEC E1-120PROB Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROB card provides front mount electrical connection for  
126 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROB card, each E1-42 port operates at  
2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Each Molex 96-pin LFH connector supports 21 E-1  
interfaces. Figure 3-11 shows the FMEC E1-120PROB faceplate and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.12.1 FMEC E1-120PROB Connector Pinout  
Figure 3-11  
FMEC E1-120PROB Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC E1-120PROB  
B
a
c
k
p
l
Protect  
Switch  
Relay  
4 x 42  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
PORT  
1-21  
PORT  
1-21  
PORT  
1-21  
6 Interface  
Connectors  
Matrix  
formers  
a
n
e
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
PORT  
22-42  
PORT  
22-42  
PORT  
22-42  
You can install the FMEC E1-120PROB card in EFCA Slots 26 to 29 on the ONS 15454 SDH. Each  
FMEC E1-120PROB card port features E1-level inputs and outputs supporting cable losses of up to 6  
dB at 1024 kHz.  
3.12.1 FMEC E1-120PROB Connector Pinout  
Use Table 3-14 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 1 to 21 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-14  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
25  
1
TX 11 N  
RX 11 N  
RX 11 P  
RX 10 N  
RX 10 P  
RX 9 N  
RX 9 P  
RX 8 N  
RX 8 P  
RX 7 N  
RX 7 P  
RX 6 N  
RX 6 P  
RX 5 N  
RX 5 P  
RX 4 N  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
TX 21 N  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
RX 21 N  
2
TX 11 P  
TX 10 N  
TX 10 P  
TX 9 N  
TX 9 P  
TX 8 N  
TX 8 P  
TX 7 N  
TX 7 P  
TX 6 N  
TX 6 P  
TX 5 N  
TX 5 P  
TX 4 N  
26  
TX 21 P  
TX 20 N  
TX 20 P  
TX 19 N  
TX 19 P  
TX 18 N  
TX 18 P  
TX 17 N  
TX 17 P  
TX 16 N  
TX 16 P  
TX 15 N  
TX 15 P  
TX 14 N  
RX 21 P  
RX 20 N  
RX 20 P  
RX 19 N  
RX 19 P  
RX 18 N  
RX 18 P  
RX 17 N  
RX 17 P  
RX 16 N  
RX 16 P  
RX 15 N  
RX 15 P  
RX 14 N  
3
27  
4
28  
5
29  
6
30  
7
31  
8
32  
9
33  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.12.1 FMEC E1-120PROB Connector Pinout  
Table 3-14  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 1 to 21 (continued)  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
40  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
TX 4 P  
TX 3 N  
TX 3 P  
TX 2 N  
TX 2 P  
TX 1 N  
TX 1 P  
NC  
RX 4 P  
RX 3 N  
RX 3 P  
RX 2 N  
RX 2 P  
RX 1 N  
RX 1 P  
NC  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
TX 14 P  
TX 13 N  
TX 13 P  
TX 12 N  
TX 12 P  
NC  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
RX 14 P  
RX 13 N  
RX 13 P  
RX 12 N  
RX 12 P  
NC  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
NC  
NC  
47  
NC  
NC  
NC  
48  
NC  
NC  
NC  
Use Table 3-15 to make the connection from the E-1 96-pin connector for Ports 22 to 42 to the external  
balanced 120-ohm E-1 interfaces.  
Table 3-15  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
1
TX 32 N  
RX 32 N  
RX 32 P  
RX 31 N  
RX 31 P  
RX 30 N  
RX 30 P  
RX 29 N  
RX 29 P  
RX 28 N  
RX 28 P  
RX 27 N  
RX 27 P  
RX 26 N  
RX 26 P  
RX 25 N  
RX 25 P  
RX 24 N  
RX 24 P  
RX 23 N  
RX 23 P  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
TX 42 N  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
RX 42 N  
2
TX 32 P  
TX 31 N  
TX 31 P  
TX 30 N  
TX 30 P  
TX 29 N  
TX 29 P  
TX 28 N  
TX 28 P  
TX 27 N  
TX 27 P  
TX 26 N  
TX 26 P  
TX 25 N  
TX 25 P  
TX 24 N  
TX 24 P  
TX 23 N  
TX 23 P  
TX 42 P  
TX 41 N  
TX 41 P  
TX 40 N  
TX 40 P  
TX 39 N  
TX 39 P  
TX 38 N  
TX 38 P  
TX 37 N  
TX 37 P  
TX 36 N  
TX 36 P  
TX 35 N  
TX 35 P  
TX 34 N  
TX 34 P  
TX 33 N  
TX 33 P  
RX 42 P  
RX 41 N  
RX 41 P  
RX 40 N  
RX 40 P  
RX 39 N  
RX 39 P  
RX 38 N  
RX 38 P  
RX 37 N  
RX 37 P  
RX 36 N  
RX 36 P  
RX 35 N  
RX 35 P  
RX 34 N  
RX 34 P  
RX 33 N  
RX 33 P  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.13 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel  
Table 3-15  
E-1 Interface Pinouts on Ports 22 to 42 (continued)  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Signal  
Pin No. Name  
Pin No.  
45  
21  
22  
23  
24  
TX 22 N  
RX 22 N  
RX 22 P  
NC  
69  
70  
71  
72  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
93  
94  
95  
96  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
TX 22 P  
NC  
46  
47  
NC  
48  
NC  
3.13 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel  
The ONS 15454 SDH E1-75/120 impedance conversion panel provides front mount electrical  
connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the E1-75/120 conversion panel, each  
E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connector.  
Figure 3-12 shows the E1-75/120 faceplate.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Figure 3-12  
E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Faceplate  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 22 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.13 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel  
Figure 3-13 shows the E1-75/120 with optional rackmount brackets installed.  
Figure 3-13 E1-75/120 with Optional Rackmount Brackets  
19 to 23 in.  
rackmount  
bracket  
ETSI  
rackmount  
bracket  
Figure 3-14 shows a block diagram of the impedance conversion panel.  
Figure 3-14  
E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Block Diagram  
42 Channels  
Transformer 1.26:1  
120-Ohm  
Symmetrical Signals  
75-Ohm  
Unsymmetrical Signals  
Transformer 1.26:1  
42 Channels  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.13.1 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Functionality  
3.13.1 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Functionality  
You can install the E1-75/120 conversion panel in the rack containing the ONS 15454 SDH shelf or in a  
nearby rack. If you install the E1-75/120 conversion panel in a place where a longer cable is required,  
make sure that the total cable loss of the balanced 120-ohm cable and the unbalanced 75-ohm cable does  
not exceed the maximum allowed value. The E1-75/120 conversion panel enables the use of 75-ohm  
interfaces on client side with the E1-42 card that has 120-ohm interfaces.  
Before you can install the E1-75/120 in the rack, install the type of rackmount brackets that is required  
for the rack that you are using.  
3.14 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-E3/DS3 card provides front mount electrical connection for  
12 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-3 or DS-3 ports. With the FMEC-E3/DS3 card, each interface of an E3-12  
card operates at 34.368 Mbps and each interface of a DS3i-N-12 card operates at 44.736 Mbps over a  
75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connector. Figure 3-15 shows the FMEC-E3/DS3  
faceplate and block diagram.  
Caution  
This interface can only be connected to SELV circuits. The interface is not intended for connection to  
any Australian telecommunications network without the written consent of the network manager.  
Figure 3-15  
FMEC-E3/DS3 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC  
E3/DS3  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
12 Input  
Coaxial  
Connectors  
1
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
formers  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
12 Output  
Coaxial  
Connectors  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
10  
11  
12  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
You can install the FMEC-E3/DS3 card in any EFCA slot from Slot 18 to 22 or Slot 25 to 29 on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC-E3/DS3 card interface features E3-level or DS3-level inputs and outputs  
supporting cable losses:  
•
E3 signals  
–
Up to 12 dB at 17184 kHz  
•
DS3 signals. One of the following;  
–
Up to 137 m (450 ft) 734A, RG59, or 728A  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.15 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card  
–
Up to 24 m (79 ft) RG179  
3.15 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC STM1E 1:1 card provides front mount electrical connection for 2 x 12  
ITU-compliant, G.703 STM1E ports. Ports 9 to 12 can be switched to E-4 instead of STM-1 (via CTC,  
on the STM1E-12 card). With the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card, each interface of an STM1E-12 card operates  
at 155.52 Mbps for STM-1 or 139.264 Mbps for E-4 over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature  
coax connector. The FMEC STM1E 1:1 card is required if you want to use the STM1E-12 card in 1:1  
protection mode or for connection to two unprotected STM1E-12 cards.  
Figure 3-16 shows the FMEC STM1E 1:1 faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 3-16  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FMEC STM1E 1:1  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
1
2
1
2
3
3
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
4
4
2 x 12 Input  
Coaxial  
5
5
Protect  
Switch  
Relay  
2 x 12  
Pairs of  
Trans-  
6
6
Connectors  
7
7
8
8
2 x 12 Output  
Coaxial  
Matrix  
formers  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
Connectors  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
You can install the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card in any EFCA slot pair (18/19, 20/21, 26/27, or 28/29) on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. Each FMEC STM1E 1:1 card interface features STM1-level inputs and outputs  
supporting cable losses of up to 12.7 dB at 78 MHz.  
3.16 FMEC-BLANK Card  
The FMEC-BLANK card provides EMC emission control for empty FMEC slots. It also provides a way  
to close off the EFCA area, thus allowing air flow and convection to be maintained through the EFCA.  
Figure 3-17 shows the FMEC-BLANK card faceplate.  
You must install the BLANK FMEC in every empty FMEC slot to maintain EMC requirements of the  
system and proper air flow.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC  
Figure 3-17  
FMEC-BLANK Faceplate  
3.17 MIC-A/P FMEC  
The MIC-A/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant  
power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P  
card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in Slot 23 in the  
center of the subrack EFCA area. Figure 3-18 shows the MIC-A/P faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 3-18  
MIC-A/P Faceplate and Block Diagram  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Power  
3W3  
Connector  
16 Alarm inputs  
4 Alarm in/outputs  
Alarms  
DB62  
Connector  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
+
The MIC-A/P FMEC has the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs  
Connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card)  
Connection for four configurable alarm inputs/outputs  
Connection for sixteen alarm inputs  
Storage of manufacturing and inventory data  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.17.1 MIC-A/P Connector Pinouts  
Note  
Note  
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and the MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the  
ONS 15454 SDH shelf.  
The MIC-A/P card controls whether FMEC cards on its side of the shelf appear in the CTC graphical  
user interface (GUI). For example, if the MIC-A/P is removed from the shelf, FMECS to the left of the  
card may disappear in CTC. This is normal behavior because when the MIC-A/P card is removed,  
communication can no longer be established with the disappeared FMECS. For more information, refer  
to the IMPROPROMVL entry in the “Alarm Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide.  
3.17.1 MIC-A/P Connector Pinouts  
Table 3-16 shows the alarm interface pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 connector.  
Table 3-16  
Pin No. Signal Name  
Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector  
Signal Description  
Color  
1
ALMCUTOFF N  
Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair  
Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair  
White/blue  
Blue/white  
2
ALMCUTOFF P  
ALMINP0 N  
ALMINP0 P  
ALMINP1 N  
ALMINP1 P  
ALMINP2 N  
ALMINP2 P  
ALMINP3 N  
ALMINP3 P  
EXALM0 N  
EXALM0 P  
GND  
3
Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires White/orange  
Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires Orange/white  
Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires White/green  
Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires Green/white  
Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires White/brown  
Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires Brown/white  
Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires White/gray  
Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires Gray/white  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
External customer alarm 1  
External customer alarm 1  
Frame ground  
Red/blue  
Blue/red  
—
EXALM1 N  
EXALM1 P  
EXALM2 N  
EXALM2 P  
EXALM3 N  
EXALM3 P  
EXALM4 N  
EXALM4 P  
EXALM5 N  
External customer alarm 2  
External customer alarm 2  
External customer alarm 3  
External customer alarm 3  
External customer alarm 4  
External customer alarm 4  
External customer alarm 5  
External customer alarm 5  
External customer alarm 6  
Red/orange  
Orange/red  
Red/green  
Green/red  
Red/brown  
Brown/red  
Red/gray  
Gray/red  
Black/blue  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.17.1 MIC-A/P Connector Pinouts  
Table 3-16  
Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)  
Pin No. Signal Name  
Signal Description  
Color  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
EXALM5 P  
EXALM6 N  
EXALM6 P  
GND  
External customer alarm 6  
External customer alarm 7  
External customer alarm 7  
Frame ground  
Blue/black  
Black/orange  
Orange/black  
—
EXALM7 N  
EXALM7 P  
EXALM8 N  
EXALM8 P  
EXALM9 N  
EXALM9 P  
EXALM10 N  
EXALM10 P  
EXALM11 N  
EXALM11 P  
ALMOUP0 N  
ALMOUP0 P  
GND  
External customer alarm 8  
External customer alarm 8  
External customer alarm 9  
External customer alarm 9  
External customer alarm 10  
External customer alarm 10  
External customer alarm 11  
External customer alarm 11  
External customer alarm 12  
External customer alarm 12  
Normally open output pair 1  
Normally open output pair 1  
Frame ground  
Black/green  
Green/black  
Black/brown  
Brown/black  
Black/gray  
Gray/black  
Amber/blue  
Blue/Amber  
Amber/orange  
Orange/Amber  
White/blue  
Blue/white  
—
ALMOUP1 N  
ALMOUP1 P  
ALMOUP2 N  
ALMOUP2 P  
ALMOUP3 N  
ALMOUP3 P  
AUDALM0 N  
AUDALM0 P  
AUDALM1 N  
AUDALM1 P  
AUDALM2 N  
AUDALM2 P  
GND  
Normally open output pair 2  
Normally open output pair 2  
Normally open output pair 3  
Normally open output pair 3  
Normally open output pair 4  
Normally open output pair 4  
Normally open Minor audible alarm  
Normally open Minor audible alarm  
Normally open Major audible alarm  
Normally open Major audible alarm  
Normally open Critical audible alarm  
Normally open Critical audible alarm  
Frame ground  
White/orange  
Orange/white  
White/green  
Green/white  
White/brown  
Brown/white  
White/gray  
Gray/white  
Red/blue  
Blue/red  
Red/orange  
Orange/red  
—
AUDALM3 N  
AUDALM3 P  
VISALM0 N  
VISALM0 P  
VISALM1 N  
VISALM1 P  
Normally open Remote audible alarm  
Normally open Remote audible alarm  
Normally open Minor visual alarm  
Normally open Minor visual alarm  
Normally open Major visual alarm  
Normally open Major visual alarm  
Red/green  
Green/red  
Red/brown  
Brown/red  
Red/gray  
Gray/red  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC  
Table 3-16  
Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)  
Pin No. Signal Name  
Signal Description  
Color  
59  
60  
61  
62  
VISALM2 N  
VISALM2 P  
VISALM3 N  
VISALM3 P  
Normally open Critical visual alarm  
Normally open Critical visual alarm  
Normally open Remote visual alarm  
Normally open Remote visual alarm  
Black/blue  
Blue/black  
Black/orange  
Orange/black  
3.18 MIC-C/T/P FMEC  
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible  
redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system  
management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs. Install the  
MIC-C/T/P in Slot 24. Figure 3-19 shows the MIC-C/T/P faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 3-19  
MIC-C/T/P Faceplate and Block Diagram  
Power  
3W3  
connector  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
System management serial ports  
System management LAN  
RJ-45  
connectors  
M
RJ-45  
connectors  
LINK  
Inventory Data  
(EEPROM)  
4 coaxial  
connectors  
Timing 2 x in / 2 x out  
ACT  
AUTION  
E
FACEPLATE  
1.0 Nm TORQUE  
+
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs  
Connection for two serial ports for local craft/modem (for future use)  
Connection for one LAN port  
Connection for two system timing inputs  
Connection for two system timing outputs  
Storage of manufacturing and inventory data  
Note  
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and the MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the  
shelf.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards  
3.18.1 MIC-C/T/P Port-Level Indicators  
3.18.1 MIC-C/T/P Port-Level Indicators  
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has one pair of LEDs located on the RJ-45 LAN connector. The green LED is on  
when a link is present, and the amber LED is on when data is being transferred.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C H A P T E R  
4
Optical Cards  
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH optical, transponder, and muxponder card features  
and functions. It includes descriptions, hardware specifications, and block diagrams for each card. For  
installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.1 Optical Card Overview, page 4-1  
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card, page 4-4  
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card, page 4-7  
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card, page 4-11  
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card, page 4-12  
4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card, page 4-15  
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card, page 4-17  
4.8 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card, page 4-20  
4.9 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card, page 4-23  
4.10 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards, page 4-26  
4.11 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card, page 4-29  
4.12 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card, page 4-32  
4.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card, page 4-35  
4.14 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card, page 4-39  
4.1 Optical Card Overview  
The optical card overview section summarizes card functions and compatibility.  
Note  
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.  
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the “1.12.1 Card Slot  
Requirements” section on page 1-15 for a list of slots and symbols.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.1.1 Card Summary  
4.1.1 Card Summary  
Table 4-1 lists the ONS 15454 SDH optical cards.  
Table 4-1  
Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH  
Card  
Description  
For Additional Information...  
OC3 IR 4/STM1  
SH 1310  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card provides four  
intermediate- or short-range STM-1 ports and operates 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card”  
See the “4.2 OC3 IR  
at 1310 nm. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
section on page 4-4.  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH  
1310-8  
The OC3IR/STM1SH 1310-8 card provides eight  
intermediate- or short-range STM-1 ports and operates SH 1310-8 Card” section on  
See the “4.3 OC3 IR/STM1  
at 1310 nm. It operates in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17.  
page 4-7.  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card provides one  
intermediate- or short-range STM-4 port and operates IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card”  
See the “4.4 OC12  
at 1310 nm. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
section on page 4-11.  
OC12 LR/STM4  
LH 1310  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card provides one  
long-range STM-4 port and operates at 1310 nm. It  
operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
See the “4.5 OC12  
LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card”  
section on page 4-12.  
OC12 LR/STM4  
LH 1550  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card provides one  
long-range STM-4 port and operates at 1550 nm. It  
operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
See the “4.6 OC12  
LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card”  
section on page 4-15.  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310-4  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card provides four  
intermediate- or short-range STM-4 ports and operates IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card”  
at 1310 nm. It operates in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. section on page 4-17.  
See the “4.7 OC12  
OC48 IR/STM16  
SH AS 1310  
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card provides one See the “4.8 OC48  
intermediate- or short-range STM-16 port at 1310 nm IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
and operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
Card” section on page 4-20.  
OC48 LR/STM16  
LH AS 1550  
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card provides one See the “4.9 OC48  
long-range STM-16 port at 1550 nm and operates in  
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.  
LR/STM16 LH AS 1550  
Card” section on page 4-23.  
OC48 ELR/STM16  
EH 100 GHz  
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card provides  
one long-range (enhanced) STM-16 port and operates ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz  
in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13. This card is available in 18 Cards” section on  
See the “4.10 OC48  
different wavelengths (9 in the blue band and 9 in the page 4-26.  
red band) in the 1550-nm range, every second  
wavelength in the ITU grid for 100-GHz spacing dense  
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).  
OC192 SR/STM64  
IO 1310  
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card provides one  
See the “4.11 OC192  
intra-office-haul STM-64 port at 1310 nm and operates SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card”  
in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the 10 Gbps cross-connect section on page 4-29.  
(XC10G) card.  
OC192 IR/STM64  
SH 1550  
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card provides one  
intermediate-range STM-64 port at 1550 nm and  
See the “4.12 OC192  
IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card”  
operates in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XC10G card. section on page 4-32.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 4-1  
Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH (continued)  
Card  
Description  
For Additional Information...  
OC192 LR/STM64  
LH 1550  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card provides one  
long-range STM-64 port at 1550 nm and operates in  
Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XC10G card.  
See the “4.13 OC192  
LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card”  
section on page 4-35.  
OC192 LR/STM64  
LH ITU 15xx.xx  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card provides See the “4.14 OC192  
one extended long-range STM-64 port and operates in LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx  
Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XC10G card. This card is Card” section on page 4-39.  
available in multiple wavelengths in the 1550-nm  
range of the ITU grid for 100-GHz-spaced DWDM.  
Note  
The Cisco OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8, OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310, and OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
interface optics, all working on 1310 nm, are optimized for the most widely used SMF-28 fiber, available  
from many suppliers.  
Corning MetroCor fiber is optimized for optical interfaces that transmit at 1550 nm or in the C and L  
DWDM windows, and targets interfaces with higher dispersion tolerances than those found in  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8, OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310, and OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS1310 interface optics.  
If you are using Corning MetroCor fiber, OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8, OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310, and  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 interface optics become dispersion limited before they become  
attenuation limited. In this case, consider using OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 and OC48 LR/STM16 LH  
1550 AS cards instead of OC12 IR/STM4 SH and OC48 IR/STM16 SH cards.  
With all fiber types, network planners/engineers should review the relative fiber type and optics  
specifications to determine attenuation, dispersion, and other characteristics to ensure appropriate  
deployment.  
4.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 4-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical card. See Table 2-5 on page 2-4 for a list  
of cross-connect cards that are compatible with each optical card.  
Table 4-2  
Optical Card Software Release Compatibility  
Optical Card  
R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0  
R4.1 R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH  
1310  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
OC3 IR /STM1 SH  
1310-8  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH  
1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH  
1550  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card  
Table 4-2  
Optical Card Software Release Compatibility (continued)  
Optical Card  
R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0  
R4.1 R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH  
1310-4  
—
—
—
—
—
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH  
AS 1310  
—
—
—
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH  
AS 1550  
—
—
—
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH  
100 GHz  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
OC48 ELR 200 GHz  
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO  
1310  
—
—
—
—
Yes  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH  
1550  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH  
1550  
Yes Yes  
Yes Yes Yes  
(15454-OC192LR1550)  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH  
1550  
(15454-OC192-LR2)  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH  
ITU 15xx.xx  
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card provides four intermediate or short range SDH STM-1 ports  
compliant with ITU-T G.707 and ITU-T G.957. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode  
fiber span. The card supports VC-4 and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at the STM-1 signal  
level.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card  
Figure 4-1 shows the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 faceplate.  
Figure 4-1  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Faceplate  
OC3IR  
STM1SH  
1310  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
Tx  
2
Rx  
Tx  
3
Rx  
Tx  
4
Rx  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Functionality  
Figure 4-2 shows a block diagram of the four-port OC-3 card.  
Figure 4-2  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Block Diagram  
STM-4  
STM-1  
STM-1  
Optical  
Transceiver  
termination/  
framing  
STM-4/  
STM-1  
STM-1  
STM-1  
STM-1  
STM-1  
termination/  
framing  
Mux/Demux  
Optical  
Transceiver  
BTC  
ASIC  
STM-1  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
B
a
c
k
p
l
STM-1  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
a
n
e
Flash  
RAM  
uP bus  
uP  
4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Functionality  
You can install the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be  
provisioned as part of a subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring or linear add-drop multiplexer  
(ADM) configuration. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors.  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.  
You can provision protection on a per port basis.  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card detects loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer  
(LOP), multiplex section alarm indication signal (MS-AIS), and multiplex section far-end receive failure  
(MS-FERF) conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of  
these conditions. The card also counts section and line bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the  
SDH overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The data communication channel/generic  
communication channel (GCC) bytes are forwarded to the TCC2 card, which terminates the GCC.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.2.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
4.2.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-3 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card.  
Table 4-3  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green ACT LED  
Amber SF LED  
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready.  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED  
is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the  
fibers are properly connected and the links are working, the light turns off.  
4.2.3 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port. The LEDs shows green if the port is available to carry  
traffic, is provisioned as in-service, and is part of a protection group, in the active mode. You can find  
the status of the four card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use  
the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms  
for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a complete  
description of the alarm messages.  
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card  
The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card provides eight intermediate or short range SDH STM-1 ports  
compliant with ITU-T G.707, and ITU-T G.957. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode  
fiber span. The card supports VC-4 and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at the STM-1 signal  
level. Figure 4-3 shows the card faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card  
Figure 4-3  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Faceplate  
OC3IR  
STM1SH  
1310-8  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card  
Figure 4-4 shows a block diagram of the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card.  
Figure 4-4  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Block Diagram  
STM-1  
Optical  
BPIA RX  
Prot  
Transceiver #1  
STM-1  
STM-1  
Optical  
Transceiver #2  
BPIA RX  
Main  
Optical  
Transceiver #3  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-1  
STM-1  
BPIA TX  
Prot  
Optical  
Transceiver #4  
OCEAN  
ASIC  
Optical  
Transceiver #5  
BPIA TX  
Main  
STM-1  
STM-1  
STM-1  
Optical  
Transceiver #6  
Optical  
Transceiver #7  
Flash  
RAM  
uP  
Optical  
Transceiver #8  
uP bus  
You can install the OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The card can be  
provisioned as part of an SNCP or in an (ADM) configuration. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser  
and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses LC  
connectors on the faceplate, angled downward 12.5 degrees.  
The OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.  
You can provision protection on a per port basis.  
The OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card detects loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer  
(LOP), multiplex section alarm indicator signal (MS-AIS), and multiplex section far-end receive failure  
(MS-FERF) conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of  
these conditions. The card also counts section and line bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the  
SDH overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card supports  
full GCC connectivity for remote network management.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators  
4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-4 describes the three card-level LED indicators for the OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card.  
Table 4-4 OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green ACT LED  
Amber SF LED  
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready.  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber signal  
fail (SF) LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly  
connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the links are working, the  
light turns off.  
4.3.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Port-Level Indicators  
Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port. The LEDs shows green if the port is available to carry  
traffic, is provisioned as in-service, is part of a protection group, or in the active mode. You can also find  
the status of the eight card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use  
the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms  
for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a complete  
description of the alarm messages.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card  
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card provides one intermediate or short range SDH STM-4 port compliant  
with ITU-T G.707 and ITU-T G.957. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span.  
The card supports VC-4 and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at STM-1 and STM-4 signal  
levels. Figure 4-5 shows the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-5  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
STM-4IR  
STM4SH  
1310  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
STS-12  
STM-4  
Tx  
1
Mux/  
Optical  
Demux  
Transceiver  
Rx  
STS-12  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
BTC  
ASIC  
Flash  
RAM  
Main SCI  
Protect SCI  
uP bus  
uP  
You can install the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the card as  
part of an MSP-SPRing or subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring. In ADM configurations, you  
can provision the card as either an access tributary or a transport span (trunk) side interface.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card uses SC optical  
connections and supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection.  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SDH  
overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2 card,  
which terminates the GCC.  
4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-5 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card.  
Table 4-5  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying  
traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in  
standby mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
Amber SF LED  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber  
SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly  
connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the  
light turns off.  
4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card port using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card provides one long-range SDH STM-4 port per card compliant with  
ITU-T G.707, and ITU-T G.957. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The  
card supports VC-4 and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at STM-1 and STM-4 signal levels.  
Figure 4-6 shows the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card  
Figure 4-6  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Faceplate  
OC12LR  
STM4LH  
1310  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Figure 4-7 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-7  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Block Diagram  
STM-4  
STM-4  
Mux/  
Demux  
Optical  
Transceiver  
STM-4  
B
a
c
k
p
l
Cross  
Connect  
Matrix  
Flash  
RAM  
Main SCI  
uP bus  
a
n
e
Protect SCI  
uP  
You can install the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the card as  
part of an MSP-SPRing or SNCP ring. In ADM configurations, you can provision the card as either an  
access tributary or a transport span-side interface.  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and  
receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC optical connections and supports  
1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection.  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SDH  
overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2 card,  
which terminates the GCC.  
4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-6 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card.  
Table 4-6  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 4-6  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators (continued)  
Description  
Card-Level LED  
Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying  
traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in  
standby mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
Amber SF LED  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber  
SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly  
connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the  
light turns off.  
4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card provides one long-range, ITU-T G.707- and G.957-compliant, SDH  
STM-4 port per card. The interface operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card  
supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads on a per VC-4 basis. Figure 4-8 shows the OC12  
LR/STM4 LH 1550 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-8 shows the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-8  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
OC12LR  
STM4LH  
1550  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
STS-12  
Tx  
1
OC12/STM-4  
Mux/  
Demux  
Rx  
Optical  
Transceiver  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STS-12  
BTC  
ASIC  
Flash  
RAM  
Main SCI  
Protect SCI  
uP bus  
uP  
4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Functionality  
You can install the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. You can provision the card  
as part of an MSP-SPRing or SNCP ring. In ADM configurations, you can provision the card as either  
an access tributary or a transport span-side interface.  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card uses long-reach optics centered at 1550 nm and contains a transmit  
and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card uses  
SC optical connections and supports 1+1 bidirectional or unidirectional protection switching.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SDH  
overhead and processes them to switch accordingly. The GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2 card,  
which terminates the GCC.  
4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-7 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card.  
Table 4-7 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green/Amber ACT LED  
Amber SF LED  
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in standby mode or is  
part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber  
SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly  
connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the  
light turns off.  
4.6.3 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card provides four intermediate or short range SDH STM-4 ports  
compliant with ITU-T G.707, and ITU-T G.957. Each port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode  
fiber span. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads on a per VC-4 basis. Figure 4-9  
shows the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card  
Figure 4-9  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Faceplate  
OC12IR  
STM4SH  
1310-4  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
Tx  
2
Rx  
Tx  
3
Rx  
Tx  
4
Rx  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-10 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-10  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Block Diagram  
STM-4  
STM-4  
STM-4  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
STM-4  
STM-4  
STM-4  
STM-4  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
BTC  
ASIC  
STM-4  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
B
a
c
k
p
l
STM-4  
termination/  
framing  
Optical  
Transceiver  
a
n
e
Flash  
RAM  
uP bus  
uP  
4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Functionality  
You can install the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The card can be  
provisioned as part of an SNCP, part of an multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), or in  
an ADM/TM configuration. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors.  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.  
You can provision protection on a per port basis.  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors.  
Each port is configurable to support all ONS 15454 SDH configurations and can be provisioned as part  
of an MS-SPRing or SNCP configuration.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the  
SDH overhead and processes them to switch accordingly. The GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2  
card, which terminates the GCC.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Note  
If you ever expect to upgrade an OC-12/STM-4 ring to a higher bit rate, you should not put an  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card in that ring. The four-port card is not upgradable to a single-port card.  
The reason is that four different spans, possibly going to four different nodes, cannot be merged to a  
single span.  
4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-8 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card.  
Table 4-8 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green ACT LED  
Amber SF LED  
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready.  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED  
is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the  
fibers are properly connected and the links are working, the light turns off.  
4.7.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the four card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray  
assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and  
severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide  
for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.8 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card  
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card provides one intermediate-range, ITU-T G.707- and  
G.957-compliant, SDH STM-16 port per card. The interface operates at 2.488 Gbps over a single-mode  
fiber span. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads at STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16  
signal levels on a per VC-4 basis. Figure 4-11 shows the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.8 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card  
Figure 4-11  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Faceplate  
OC48IR  
STM16SH  
AS 1310  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
TX  
1
RX  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.8.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-12 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-12  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Block Diagram  
STM-16  
Optical  
Mux/  
Transceiver  
Demux  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-16  
Main SCI  
Protect SCI  
BTC  
ASIC  
Flash  
RAM  
uP bus  
uP  
4.8.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Functionality  
You can install the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision  
the card as part of a MS-SPRing or SNCP. In an ADM configuration, you can provision the card as either  
an access tributary or a transport span interface.  
The STM-16 port features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on  
the card faceplate. The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card uses SC connectors. The card supports 1+1  
unidirectional protection and provisionable bidirectional switching.  
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions.  
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The  
card also counts section and line BIP errors.  
4.8.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-9 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card.  
Table 4-9  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.8.3 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 4-9  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators (continued)  
Description  
Card-Level LED  
Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in standby mode  
or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
Amber SF LED  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
MS-AIS, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber  
SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly  
connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the  
light turns off.  
4.8.3 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.9 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card  
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card provides one long-range, ITU-T G.707- and G.957-compliant,  
SDH STM-16 port per card. The interface operates at 2.488 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The  
card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads at STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16 signal levels on  
a per VC-4 basis. Figure 4-13 shows the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.9 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card  
Figure 4-13  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Faceplate  
OC48LR  
STM16LH  
AS 1550  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
TX  
1
RX  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.9.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-14 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-14  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Block Diagram  
STM-16  
Optical  
Mux/  
Transceiver  
Demux  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-16  
Main SCI  
Protect SCI  
BTC  
ASIC  
Flash  
RAM  
uP bus  
uP  
4.9.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Functionality  
You can install OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 cards in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. You can provision this  
card as part of a MS-SPRing or SNCP. In an ADM/TM configuration, you can provision the card as either  
an access tributary or a transport span interface.  
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors, and it supports  
1+1 unidirectional protection and provisionable bidirectional and unidirectional switching.  
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors.  
4.9.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-10 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card.  
Table 4-10  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.9.3 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 4-10  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators (continued)  
Description  
Card-Level LED  
Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in standby mode  
or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
Amber SF LED  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.9.3 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.10 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards  
Eighteen distinct STM-16 ITU 100-GHz DWDM cards comprise the ONS 15454 SDH DWDM channel  
plan. This plan contains every second wavelength in the ITU grid for 100-GHz-spaced DWDM. Though  
the ONS 15454 SDH only uses 200-GHz spacing, the cards work in 100-GHz-spaced nodes, as well.  
Each OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card provides one SDH STM-16 port compliant with  
ITU-T G.692, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and ITU-T G.958. The interface operates at 2.488 Gbps over  
a single-mode fiber span. Each card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads at STM-1,  
STM-4, or STM-16 signal levels on a per VC-4 basis. Figure 4-15 shows the  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.10 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards  
Figure 4-15  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Faceplate  
OC48ELR  
STM16EH  
15XX.XX  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
TX  
1
RX  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.10.1 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Functionality  
Figure 4-16 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-16  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Block Diagram  
STM-16  
Optical  
Mux/  
Transceiver  
Demux  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-16  
Main SCI  
Protect SCI  
BTC  
ASIC  
Flash  
RAM  
uP bus  
uP  
4.10.1 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Functionality  
You can install the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this  
card as part of a MS-SPRing or SNCP. In an ADM/TM configuration, you can provision the card as either  
an access tributary or a transport span interface.  
Nine of the cards operate in the blue band with a spacing of 2 * 100 GHz in the ITU grid (1530.33 nm,  
1531.90 nm, 1533.47 nm, 1535.04 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1539.77 nm, 1541.35 nm, and  
1542.94 nm). The other nine cards operate in the red band with a spacing of 2 * 100 GHz in the ITU grid  
(1547.72 nm, 1549.32 nm, 1550.92 nm, 1552.52 nm, 1554.13 nm, 1555.75 nm, 1557.36 nm,  
1558.98 nm, and 1560.61 nm).  
Each OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card uses extended long-reach optics operating individually  
within the ITU 100-GHz grid. The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards are intended to be used in  
applications with long unregenerated spans of up to 200 km (with mid-span amplification). These  
transmission distances are achieved through the use of inexpensive optical amplifiers (flat gain  
amplifiers) such as erbium-doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs). Using collocated amplification, distances  
up to 200 km can be achieved for a single channel (160 km for 8 channels).  
Maximum system reach in filterless applications is 24 dB, or approximately 80 km, without the use  
of optical amplifiers or regenerators. However, system reach also depends on the condition of the  
facilities, number of splices and connectors, and other performance-affecting factors. The  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards feature wavelength stability of +/– 0.25 nm. Each port contains  
a transmitter and a receiver.  
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards are the first in a family of cards meant to support extended  
long-reach applications in conjunction with optical amplification. Using DFB laser technology, the  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards provide a solution at the lower extended long-reach distances.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.10.2 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators  
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz port features a 1550-nm range laser and contains a transmit and  
receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors and supports  
1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.  
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards detect LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions.  
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The  
cards also count section and line BIP errors.  
To enable an MSP-SPRing, the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards extract the K1 and K2 bytes from  
the SDH overhead. The GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P card; the TCC2/TCC2P  
terminates the GCC.  
4.10.2 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-11 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards.  
Table 4-11  
OC48 ELR Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is  
traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in standby mode  
or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
Amber SF LED  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.10.3 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.11 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card  
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card provides one intra-office haul, ITU-T G.707- and  
G.957-compliant, SDH STM-64 port per card in the 1310-nm wavelength range. The port operates at  
9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 2 km (1.24 miles). The card supports concatenated or  
nonconcatenated payloads on a VC-4 basis, as well as VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 payloads. Figure 4-17  
shows the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 faceplate.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.11 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card  
Figure 4-17  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Faceplate  
OC192SR  
STM64IO  
1310  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.11.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-18 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-18  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Block Diagram  
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
transceiver  
Demux  
CDR  
Demux  
SCL  
BTC  
ASIC  
B
a
c
k
p
l
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
Mux  
Mux  
transceiver  
CK Mpy  
SCL  
a
n
e
ADC x 8  
SRAM  
Flash  
Processor  
4.11.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Functionality  
You can install OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as  
part of an MS-SPRing, a SNCP, a linear configuration, or a regenerator for longer span reaches.  
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 port features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable  
termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports  
1:1 protection in four-fiber bidirectional line switched ring applications where both span switching and  
ring switching might occur.  
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.  
4.11.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-12 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.11.3 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 4-12  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators  
Description  
Card-Level LED  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is in standby mode or is  
part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.11.3 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.12 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card  
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card provides one short-range, ITU-T G.707- and G.957-compliant,  
SDH STM-64 port per card. The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 40 km  
with SMF-28 fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated  
payloads on a VC-4 basis, as well as VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 payloads.  
Caution  
You must use a 3 to 15 dB fiber attenuator (5 dB recommended) when working with the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card. Using fiber loopbacks can cause irreparable damage to the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.12 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card  
Figure 4-19 shows the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 faceplate.  
Figure 4-19  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Faceplate  
OC192IR  
STM64SH  
1550  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.12.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-20 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-20  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Block Diagram  
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
transceiver  
Demux  
CDR  
Demux  
Mux  
SCL  
BTC  
ASIC  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
transceiver  
Mux  
CK Mpy  
SCL  
ADC x 8  
SRAM  
Flash  
Processor  
4.12.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Functionality  
You can install OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as  
part of an MS-SPRing, SNCP, or linear configuration, or as a regenerator for longer span reaches.  
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable  
termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports  
1:1 protection in four-fiber bidirectional line switched ring applications where both span switching and  
ring switching might occur.  
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.12.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
4.12.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-13 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card.  
Table 4-13 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic. The amber ACT/STBY LED indicates that the card is in standby  
mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.12.3 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
4.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card provides one long-range SDH STM-64 port per card, compliant  
with ITU-T G.707 and G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE (except minimum and maximum transmit  
power, and minimum receive power). Also, the port is compliant to ITU-T G.691 (prepublished unedited  
version 10/2000) L-64.2, except for optical output power and receiver sensitivity (see Note on page  
4-38). The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km with different types of  
fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card  
supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads on a VC-4 basis, as well as VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12  
payloads.  
Figure 4-21 shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 4-22 on page 4-37 shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning.  
Note  
You can differentiate this OC-192/STM-64 card (15454E-L64.2-1) from the OC-192/STM-64 card with  
the product ID 15454-OC192LR1550 by looking at the faceplate. This card does not have a laser on/off  
switch.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card  
Figure 4-21  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
1550  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
OC-192/STM-64  
STS  
SCL  
Optical  
transceiver  
Demux  
CDR  
Mux  
Mux  
BTC  
ASIC  
B
a
c
k
p
l
TX  
1
RX  
OC-192/STM-64  
STS  
SCL  
Optical  
transceiver  
Mux  
CK Mpy  
a
n
e
RX  
!
MAX INPUT  
POWER LEVEL  
-7 dBm  
ADC x 8  
SRAM  
Flash  
Processor  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.13.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Functionality  
Figure 4-22  
Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Faceplate  
1550  
FAIL  
ACT/STBY  
SF  
RX  
!
MAX INPUT  
POWER LEVEL  
-7 dBm  
TX  
1
RX  
RX  
!
MAX INPUT  
POWER LEVEL  
-7 dBm  
4.13.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Functionality  
You can install OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as  
part of an MS-SPRing, SNCP, or linear configuration, or also as a regenerator for longer span reaches.  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive  
connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable  
termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports  
1:1 protection in four-fiber bidirectional line switched ring applications where both span switching and  
ring switching might occur.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.13.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also  
counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.  
Caution  
You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (19 to 24 dB) when working with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card. Using fiber  
loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card.  
4.13.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-14 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card.  
Table 4-14 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready.The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is in standby mode or is  
part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.13.3 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card ports using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
Note  
The optical output power of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (+4 dBm to +7 dBm) is 6 dB lower than in  
L-64.2b of the 10/2000 prepublished unedited version of ITU-T G.691 (+10 dBm to +13 dBm). However,  
the total attenuation range of the optical path, 22 to 16 dB, is maintained by the optical receiver  
sensitivity range of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (–7 dBm to –24 dBm). This sensitivity range  
outperforms the specification in L-64.2b of the 10/2000 prepublished unedited version of ITU-T G.691  
as the resulting link budget of the card is 26 dBm.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.14 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card  
4.14 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card  
Sixteen distinct STM-64 ITU 100 GHz DWDM cards comprise the ONS 15454 SDH DWDM channel  
plan. The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card provides one long-range SDH STM-64 port per card,  
compliant with ITU-T G.707 and G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE (except minimum and maximum  
transmit power, and minimum receive power). The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified  
distances up to 60 km with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber  
limited by loss and/or dispersion.  
Note  
Longer distances are possible in an amplified system using dispersion compensation.  
The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads on a VC-4 basis, as well as VC-4, VC-3,  
and VC-12 payloads. Figure 4-23 shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx faceplate.  
Figure 4-23  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Faceplate  
OC192LR  
STM64LH  
ITU  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Tx  
1
Rx  
RX  
RX  
MAX INPUT  
POWER LEVEL  
-8 dBm  
MAX INPUT  
POWER LEVEL  
-8 dBm  
Figure 4-24 on page 4-40 shows a block diagram of the card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.14.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Functionality  
Figure 4-24  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Block Diagram  
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
transceiver  
Demux  
CDR  
Demux  
Mux  
SCL  
BTC  
ASIC  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
STM-64/  
OC-192  
STM-64 / OC192  
Optical  
transceiver  
Mux  
CK Mpy  
SCL  
ADC x 8  
SRAM  
Flash  
Processor  
4.14.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Functionality  
You can install OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this  
card as part of an MS-SPRing, SNCP, or linear configuration, or as a regenerator for longer span reaches.  
Eight of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx cards operate in the blue band with a spacing of 100  
GHz in the ITU grid (1534.25 nm, 1535.04 nm, 1535.82 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1538.98 nm,  
1539.77 nm, and 1540.56 nm). The other eight cards operate in the red band with a spacing of 100 GHz  
in the ITU grid (1550.12 nm, 1550.92 nm, 1551.72 nm, 1552.52 nm, 1554.13 nm, 1554.94 nm,  
1555.75 nm, and 1556.55 nm).  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx port features a laser on a specific wavelength in the 1550-nm  
range and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual  
SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional  
facility protection. It also supports 1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span  
switching and ring switching might occur.  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility.  
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The  
card also counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line  
overhead.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.14.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators  
4.14.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators  
Table 4-15 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx  
card.  
Table 4-15  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LED  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL  
LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card  
if the red FAIL LED persists.  
ACT/STBY LED  
Green (Active)  
Amber (Standby)  
Amber SF LED  
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is in standby mode or is  
part of an active ring switch (BLSR).  
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,  
or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also  
on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers  
are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.  
4.14.3 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators  
You can find the status of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card ports using the LCD screen on  
the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the  
screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4 Optical Cards  
4.14.3 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
5
Ethernet Cards  
Note  
The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms  
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.  
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s  
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not  
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.  
The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH integrates Ethernet into a SDH time-division multiplexing (TDM) platform.  
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH E-Series Ethernet cards, G-Series Ethernet cards, and  
ML-Series Ethernet cards. It includes descriptions, hardware specifications, and block diagrams for each  
card. For G-Series and E-Series Ethernet application information, see Chapter 14, “Ethernet Operation.”  
For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide. For  
ML-Series configuration information, see the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.1 Ethernet Card Overview, page 5-1  
5.2 E100T-G Card, page 5-2  
5.3 E1000-2-G Card, page 5-4  
5.4 G1000-4 Card, page 5-7  
5.5 G1K-4 Card, page 5-8  
5.6 ML100T-12 Card, page 5-10  
5.7 ML1000-2 Card, page 5-12  
5.8 GBICs and SFPs, page 5-14  
5.1 Ethernet Card Overview  
The card overview section summarizes card functions, power consumption, and temperature ranges.  
Note  
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 SDH shelf  
assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedures Guide for a list of slots and symbols.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.1.1 Cards Summary  
5.1.1 Cards Summary  
Table 5-1 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet cards.  
Table 5-1  
Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 SDH  
Card  
Port Description  
For Additional Information...  
E100T-G  
The E100T-G card provides 12 switched, autosensing, See the “5.2 E100T-G Card”  
10/100BaseT Ethernet ports.  
section on page 5-2.  
E1000-2-G  
The E1000-2-G card provides two IEEE-compliant,  
1000-Mbps ports. Gigabit Interface Converters  
(GBICs) are separate.  
See the “5.3 E1000-2-G Card”  
section on page 5-4.  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
The G1000-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant,  
1000-Mbps ports. GBICs are separate.  
See the “5.4 G1000-4 Card”  
section on page 5-7.  
The G1K-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant,  
See the “5.5 G1K-4 Card”  
1000-Mbps ports. GBICs are separate. The G1K-4 card section on page 5-8.  
is functionally identical to the G1000-4 card.  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
The ML100T-12 card provides 12 switched,  
autosensing, 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports.  
See the “5.6 ML100T-12  
Card” section on page 5-10.  
The ML1000-2 card provides two IEEE-compliant,  
See the “5.7 ML1000-2 Card”  
1000-Mbps ports. Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) section on page 5-12.  
connectors are separate.  
5.1.2 Card Compatibility  
Table 5-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each Ethernet card. See Table 2-6 on page 2-4 to  
determine Ethernet card cross-connect compatibility.  
Table 5-2  
Ethernet Card Software Compatibility  
Ethernet  
Cards  
R2.2.1  
Yes  
Yes  
—
R2.2.2  
Yes  
Yes  
—
R3.0.1 R3.1  
R3.2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
R3.3  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
R3.4  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
R4.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.1  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
R4.51 R4.6 R4.71 R5.0  
E100T-G  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
G1K-4  
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
—
—
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1. DWDM-only release.  
5.2 E100T-G Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH uses E100T-G cards for Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps). Each  
card provides 12 switched, IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports that can independently  
detect the speed of an attached device (autosense) and automatically connect at the appropriate speed.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.2 E100T-G Card  
The ports autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and determine whether to enable or  
disable flow control. You can also configure Ethernet ports manually. Figure 5-1 shows the faceplate and  
a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 5-1  
E100T-G Faceplate and Block Diagram  
E100T-G  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Flash  
DRAM  
CPU  
B
a
c
k
p
l
A/D Mux  
a
n
e
Ethernet  
MACs/switch  
10/100  
PHYS  
FPGA  
BTC  
7
8
9
Buffer  
memory  
Control  
memory  
10  
11  
12  
The E100T-G Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of Ethernet traffic  
across a SDH network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SDH self-healing  
protection services. This Ethernet capability enables network operators to provide multiple  
10/100-Mbps access drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects, Internet traffic, and cable  
modem traffic aggregation. It enables the efficient transport and co-existence of traditional TDM traffic  
with packet-switched data traffic.  
Each E100T-G card supports standards-based, wire-speed, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its  
Ethernet interfaces. The IEEE 802.1Q tag logically isolates traffic (typically subscribers). IEEE 802.1Q  
also supports multiple classes of service.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.2.1 E100T-G Slot Compatibility  
5.2.1 E100T-G Slot Compatibility  
You can install the E100T-G card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed  
in an ONS 15454 SDH can act independently or as a single Ethernet switch. You can create logical SDH  
ports by provisioning a number of SDH channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of VC-4.  
5.2.2 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators  
The E100T-G card faceplate has three card-level LED indicators (Table 5-3).  
Table 5-3 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level Indicators  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the E100T-G card. As part of the  
boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card  
operational.  
Green ACT LED  
SF LED  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E100T-G. If the  
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the E100T-G card is active and the  
software is operational.  
Not used.  
5.2.3 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators  
The E100T-G card also has 12 pairs of LEDs (one pair for each port) to indicate port conditions  
(Table 5-4). You can find the status of the E100T-G card port using the LCD screen on the  
ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen  
displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.  
Table 5-4  
E100T-G Port-Level Indicators  
LED State  
Description  
Amber  
Port is active (transmitting and/or receiving data). By default, indicates the  
transmitter is active but can be software controlled to indicate link status,  
duplex status, or receiver active.  
Solid Green  
Link is established. By default, indicates the link for this port is up, but can  
be software controlled to indicate duplex status, operating speed, or  
collision.  
5.3 E1000-2-G Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH uses E1000-2-G cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The E1000-2-G card  
provides two IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps ports for high-capacity customer LAN interconnections.  
Each port supports full-duplex operation.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.3 E1000-2-G Card  
The E1000-2-G card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the  
“5.8 GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-14.  
Figure 5-2 shows the card faceplate and a block diagram of the card.  
Figure 5-2  
E1000-2-G Faceplate and Block Diagram  
E1000-2-G  
FAIL  
ACT  
SF  
Flash  
DRAM  
CPU  
RX  
1
TX  
B
a
c
k
p
l
A/D Mux  
ACT/LINK  
a
n
e
Ethernet  
MACs/switch  
Gigabit Ethernet  
PHYS  
FPGA  
BTC  
Buffer  
memory  
Control  
memory  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
2
TX  
The E1000-2-G Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of  
Ethernet traffic across a SDH network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SDH  
self-healing protection services. This enables network operators to provide multiple 1000-Mbps access  
drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects. It enables efficient transport and co-existence of  
traditional TDM traffic with packet-switched data traffic.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.3.1 E1000-2-G Compatibility  
Each E1000-2-G card supports standards-based, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its Ethernet  
interfaces and SDH interfaces on the ONS 15454 SDH. The IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag logically isolates  
traffic (typically subscribers).  
Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 SDH can act together as a single switching  
entity or as independent single switches supporting a variety of SDH port configurations.  
You can create logical SDH ports by provisioning a number of SDH channels to the packet switch entity  
within the ONS 15454 SDH. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of VC-4.  
5.3.1 E1000-2-G Compatibility  
The E1000-2-G is compatible with any traffic card slots (Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17).  
5.3.2 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators  
The E1000-2-G card faceplate has three card-level LED indicators (Table 5-5).  
Table 5-5 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level Indicators  
Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the E1000-2-G card. As part of the  
boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card  
operational.  
Green ACT LED  
SF LED  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E1000-2-G. If the  
ACT LED is green it indicates that the E1000-2-G card is active and the  
software is operational.  
Not used in this release.  
5.3.3 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators  
The E1000-2-G card also has one bicolor LED per port (Table 5-6). When the LINK LED is illuminated  
green, carrier is detected, meaning an active network cable is installed. When the LINK LED is not  
illuminated green, an active network cable is not plugged into the port, or the card is carrying  
unidirectional traffic. The port ACT LED flashes amber at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being  
received and transmitted over the port.  
Table 5-6  
E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators  
LED State  
Description  
Amber  
The port is active (transmitting and receiving data).  
Solid green  
Green light off  
The link is established.  
The connection is inactive, or traffic is unidirectional.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.4 G1000-4 Card  
5.4 G1000-4 Card  
The ONS 15454 SDH uses G1000-4 cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The G1000-4 card  
provides four ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each port supports full-duplex operation  
for a maximum bandwidth of STM-16 on each card.  
The G1000-4 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the  
“5.8 GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-14.  
Figure 5-3 shows the card faceplate and the block diagram of the card.  
Figure 5-3  
G1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
G1000  
4
FAIL  
ACT  
RX  
1
Decode  
PLD  
Flash  
DRAM  
CPU  
To FPGA, BTC,  
MACs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
RX  
2
Protect/  
Main  
Rx/Tx  
BPIAs  
Mux/  
Demux  
FPGA  
Inter-  
face  
FPGA  
Trans-  
ceivers  
Ethernet  
MACs/switch  
POS  
Function  
BTC  
GBICs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
3
Clock  
Generation  
TX  
Power  
ACT/LINK  
Buffer  
RX  
memory  
4
TX  
ACT/LINK  
The G1000-4 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low latency transport of Ethernet  
encapsulated traffic (IP and other Layer 3 protocols) across a SDH network. Carrier-class Ethernet  
transport is achieved by hitless (< 50 ms) performance in the event of any failures or protection switches  
(such as 1+1 automatic protection switching [APS], SNCP ring, or MS-SPRing. Full provisioning  
support is possible via Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) or Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). Each  
G1000-4 card performs independently of the other cards in the same shelf.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.4.1 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators  
5.4.1 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators  
The G1000-4 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators (Table 5-7).  
Table 5-7  
G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
FAIL LED (red)  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the G1000-4 card. As part of the  
boot sequence, the FAIL LED turns on; it turns off if the software is deemed  
operational.  
The red FAIL LED normally blinks when the card is loading software.  
ACT LED (green)  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the G1000-4. If the  
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the G1000-4 card is active and the  
software is operational.  
5.4.2 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators  
The G1000-4 card has one bicolor LED per port. Table 5-8 describes the status that each color  
represents.  
Table 5-8  
G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators  
Port-Level LED State  
Off  
Description  
No link exists to the Ethernet port.  
Steady amber  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example,  
an unconfigured circuit, an error on line, or a nonenabled port might inhibit  
traffic flow.  
Solid green  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.  
Flashing green  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The LED  
flash rate reflects the traffic rate for the port.  
5.4.3 G1000-4 Compatibility  
The G-Series card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, for a total shelf capacity of 48 Gigabit Ethernet  
ports. The practical G1000-4 port per shelf limit is 40, because at least two slots are typically filled by  
OC-N trunk cards.  
5.5 G1K-4 Card  
The G1K-4 card is the functional equivalent of the G1000-4 card and provides four ports of  
IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each interface supports full-duplex operation for a maximum  
bandwidth of 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps bidirectional per port, and 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps bidirectional per card.  
Each port autonegotiates for full duplex and IEEE 802.3x flow control. The G1K-4 card uses GBIC  
modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the “5.8 GBICs and SFPs” section on  
page 5-14.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.5.1 G1K-4 Compatibility  
Figure 5-4 shows the card faceplate and the block diagram of the card.  
Figure 5-4  
G1K-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
G1K  
FAIL  
ACT  
RX  
1
Decode  
PLD  
Flash  
DRAM  
CPU  
To FPGA, BTC,  
MACs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
RX  
2
Protect/  
Main  
Rx/Tx  
BPIAs  
Mux/  
Demux  
FPGA  
Inter-  
face  
FPGA  
Trans-  
ceivers  
Ethernet  
MACs/switch  
POS  
function  
BTC  
GBICs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
3
Clock  
generation  
TX  
Power  
ACT/LINK  
Buffer  
memory  
RX  
4
TX  
ACT/LINK  
The G1K-4 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency transport of Ethernet  
encapsulated traffic (IP and other Layer 3 protocols) across a SDH network while providing a greater  
degree of reliability through SDH self-healing protection services. Carrier-class Ethernet transport is  
achieved by hitless (< 50 ms) performance in the event of any failures or protection switches (such as  
1+1 APS, path protection, BLSR, or optical equipment protection) and full provisioning and  
manageability, as in SDH service. Full provisioning support is possible via CTC or CTM. Each G1K-4  
card performs independently of the other cards in the same shelf.  
5.5.1 G1K-4 Compatibility  
Software R4.0 and later identifies G1K-4 cards as G1K-4s upon physical installation. Software prior to  
R4.0 identifies both G1000-4 and G1K-4 cards as G1000-4s upon physical installation.  
You can install the G1K-4 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, for a total shelf capacity of 48 Gigabit  
Ethernet ports. (The practical limit is 40 ports because at least two slots are typically populated by  
optical cards such as the OC-192.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.5.2 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators  
5.5.2 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators  
The G1K-4 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-9.  
Table 5-9  
G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
FAIL LED (red)  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the G1K-4 card. As part of the boot  
sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on, and it goes off when the software is  
deemed operational.  
The red FAIL LED blinks when the card is loading software.  
ACT LED (green)  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the G1K-4. If the ACT  
LED is green, it indicates that the G1K-4 card is active and the software is  
operational.  
5.5.3 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators  
The G1K-4 card has four bicolor LEDs (one LED per port). Table 5-10 describes these LEDs.  
Table 5-10 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators  
Port-Level LED State  
Off  
Description  
No link exists to the Ethernet port.  
Steady amber  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example,  
a lack of circuit setup, an error on the line, or a nonenabled port might inhibit  
traffic flow.  
Solid green  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.  
Flashing green  
A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The LED  
flash rate reflects the traffic rate for the port.  
5.6 ML100T-12 Card  
The ML100T-12 card provides 12 ports of IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100 interfaces. Each interface  
supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 200 Mbps per port and 2.488 Gbps per card.  
Each port independently detects the speed of an attached device (autosenses) and automatically connects  
at the appropriate speed. The ports autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and can  
determine whether to enable or disable flow control. For ML-Series configuration information, see the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SONET/SDH ML-Series Multilayer Ethernet Card Software Feature and  
Configuration Guide.  
Figure 5-5 shows the card faceplate.  
Caution  
Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for inter-building applications.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.6.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Figure 5-5  
ML100T-12 Faceplate  
ML100T  
12  
ACT  
FAIL  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
ML-Series cards feature two SDH virtual ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of VC4-16c. Each  
port carries an STM circuit with a size of VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, and VC4-8c. For  
step-by-step instructions on configuring an ML-Series card SDH STM circuit, refer to the “Create  
Circuits and Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
The ML-Series packet-over-SDH (POS) ports supports virtual concatenation (VCAT) of SONET/SDH  
circuits and a software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). The ML-Series card supports a  
maximum of two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports. Each VCAT  
group must be provisioned with two circuit members. An ML-Series card supports VC-3-2v, VC-4-2v  
and VC-4-4c-2v. For step-by-step instructions on configuring an ML-Series card SDH VCAT circuit,  
refer to the “Create Circuits and Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
5.6.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators  
The ML00T-12 card supports two card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-11.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.6.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 5-11  
ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
Red SF LED  
The red SF LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100T-12 card. As part of the  
boot sequence, the FAIL LED is illuminated until the software deems the  
card operational.  
Green ACT LED  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML100T-12. If the  
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the ML100T-12 card is active and the  
software is operational.  
5.6.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators  
The ML100T-12 card provides a pair of LEDs for each Fast Ethernet port: an amber LED for activity  
(ACT) and a green LED for LINK. The port-level indicators are described in Table 5-12.  
Table 5-12  
ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators  
Port-Level LED State  
Description  
ACT LED (Amber)  
Steady amber LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is an  
issue inhibiting traffic.  
Blinking amber LED means that traffic is flowing.  
LINK LED (Green)  
Steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no  
traffic.  
Blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic  
being received and transmitted over the port.  
Both ACT and LINK LED  
Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.  
5.6.3 ML100T-12 Slot Compatibility  
The ML100T-12 card works in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17.  
5.7 ML1000-2 Card  
The ML1000-2 card provides two ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each interface  
supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 2 Gbps per port and 4 Gbps per card. Each  
port autoconfigures for full duplex and IEEE 802.3x flow control.  
SFP modules are offered as separate orderable products for maximum customer flexibility. For details,  
see the “5.8 GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-14.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.7.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators  
Figure 5-6 shows the ML1000-2 card faceplate.  
Figure 5-6 ML1000-2 Faceplate  
ML1000  
2
FAIL  
ACT  
CONSOLE  
TX  
1
RX  
LINK  
ACT  
TX  
2
RX  
LINK  
ACT  
ML-Series cards feature two SDH virtual ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of VC4-16c. Each  
port carries an STM circuit with a size of VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, and VC4-8c. For  
step-by-step instructions on configuring an ML-Series card SDH STM circuit, refer to the “Create  
Circuits and Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
The ML-Series POS ports supports VCAT of SONET/SDH circuits and a software link capacity  
adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). The ML-Series card supports a maximum of two VCAT groups with  
each group corresponding to one of the POS ports. Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two  
circuit members. An ML-Series card supports VC-3-2v, VC-4-2v and VC-4-4c-2v. For step-by-step  
instructions on configuring an ML-Series card SDH VCAT circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and  
Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
5.7.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators  
The ML1000-2 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-13.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.7.2 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators  
Table 5-13  
ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level LEDs  
Description  
FAIL LED (Red)  
ACT LED (Green)  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a  
catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML1000-2 card. As part of the  
boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card  
operational.  
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML1000-2. When  
the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the ML1000-2 card is active and the  
software is operational.  
5.7.2 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators  
The ML1000-2 card has two LEDs for each of the two Gigabit Ethernet ports. The port-level indicators  
are described in Table 5-14.  
Table 5-14  
ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators  
Port-Level LED State  
Description  
ACT LED (Amber)  
Steady amber LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is an issue  
inhibiting traffic.  
Blinking amber LED means that traffic is flowing.  
LINK LED (Green)  
Steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic.  
Blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic  
being received and transmitted over the port.  
Both ACT and LINK LED Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.  
5.7.3 ML1000-2 Slot Compatibility  
The ML1000-2 card works in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17.  
5.8 GBICs and SFPs  
This section describes the GBICs and SFPs used with the Ethernet cards.  
The ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet cards use industry standard small form-factor pluggable connectors  
(SFPs) and Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) modular receptacles. The ML-Series Gigabit Ethernet  
cards use standard Cisco SFPs. The Gigabit E-Series card and the G-Series card use standard Cisco  
GBICs. With Software Release 4.1 and later, G-Series cards can also be equipped with dense wavelength  
division multiplexing (DWDM) and coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) GBICs to  
function as Gigabit Ethernet transponders.  
For all Ethernet cards, the type of GBIC or SFP plugged into the card is displayed in CTC and TL1. Cisco  
offers SFPs and GBICs as separate orderable products.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.1 Compatibility by Card  
5.8.1 Compatibility by Card  
Table 5-15 lists Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet cards with their compatible GBICs and SFPs.  
Caution  
Only use GBICs and SFPs certified for use in Cisco Optical Networking Systems. The qualified Cisco  
GBIC and SFP pluggable module’s top assembly numbers (TANs) are provided in Table 5-15.  
Table 5-15  
GBIC and SFP Card Compatibility  
Compatible GBIC or SFP  
Cisco Top Assembly Number  
(TAN)  
Card  
(Cisco Product ID)  
E1000-2-G (ONS 15454 SONET)  
E1000-2 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)  
15454-GBIC-SX  
30-0759-01  
800-06780-011  
10-1743-01  
30-0703-01  
15454E-GBIC-SX  
15454-GBIC-LX/LH  
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH  
FC_MR-4 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH) 15454-GBIC-SX  
15454E-GBIC-SX  
30-0759-01  
800-06780-01  
10-1743-01  
30-0703-01  
10-2015-01  
10-2016-01  
15454-GBIC-LX/LH  
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH  
ONS-GX-2FC-MMI  
ONS-GX-2FC-SML  
G1K-4 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)  
G1000-4 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)  
15454-GBIC-SX  
30-0759-01  
800-06780-01  
10-1743-01  
30-0703-01  
15454E-GBIC-SX  
15454-GBIC-LX/LH  
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH  
15454-GBIC-ZX  
30-0848-01  
15454E-GBIC-ZX  
15454-GBIC-xx.x2  
15454E-GBIC-xx.x2  
15454-GBIC-xxxx3  
15454E-GBIC-xxxx3  
10-1744-01  
10-1845-01 through 10-1876-01  
10-1845-01 through 10-1876-01  
10-1453-01 through 10-1460-01  
10-1453-01 through 10-1460-01  
ML1000-2 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH) 15454-SFP-LC-SX  
15454E-SFP-LC-SX  
30-1301-01  
30-1301-01  
30-1299-01  
30-1299-01  
15454-SFP-LC-LX/LH  
15454E-SFP-LC-LX/LH  
1. This TAN is only compatible with ONS 15454-E1000-2 or 15454-E1000-2-G cards.  
2. xx.x defines the 32 possible wavelengths as shown in Table A-1 on page A-4.  
3. xxxx defines the 8 possible wavelengths as shown in Table 5-16 on page 5-17.  
5.8.2 GBIC Description  
GBICs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high speed serial links from a port or slot to  
the network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the GBIC pluggable modules. There is no  
correlation between the type of latch to the model type (such as SX or LX/LH) or technology type (such  
as Gigabit Ethernet). See the label on the GBIC for technology type and model. One GBIC model has  
two clips (one on each side of the GBIC) that secure the GBIC in the slot on the Ethernet card; the other  
has a locking handle. Both types are shown in Figure 5-7.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.2 GBIC Description  
GBIC dimensions are:  
•
•
•
Height 0.39 in. (1 cm)  
Width 1.18 in. (3 cm)  
Depth 2.56 in. (6.5 cm)  
GBIC temperature ranges are:  
•
•
•
COM—commercial operating temperature range -5•C to 70•C  
EXT—extended operating temperature range 0•C to 85•C  
IND—industrial operating temperature range -40•C to 85•C  
Figure 5-7  
GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right)  
Clip  
Handle  
Receiver  
Transmitter  
Receiver  
Transmitter  
5.8.2.1 DWDM and CWDM GBICs  
DWDM (15454-GBIC-xx.x, 15454E-GBIC-xx.x) and CWDM (15454-GBIC-xxxx,  
15454E-GBIC-xxxx) GBICs operate in the ONS 15454 G-Series card when the card is configured in  
Gigabit Ethernet Transponding mode or in Ethernet over SDH mode. DWDM and CWDM GBICs are  
both wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) technologies and operate over single-mode fibers with SC  
connectors. Cisco CWDM GBIC technology uses a 20 nm wavelength grid and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM  
GBIC technology uses a 1 nm wavelength grid. CTC displays the specific wavelengths of the installed  
CWDM or DWDM GBICs. DWDM wavelengths are spaced closer together and require more precise lasers  
than CWDM. The DWDM spectrum allows for optical signal amplification. For more information on  
G-Series card transponding mode, see the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual.  
The DWDM and CWDM GBICs receive across the full 1300 nm and 1500 nm bands, which includes all  
CWDM, DWDM, LX/LH, ZX wavelengths, but transmit on one specified wavelength. This capability  
can be exploited in some of the G-Series transponding modes by receiving wavelengths that do not match  
the specific transmission wavelength.  
Note  
G1000-4 cards support CWDM and DWDM GBICs. G1K-4 cards with the Common Language  
Equipment Identification (CLEI) code of WM5IRWPCAA (manufactured after August 2003) support  
CWDM and DWDM GBICs. G1K-4 cards manufactured prior to August 2003 do not support CWDM or  
DWDM GBICs.  
The ONS 15454-supported CWDM GBICs reach up to 100 to 120 km over single-mode fiber and support  
eight wavelengths as shown in Table 5-16.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.2 GBIC Description  
Table 5-16  
Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs  
CWDM GBIC Wavelengths  
Corresponding GBIC Colors  
Band  
1470 nm  
Gray  
47  
1490 nm  
Violet  
49  
1510 nm  
Blue  
1530 nm  
Green  
53  
1550 nm  
Yellow  
55  
1570 nm  
Orange  
57  
1590 nm  
1610 nm  
Brown  
61  
Red  
59  
51  
The ONS 15454-supported DWDM GBICs reach up to 100 to 120 km over single-mode fiber and  
support 32 different wavelengths in the red and blue bands. Paired with optical amplifiers, such as the  
Cisco ONS 15216, the DWDM GBICs allow maximum unregenerated spans of approximately 300 km  
(Table 5-17).  
Table 5-17  
Supported Wavelengths for DWDM GBICs  
Blue Band  
1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm  
1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm  
1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm  
1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm  
Red Band  
5.8.2.1.1 Placement of CWDM or DWDM GBICs  
CWDM or DWDM GBICs for the G-Series card come in set wavelengths and are not provisionable. The  
wavelengths are printed on each GBIC, for example, CWDM-GBIC-1490. The user must insert the  
specific GBIC transmitting the wavelength required to match the input of the CWDM/DWDM device for  
successful operation (Figure 5-8). Follow your site plan or network diagram for the required  
wavelengths.  
Figure 5-8  
CWDM GBIC with Wavelength Appropriate for Fiber-Connected Device  
G1K  
FAIL  
ACT  
RX  
1
1470-nm Input  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
2
TX  
ACT/LINK  
Fiber Optic Connection  
CWDM Mux  
RX  
3
TX  
ACT/LINK  
CWDM-GBIC-1470  
RX  
4
TX  
ACT/LINK  
The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide contains specific procedures for attaching optical fiber to  
GBICs and inserting GBICs into the G-Series card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.3 SFP Description  
5.8.2.1.2 Example of CWDM or DWDM GBIC Application  
A G-Series card equipped with CWDM or DWDM GBICs supports the delivery of unprotected Gigabit  
Ethernet service over Metro DWDM (Figure 5-9). It can be used in short-haul and long-haul  
applications.  
Figure 5-9  
G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network  
GigE /  
GigE /  
Conventional GigE signals  
GigE over 's  
HFC  
QAM  
CWDM/DWDM  
Mux only  
VoD  
CWDM/DWDM  
Demux only  
ONS Node  
with G-Series Cards  
with CWDM/DWDM GBICs  
= Lambdas  
5.8.3 SFP Description  
SFPs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high speed serial links from a port or slot to the  
network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the SFP modules. There is no correlation  
between the type of latch to the model type (such as SX or LX/LH) or technology type (such as Gigabit  
Ethernet). See the label on the SFP for technology type and model. One type of latch available is a mylar  
tab (Figure 5-10), a second type of latch available is an actuator/button (Figure 5-11), and a third type  
of latch is a bail clasp (Figure 5-12).  
SFP dimensions are:  
•
•
•
Height 0.03 in. (8.5 mm)  
Width 0.53 in. (13.4 mm)  
Depth 2.22 in. (56.5 mm)  
SFP temperature ranges for are:  
•
•
•
COM—commercial operating temperature range -5•C to 70•C  
EXT—extended operating temperature range -5•C to 85•C  
IND—industrial operating temperature range -40•C to 85•C  
Figure 5-10  
Mylar Tab SFP  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.3 SFP Description  
Figure 5-11  
Actuator/Button SFP  
Figure 5-12  
Bail Clasp SFP  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards  
5.8.3 SFP Description  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
6
Storage Access Networking Cards  
The FC_MR-4 card is a 1.0625- or 2.125-Gbps Fibre Channel/Fiber Connectivity (FICON) card that  
integrates non-SDH framed protocols into an SDH time-division multiplexing (TDM) platform through  
virtually concatenated payloads. This chapter provides information about the FC_MR-4 card. For  
installation and step-by-step circuit configuration procedures, refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview, page 6-1  
6.2 FC_MR-4 Card Modes, page 6-3  
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application, page 6-5  
6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview  
The Fibre Channel Multirate 4-port (FC_MR-4) card uses pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters  
(GBICs) to transport non-SONET/SDH-framed, block-coded protocols over SONET/SDH. The  
FC_MR-4 enables four client Fibre Channel (FC) ports to be transported over SONET/SDH,  
encapsulating the frames using the ITU-T Generic Framing Protocol (GFP) format and mapping them  
into either T1X1 G.707-based Virtual Concatenated (VCAT) payloads or standard contiguously  
concatenated SONET/SDH payloads. The FC_MR-4 card has the following features:  
•
•
•
Four FICON ports operating at 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps  
–
–
All four ports can be operational at any time due to subrate support  
Advanced Distance Extension capability (buffer-to-buffer credit spoofing)  
Pluggable GBIC optics  
–
–
Dual rate (1G/2G): MM (550 m) and SM (10 km)  
Single rate (1G): SX (550 m) and LX (10 km)  
SONET/SDH support  
–
Four 1.0625 Gbps FC channels can be mapped into SONET/SDH containers as small as  
STS1/VC3 (subrate), with a minimum of STS-24c/VC4-8c for full rate, and as large as  
STS48c/VC4-24c.  
–
Four 2.125 Gbps FC channels can be mapped into SONET/SDH containers as small as  
STS1/VC3 (subrate), with a minimum of STS48c/VC4-24c for full rate, and as large as  
STS48c/VC4-24c.  
•
Frame encapsulation: ITU-T G.7041 Generic Framing Procedure-Transparent (GFP-T)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards  
6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators  
•
High-order SONET/SDH VCAT support (STS1-xv/VC-3 and STS3c-xv/VC-4)  
Figure 6-1 shows the FC_MR-4 faceplate and block diagram.  
Figure 6-1  
FC_MR-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram  
FC_MR-4  
Decode and  
Control  
PLD  
FAIL  
ACT  
FLASH  
SDRAM  
MPC8250  
Rx  
1
GBIC  
OPTICS  
Tx  
ACT/LNK  
GBIC  
OPTICS  
BTC  
192  
TADM  
IBPIA  
Rx  
2
RUDRA  
FPGA  
B
SERDES  
A
C
K
P
L
GBIC  
Tx  
OPTICS  
ACT/LNK  
CDR +  
SONET  
FRAMER  
GBIC  
OPTICS  
Rx  
3
A
N
Tx  
ACT/LNK  
E
IBPIA  
QUICKSILVER  
VCAT  
PROCESSOR  
Rx  
4
Tx  
QDR MEMORY  
ACT/LNK  
DDR  
MEMORY  
6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Table 6-1 describes the two card-level LEDs on the FC_MR-4 card.  
Table 6-1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators  
Card-Level Indicators Description  
Red FAIL LED  
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the  
card if the red FAIL LED persists.  
Green ACT LED  
Amber ACT LED  
If the ACTV/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry  
traffic.  
If the ACTV/STBY LED is amber, the card is rebooting.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards  
6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators  
6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators  
Each FC_MR-4 port has a corresponding ACT/LNK LED. The ACT/LNK LED is solid green if the port  
is available to carry traffic, is provisioned as in-service, and in the active mode. The ACT/LNK LED is  
flashing green if the port is carrying traffic. The ACT/LNK LED is steady amber if the port is not enabled  
and the link is connected, or if the port is enabled and the link is connected but there is an SONET/SDH  
transport error. The ACT/LNK LED is unlit if there is no link.  
You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly.  
Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of  
alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for a complete  
description of the alarm messages.  
6.1.3 FC_MR-4 Compatibility  
The FC_MR-4 cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 when used with XC-VXL-2.5G,  
XC-VXL-10G, and XC10G cards. The FC_MR-4 card can be provisioned as part of any valid ONS  
15454 SONET/SDH network topology, such as a subnetwork connection protection ring (SNCP) (CCAT  
circuits only), multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), 1+1 subnetwork connection  
(SNC), unprotected, or linear network topologies. The FC_MR-4 card is compatible with Software R4.6  
and greater.  
6.2 FC_MR-4 Card Modes  
The FC_MR-4 card can operate in two modes:  
•
•
Line Rate mode. This mode is backward compatible with Software Release 4.6 Line Rate mode.  
Enhanced mode. This mode supports subrate, distance extension, and other enhancements.  
The FC_MR-4 card reboots when changing card modes (a traffic hit results). The FPGA running on the  
card upgrades to the required image. However, the FPGA image in the card’s flash is not be modified.  
6.2.1 Line-Rate Card Mode  
Mapping for the line-rate card mode is summarized here.  
•
1 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:  
–
–
–
–
SONET CCAT: STS24c, STS48c  
SONET VCAT: STS3c-8v, STS1c-24v  
SDH CCAT: VC4-8c, VC4-16c  
SDH VCAT: VC4-8v  
•
2 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:  
–
–
–
–
SONET CCAT: STS48c  
SONET VCAT: STS3c-16v, STS1c-48v  
SDH CCAT: VC4-16c  
SDH VCAT: VC4-16v  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards  
6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode  
6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode  
Features available in enhanced card mode are given in this section.  
6.2.2.1 Mapping  
1 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:  
•
•
•
•
SONET CCAT: STS1c, STS3c, STS6c, STS9c, STS12c, STS18c, STS24c, STS48c  
SONET VCAT: STS3c-Nv (N is 1 to 8), STS1c-Nv (N is 1 to 24)  
SDH CCAT: VC4-1c, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c  
SDH VCAT: VC4-Nv (N is 1 to 8)  
2 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:  
•
•
•
•
SONET CCAT: STS1c, STS3c, STS6c, STS9c, STS12c, STS18c, STS24c, STS36c, STS48c  
SONET VCAT: STS3c-Nv (N is 1 to 16), STS1c-Nv (N is 1 to 48)  
SDH CCAT: VC4-1c, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c, VC4-16c  
SDH VCAT: VC4-16v (N is 1 to 16)  
6.2.2.2 SW-LCAS  
Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) is reconfigurable with the software link capacity adjustment  
scheme (SW-LCAS) enabled, as follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
Out of service and out of group members can be removed from VCG  
Members with deleted cross connect can be removed from VCG  
Errored members can be autonomously removed from VCG  
Degraded bandwidth VCGs are supported  
VCG is flexible with SW-LCAS enabled (VCG can run traffic as soon as the first cross-connect is  
provisioned on both sides of the transport)  
6.2.3 Distance Extension (Enhanced Mode Only)  
This following list describes FC_MR-4 card distance extension capabilities.  
•
Enabling of SAN extension over long distances through buffer-to-buffer (B2B) credit spoofing.  
–
–
2300 Km for 1G ports (longer distances supported with lesser throughput)  
1150 Km for 2G ports (longer distances supported with lesser throughput)  
•
Negotiation mechanism to identify if far end FC-over-SONET card supports Cisco proprietary B2B  
mechanism.  
•
•
•
•
Auto detection of FC switch B2B credits from FC-SW standards-based ELP frames.  
Support for manual provisioning of credits based on FC switch credits.  
Automatic GFP buffer adjustment based on roundtrip latency between two SL ports.  
Automatic credit recovery during SONET switchovers/failures.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards  
6.2.4 Interoperability Features (Enhanced Mode Only)  
•
Insulation for FC switches from any SONET switchovers. No FC fabric reconvergences for SONET  
failures of less than or equal to 60 ms.  
6.2.4 Interoperability Features (Enhanced Mode Only)  
The interoperability features are as follows:  
•
•
Maximum frame size setting to prevent accumulation of oversize PMs for VSAN frames  
Ingress filtering disable for attachment to third party GFP over SONET/SDH equipment  
6.2.5 Link Integrity  
The link integrity features are as follows:  
•
•
Data port disabled if upstream data port is not able to send over SONET/SDH Transport  
Data port disabled if SONET/SDH transport is errored  
6.2.6 Link Recovery  
Link recovery has the following features:  
•
•
•
Reduces the impact of SONET/SDH disruptions on attached fiber channel equipment  
Speeds up the recovery of Inter Switch Links (ISL)  
Allows the monitoring of B2B credit depletion due to SONET outage and the full recovery of the  
credits, thus preventing the slow decay of the bandwidth/throughput  
Note  
Distance Extension and Link Recovery cannot be enabled at the same time.  
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application  
The FC_MR-4 card reliably transports a carrier-class, private-line Fibre Channel/FICON transport  
service. Each FC_MR-4 card can support up to four 1-Gbps circuits or four 2-Gbps circuits. Four 1.0625  
Gbps FC channels can be mapped into containers as small as STS1 (subrate), with a minimum of  
STS-24c/VC4-8c for full rate, and as large as STS48c/VC4-24c. Four 2.125 Gbps FC channels can be  
mapped into containers as small as STS1 (sub-rate), with a minimum of STS48c/VC4-24c for full rate,  
and as large as STS48c/VC4-24c.  
The FC_MR-4 card incorporates features optimized for carrier-class applications such as:  
•
•
•
•
Carrier-class Fibre Channel/FICON  
50 ms of switch time through SONET/SDH protection as specified in Telcordia GR-253CORE  
Hitless software upgrades  
Remote Fibre Channel/FICON circuit bandwidth upgrades by means of integrated Cisco Transport  
Controller (CTC)  
•
Multiple management options through CTC, Cisco Transport Manager (CTM), TL1 (for SONET  
only), and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards  
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application  
The FC_MR-4 payloads can be transported over the following protected circuit types, in addition to  
unprotected circuits:  
•
•
•
SNCP (CCAT circuits only)  
MS-SPRing  
Protection channel access (PCA)  
The FC_MR-4 card supports high-order virtual concatenation (VCAT). See the “10.14 Virtual  
Concatenated Circuits” section on page 10-22.  
The FC_MR-4 uses pluggable GBICs for client interfaces and is compatible with the following GBIC  
types:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
ONS-GX-2FC-SML= (short reach 1 or 2 Gbps FC 1310 nm single mode with SC connectors)  
ONS-GX-2FC-MMI= (long reach 2 Gbps FC 850 nm multimode with SC connectors)  
15454-GBIC-SX (short reach 1 Gbps 850 nm multimode)  
15454E-GBIC-SX (short reach 1 Gbps 850 nm multimode)  
15454-GBIC-LX/LH (long reach 1 Gbps 1310 nm multimode)  
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH (long reach 1 Gbps 1310 nm multimode)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
7
Card Protection  
This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH card protection configurations. To provision card  
protection, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
7.1 Electrical Card Protection, page 7-1  
7.2 STM-N Card Protection, page 7-4  
7.3 Unprotected Cards, page 7-4  
7.4 External Switching Commands, page 7-5  
7.1 Electrical Card Protection  
The ONS 15454 SDH provides a variety of electrical card protection methods. This section describes the  
protection options.  
7.1.1 1:1 Protection  
In 1:1 protection, a working card is paired with a protect card of the same type. If the working card fails,  
the traffic from the working card switches to the protect card.When the failure on the working card is  
resolved, traffic automatically reverts to the working card. Figure 7-1 shows the ONS 15454 SDH in a  
1:1 protection configuration; Slot 2 is protecting Slot 1, Slot 4 is protecting Slot 3, Slot 17 is protecting  
Slot 16, and Slot 15 is protecting Slot 14. Each working card is paired with a protect card. Slots 6 and  
12 are not used for electrical cards. They have no corresponding Front Mount Electrical Connection  
(FMEC) slots.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 7 Card Protection  
7.1.2 1:N Protection  
Figure 7-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in a 1:1 Protection Configuration  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
1:1 Protection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
7.1.2 1:N Protection  
1:N protection allows a single card to protect several working cards. An E1-N-14 card protects up to four  
E1-N-14 cards, and a DS3i-N-12 card protects up to four DS3i-N-12 cards.  
Currently, 1:N protection operates only at the E-1 and DS-3 levels. The 1:N protect cards must match  
the levels of their working cards. For example, an E1-N-14 protects only E1-N-14 cards, and a  
DS3i-N-12 protects only DS3i-N-12 cards.  
The physical E-1 or DS-3 ports on the ONS 15454 SDH FMEC cards use the working card until the  
working card fails. When the node detects this failure, the protect card takes over the physical E-1 or  
DS-3 electrical interfaces through the relays and signal bridging on the backplane. Figure 7-2 shows the  
ONS 15454 SDH in a 1:N protection configuration. Each side of the shelf assembly has only one card  
protecting all of the cards on that side.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 7 Card Protection  
7.1.2 1:N Protection  
Figure 7-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in a 1:N Protection Configuration  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
1:N Protection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
7.1.2.1 Revertive Switching  
1:N protection supports revertive switching. Revertive switching sends the electrical interfaces back to  
the original working card after the card comes back online. Detecting an active working card triggers the  
reversion process. There is a variable time period for the lag between detection and reversion, called the  
revertive delay, which you can set using Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). For instructions, refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide. All cards in a protection group share the same reversion  
settings. 1:N protection groups default to automatic reversion.  
Caution  
A user-initiated switch (external switching command) overrides the revertive delay, that is, clearing the  
switch clears the timer.  
7.1.2.2 1:N Protection Guidelines  
Several rules apply to 1:N protection groups in the ONS 15454 SDH:  
•
•
•
Working and protect card groups must reside in the same card bank (A or B).  
The 1:N protect card must reside in Slot 3 for side A and Slot 15 for side B.  
Working cards might sit on either or both sides of the protect card.  
The ONS 15454 SDH supports 1:N equipment protection for all add/drop multiplexer configurations  
(ring, linear, and terminal), as specified by ITU-T G.841.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 7 Card Protection  
7.2 STM-N Card Protection  
The ONS 15454 SDH automatically detects and identifies a 1:N protect card when the card is installed  
in Slot 3 or Slot 15. However, the slot containing the 1:N card in a protection group must be manually  
provisioned as a protect slot because by default, all cards are working cards.  
7.2 STM-N Card Protection  
With 1+1 port-to-port protection, any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the  
corresponding ports on the working card. The working and protect cards do not have to be placed side  
by side in the node. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of  
ports. For example, a single-port STM-4 must be paired with another single-port STM-4, and a four-port  
STM-4 must be paired with another four-port STM-4. You cannot create a 1+1 protection group if one  
card is single-port and the other is multiport, even if the STM-N rates are the same. The protection takes  
place on the port level, any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the  
corresponding ports on the working card.  
For example, on a four-port card, you can assign one port as a protection port on the protect card  
(protecting the corresponding port on the working card) and leave three ports unprotected. Conversely,  
you can assign three ports as protection ports and leave one port unprotected.  
With 1:1 or 1:N protection (electrical cards), the protect card must protect an entire slot. In other words,  
all the ports on the protect card are used in the protection scheme.  
1+1 span protection can be either revertive or nonrevertive. With nonrevertive 1+1 protection, when a  
failure occurs and the signal switches from the working card to the protect card, the signal stays switched  
to the protect card until it is manually switched back. Revertive 1+1 protection automatically switches  
the signal back to the working card when the working card comes back online.  
You create and modify protection schemes using CTC software. For more information, refer to the “Turn  
up Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
7.3 Unprotected Cards  
Unprotected cards are not included in a protection scheme; therefore, a card failure or a signal error  
results in lost data. An unprotected configuration is sometimes called 1:0 protection. Because no  
bandwidth is reserved for protection, unprotected schemes maximize the available ONS 15454 SDH  
bandwidth. Figure 7-3 shows the ONS 15454 SDH in an unprotected configuration. All cards are in a  
working state.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 7 Card Protection  
7.4 External Switching Commands  
Figure 7-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards in an Unprotected Configuration  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Unprotected  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
7.4 External Switching Commands  
The external switching commands on the ONS 15454 SDH are Manual, Force, and Lock out. If you  
choose a Manual switch, the command will switch traffic only if the path has an error rate less than the  
signal degrade (SD) bit error rate threshold. A Force switch will switch traffic even if the path has SD  
or signal fail (SF) conditions; however, a Force switch will not override an SF on a 1+1 protection  
channel. A Force switch has a higher priority than a Manual switch. Lock outs, which prevent traffic  
from switching to the protect port under any circumstance, can only be applied to protect cards (in 1+1  
configurations) . Lockouts have the highest priority.  
Note  
Force and Manual switches do not apply to 1:1 protection groups; these ports have a single switch  
command.  
Another way to inhibit protection switching in a 1+1 configuration is to apply a lock on to the working  
port. A working port with a lock on applied cannot switch traffic to the protect port in the protection  
group (pair). In 1:1 protection groups, working or protect ports can have a lock on.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 7 Card Protection  
7.4 External Switching Commands  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
8
Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
This chapter describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), the Cisco software interface for the Cisco  
ONS 15454 SDH. For CTC set up and login information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure  
Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods, page 8-1  
8.2 CTC Installation Overview, page 8-3  
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements, page 8-3  
8.4 ONS 15454 SDH Connection, page 8-5  
8.5 CTC Window, page 8-6  
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset, page 8-15  
8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database, page 8-15  
8.8 Software Revert, page 8-15  
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods  
ONS 15454 SDH provisioning and administration is performed using the CTC software. CTC is a Java  
application that is installed in two locations;CTC is stored on the Advanced Timing, Communications,  
and Control (TCC2) card or the Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card,  
and it is downloaded to your workstation the first time you log into the ONS 15454 SDH with a new  
software release.  
8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card  
CTC software is preloaded on the ONS 15454 SDH TCC2/TCC2P card; therefore, you do not need to  
install software on the TCC2/TCC2P cards. When a new CTC software version is released, use the  
release-specific software upgrade guide to upgrade the ONS 15454 SDH software on the TCC2/TCC2P  
cards.  
When you upgrade CTC software, the TCC2/TCC2P cards store the new CTC version as the protect CTC  
version. When you activate the new CTC software, the TCC2/TCC2P cards store the older CTC version  
as the protect CTC version, and the newer CTC release becomes the working version. You can view the  
software versions that are installed on an ONS 15454 SDH by selecting the Maintenance > Software tabs  
in node view (Figure 8-1).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card  
Figure 8-1  
CTC Software Versions, Node View  
Select the Maintenance > Software tabs in network view to display the software versions installed on all  
the network nodes (Figure 8-2).  
Figure 8-2  
CTC Software Versions, Network View  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation  
8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation  
CTC software is downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P cards and installed on your computer automatically  
after you connect to the ONS 15454 SDH with a new software release for the first time. Downloading  
the CTC software files automatically ensures that your computer is running the same CTC software  
version as the TCC2/TCC2P cards you are accessing. The computer CTC software files are stored in the  
temporary directory designated by your computer’s operating system. You can use the Delete CTC  
Cache button to remove files stored in the temporary directory. If the files are deleted, they download  
the next time you connect to an ONS 15454 SDH. Downloading the Java archive files, called “JAR” files,  
for CTC takes several minutes depending on the bandwidth of the connection between your workstation  
and the ONS 15454 SDH. For example, JAR files downloaded from a modem or a data communication  
channel (DCC) network link require more time than JAR files downloaded over a LAN connection.  
8.2 CTC Installation Overview  
To connect to an ONS 15454 SDH using CTC, you enter the ONS 15454 SDH IP address in the URL  
field of Netscape Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer. After connecting to an  
ONS 15454 SDH, the following occurs automatically:  
1. A CTC launcher applet is downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P card to your computer.  
2. The launcher determines whether your computer has a CTC release matching the release on the  
ONS 15454 SDH TCC2/TCC2P card.  
3. If the computer does not have CTC installed, or if the installed release is older than the  
TCC2/TCC2P card’s version, the launcher downloads the CTC program files from the TCC2/TCC2P  
card.  
4. The launcher starts CTC. The CTC session is separate from the web browser session, so the web  
browser is no longer needed. Always log into nodes having the latest software release. If you log  
into an ONS 15454 SDH that is connected to ONS 15454 SDHs with older versions of CTC, CTC  
files are downloaded automatically to enable you to interact with those nodes. The CTC file  
download occurs only when necessary, such as during your first login. You cannot interact with  
nodes on the network that have a software version later than the node that you used to launch CTC.  
Each ONS 15454 SDH can handle up to five concurrent CTC sessions. CTC performance can vary,  
depending upon the volume of activity in each session, network bandwidth, and TCC2/TCC2P card load.  
Note  
The TCC2/TCC2P card requires Software R4.0 or later.  
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements  
To use CTC in the ONS 15454 SDH, your computer must have a web browser with the correct Java  
Runtime Environment (JRE) installed. The correct JRE for each CTC software release is included on the  
ONS 15454 SDH software CD and the ONS 15454 SDH documentation CD. If you are running multiple  
CTC software releases on a network, the JRE installed on the computer must be compatible with the  
different software releases.  
You can change the JRE version on the Preferences dialog box JRE tab. When you change the JRE  
version on the JRE tab, you must exit and restart CTC for the new JRE version to take effect. Table 8-1  
shows JRE compatibility with ONS software releases.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements  
Table 8-1  
JRE Compatibility  
ONS Software Release  
JRE 1.2.2 Compatible JRE 1.3 Compatible JRE 1.4 Compatible  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 3.3  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 3.4  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.01 No  
No  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.1  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.5  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.6  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.7  
ONS 15454 SDH Release 5.0  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
1. Software releases 4.0 and later notify you if an older version of the JRE is running on your PC or UNIX workstation.  
Note  
To avoid network performance issues, Cisco recommends managing a maximum of 50 nodes  
concurrently with CTC. The 50 nodes can be on a single DCC or split across multiple DCCs. Cisco does  
not recommend running multiple CTC sessions when managing two or more large networks.  
To manage more than 50 nodes, Cisco recommends using Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). If you do  
use CTC to manage more than 50 nodes, you can improve performance by adjusting the heap size; see  
the “General Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide. You can  
also create login node groups; see the “Connect the PC and Log Into the GUI” chapter of the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Table 8-2 lists the requirements for PCs and UNIX workstations. In addition to the JRE, the Java plug-in  
and modified java.policy file are also included on the ONS 15454 SDH software CD and the ONS 15454  
SDH documentation CD.  
Table 8-2  
CTC Computer Requirements  
Area  
Requirements  
Notes  
Processor  
(PC only)  
Pentium 4 processor or equivalent  
A faster CPU is recommended if your  
workstation runs multiple  
applications or if CTC manages a  
network with a large number of nodes  
and circuits.  
RAM  
512 MB or more  
A minimum of 1 GB is recommended  
if your workstation runs multiple  
applications or if CTC manages a  
network with a large number of nodes  
and circuits.  
Hard drive  
20 GB hard drive with 50 MB of space  
available  
CTC application files are  
downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P  
to your computer’s Temp directory.  
These files occupy 5 to 10 MB of  
hard drive space.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.4 ONS 15454 SDH Connection  
Table 8-2  
CTC Computer Requirements (continued)  
Requirements  
Area  
Notes  
Operating  
system  
•
PC: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000, or Windows XP  
—
•
Workstation: Ultra 10 Sun running  
SunOS 6, 7, or 8  
Java Runtime JRE 1.4.2  
Environment  
JRE 1.4.2 is installed by the CTC  
Installation Wizard included on the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH software and  
documentation CDs. JRE 1.4.2  
provides enhancements to CTC  
performance, especially for large  
networks with numerous circuits.  
Cisco recommends that you use  
JRE 1.4.2 for networks with  
Software R5.0 nodes. If CTC must be  
launched directly from nodes running  
software earlier than R5.0, Cisco  
recommends JRE 1.3.1_02.  
Web browser  
•
•
PC: Netscape 4.76, Netscape 7.x, Internet For the PC, use JRE 1.4.2 or 1.3.1_02  
Explorer 6.x  
with any supported web browser. For  
UNIX, use JRE 1.4.2 with  
Netscape 7.x or JRE 1.3.1_02 with  
Netscape 4.76.  
UNIX Workstation: Netscape 4.76,  
Netscape 7.x  
Netscape 4.76 or 7.x is available at  
the following site:  
http://channels.netscape.com/ns/bro  
wsers/default.jsp  
Internet Explorer 6.x is available at  
the following site:  
http://www.microsoft.com  
Java.policy  
file  
A java.policy file modified for CTC  
The java.policy file is modified by  
the CTC Installation Wizard included  
on the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
software and documentation CDs.  
Cable  
User-supplied Category 5 straight-through  
cable with RJ-45 connectors on each end to  
connect the computer directly to the ONS  
15454 SDH or through a LAN  
—
8.4 ONS 15454 SDH Connection  
You can connect to the ONS 15454 SDH in multiple ways. You can connect your PC directly the  
ONS 15454 SDH (local craft connection) using the RJ-45 port on the TCC2/TCC2P card, to the LAN  
pins on the MIC-C/T/P, or by connecting your PC to a hub or switch that is connected to the ONS 15454  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5 CTC Window  
SDH. You can connect to the ONS 15454 SDH through a LAN or modem, and you can establish TL1  
connections from a PC or TL1 terminal. Table 8-3 lists the ONS 15454 SDH connection methods and  
requirements.  
Table 8-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Connection Methods  
Method  
Description  
Requirements  
• If you do not use Dynamic Host  
Local craft Refers to onsite network connections  
between the CTC computer and the  
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), you  
must change the computer IP address,  
subnet mask, and default router, or use  
automatic host detection.  
ONS 15454 SDH using one of the following:  
•
•
•
The RJ-45 (LAN) port on the  
TCC2/TCC2P card  
The LAN pins on the ONS 15454 SDH  
MIC-C/T/P FMEC  
A hub or switch to which the  
ONS 15454 SDH is connected  
Corporate Refers to a connection to the  
•
The ONS 15454 SDH must be  
provisioned for LAN connectivity,  
including IP address, subnet mask,  
default gateway.  
LAN  
ONS 15454 SDH through a corporate or  
network operations center (NOC) LAN.  
•
•
The ONS 15454 SDH must be  
physically connected to the corporate  
LAN.  
The CTC computer must be connected  
to the corporate LAN that has  
connectivity to the ONS 15454 SDH.  
TL1  
Refers to a connection to the  
—
ONS 15454 SDH using TL1 rather than  
CTC. TL1 sessions can be started from CTC,  
or you can use a TL1 terminal. The physical  
connection can be a craft connection,  
corporate LAN, or a TL1 terminal.  
Remote  
Refers to a connection made to the  
ONS 15454 SDH using a modem.  
•
•
A modem must be connected to the  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
The modem must be provisioned for  
ONS 15454 SDH. To run CTC, the  
modem must be provisioned for  
Ethernet access.  
8.5 CTC Window  
The CTC window appears after you log into an ONS 15454 SDH (Figure 8-3). The window includes a  
menu bar, toolbar, and a top and bottom pane. The top pane provides status information about the  
selected objects and a graphic of the current view. The bottom pane provides tabs and subtabs to view  
ONS 15454 SDH information and perform ONS 15454 SDH provisioning and maintenance. From this  
window you can display three ONS 15454 SDH views: network, node, and card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.1 Node View  
Figure 8-3  
Node View (Default Login View)  
Node view  
Upper FMEC shelf  
Menu  
Tool bar  
Status area  
Graphic area  
Tabs  
Subtabs  
Status bar  
8.5.1 Node View  
Node view, shown in Figure 8-3, is the first view open after you log into an ONS 15454 SDH. The login  
node is the first node shown, and it is the “home view” for the session. Node view allows you to view  
and manage one ONS 15454 SDH node. The status area shows the node name; IP address; session boot  
date and time; number of Critical (CR), Major (MJ), and Minor (MN) alarms; the name of the current  
logged-in user; and the security level of the user; software version; and the network element default  
setup.  
8.5.1.1 CTC Card Colors  
The graphic area of the CTC window depicts the ONS 15454 SDH shelf assembly. The colors of the  
cards in the graphic reflect the real-time status of the physical card and slot (Table 8-4).  
Table 8-4  
Node View Card Colors  
Card Color  
Gray  
Status  
Slot is not provisioned; no card is installed.  
Slot is provisioned; no card is installed.  
Slot is provisioned; a functioning card is installed.  
Slot is provisioned; a Minor alarm condition exists.  
Violet  
White  
Yellow  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.1 Node View  
Table 8-4  
Node View Card Colors (continued)  
Card Color  
Orange  
Red  
Status  
Slot is provisioned; a Major alarm condition exists.  
Slot is provisioned; a Critical alarm exists.  
The colors of the Front Mount Electrical Connection (FMEC) cards reflect the real-time status of the  
physical FMEC cards. Table 8-5 lists the FMEC card colors. The FMEC ports shown in CTC do not  
change color.  
Note  
You cannot preprovision FMECs.  
Table 8-5  
Node View FMEC Color  
Upper Shelf FMEC Color  
Status  
White  
Functioning card is installed.  
Minor alarm condition exists.  
Major alarm condition exists.  
Critical alarm exists.  
Yellow  
Orange (Amber)  
Red  
Port color in both card and node view indicates the port service state. Table 8-6 lists the port colors and  
their service states. For more information about port service states, see Appendix B, “Administrative and  
Service States.”  
Table 8-6  
Node View Card Port Colors and Service States  
Port Color  
Service State Description  
Blue  
Locked-enabled,loopback Port is in a loopback state. On the card in node view, a  
line between ports indicates that the port is in terminal or  
facility loopback (see Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5). Traffic  
is carried and alarm reporting is suppressed. Raised fault  
conditions, whether or not their alarms are reported, can  
be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the  
TL1 RTRV-COND command.  
Blue  
Locked-enabled,  
maintenance  
Port is out-of-service for maintenance. Traffic is carried  
and loopbacks are allowed. Alarm reporting is  
suppressed. Raised fault conditions, whether or not their  
alarms are reported, can be retrieved on the CTC  
Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND  
command. Use Locked-enabled,maintenance for testing  
or to suppress alarms temporarily. Change the state to  
Unlocked-enabled; Locked-enabled,disabled; or  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService when testing is  
complete.  
Gray  
Locked-enabled,disabled  
The port is out-of-service and unable to carry traffic.  
Loopbacks are not allowed in this service state.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.1 Node View  
Table 8-6  
Node View Card Port Colors and Service States (continued)  
Service State Description  
Port Color  
Green  
Unlocked-enabled  
The port is fully operational and performing as  
provisioned. The port transmits a signal and displays  
alarms; loopbacks are not allowed.  
Violet  
Unlocked-disabled,  
automaticInService  
The port is out-of-service, but traffic is carried. Alarm  
reporting is suppressed. The node monitors the ports for  
an error-free signal. After an error-free signal is detected,  
the port stays in this state for the duration of the soak  
period. After the soak period ends, the port service state  
changes to Unlocked-enabled.  
Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are  
reported, can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or  
by using the TL1 RTRV-COND command. The AINS  
port will automatically transition to Unlocked-enabled  
when a signal is received for the length of time  
provisioned in the soak field.  
Figure 8-4  
Figure 8-5  
Terminal Loopback Indicator  
Facility Loopback Indicator  
The wording on a lower-shelf card in node view shows the status of a card (Active, Standby, Loading,  
or Not Provisioned). Table 8-7 lists the card statuses.  
Table 8-7  
Node View Card States  
Lower Shelf Card Status Description  
Sty  
Act  
NP  
Card is in standby.  
Card is active.  
Card is not present.  
Card is resetting.  
Ldg  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.1 Node View  
The graphics on a port in node view show the state of a port (diagonal lines or loop graphics). Table 8-8  
lists the port graphic and their description.  
Table 8-8  
Node View Port Graphics  
Lower Shelf Port Graphics  
Description  
Multiple diagonal lines on  
port  
Port is in service and card was reset.  
Loop graphic on port  
Port is in service and has a loopback provisioned in Card View >  
Maintenance > Loopback tabs.  
8.5.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts  
If you move your mouse over cards in the graphic, popups display additional information about the card  
including the card type; the card status (active or standby); the type of alarm, such as Critical, Major,  
and Minor (if any); and the alarm profile used by the card. Right-click a card to reveal a shortcut menu,  
which you can use to open, reset, or delete a card. Right-click a slot to preprovision a card (that is,  
provision a slot before installing the card).  
8.5.1.3 Node View Tabs  
Table 8-9 lists the tabs and subtabs available in the node view.  
Table 8-9  
Node View Tabs and Subtabs  
Tab  
Description  
Subtabs  
Alarms  
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the  
node and updates them in real time.  
—
Conditions  
History  
Displays a list of standing conditions on the  
node.  
—
Provides a history of node alarms including  
date, type, and severity of each alarm. The  
Session subtab displays alarms and events for  
the current session. The Node subtab displays  
alarms and events retrieved from a fixed-size  
log on the node.  
Session, Node  
Circuits  
Creates, deletes, edits, and maps circuits.  
—
Provisioning Provisions the ONS 15454 SDH node.  
General, Ether Bridge, Network,  
Protection, MS-SPRing, Security,  
SNMP, Comm Channels, Timing,  
Alarm Profiles, Defaults, UCP,  
WDM-ANS  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.2 Network View  
Table 8-9  
Node View Tabs and Subtabs (continued)  
Tab  
Description  
Subtabs  
Inventory  
Provides inventory information (part number,  
serial number, CLEI codes) for cards installed  
in the node. Allows you to delete and reset  
cards.  
—
Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for the node.  
Database, Ether Bridge, Protection,  
MS-SPRing, Software,  
Cross-Connect, Overhead XConnect,  
Diagnostic, Timing, Audit, Routing  
Table, RIP Routing Table, Test  
Access  
8.5.2 Network View  
Network view allows you to view and manage ONS 15454 SDHs that have DCC connections to the node  
that you logged into and any login node groups you selected (Figure 8-6).  
Figure 8-6  
Network in CTC Network View  
Bold letters indicate  
login node, asterisk  
indicates topology host  
Icon color indicates Dots indicate  
node status selected node  
Note  
Nodes with DCC connections to the login node do not appear if you checked Disable Network Discovery  
check box in the Login dialog box.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.2 Network View  
The graphic area displays a background image with colored ONS 15454 SDH icons. A Superuser can set  
up the logical network view feature, which enables each user to see the same network view.  
The lines show DCC connections between the nodes. DCC connections can be green (active) or gray  
(fail). The lines can also be solid (circuits can be routed through this link) or dashed (circuits cannot be  
routed through this link).  
There are four possible combinations for the appearance of DCCs: green/solid, green/dashed, gray/solid,  
or gray/dashed. DCC appearance corresponds to the following states: active/routable,  
active/nonroutable, failed/routable, or failed/nonroutable. Circuit provisioning uses active/routable  
links. Selecting a node or span in the graphic area displays information about the node and span in the  
status area.  
The color of a node in network view, shown in Table 8-10, indicates the node alarm status.  
Table 8-10  
Node Status Shown in Network View  
Color  
Alarm Status  
No alarms  
Green  
Yellow  
Orange  
Red  
Minor alarms  
Major alarms  
Critical alarms  
Gray with Unknown#  
Node initializing for the first time (CTC displays Unknown#  
because CTC has not discovered the name of the node yet)  
Table 8-11 lists the tabs and subtabs available in network view.  
Table 8-11  
Network View Tabs and Subtabs  
Tab  
Description  
Subtabs  
Alarms  
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the  
network and updates them in real time.  
—
Conditions  
History  
Displays a list of standing conditions on the  
network.  
—
—
—
Provides a history of network alarms including  
date, type, and severity of each alarm.  
Circuits  
Creates, deletes, edits, filters, and searches for  
network circuits.  
Provisioning Provisions security, alarm profiles,  
MS-SPRings and overhead circuits.  
Security, Alarm Profiles,  
MS-SPRing, Overhead Circuits  
Maintenance Displays the type of equipment and the status Software  
of each node in the network; displays working  
and protect software versions; and allows  
software to be downloaded.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.3 Card View  
8.5.3 Card View  
Card view provides information about individual ONS 15454 SDH cards (Figure 8-7). Use this window  
to perform card-specific maintenance and provisioning. A graphic showing the ports on the card is  
shown in the graphic area. The status area displays the node name, slot, number of alarms, card type,  
equipment type, and the card status (active or standby), card state if the card is present, or port state  
(Table 8-6 on page 8-8). The information that appears and the actions you can perform depend on the  
card. For more information about card service states, see Appendix B, “Administrative and Service  
States.”  
Figure 8-7  
Card View  
Note  
CTC provides a card view for all ONS 15454 SDH cards except the TCC2, TCC2P, XC10G,  
XC-VXL-10G, and XC-VXL-2.5G cards. Provisioning for these common control cards occurs at the  
node view; therefore, no card view is necessary.  
Use the card view tabs and subtabs, shown in Table 8-12, to provision and manage the ONS 15454 SDH.  
The subtabs, fields, and information shown under each tab depend on the card type selected. The  
Performance tab is not available for the AIC-I card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.5.3 Card View  
Table 8-12  
Card View Tabs and Subtabs  
Tab  
Description  
Subtabs  
Alarms  
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the card  
and updates them in real time.  
—
Conditions  
History  
Displays a list of standing conditions on the  
card.  
—
Provides a history of card alarms including  
Session (displays alarms and events  
date, object, port, and severity of each alarm. for the current session), Card  
(displays alarms and events retrieved  
from a fixed-size log on the card)  
Circuits  
Creates, deletes, edits, and searches for  
circuits.  
Circuits  
Provisioning Provisions an ONS 15454 SDH card.  
DS-N and STM cards: Line, Line  
Thresholds (different threshold  
options are available for electrical  
and optical cards), Elect Path  
Thresholds, SDH Thresholds, VC4,  
and Alarm Profiles  
TXP and MXP cards: Card, Line,  
Line Thresholds (different threshold  
options are available for electrical  
and optical cards), Optics  
Thresholds, OTN, and Alarm Profiles  
DWDM cards (subtabs depend on the  
card type): Optical Line, Optical  
Chn, Optical Amplifier, Parameters,  
Optics Thresholds  
Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for the card.  
Loopback, Info, Protection, and J1  
Path Trace (options depend on the  
card type)  
Performance Performs performance monitoring for the card. DS-N and STM cards: no subtabs  
TXP and MXP cards: Optics PM,  
Payload PM, OTN PM  
DWDM cards (subtabs depend on  
card type): Optical Line, Optical  
Chn, Optical Amplifier, Parameters,  
Optics Thresholds, OTN  
Inventory  
Displays an Inventory screen of the ports (TXP  
and MXP cards only).  
—
Note  
For TXP, MXP and DWDM card information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and  
Operations Guide.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset  
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset  
You can reset the ONS 15454 SDH TCC2/TCC2P card by using CTC (a soft reset) or by physically  
reseating a TCC2/TCC2P card (a hard reset). A soft reset reboots the TCC2/TCC2P card and reloads the  
operating system and the application software. Additionally, a hard reset temporarily removes power  
from the TCC2/TCC2P card and clears all buffer memory.  
You can apply a soft reset from CTC to either an active or standby TCC2/TCC2P card without affecting  
traffic. If you need to perform a hard reset on an active TCC2/TCC2P card, put the TCC2/TCC2P card  
into standby mode first by performing a soft reset.  
Note  
When a CTC reset is performed on an active TCC2/TCC2P card, the AIC-I card goes through an  
initialization process and also resets because the AIC-I card is controlled by the active TCC2/TCC2P.  
8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database  
When dual TCC2/TCC2P cards are installed in the ONS 15454 SDH, each TCC2/TCC2P card hosts a  
separate database; therefore, the protect card’s database is available if the database on the working  
TCC2/TCC2P fails. You can also store a backup version of the database on the workstation running CTC.  
This operation should be part of a regular ONS 15454 SDH maintenance program at approximately  
weekly intervals, and should also be completed when preparing an ONS 15454 SDH for a pending  
natural disaster, such as a flood or fire.  
Note  
The following parameters are not backed up and restored: node name, IP address, mask and gateway, and  
Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) port. If you change the node name and then restore a backed up  
database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new node name. Cisco recommends keeping  
a record of the old and new node names.  
8.8 Software Revert  
When you click the Activate button after a software upgrade, the TCC2/TCC2P copies the current  
working database and saves it in a reserved location in the TCC2/TCC2P flash memory. If you later need  
to revert to the original working software load from the protect software load, the saved database installs  
automatically. You do not need to restore the database manually or recreate circuits.  
Note  
The TCC2/TCC2P card does not carry any software earlier than Software R4.0. You will not be able to  
revert to a software release earlier than Software R4.0 with TCC2/TCC2P cards installed.  
The revert feature is useful if a maintenance window closes while you are upgrading CTC software. You  
can revert to the protect software load without losing traffic. When the next maintenance window opens,  
complete the upgrade and activate the new software load.  
Circuits created and provisioning done after a software load is activated (upgraded to a higher software  
release) will be lost with a revert. The database configuration at the time of activation is reinstated after  
a revert. This does not apply to maintenance reverts (for example, 4.6.2 to 4.6.1), because maintenance  
releases use the same database.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation  
8.8 Software Revert  
To perform a supported (non-service-affecting) revert from Software R5.0, the release you want to revert  
to must have been working at the time you first activated Software R5.0 on that node. Because a  
supported revert automatically restores the node configuration at the time of the previous activation, any  
configuration changes made after activation will be lost when you revert the software. Downloading  
Release 5.0 a second time after you have activated a new load ensures that no actual revert to a previous  
load can take place (the TCC2/TCC2P will reset, but will not be traffic affecting and will not change  
your database).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
9
Security and Timing  
This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 SDH users and SDH timing. To provision  
security and timing, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
9.1 Users and Security, page 9-1  
9.2 Node Timing, page 9-7  
9.1 Users and Security  
The CISCO15 user ID is provided with the ONS 15454 SDH system, but this user ID is not prompted  
when you sign into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). This ID can be used to set up other  
ONS 15454 SDH users. (To do this, complete the “Create Users and Assign Security” procedure in the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.)  
You can have up to 500 user IDs on one ONS 15454 SDH. Each CTC or Transaction Language One  
(TL1) user can be assigned one of the following security levels:  
•
•
•
•
Retrieve—Users can retrieve and view CTC information but cannot set or modify parameters.  
Maintenance—Users can access only the ONS 15454 SDH maintenance options.  
Provisioning—Users can access provisioning and maintenance options.  
Superusers—Users can perform all of the functions of the other security levels as well as set names,  
passwords, and security levels for other users.  
By default, multiple concurrent user ID sessions are permitted on the node, that is, multiple users can  
log into a node using the same user ID. However, you can provision the node to allow only a single login  
per user and prevent concurrent logins for all users.  
Note  
You must add the same user name and password to each node the user accesses.  
9.1.1 Security Requirements  
Table 9-1 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in node view.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.1.1 Security Requirements  
Table 9-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Node View  
CTC Tab  
Subtab  
[Subtab]:Actions  
Retrieve  
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser  
Alarms  
—
Synchronize/Filter/Delete  
Cleared Alarms  
X
X
X
X
Conditions  
History  
—
Retrieve/Filter  
Filter  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Session  
Node  
—
X
X
X
Retrieve/Filter  
Create/Edit/Delete  
Filter/Search  
X
X
X
Circuits  
—
X
—
X
X
X
Provisioning General  
General: Edit  
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
X
Partial1  
Power Monitor: Edit  
Spanning trees: Edit  
General: Edit  
X
X
—
X
X
Ether Bridge  
Network  
General: View2  
Static Routing: Create/Edit/  
Delete  
—
—
OSPF: Create/Edit/Delete  
RIP: Create/Edit/Delete  
Create/Delete/Edit  
View  
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Protection  
MS-SPRing  
Create/Edit/Delete  
—
X
—
X
Ring Map/Squelch Table/RIP  
Table  
Security  
Users: Create/Delete  
Users: Change password  
Active Logins: View/Logout  
Policy: Edit  
—
—
—
X
Same user Same user  
Same user  
All users  
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Access: Edit  
Legal Disclaimer: Edit  
Create/Delete/Edit  
SNMP  
Browse trap destinations  
X
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.1.1 Security Requirements  
Table 9-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Node View (continued)  
CTC Tab  
Subtab  
[Subtab]:Actions  
Retrieve  
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser  
Provisioning Comm Channels  
SDCC: Create/Edit/Delete  
LDCC: Create/Edit/Delete  
GCC: Create/Edit/Delete  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OSC: OSC Terminations:  
Create/Edit/Delete  
OSC: DWDM Ring ID:  
Create/Edit/Delete  
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
Provisionable Patchcords:  
Create/Delete  
—
Timing  
General: Edit  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BITS Facilities: Edit  
Alarm Behavior: Edit  
Alarm Profiles  
Alarm Profiles Editor:  
Store/Delete3  
Alarm Profile Editor:  
New/Load/Compare/Available/  
Usage  
X
X
X
X
Defaults  
Edit/Import  
—
X
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reset/Export  
WDM-ANS  
Provisioning: Edit/Import  
Provisioning: Reset/Export  
—
X
—
X
—
X
Connections:  
—
—
X
Create/Edit/Delete/Commit/  
Calculate  
Port Status: Launch  
Delete  
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inventory  
—
Reset  
Maintenance Database  
Backup  
X
Restore  
—
X
EtherBridge  
Spanning Trees: View  
MAC Table: Retrieve  
MAC Table: Clear/Clear All  
Trunk Utilization: Refresh  
Circuits: Refresh  
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
Protection  
Switch/Lock out/Lockon/  
Clear/ Unlock  
—
X
MS-SPRing  
Create/Edit/Delete  
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
Ring Map/Squelch Table/RIP  
Table  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.1.1 Security Requirements  
Table 9-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Node View (continued)  
CTC Tab  
Subtab  
[Subtab]:Actions  
Retrieve  
—
—
—
—
X
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser  
Maintenance Software  
Download  
X
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Upgrade/Activate/Revert  
Cards: Switch/Lock/Unlock  
Resource Usage: Delete  
Cross-Connect  
Overhead XConnect View  
Diagnostic  
Timing  
Retrieve/Lamp Test  
—
—
X
Source: Edit  
Timing Report: View/Refresh  
Retrieve/Archive  
Retrieve  
Audit  
—
X
Routing Table  
RIP Routing Table  
Test Access  
DWDM  
Retrieve  
X
View  
X
APC: Run/Disable/Refresh  
—
X
WDM Span Check: Retrieve  
Span Loss values, Reset  
Power Monitoring: Refresh  
X
X
X
X
1. Provisioner user cannot change node name, contact parameters.  
2. IP Address is not viewable for Retrieve, Maintenance, and Provisioning users.  
3. The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users, but the actions can be completely performed only by the users assigned with the required security  
levels.  
Table 9-2 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in network view.  
Table 9-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Network View  
CTC Tab  
Subtab  
[Subtab]: Actions  
Retrieve  
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser  
Alarms  
—
Synchronize/Filter/Delete  
cleared alarms  
X
X
X
X
Conditions  
History  
—
—
—
Retrieve/Filter  
Filter  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Circuits  
Create/Edit/Delete  
Filter/Search  
—
X
—
X
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.1.2 Security Policies  
Table 9-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Security Levels—Network View (continued)  
CTC Tab  
Subtab  
[Subtab]: Actions  
Users: Create/Delete  
Users: Change  
Retrieve  
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser  
Provisioning Security  
—
—
—
X
Same user Same user  
Same user  
All users  
Active logins: Logout  
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
Policy: Change  
Store/Delete1  
Alarm Profiles  
New/Load/Compare/Available/  
Usage  
X
MS-SPRing  
Create/Delete/Edit/Upgrade  
Create/Delete/Edit/Merge  
Search  
—
—
X
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Overhead Circuits  
Provisionable  
Patchcords  
Create/ Delete  
—
—
Maintenance Software  
Download/Cancel  
X
X
X
X
1. The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users, but the actions can be completely performed only by the users assigned with the required security  
levels.  
9.1.2 Security Policies  
Users with Superuser security privilege can provision security policies on the ONS 15454 SDH. These  
security policies include idle user timeouts, password changes, password aging, and user lockout  
parameters. In addition, a Superuser can prevent users from accessing the ONS 15454 SDH through the  
TCC2/TCC2P RJ-45 port, the MIC-C/T/P LAN connection, or both.  
9.1.2.1 Idle User Timeout  
Each ONS 15454 SDH CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified  
amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making  
changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or  
unlimited default idle periods, as shown in Table 9-3. The user idle period can be modified by a  
Superuser; refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for instructions.  
Table 9-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Default User Idle Times  
Security Level  
Superuser  
Idle Time  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Unlimited  
Provisioning  
Maintenance  
Retrieve  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.1.2 Security Policies  
9.1.2.2 User Password, Login, and Access Policies  
Superusers can view real-time lists of users who are logged into CTC or TL1 by node. Superusers can  
also provision the following password, login, and node access policies.  
•
•
•
•
Password expirations and reuse—Superusers can specify when users must change and when they can  
reuse their passwords.  
Login attempts—Superusers can specify the maximum number of times that users are allowed to  
attempt to log into CTC.  
Locking out and disabling users—Superusers can provision the number of invalid logins that are  
allowed before locking out users and the length of time before inactive users are disabled.  
Node access and user sessions—Superusers can limit the number of CTC sessions one user can have,  
and they can prohibit access to the ONS 15454 SDH using the LAN or MIC-C/T/P connections.  
In addition, a Superuser can select secure shell (SSH) instead of Telnet at the CTC Provisioning >  
Security > Access tabs. SSH is a terminal-remote host Internet protocol that uses encrypted links. It  
provides authentication and secure communication over unsecure channels. Port 22 is the default  
port and cannot be changed.  
Note  
The superuser cannot modify the privilege level of an active user. The CTC displays a warning message  
when the superuser attempts to modify the privilege level of an active user.  
9.1.2.3 Audit Trail  
Audit trails prove useful for maintaining security, recovering lost transactions, and enforcing  
accountability. Accountability refers to tracing user activities; that is, associating a process or action  
with a specific user.  
The ONS 15454 SDH maintains a 640-entry, human-readable audit trail of user or system actions such  
as login, logout, circuit creation or deletion, and user- or system-generated actions. Login events include  
authorized Cisco logins using the ONS 15454 SDH TL1 or the CTC graphical user interface. You can  
move the log to a local or network drive for later review. The ONS 15454 SDH generates an event to  
indicate when the log is 80 percent full, and another event to indicate that the oldest log entries are being  
overwrittenn.  
Table 9-4 contains the columns listed in Audit Trail window.  
Table 9-4  
Audit Trail Window Columns  
Heading  
Date  
Explanation  
Date when the action occurred  
Incrementing count of actions  
User ID that initiated the action  
Pass/Fail (whether or not the action was executed)  
Action that was taken  
Num  
User  
P/F  
Operation  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.2 Node Timing  
9.2 Node Timing  
SDH timing parameters must be set for each ONS 15454 SDH. Each ONS 15454 SDH independently  
accepts its timing reference from one of three sources:  
•
•
The building integrated timing supply (BITS) pins on the MIC-C/T/P coaxial connectors.  
An STM-N card installed in the ONS 15454 SDH. The card is connected to a node that receives  
timing through a BITS source.  
•
The internal ST3 clock on the TCC2/TCC2P card.  
You can set ONS 15454 SDH timing to one of three modes: external, line, or mixed. If timing is coming  
from the BITS pins, set the ONS 15454 SDH timing to external. If the timing comes from an STM-N  
card, set the timing to line. In typical ONS 15454 SDH networks:  
•
One node is set to external. The external node derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the  
BITS MIC-C/T/P coaxial connectors. The BITS source, in turn, derives its timing from a primary  
reference source (PRS) such as a Stratum 1 clock or global positioning satellite (GPS) signal.  
•
The other nodes are set to line. The line nodes derive timing from the externally timed node through  
the STM-N trunk (span) cards. The MSTP normally derives timing from the line using the OSCM  
or OSC-CSM card that are inside an STM-1 channel.  
You can set three timing references for each ONS 15454 SDH. The first two references are typically two  
BITS-level sources, or two line-level sources optically connected to a node with a BITS source. The third  
reference is usually assigned to the internal clock provided on every ONS 15454 SDH TCC2/TCC2P  
card. However, if you assign all three references to other timing sources, the internal clock is always  
available as a backup timing reference. The internal clock is a Stratum 3 (ST3), so if an ONS 15454 SDH  
node becomes isolated, timing is maintained at the ST3 level.  
The CTC Maintenance > Timing > Report tabs show current timing information for an ONS 15454 SDH,  
including the timing mode, clock state and status, switch type, and reference data.  
Caution  
Mixed timing allows you to select both external and line timing sources. However, Cisco does not  
recommend its use because it can create timing loops. Use this mode with caution.  
9.2.1 Network Timing Example  
Figure 9-1 shows an ONS 15454 SDH network timing setup example. Node 1 is set to external timing.  
Two timing references are set to BITS. These are Stratum 1 timing sources wired to the BITS MIC-C/T/P  
coaxial connectors on Node 1. The third reference is set to internal clock. The BITS outputs on Node 3  
provide timing to outside equipment, such as a digital access line access multiplexer.  
In the example, Slots 5 and 6 contain the trunk (span) cards. Timing at Nodes 2, 3, and 4 is set to line,  
and the timing references are set to the trunk cards based on distance from the BITS source. Reference 1  
is set to the trunk card closest to the BITS source. At Node 2, Reference 1 is Slot 5 because it is  
connected to Node 1. At Node 4, Reference 1 is set to Slot 6 because it is connected to Node 1. At  
Node 3, Reference 1 could be either trunk card because they are an equal distance from Node 1.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.2.2 Synchronization Status Messaging  
Figure 9-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Timing Example  
BITS1 BITS2  
source source  
Node 1  
Timing External  
Ref 1: BITS1  
Ref 2: BITS2  
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)  
Slot 5  
Slot 6  
Node 4  
Node 2  
Timing Line  
Ref 1: Slot 5  
Ref 2: Slot 6  
Slot 6  
Slot 5  
Slot 5  
Slot 6  
Timing Line  
Ref 1: Slot 6  
Ref 2: Slot 5  
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)  
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)  
Slot 6  
Slot 5  
Node 3  
Timing Line  
Ref 1: Slot 5  
Ref 2: Slot 6  
BITS1 BITS2  
out out  
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)  
Third party  
equipment  
9.2.2 Synchronization Status Messaging  
Synchronization status messaging (SSM) is an SDH protocol that communicates information about the  
quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SDH section overhead. They  
enable SDH devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing  
loops.  
SSM messages are either Generation 1 or Generation 2. Generation 1 is the first and most widely  
deployed SSM message set. Generation 2 is a newer version. If you enable SSM for the  
ONS 15454 SDH, consult your timing reference documentation to determine which message set to use.  
Table 9-5 shows the SDH message set.  
Table 9-5  
SDH SSM Message Set  
Message  
G811  
Quality  
Description  
1
2
3
Primary reference clock  
Sync traceability unknown  
Transit node clock traceable  
STU  
G812T  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.2.2 Synchronization Status Messaging  
Table 9-5  
SDH SSM Message Set (continued)  
Message  
G812L  
SETS  
Quality  
Description  
4
5
6
Local node clock traceable  
Synchronous equipment  
Do not use for timing synchronization  
DUS  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9 Security and Timing  
9.2.2 Synchronization Status Messaging  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
10  
Circuits and Tunnels  
This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15454 SDH high-order and low-order circuits; low-order, data  
communication channel (DCC), and IP-encapsulated tunnels; and virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuits.  
To provision circuits and tunnels, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10.1 Overview, page 10-1  
10.2 Circuit Properties, page 10-2  
10.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth, page 10-9  
10.4 DCC Tunnels, page 10-10  
10.5 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits, page 10-12  
10.6 Monitor Circuits, page 10-12  
10.7 SNCP Circuits, page 10-12  
10.8 MS-SPRing Protection Channel Access Circuits, page 10-14  
10.9 Path Trace, page 10-15  
10.10 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte, page 10-15  
10.11 Automatic Circuit Routing, page 10-16  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing, page 10-18  
10.13 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing, page 10-22  
10.14 Virtual Concatenated Circuits, page 10-22  
10.15 Merge Circuits, page 10-24  
10.16 Reconfigure Circuits, page 10-25  
10.1 Overview  
You can create circuits across and within ONS 15454 SDH nodes and assign different attributes to  
circuits. For example, you can:  
•
Create one-way, two-way (bidirectional), or broadcast circuits. VC low-order path tunnels  
(VC_LO_PATH_TUNNEL) are automatically set to bidirectional and do not use multiple drops.  
•
•
Assign user-defined names to circuits.  
Assign different circuit sizes.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2 Circuit Properties  
•
Enable port grouping on low-order path tunnels. Three ports form a port group. For example, in one  
E3-12 or one DS3i-N-12 card, four port groups are available: Ports 1 to 3 = PG1, Ports 4 to 6 = PG2,  
Ports 7 to 9 = PG3, and Ports 10 to 12 = PG4.  
Note  
CTC shows VC3-level port groups, but the XC10G creates only VC4-level port groups. VC4  
tunnels must be used to transport VC3 signal rates.  
Note  
Monitor circuits cannot be created on a VC3 circuit in a port group.  
•
•
•
Automatically or manually route VC high-order and low-order path circuits.  
Automatically route VC low-order path tunnels.  
Automatically create multiple circuits with autoranging. VC low-order path tunnels do not use  
autoranging.  
•
•
•
Provide full protection to the circuit path.  
Provide only protected sources and destinations for circuits.  
Define a secondary circuit source or destination that allows you to interoperate an ONS 15454 SDH  
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring with third-party equipment SNCPs.  
You can provision circuits at any of the following points:  
•
Before cards are installed. The ONS 15454 SDH allows you to provision slots and circuits before  
installing the traffic cards. (To provision an empty slot, right-click it and select a card from the  
shortcut menu.) However, circuits cannot carry traffic until you install the cards and place their ports  
in service. For card installation procedures and ring-related procedures, refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
•
•
After cards are installed, but before their ports are in service (enabled). You must put the ports in  
service before circuits can carry traffic.  
After cards are installed and their ports are in service. Circuits carry traffic as soon as the signal is  
received.  
10.2 Circuit Properties  
The ONS 15454 SDH Circuits window, which appears in network, node, and card view, is where you can  
view information about circuits. The Circuits window (Figure 10-1 on page 10-4) provides the following  
information:  
•
Name—The name of the circuit. The circuit name can be manually assigned or automatically  
generated.  
•
Type—Circuit types are HOP (high-order circuit), LOP (low-order circuit), VCT (VC low-order  
tunnel), VCA (VC low-order aggregation point), OCHNC (dense wavelength division multiplexing  
[DWDM] optical channel network connection; refer to the refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM  
Installation and Operations Guide), HOP_v (high-order virtual concatenated [VCAT] circuit), and  
LOP_v (low-order VCAT circuit).  
•
Size—The circuit size. Low-order circuits are VC12 and VC3. High-order circuit sizes are VC4,  
VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, and VC4-64c. OCHNC sizes are Equipped not  
specific, Multi-rate, 2.5 Gbps No FEC (forward error correction), 2.5 Gbps FEC, 10 Gbps No FEC,  
and 10 Gbps FEC. High-order VCAT circuits are VC4 and VC4-4c. OCHNCs are DWDM only, refer  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2 Circuit Properties  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide for more information.  
Low-order VCAT circuits are VC3. For information on the number of supported members for each  
card, see Table 10-12.  
•
OCHNC Wlen—For OCHNCs, the wavelength provisioned for the DWDM optical channel network  
connection. (DWDM only; refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide  
for more information).  
•
•
Direction—The circuit direction, either two-way (bidirectional) or one-way.  
OCHNC Dir—For OCHNCs, the direction of the DWDM optical channel network connection,  
either east to west or west to east. (DWDM only; refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation  
and Operations Guide for more information).  
•
Protection—The type of circuit protection. See the “10.2.3 Circuit Protection Types” section on  
page 10-7.  
•
•
Status—The circuit status. See the “10.2.1 Circuit Status” section on page 10-4.  
Source—The circuit source in the format: node/slot/port “port name” virtual container/tributary  
unit group/tributary unit group/virtual container. (The port name appears in quotes.) Node and slot  
always display; port “port name”/virtual container/tributary unit group/tributary unit group/virtual  
container might display, depending on the source card, circuit type, and whether a name is assigned  
to the port. If the circuit size is a concatenated size (VC4-2c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, etc.), VCs used in  
the circuit are indicated by an ellipsis, for example, VC4-7..9 (VCs 7, 8, and 9) or VC4-10..12 (VC  
10, 11, and 12).  
•
•
•
•
Destination—The circuit destination in same format (node/slot/port “port name”/virtual  
container/tributary unit group/tributary unit group/virtual container) as the circuit source.  
# of VLANS—The number of VLANS used by an Ethernet circuit with end points on E-Series  
Ethernet cards in single-card or multicard mode.  
# of Spans—The number of inter-node links that constitute the circuit. Right-clicking the column  
displays a shortcut menu from which you can choose to show or hide circuit span detail.  
State—The circuit state. See the “10.2.2 Circuit States” section on page 10-5.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2.1 Circuit Status  
Figure 10-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Circuit Window in Network View  
10.2.1 Circuit Status  
The circuit statuses that appear in the Circuit window Status column are generated by CTC based on  
conditions along the circuit path. Table 10-1 shows the statuses that can appear in the Status column.  
Table 10-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Circuit Status  
Status  
Definition/Activity  
CREATING  
DISCOVERED  
CTC is creating a circuit.  
CTC created a circuit. All components are in place and a  
complete path exists from circuit source to destination.  
DELETING  
CTC is deleting a circuit.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2.2 Circuit States  
Table 10-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Circuit Status (continued)  
Status  
Definition/Activity  
PARTIAL  
A CTC-created circuit is missing a cross-connect or network  
span, a complete path from source to destination(s) does not  
exist, or an alarm interface panel (AIP) change occurred on  
one of the circuit nodes and the circuit is in need of repair.  
(AIPs store the node MAC address.)  
In CTC, circuits are represented using cross-connects and  
network spans. If a network span is missing from a circuit,  
the circuit status is PARTIAL. However, a PARTIAL status  
does not necessarily mean a circuit traffic failure has  
occurred, because traffic might flow on a protect path.  
Network spans are in one of two states: up or down. On CTC  
circuit and network maps, up spans appear as green lines,  
and down spans appear as gray lines. If a failure occurs on a  
network span during a CTC session, the span remains on the  
network map but its color changes to gray to indicate that the  
span is down. If you restart your CTC session while the  
failure is active, the new CTC session cannot discover the  
span and its span line does not appear on the network map.  
Subsequently, circuits routed on a network span that goes  
down appear as DISCOVERED during the current CTC  
session, but appear as PARTIAL to users who log in after the  
span failure.  
DISCOVERED_TL1  
PARTIAL_TL1  
A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like, CTC-created circuit is  
complete. A complete path from source to destination(s)  
exists.  
A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like, CTC-created circuit is  
missing a cross-connect or circuit span (network link), and a  
complete path from source to destination(s) does not exist.  
CONVERSION_PENDING  
An existing circuit in a topology upgrade is set to this state.  
The circuit returns to the DISCOVERED status once the  
in-service topology upgrade is complete. For more  
information about in-service topology upgrades, see  
Chapter 11, “SDH Topologies and Upgrades.”  
PENDING_MERGE  
Any new circuits created to represent an alternate path in a  
topology upgrade are set to this status to indicate that it is a  
temporary circuit. These circuits can be deleted if an  
in-service topology upgrade fails. For more information  
about in-service topology upgrades, see Chapter 11, “SDH  
Topologies and Upgrades.”  
10.2.2 Circuit States  
The circuit service state is an aggregate of the cross-connect states within the circuit.  
•
If all cross-connects in a circuit are in the Unlocked-enabled service state, the circuit service state  
is Unlocked.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2.2 Circuit States  
•
•
If all cross-connects in a circuit are in the Locked-enabled,maintenance;  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService; or Locked-enabled,disabled service state, the circuit  
service state is Locked.  
Partial is appended to the Locked circuit service state when circuit cross-connects state are mixed  
and not all in the Unlocked-enabled service state. The Locked-partial state can occur during  
automatic or manual transitions between states. The Locked-partial service state can appear during  
a manual transition caused by an abnormal event such as a CTC crash or communication error, or if  
one of the cross-connects could not be changed. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide for troubleshooting procedures. The Locked-partial circuit state does not  
apply to OCHNC circuit types.  
The state of a VCAT circuit is an aggregate of its member circuits. An In Group member has  
cross-connects in the Unlocked-enabled; Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService; or  
Locked-enabled,maintenance service states. An Out of Group member has cross-connects in the  
Locked-enabled,disabled; or Locked-enabled,outOfGroup service states. You can view whether a VCAT  
member is In Group or Out of Group in the VCAT State column on the Edit Circuits window.  
•
•
•
•
If all member circuits are Unlocked, the VCAT circuit is Unlocked.  
If all In Group member circuits are Locked, the VCAT circuit state is Locked.  
If no member circuits exist or are all Out of Group, the state of a VCAT circuit is Locked.  
A VCAT circuit is Locked-partial when In Group member states are mixed and not all in the  
Unlocked state.  
You can assign a state to circuit cross-connects at two points:  
•
•
During circuit creation, you can set the state on the Create Circuit wizard.  
After circuit creation, you can change a circuit state on the Edit Circuit window or from the  
Tools > Circuits > Set Circuit State menu.  
During circuit creation, you can apply a service state to the drop ports in a circuit; however, CTC does  
not apply a requested state other than Unlocked-enabled to drop ports if:  
•
•
•
•
The port is a timing source.  
The port is provisioned for orderwire or tunnel orderwire.  
The port is provisioned as a DCC or DCC tunnel.  
The port supports 1+1 or multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing).  
Circuits do not use the soak timer, but ports do. The soak period is the amount of time that the port  
remains in the Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService service state after a signal is continuously  
received. When the cross-connects in a circuit are in the Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService service  
state, the ONS 15454 SDH monitors the cross-connects for an error-free signal. It changes the state of  
the circuit from Locked to Unlocked or to Locked-partial as each cross-connect assigned to the circuit  
path is completed. This allows you to provision a circuit using TL1, verify its path continuity, and  
prepare the port to go into service when it receives an error-free signal for the time specified in the port  
soak timer.  
To find the remaining port soak time, choose the Maintenance > AINS Soak tabs in card view and click  
the Retrieve button. If the port is in the Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService state and has a good  
signal, the Time Until IS column shows the soak count down status. If the port is  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService and has a bad signal, the Time Until IS column indicates that the  
signal is bad. You must click the Retrieve button to obtain the latest time value.  
For more information about cross-connect states, see Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States.”  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2.3 Circuit Protection Types  
10.2.3 Circuit Protection Types  
The Protection column on the Circuit window shows the card (line) and SDH topology (path) protection  
used for the entire circuit path. Table 10-2 shows the protection type indicators that appear in this  
column.  
Table 10-2  
Circuit Protection Types  
Protection Type Description  
1+1  
The circuit is protected by a 1+1 protection group.  
2F MS-SPRing  
4F MS-SPRing  
2F-PCA  
The circuit is protected by a two-fiber MS-SPRing.  
The circuit is protected by a four-fiber MS-SPRing.  
The circuit is routed on a protection channel access (PCA) path on a two-fiber  
MS-SPRing; PCA circuits are unprotected.  
4F-PCA  
The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a four-fiber MS-SPRing; PCA circuits are  
unprotected.  
DRI  
The circuit is protected by a dual-ring interconnection.  
MS-SPRing  
N/A  
The circuit is protected by both a two-fiber and a four-fiber MS-SPRing.  
A circuit with connections on the same node is not protected.  
PCA  
The circuit is routed on a PCA path on both two-fiber and four-fiber MS-SPRings;  
PCA circuits are unprotected.  
Protected  
The circuit is protected by diverse SDH topologies, for example, an MS-SPRing and  
an SNCP, or an SNCP and a 1+1 protection group.  
SNCP  
The circuit is protected by an SNCP.  
SPLITTER  
The circuit is protected by the protect transponder (TXPP_MR_2.5G) splitter  
protection. For splitter information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM  
Installation and Operations Guide.  
Unknown  
A circuit has a source and destination on different nodes and communication is  
down between the nodes. This protection type appears if not all circuit components  
are known.  
Unprot (black)  
Unprot (red)  
A circuit with a source and destination on different nodes is not protected.  
A circuit created as a fully protected circuit is no longer protected due to a system  
change, such as removal of a MS-SPRing or 1+1 protection group.  
Y-Cable  
The circuit is protected by a transponder or muxponder card Y-cable protection  
group. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and  
Operations Guide.  
10.2.4 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window  
The detailed circuit map on the Edit Circuit window allows you to view information about  
ONS 15454 SDH circuits. Routing information that appears includes:  
•
•
Circuit direction (unidirectional/bidirectional)  
The nodes, VC4s, VC3/TUG3, TUG2s, and VC12s through which the circuit passes, including slots  
and port numbers  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.2.4 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window  
•
•
•
The circuit source and destination points  
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area IDs  
Link protection (SNCP, unprotected, MS-SPRing, 1+1) and bandwidth (STM-N)  
For MS-SPRings, the detailed map shows the number of MS-SPRing fibers and the MS-SPRing ring ID.  
For SNCPs, the map shows the active and standby paths from circuit source to destination, and it also  
shows the working and protect paths. The map indicates nodes set up as dual-ring interconnect nodes.  
For VCAT circuits, the detailed map is not available for an entire VCAT circuit. However, you can view  
the detailed map to view the circuit route for each individual member.  
You can also view alarms and states on the circuit map, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alarm states of nodes on the circuit route  
Number of alarms on each node organized by severity  
Port service states on the circuit route  
Alarm state/color of the most severe alarm on the port  
Loopbacks  
Path trace states  
Path selectors states  
For example, in an SNCP, the working path is indicated by a green, bidirectional arrow, and the protect  
path is indicated by a purple, bidirectional arrow. Source and destination ports are shown as circles with  
an S and a D. Port service states are indicated by colors, shown in Table 10-3.  
Table 10-3  
Port State Color Indicators  
Port Color  
Green  
Service State  
Unlocked-enabled  
Gray  
Locked-enabled,disabled  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService  
Locked-enabled,maintenance  
Violet  
Blue (Cyan)  
A notation within or by the squares on each node indicates switches and loopbacks, including:  
•
•
•
•
F = Force switch  
M = Manual switch  
L = Lockout switch  
Arrow = Facility (outward) or terminal (inward) loopback  
Figure 10-2 shows an example of an SNCP with a card in terminal loopback in the Edit Circuits window.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth  
Figure 10-2  
Terminal Loopback in the Edit Circuits Window  
Move the mouse cursor over nodes, ports, and spans to see tooltips with information including the  
number of alarms on a node (organized by severity), port service state, and the protection topology.  
Right-click a node, port, or span on the detailed circuit map to initiate certain circuit actions:  
•
•
•
Right-click a unidirectional circuit destination node to add a drop to the circuit.  
Right-click a port containing a path trace capable card to initiate the path trace.  
Right-click an SNCP span to change the state of the path selectors in the SNCP circuit.  
10.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth  
XC10G cards support high-order cross-connections (VC4 and above at STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and  
STM-64 signal rates). The XC10G does not support any low-order circuits such as VC-11, VC-12, and  
VC3. The XC10G card cross connects standard VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-16c, and VC4-64c signal rates and  
nonstandard VC4-2c, VC4-3c, and VC4-8c signal rates, providing a maximum of 384 x 384 VC4  
cross-connections. Any VC4 on any port can be connected to any other port, meaning that the VC  
cross-connection capacity is nonblocking. The XC10G card manages up to 192 bidirectional VC4  
cross-connects.  
VC4 tunnels must be used with the E3-12 and DS3i-N-12 cards to transport VC3 signal rates. Three ports  
form a port group. For example, in one E3-12 or one DS3i-N-12 card, there are four port groups: Ports  
1 to 3 = PG1, Ports 4 to 6 = PG2, Ports 7 to 9 = PG3, and Ports 10 to 12 = PG4.  
Note  
In SDH Software R3.4 and earlier, the XC10G does not support VC3 circuits for the E3-12 and  
DS3i-N-12 cards. You must create a VC tunnel. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide  
for more information.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.4 DCC Tunnels  
The XC-VXL-10G and XC-VXL-2.5G card support both low-order and high-order circuits (E-1, E-3,  
DS-3, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64 signal rates). They manage up to 192 bidirectional STM-1  
cross-connects, 192 bidirectional E-3 or DS-3 cross-connects, or 1008 bidirectional E-1 cross-connects.  
The XC10G, XC-VXL-10G, and XC-VXL-2.5G cards work with the TCC2/TCC2P card to maintain  
connections and set up cross-connects within the node. You can create circuits using CTC.  
Note  
Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards,” contains detailed specifications of the XC10G, XC-VXL-10G, and  
XC-VXL-2.5G cards.  
10.4 DCC Tunnels  
SDH provides four DCCs for network element operation, administration, maintenance, and  
provisioning: one on the SDH regenerator section layer (SDCC) and three on the SDH multiplex section  
layer, also called the line DCC (LDCC). A section DCC (SDCC) and line DCC (LDCC) each provide  
192 Kbps of bandwidth per channel. The aggregate bandwidth of the three LDCCs is 576 Kbps. When  
multiple DCC channels exist between two neighboring nodes, the ONS 15454 SDH balances traffic over  
the existing DCC channels. You can tunnel third-party SDH equipment across ONS 15454 SDH  
networks using one of two tunneling methods, a traditional DCC tunnel or an IP-encapsulated tunnel.  
10.4.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels  
In traditional DCC tunnels, the ONS 15454 SDH uses regenerator SDCC for inter-ONS-15454-SDH  
data communications. It does not use the multiplex section DCCs; therefore, the multiplex SDCCs are  
available to tunnel DCCs from third-party equipment across ONS 15454 SDH networks. If D4 through  
D12 are used as data DCCs, they cannot be used for DCC tunneling.  
A traditional DCC tunnel endpoint is defined by slot, port, and DCC, where DCC can be either the  
regenerator SDCC, Tunnel 1, Tunnel 2, or Tunnel 3. You can link a regenerator SDCC to a multiplex  
SDCC (Tunnel 1, Tunnel 2, or Tunnel 3) and a multiplex SDCC to a regenerator SDCC. You can also  
link multiplex SDCCs to multiplex SDCCs and link regenerator SDCCs to regenerator SDCCs. To create  
a DCC tunnel, you connect the tunnel end points from one ONS 15454 SDH STM-N port to another.  
Cisco recommends a maximum of 84 DCC tunnel connections for an ONS 15454 SDH. Table 10-4  
shows the DCC tunnels that you can create.  
Table 10-4  
DCC Tunnels  
DCC  
SDH Layer  
SDH Bytes  
D1 to D3  
D4 to D6  
D7 to D9  
D10 to D12  
STM-1 (All Ports)  
STM-4, STM-16, STM-64  
SDCC  
Regenerator Section  
Multiplex Section  
Multiplex Section  
Multiplex Section  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Tunnel 1  
Tunnel 2  
Tunnel 3  
Figure 10-3 shows a DCC tunnel example. Third-party equipment is connected to STM-1 cards at  
Node 1/Slot 3/Port 1 and Node 3/Slot 3/Port 1. Each ONS 15454 SDH node is connected by STM-16  
trunk (span) cards. In the example, three tunnel connections are created, one at Node 1 (STM-1 to  
STM-16), one at Node 2 (STM-16 to STM-16), and one at Node 3 (STM-16 to STM-1).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.4.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels  
Note  
A DCC does not function on a mixed network of ONS 15454 SDH nodes and ONS 15454 nodes. DCC  
tunneling is required for ONS 15454 SDH nodes transporting data through ONS 15454 nodes.  
Figure 10-3  
Traditional DCC Tunnel  
Link 1  
From (A) To (B)  
Link 2  
Link 3  
From (A) To (B)  
From (A) To (B)  
Slot 3 (STM-1) Slot 13 (STM-16) Slot 12 (STM-16) Slot 13 (STM-16) Slot 12 (STM-16) Slot 3 (STM-1)  
Port 1, RSDCC Port 1, Tunnel 1 Port 1, Tunnel 1 Port 1, Tunnel 1 Port 1, Tunnel 1 Port 1, RSDCC  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Third party  
equipment  
Third party  
equipment  
When you create DCC tunnels, keep the following guidelines in mind:  
•
•
•
•
•
Each ONS 15454 SDH can have up to 84 DCC tunnel connections.  
Each ONS 15454 SDH can have up to 84 regenerator SDCC terminations.  
A regenerator SDCC that is terminated cannot be used as a DCC tunnel endpoint.  
A regenerator SDCC that is used as a DCC tunnel endpoint cannot be terminated.  
All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional.  
Note  
A multiplex SDCC cannot be used for tunneling if a data DCC is assigned.  
10.4.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels  
An IP-encapsulated tunnel puts an SDCC in an IP packet at a source node and dynamically routes the  
packet to a destination node. A traditional DCC tunnel is configured as one dedicated path across a  
network and does not provide a failure recovery mechanism if the path is down. An IP-encapsulated  
tunnel is a virtual path, which adds protection when traffic travels between different networks.  
IP-encapsulated tunneling has the potential of flooding the DCC network with traffic resulting in a  
degradation of performance for CTC. The data originating from an IP tunnel can be throttled to a  
user-specified rate, which is a percentage of the total SDCC bandwidth.  
Each ONS 15454 SDH supports up to ten IP-encapsulated tunnels. You can convert a traditional DCC  
tunnel to an IP-encapsulated tunnel or an IP-encapsulated tunnel to a traditional DCC tunnel. Only  
tunnels in the DISCOVERED status can be converted.  
Caution  
Converting from one tunnel type to the other is service-affecting.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.5 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits  
10.5 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits  
Unidirectional circuits can have multiple destinations for use in broadcast circuit schemes. In broadcast  
scenarios, one source transmits traffic to multiple destinations, but traffic is not returned back to the  
source. When you create a unidirectional circuit, the card that does not have its backplane receive (Rx)  
input terminated with a valid input signal generates a loss of signal (LOS) alarm. To mask the alarm,  
create an alarm profile suppressing the LOS alarm and apply it to the port that does not have its Rx input  
terminated.  
10.6 Monitor Circuits  
Monitor circuits are secondary circuits that monitor traffic on primary bidirectional circuits. Monitor  
circuits can be created on E1 or STM-N cards. Figure 10-4 shows an example of a monitor circuit. At  
Node 1, a VC4 is dropped from Port 1 of an STM-1 card. To monitor the VC4 traffic, test equipment is  
plugged into Port 2 of the STM-1 card and a monitor circuit to Port 2 is provisioned in CTC. Circuit  
monitors are one-way. The monitor circuit in Figure 10-4 is used to monitor VC4 traffic received by  
Port 1 of the STM-1 card.  
Figure 10-4  
VC4 Monitor Circuit Received at an STM-1 Port  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 1  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 2  
XC  
XC  
VC4 Drop  
Class 5  
Switch  
Port 1  
STM-1  
STM-N  
STM-N  
STM-N  
Port 2  
Test Set  
VC4 Monitor  
Note  
Monitor circuits cannot be used with Ethernet circuits.  
10.7 SNCP Circuits  
Use the Edit Circuits window to change SNCP selectors and switch protection paths. In the SNCP  
Selectors subtab on the Edit Circuits window, you can:  
•
•
•
•
View the SNCP circuit’s working and protection paths.  
Edit the reversion time.  
Set the hold-off timer.  
Edit the Signal Fail (SF)/Signal Degrade (SD) bit error rate (BER) thresholds.  
Note  
In the SNCP Selectors tab, the SF Ber Level and SD Ber Level columns display “N/A” for those nodes  
that do not support VC low-order signal BER monitoring. In Software Release 5.0, only the  
Cisco ONS 15310-CL supports VC low-order signal BER monitoring.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.7.1 Open-Ended SNCP Circuits  
In the SNCP Switch Counts subtab, you can:  
•
•
Perform maintenance switches on the circuit selector.  
View switch counts for the selectors.  
10.7.1 Open-Ended SNCP Circuits  
If ONS 15454 SDHs are connected to a third-party network, you can create an open-ended SNCP circuit  
to route a circuit through it. To do this, you create three circuits. One circuit is created on the source  
ONS 15454 SDH network. This circuit has one source and two destinations, one at each  
ONS 15454 SDH that is connected to the third-party network. The second circuit is created on the  
third-party network so that the circuit travels across the network on two paths to the ONS 15454 SDHs.  
That circuit routes the two circuit signals across the network to ONS 15454 SDHs that are connected to  
the network on other side. At the destination node network, the third circuit is created with two sources,  
one at each node connected to the third-party network. A selector at the destination node chooses  
between the two signals that arrive at the node, similar to a regular SNCP circuit.  
10.7.2 Go-and-Return SNCP Routing  
The go-and-return SNCP routing option allows you to route the SNCP working path on one fiber pair  
and the protect path on a separate fiber pair (Figure 10-5). The working path will always be the shortest  
path. If a fault occurs, neither the working fibers nor the protection fibers are affected. This feature only  
applies to bidirectional SNCP circuits. The go-and-return option appears on the Circuit Attributes panel  
of the Circuit Creation wizard.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.8 MS-SPRing Protection Channel Access Circuits  
Figure 10-5  
SNCP Go-and-Return Routing  
Node A  
Any network  
Any network  
Node B  
Go and Return working connection  
Go and Return protecting connection  
10.8 MS-SPRing Protection Channel Access Circuits  
You can provision circuits to carry traffic on MS-SPRing protection channels when conditions are fault  
free. Traffic routed on MS-SPRing PCA circuits, called extra traffic, has lower priority than the traffic  
on the working channels and has no means for protection. During ring or span switches, PCA circuits  
are preempted and squelched. For example, in a two-fiber STM-16 MS-SPRing, STMs 9 to 16 can carry  
extra traffic when no ring switches are active, but PCA circuits on these STMs are preempted when a  
ring switch occurs. When the conditions that caused the ring switch are remedied and the ring switch is  
removed, PCA circuits are restored if the MS-SPRing is provisioned as revertive.  
Provisioning traffic on MS-SPRing protection channels is performed during circuit provisioning. The  
Protection Channel Access check box appears whenever Fully Protected Path is unchecked on the circuit  
creation wizard. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for more information. When  
provisioning PCA circuits, two considerations are important:  
•
If MS-SPRings are provisioned as nonrevertive, PCA circuits are not restored automatically after a  
ring or span switch. You must switch the MS-SPRing manually.  
•
PCA circuits are routed on working channels when you upgrade a MS-SPRing from a two-fiber to  
a four-fiber or from one STM-N speed to a higher STM-N speed. For example, if you upgrade a  
two-fiber STM-16 MS-SPRing to an STM-64, STMs 9 to 16 on the STM-16 MS-SPRing become  
working channels on the STM-64 MS-SPRing.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.9 Path Trace  
10.9 Path Trace  
SDH J1 and J2 path trace are repeated, fixed-length strings composed of 64 consecutive bytes. You can  
use the strings to monitor interruptions or changes to circuit traffic. Table 10-5 shows the  
ONS 15454 SDH cards that support J1 path trace. Cards that are not listed in the table do not support the  
J1 byte.  
Table 10-5  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards Capable of Path Trace  
J1 Function  
Cards  
Transmit and receive  
Receive only  
E3-12  
DS3i-N-12  
G-Series  
ML-Series  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC12/STM4-4  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
Table 10-6 shows cards that support J2 path trace.  
Table 10-6  
ONS 15454 SDH Cards Capable of J2 Path Trace  
J2 Function  
Cards  
Transmit and Receive E1-42  
Receive Only  
STM1E-12  
If the string received at a circuit drop port does not match the string the port expects to receive, an alarm  
is raised. Two path trace modes are available:  
•
•
Automatic—The receiving port assumes that the first string it receives is the baseline string.  
Manual—The receiving port uses a string that you manually enter as the baseline string.  
10.10 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte  
One of the overhead bytes in the SDH frame is the C2 byte. The SDH standard defines the C2 byte as  
the path signal label. The purpose of this byte is to communicate the payload type being encapsulated  
by the high-order path overhead (HO-POH). The C2 byte functions similarly to EtherType and Logical  
Link Control (LLC)/Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) header fields on an Ethernet network; it  
allows a single interface to transport multiple payload types simultaneously. Table 10-7 provides the C2  
byte hex values.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.11 Automatic Circuit Routing  
Table 10-7  
STM Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals  
Hex Code  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15  
0xFE  
0xFF  
Content of the STM Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE)  
Unequipped  
Equipped—nonspecific payload  
Tributary unit group (TUG) structure  
Locked tributary unit (TU-n)  
Asynchronous mapping of 34,368 kbps or 44,736 kbps into container-3 (C-3)  
Asynchronous mapping of 139,264 kbps into container-4 (C-4)  
Mapping for asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)  
Mapping for Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB)  
Asynchronous mapping for Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)  
0.181 Test signal (TSS1 to TSS3) mapping SDH network (see ITU-T G.707)  
Virtual container-alarm indication signal (VC-AIS)  
If a circuit is provisioned using a terminating card, the terminating card provides the C2 byte. A  
low-order path circuit is terminated at the cross-connect card and the cross-connect card generates the  
C2 byte (0x02) downstream to the VC terminating cards. The cross-connect generates the C2 value  
(0x02) to the terminating card. If an STM-N circuit is created with no terminating cards, the test  
equipment must supply the path overhead in terminating mode. If the test equipment is in pass-through  
mode, the C2 values usually change rapidly between 0x00 and 0xFF. Adding a terminating card to an  
STM-N circuit usually fixes a circuit having C2 byte problems.  
10.11 Automatic Circuit Routing  
If you select automatic routing during circuit creation, CTC routes the circuit by dividing the entire  
circuit route into segments based on protection domains. For unprotected segments of circuits  
provisioned as fully protected, CTC finds an alternate route to protect the segment, creating a virtual  
SNCP. Each segment of a circuit path is a separate protection domain. Each protection domain is  
protected in a specific protection scheme including card protection (1+1, 1:1, etc.) or SDH topology  
(SNCP, MS-SPRing, etc.).  
The following list provides principles and characteristics of automatic circuit routing:  
•
Circuit routing tries to use the shortest path within the user-specified or network-specified  
constraints. Low-order tunnels are preferable for low-order circuits because low-order tunnels are  
considered shortcuts when CTC calculates a circuit path in path-protected mesh networks.  
•
If you do not choose Fully Path Protected during circuit creation, circuits can still contain protected  
segments. Because circuit routing always selects the shortest path, one or more links and/or  
segments can have some protection. CTC does not look at link protection while computing a path  
for unprotected circuits.  
•
•
Circuit routing does not use links that are down. If you want all links to be considered for routing,  
do not create circuits when a link is down.  
Circuit routing computes the shortest path when you add a new drop to an existing circuit. It tries to  
find the shortest path from the new drop to any nodes on the existing circuit.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.11.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing  
•
If the network has a mixture of low-order-capable nodes and low-order-incapable nodes, CTC might  
automatically create a low-order tunnel. Otherwise, CTC asks you whether or not a low-order tunnel  
is needed.  
10.11.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing  
Within a given network, CTC routes circuits on the shortest possible path between source and destination  
based on the circuit attributes, such as protection and type. CTC considers using a link for the circuit  
only if the link meets the following requirements:  
•
•
•
The link has sufficient bandwidth to support the circuit.  
The link does not change the protection characteristics of the path.  
The link has the required time slots to enforce the same time slot restrictions for MS-SPRing.  
If CTC cannot find a link that meets these requirements, an error appears.  
The same logic applies to low-order circuits on low-order tunnels. Circuit routing typically favors  
low-order tunnels because low-order tunnels are shortcuts between a given source and destination. If the  
low-order tunnel in the route is full (no more bandwidth), CTC asks whether you want to create an  
additional low-order tunnel.  
10.11.2 Secondary Sources and Destinations  
CTC supports secondary sources and destinations (drops). Secondary sources and destinations typically  
interconnect two “foreign” networks (Figure 10-6). Traffic is protected while it goes through a network  
of ONS 15454 SDHs.  
Figure 10-6  
Secondary Sources and Destinations  
Primary source  
Primary destination  
Vendor A  
network  
Vendor B  
network  
Secondary source  
Secondary destination  
ONS network  
Several rules apply to secondary sources and destinations:  
•
CTC does not allow a secondary destination for unidirectional circuits, because you can always  
specify additional destinations after you create the circuit.  
•
•
•
Primary and secondary sources should be on the same node.  
Primary and secondary destinations should be on the same node.  
Secondary sources and destinations are permitted only for regular high-order or low-order  
connections (not for low-order tunnels and multicard EtherSwitch circuits).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing  
•
For point-to-point (straight) Ethernet circuits, only VC endpoints can be specified as multiple  
sources or drops.  
For bidirectional circuits, CTC creates an SNCP connection at the source node that allows traffic to be  
selected from one of the two sources on the ONS 15454 SDH network. If you check the Fully Path  
Protected option during circuit creation, traffic is protected within the ONS 15454 SDH network. At the  
destination, another SNCP connection is created to bridge traffic from the ONS 15454 SDH network to  
the two destinations. A similar but opposite path exists for the reverse traffic flowing from the  
destinations to the sources. For unidirectional circuits, an SNCP drop-and-continue connection is created  
at the source node.  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing  
Routing circuits manually allows you to:  
•
•
•
•
Choose a specific path, not necessarily the shortest path.  
Choose a specific VC4/VC3/TUG3/TUG2/VC12 on each link along the route.  
Create a shared packet ring for multicard EtherSwitch circuits.  
Choose a protected path for multicard EtherSwitch circuits, allowing virtual SNCP segments.  
CTC imposes the following rules on manual routes:  
•
All circuits, except multicard EtherSwitch circuits in a shared packet ring, should have links with a  
direction that flows from source to destination. This is true for multicard EtherSwitch circuits that  
are not in a shared packet ring.  
•
If you enabled Fully Path Protected, choose a diverse protect (alternate) path for every unprotected  
segment (Figure 10-7).  
Figure 10-7  
Alternate Paths for Virtual SNCP Segments  
SNCP  
SNCP  
Two way  
Two way  
Source  
1+1  
Node 1  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Node 5  
MS-SPRing  
Node 7 Node 8  
Node 6  
Node 9  
Node 10  
Node 4  
Node 11 Node 12  
1+1  
Drop  
1+1  
Two way  
Two way  
Two way  
Two way  
Two way  
Path Segment 1 Path Segment 2  
Path Segment 3  
Path Segment 4  
1+1 protected  
SNCP/mesh  
protected  
1+1 protected MS-SPRing protected  
Needs alternate path  
from N1 to N2  
No need for alternate path  
•
•
For multicard EtherSwitch circuits, the Fully Path Protected option is ignored.  
For a node that has an SNCP selector based on the links chosen, the input links to the SNCP selectors  
cannot be 1+1 or MS-SPRing protected (Figure 10-8). The same rule applies at the SNCP bridge.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing  
Figure 10-8  
Mixing 1+1 or MS-SPRing Protected Links with an SNCP  
SNCP  
SNCP  
SNCP  
SNCP  
Unprotected  
Node 1  
(source) (destination)  
Node 2  
Node 1  
(source)  
Node 2  
MS-SPRing  
Unprotected  
Unprotected  
Node 4  
(destination)  
Node 3  
Node 4  
Node 3  
SNCP  
SNCP  
Unprotected  
Unprotected  
Legal  
Illegal  
Node 1  
(source)  
Node 2  
Unprotected  
1+1 protected  
Node 4  
(destination)  
Node 3  
Unprotected  
Illegal  
•
Choose the links of multicard EtherSwitch circuits in a shared packet ring to route from source to  
destination back to source (Figure 10-9). Otherwise, a route (set of links) chosen with loops is  
invalid.  
Figure 10-9  
Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing  
Ethernet source  
Node 1  
Node 3  
Node 2  
Node 4  
Ethernet destination  
•
Multicard EtherSwitch circuits can have virtual SNCP segments if the source or destination is not  
in the SNCP domain. This restriction also applies after circuit creation; therefore, if you create a  
circuit with SNCP segments, Ethernet drops cannot exist anywhere on the SNCP segment  
(Figure 10-10).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing  
Figure 10-10  
Ethernet and SNCP  
Source  
Source  
Node 2  
Node 5  
SNCP Segment  
Node 7 Node 8  
Node 6  
Node 5  
Node 7  
Node 6  
SNCP Segment  
Drop  
Drop  
Node 8  
Node 11  
Node 11  
Legal  
Illegal  
•
Low-order tunnels cannot be the endpoint of an SNCP segment. A SNCP segment endpoint is where  
the SNCP selector resides.  
If you provision full path protection, CTC verifies that the route selection is protected at all segments.  
A route can have multiple protection domains with each domain protected by a different scheme.  
Table 10-8 through Table 10-11 on page 10-21 summarize the available node connections. Any other  
combination is invalid and generates an error.  
Table 10-8  
Bidirectional VC/TUG/Regular Multicard EtherSwitch/Point-to-Point (Straight)  
Ethernet Circuits  
Number of  
Inbound Links  
Number of  
Outbound Links  
Number of  
Sources  
Number of  
Drops  
Connection Type  
SNCP  
—
2
1
—
1
SNCP  
2
—
—
—
—
—
2
SNCP  
2
1
—
—
2
SNCP  
1
2
SNCP  
1
—
SNCP  
—
1
—
—
2
Double SNCP  
Double SNCP  
Double SNCP  
Two way  
Ethernet  
2
2
—
—
2
2
—
—
2
—
—
—
1
1
—
0 or 1  
0 or 1  
Ethernet node  
source  
Ethernet  
0 or 1  
0 or 1  
—
Ethernet  
node drop  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.12 Manual Circuit Routing  
Table 10-9  
Unidirectional Circuit  
Number of  
Inbound Links Outbound Links  
Number of  
Number of  
Sources  
Number of  
Drops  
Connection Type  
One way  
1
1
—
—
1
—
—
—
1+  
SNCP head end  
SNCP head end  
1
2
—
2
2
SNCP drop and  
continue  
—
—
Table 10-10  
Multicard Group Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Circuit  
Number of  
Number of  
Outbound Links  
Number of  
Sources  
Number of  
Drops  
Connection Type  
Intermediate Nodes Only  
SNCP  
Inbound Links  
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-—  
SNCP  
Double SNCP  
Two way  
Source or Destination Nodes Only  
Ethernet  
1
1
—
—
Table 10-11  
Bidirectional Low-Order Tunnels  
Number of  
Inbound Links  
Number of  
Outbound Links  
Number of  
Sources  
Number of  
Drops  
Connection Type  
Intermediate Nodes Only  
2
1
2
2
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SNCP  
1
SNCP  
2
Double SNCP  
Two way  
1
Source Nodes Only  
1
—
—
—
—
—
Low-order tunnel  
endpoint  
Destination Nodes Only  
1
—
Low-order tunnel  
endpoint  
Although virtual SNCP segments are possible in low-order tunnels, low-order tunnels are still  
considered unprotected. If you need to protect low-order circuits, use two independent low-order tunnels  
that are diversely routed or use a low-order tunnel that is routed over 1+1, MS-SPRing, or a mixture of  
1+1 and MS-SPRing links.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.13 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing  
10.13 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing  
When you create circuits, you can choose Fully Protected Path to protect the circuit from source to  
destination. The protection mechanism used depends on the path CTC calculates for the circuit. If the  
network is composed entirely of MS-SPRing or 1+1 links, or the path between source and destination  
can be entirely protected using 1+1 or MS-SPRing links, no path-protected mesh network (Extended  
SNCP) or virtual SNCP protection is used.  
If Extended SNCP protection is needed to protect the path, set the level of node diversity for the  
Extended SNCP portions of the complete path in the Circuit Creation dialog box:  
•
•
•
Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths of each Extended SNCP  
domain in the complete path have a diverse set of nodes.  
Nodal Diversity Desired—CTC looks for a node diverse path; if a node-diverse path is not available,  
CTC finds a link-diverse path for each Extended SNCP domain in the complete path.  
Link Diversity Only—Creates only a link-diverse path for each Extended SNCP domain.  
When you choose automatic circuit routing during circuit creation, you have the option to require or  
exclude nodes and links in the calculated route. You can use this option to:  
•
Simplify manual routing, especially if the network is large and selecting every span is tedious. You  
can select a general route from source to destination and allow CTC to fill in the route details.  
•
Balance network traffic; by default CTC chooses the shortest path, which can load traffic on certain  
links while other links have most of their bandwidth available. By selecting a required node or a link,  
you force the CTC to use (or not use) an element, resulting in more efficient use of network  
resources.  
CTC considers required nodes and links to be an ordered set of elements. CTC treats the source nodes  
of every required link as required nodes. When CTC calculates the path, it makes sure the computed path  
traverses the required set of nodes and links and does not traverse excluded nodes and links.  
The required nodes and links constraint is only used during the primary path computation and only for  
Extended SNCP domains/segments. The alternate path is computed normally; CTC uses excluded  
nodes/links when finding all primary and alternate paths on Extended SNCPs.  
10.14 Virtual Concatenated Circuits  
Virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuits, also called VCAT groups (VCGs), transport traffic using  
noncontiguous time division multiplexing (TDM) time slots, avoiding the bandwidth fragmentation  
problem that exists with contiguous concatenated circuits. The cards that support VCAT circuits are the  
FC_MR-4 (both enhanced and line rate mode), ML-100T, and ML-1000 cards.  
In a VCAT circuit, circuit bandwidth is divided into smaller circuits called VCAT members. The  
individual members act as independent TDM circuits. All VCAT members should be the same size and  
must originate/terminate at the same end points. For two-fiber MS-SPRing configurations, some  
members can be routed on protected time slots and others on PCA time slots.  
10.14.1 VCAT Member Routing  
The automatic and manual routing selection applies to the entire VCAT circuit, that is, all members are  
manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the  
same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.14.2 Software-Link Capacity Adjustment  
constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different  
members. The FC_MR-4 and ML-Series cards support common fiber routing. In common fiber routing,  
all VCAT members travel on the same fibers, which eliminates delay between members. Three protection  
options are available for common fiber routing: Fully Protected, PCA, and Unprotected. Each member  
can use a different protection scheme; however, CTC checks the combination to make sure a valid route  
exists and if it does not, the user must modify the protection type. Figure 10-11 shows an example of  
common fiber routing.  
Figure 10-11  
VCAT Common Fiber Routing  
Member 1  
VCG-1  
Member 1  
VCG-1  
VC-1  
VC-2  
VC-1  
VC-2  
VCAT  
Function  
VCAT  
Function  
Member 2  
Member 2  
Intermediate  
NE  
ML-Series  
ML-Series  
Member 1  
VCG-2  
Member 1  
VCG-2  
VC-3  
VC-4  
VC-3  
VC-4  
VCAT  
Function  
VCAT  
Function  
Member 2  
Member 2  
10.14.2 Software-Link Capacity Adjustment  
The FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode), ML100T, and ML-1000 cards support Software–Link Capacity  
Adjustment Scheme (SW-LCAS), which uses legacy SONET failure indicators like the AIS-P and RDI-P  
to detect member failure. If used, SW-LCAS removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit for the  
duration of the failure, leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic. When the failure clears, the  
member circuit is added back into the VCAT circuit. SW-LCAS cannot autonomously remove members  
that have defects in the H4/Z7 byte. SW-LCAS is only available for legacy SONET defects such as  
AIS-P, LOP-P, etc. SW-LCAS is optional. You can select SW-LCAS during VCAT circuit creation. The  
FC_MR-4 card in line rate mode does not support SW-LCAS.  
SW-LCAS allows circuit pairing for ML-Series cards over two-fiber MS-SPRing. With circuit pairing,  
a VCAT circuit is set up between two ML-Series cards: one is a protected circuit (line protection) and  
the other is PCA. For four-fiber MS-SPRing, member protection cannot be mixed.  
In addition, you can create non-LCAS VCAT circuits, which do not use SW-LCAS. While SW-LCAS  
member cross-connects can be in different service states, all In Group non-LCAS members must have  
cross-connects in the same service state. A non-LCAS circuit can mix Out of Group and In Group  
members, as long as the In Group members are in the same service state. Non-LCAS members do not  
support the Locked-enabled,outOfGroup service state; to put a non-LCAS member in the Out of Group  
VCAT state, use Locked-enabled,disabled.  
10.14.3 VCAT Circuit Size  
Table 10-12 lists supported circuit rates and number of members for each card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.15 Merge Circuits  
Table 10-12  
ONS 15454 SDH Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members  
Card  
Circuit Rate  
Number of Members  
FC_MR-4 (Line rate mode)  
VC4  
8 (1-Gbps port)  
16 (2-Gbps port)  
1–8 (1-Gbps port)  
1–16 (2-Gbps port)  
2
FC_MR-4 (Enhanced mode)  
ML-Series  
VC4  
VC3, VC4, VC4-4c  
Use the Members tab on the Edit Circuit window to add or delete members from a VCAT circuit. The  
capability to add or delete members depends on the card and if the VCAT circuit is SW-LCAS:  
•
FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode) card—You can add or delete SW-LCAS VCAT members, although it  
might affect service. Before deleting a member, Cisco recommends that you put the member in the  
Locked-enabled,outOfGroup service state. You cannot add or delete members from VCAT circuits  
without SW-LCAS.  
•
•
FC_MR-4 (line rate mode) card—All VCAT circuits using FC_MR-4 (line rate mode) cards have a  
fixed number of members; you cannot add or delete members.  
ML-Series card—All VCAT circuits using ML-Series cards have a fixed number of members; you  
cannot add or delete members.  
Table 10-13 summarizes the VCAT capabilities for each card.  
Table 10-13  
ONS 15454 SDH VCAT Card Capabilities  
Support  
Locked-enabled,  
outOfGroup  
Add a  
Member  
Delete a  
Member  
Card  
Mode  
FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode)  
SW-LCAS  
Non-LCAS  
Non-LCAS  
SW-LCAS  
Non-LCAS  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
FC_MR-4 (line mode)  
ML-Series  
No  
No  
No  
10.15 Merge Circuits  
A circuit merge combines a single selected circuit with one or more circuits. You can merge VCTs, VCA  
circuits, VLAN-assigned circuits, CTC-created circuits, and TL1-created circuits. To merge circuits, you  
choose a circuit on the CTC Circuits tab window and the circuits that you want to merge with the chosen  
(master) circuit on the Merge tab in the Edit Circuits window. The Merge tab shows only the circuits that  
are available for merging with the master circuit:  
•
•
Circuit cross-connects must create a single, contiguous path.  
Circuits types must be a compatible. For example, you can combine a HOP with a VCA circuit to  
create a longer VCA circuit, but you cannot combine a LOP with a HOP.  
•
Circuit directions must be compatible. You can merge a one-way and a two-way circuit, but not two  
one-way circuits in opposing directions.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.16 Reconfigure Circuits  
•
•
•
•
Circuit sizes must be identical.  
VLAN assignments must be identical.  
Circuit end points must send or receive the same framing format.  
The merged circuits must become a DISCOVERED circuit.  
If all connections from the master circuit and all connections from the merged circuits align to form one  
complete circuit, the merge is successful. If all connections from the master circuit and some, but not  
all, connections from the other circuits align to form a single complete circuit, CTC notifies you and  
gives you the chance to cancel the merge process. If you choose to continue, the aligned connections  
merge successfully into the master circuit, and unaligned connections remain in the original circuits.  
All connections from the master circuit and at least one connection from the other selected circuits must  
be used in the resulting circuit for the merge to succeed. If a merge fails, the master circuit and all other  
circuits remain unchanged. When the circuit merge completes successfully, the resulting circuit retains  
the name of the master circuit.  
10.16 Reconfigure Circuits  
You can reconfigure multiple circuits, which is typically necessary when a large number of circuits are  
in the PARTIAL state. When reconfiguring multiple circuits, the selected circuits can be any  
combination of DISCOVERED, PARTIAL, DISCOVERED_TL1, or PARTIAL_TL1 circuits. You can  
reconfigure VCTs, VCA circuits, VLAN-assigned circuits, CTC-created circuits, and TL1-created  
circuits.  
Use the CTC Tools > Circuits > Reconfigure Circuits command to reconfigure selected circuits. During  
reconfiguration, CTC reassembles all connections of the selected circuits into circuits based on path size,  
direction, and alignment. Some circuits might merge and others might split into multiple circuits. If the  
resulting circuit is a valid circuit, it appears as a DISCOVERED circuit. Otherwise, the circuit appears  
as a PARTIAL or PARTIAL_TL1 circuit.  
Note  
PARTIAL tunnel and PARTIAL VLAN-capable circuits do not split into multiple circuits during  
reconfiguration.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 10 Circuits and Tunnels  
10.16 Reconfigure Circuits  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
10-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
11  
SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15454 SDH topologies and upgrades. To provision topologies, refer to  
the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11.1 SDH Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards, page 11-1  
11.2 Multiplex Section-Shared Protection Rings, page 11-2  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection, page 11-13  
11.4 Dual Ring Interconnect, page 11-18  
11.5 Subtending Rings, page 11-26  
11.6 Linear ADM Configurations, page 11-28  
11.7 Extended SNCP Mesh Networks, page 11-29  
11.8 Four Node Configurations, page 11-31  
11.9 STM-N Speed Upgrades, page 11-31  
11.1 SDH Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards  
Table 11-1 shows the SDH rings that can be created on each ONS 15454 SDH node using redundant  
TCC2/TCC2P cards.  
Table 11-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards  
Ring Type  
Maximum Rings per Node  
MS-SPRings1  
5
2-Fiber MS-SPRings  
4-Fiber MS-SPRings  
SNCP with SDCC  
SNCP with LDCC  
SNCP with LDCC and SDCC  
5
1
342 3  
144 5  
266  
1. MS-SPRing = multiplex section-shared protection ring  
2. Total SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84 SDCCs.  
3. See the “11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection” section on page 11-13.  
4. Total LDCC usage must be equal to or less than 28 LDCCs.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2 Multiplex Section-Shared Protection Rings  
5. See the “11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection” section on page 11-13.  
6. Total LDCC and SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84. When LDCC is  
provisioned, an SDCC termination is allowed on the same port, but is not  
recommended. Using SDCC and LDCC on the same port is only needed during a  
software upgrade if the other end of the link does not support LDCC. You can  
provision SDCCs and LDCCs on different ports in the same node.  
11.2 Multiplex Section-Shared Protection Rings  
There are two types of MS-SPRings: two-fiber and four-fiber. Two-fiber MS-SPRings share service and  
protection equally, but only two physical fibers are required. For more information, see the  
“11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings” section on page 11-2. With four-fiber MS-SPRings, the nodes on both  
sides of the failed span perform a span switch and use the second pair of fibers as the new working route.  
For more information, see the “11.2.2 Four-Fiber MS-SPRings” section on page 11-6.  
The ONS 15454 SDH can support five concurrent MS-SPRings in one of the following configurations:  
•
•
Five two-fiber MS-SPRings  
Four two-fiber and one four-fiber MS-SPRings  
Each MS-SPRing can have up to 32 ONS 15454 SDH nodes. Because the working and protect  
bandwidths must be equal, you can create only STM-4 (two-fiber only), STM-16, or STM-64  
MS-SPRings. For information about MS-SPRing protection channels, see the “10.8 MS-SPRing  
Protection Channel Access Circuits” section on page 10-14.  
Note  
MS-SPRings with 16 or fewer nodes have a switch time of 50ms. MS-SPRings with 16 or more  
nodes have a switch time of 100 ms.  
Note  
For best performance, MS-SPRings should have one LAN connection for every ten nodes in the  
MS-SPRing.  
11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings  
In two-fiber MS-SPRings, each fiber is divided into working and protect bandwidths. For example, in an  
STM-16 MS-SPRing (Figure 11-1), VC4s 1 to 8 carry the working traffic, and VC4s 9 to 16 are reserved  
for protection. Working traffic (VC4s 1 to 8) travels in one direction on one fiber and in the opposite  
direction on the second fiber. The Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) circuit routing routines calculate  
the “shortest path” for circuits based on many factors, including user requirements, traffic patterns, and  
distance. For example, in Figure 11-1, circuits going from Node 0 to Node 1 typically travel on Fiber 1,  
unless that fiber is full, in which case circuits are routed on Fiber 2 through Node 3 and Node 2. Traffic  
from Node 0 to Node 2 (or Node 1 to Node 3), can be routed on either fiber, depending on circuit  
provisioning requirements and traffic loads.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings  
Figure 11-1  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing  
VC4s 1-8 (working)  
VC4s 9-16 (protect)  
Node 0  
VC4s 1-8 (working)  
VC4s 9-16 (protect)  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
= Fiber 1  
= Fiber 2  
Node 2  
The SDH K1, K2, and K3 bytes carry the information that governs MS-SPRing protection switches. Each  
MS-SPRing node monitors the K bytes to determine when to switch the SDH signal to an alternate  
physical path. The K bytes communicate failure conditions and actions taken between nodes in the ring.  
If a break occurs on one fiber, working traffic targeted for a node beyond the break switches to the protect  
bandwidth on the second fiber. The traffic travels in a reverse direction on the protect bandwidth until it  
reaches its destination node. At that point, traffic is switched back to the working bandwidth.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings  
Figure 11-2 shows a sample traffic pattern on a four-node, two-fiber MS-SPRing.  
Figure 11-2  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Traffic Pattern  
Node 0  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
Traffic flow  
Fiber 1  
Node 2  
Fiber 2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.1 Two-Fiber MS-SPRings  
Figure 11-3 shows how traffic is rerouted after a line break between Node 0 and Node 3.  
•
All circuits originating on Node 0 and carried to Node 2 on Fiber 2 are switched to the protect  
bandwidth of Fiber 1. For example, a circuit carried on VC4-1 on Fiber 2 is switched to VC4-9 on  
Fiber 1. A circuit carried on VC4-2 on Fiber 2 is switched to VC4-10 on Fiber 1. Fiber 1 carries the  
circuit to Node 3 (the original routing destination). Node 3 switches the circuit back to VC4-1 on  
Fiber 2 where it is routed to Node 2 on VC4-1.  
•
Circuits originating on Node 2 that were normally carried to Node 0 on Fiber 1 are switched to the  
protect bandwidth of Fiber 2 at Node 3. For example, a circuit carried on VC4-2 on Fiber 1 is  
switched to VC4-10 on Fiber 2. Fiber 2 carries the circuit to Node 0 where the circuit is switched  
back to VC4-2 on Fiber 1 and then dropped to its destination.  
Figure 11-3  
Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Traffic Pattern After Line Break  
Node 0  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
Traffic flow  
Fiber 1  
Node 2  
Fiber 2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.2 Four-Fiber MS-SPRings  
11.2.2 Four-Fiber MS-SPRings  
Four-fiber MS-SPRings double the bandwidth of two-fiber MS-SPRings. Because they allow span  
switching as well as ring switching, four-fiber MS-SPRings increase the reliability and flexibility of  
traffic protection. Two fibers are allocated for working traffic and two fibers for protection, as shown in  
Figure 11-4. To implement a four-fiber MS-SPRing, you must install four STM-16 cards or four STM-64  
cards at each MS-SPRing node.  
Figure 11-4  
Four-Node, Four-Fiber MS-SPRing  
Node 0  
Span 4  
Span 1  
Span 5  
Span 8  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
Span 6  
Span 7  
Span 3  
Span 2  
= Working fibers  
= Protect fibers  
Node 2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.2 Four-Fiber MS-SPRings  
Four-fiber MS-SPRings provide span and ring switching.  
Span switching occurs when a working span fails (Figure 11-5). Traffic switches to the protect fibers  
between the nodes (Node 0 and Node 1 in the Figure 11-5 example) and then returns to the working  
fibers that did not fail. Multiple span switches can occur at the same time.  
Figure 11-5  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Span Switch  
Node 0  
Span 4  
Span 1  
Span 5  
Span 8  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
Span 6  
Span 7  
Span 3  
Span 2  
= Working fibers  
= Protect fibers  
Node 2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.3 MS-SPRing Bandwidth  
Ring switching occurs when a span switch cannot recover traffic (Figure 11-6), such as when both the  
working and protect fibers fail on the same span. In a ring switch, traffic is routed to the protect fibers  
throughout the full ring.  
Figure 11-6  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Switch  
Node 0  
Span 4  
Span 1  
Span 5  
Span 8  
Node 3  
STM-16 Ring  
Node 1  
Span 6  
Span 7  
Span 3  
Span 2  
= Working fibers  
= Protect fibers  
Node 2  
11.2.3 MS-SPRing Bandwidth  
An MS-SPRing node can terminate traffic it receives from either side of the ring. Therefore,  
MS-SPRings are suited for distributed node-to-node traffic applications such as interoffice networks and  
access networks.  
MS-SPRings share the ring bandwidth equally between working and protection traffic. Half of the  
payload bandwidth is reserved for protection in each direction, making the communication pipe half-full  
under normal operation.  
MS-SPRings allow bandwidth to be reused around the ring and can carry more traffic than a network  
with traffic flowing through one central hub. MS-SPRings can also carry more traffic than an SNCP ring  
operating at the same STM-N rate. Table 11-2 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of two-fiber  
MS-SPRings. The capacity is the STM-N rate divided by two, multiplied by the number of nodes in the  
ring and minus the number of pass-through VC4 circuits.  
Table 11-2  
Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Capacity  
STM Rate Working Bandwidth  
STM-4 VC4 1-2  
Protection Bandwidth  
Ring Capacity  
2 x N1 – PT2  
VC4 3-4  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.3 MS-SPRing Bandwidth  
Table 11-2  
Two-Fiber MS-SPRing Capacity (continued)  
STM Rate Working Bandwidth  
Protection Bandwidth  
VC4 9-16  
Ring Capacity  
STM-16  
STM-64  
VC4 1-8  
VC4 1-32  
8 x N – PT  
VC4 33-64  
32 x N – PT  
1. N equals the number of ONS 15454 SDH nodes configured as MS-SPRing nodes.  
2. PT equals the number of VC4 circuits passed through ONS 15454 SDH nodes in the ring. (Capacity can vary  
depending on the traffic pattern.)  
Table 11-3 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of four-fiber MS-SPRings.  
Table 11-3  
Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Capacity  
STM Rate Working Bandwidth  
Protection Bandwidth  
VC4 1-16 (Fiber 2)  
VC4 1-64 (Fiber 2)  
Ring Capacity  
16 x N – PT  
64 x N – PT  
STM-16  
STM-64  
VC4 1-16 (Fiber 1)  
VC4 1-64 (Fiber 1)  
Figure 11-7 shows an example of MS-SPRing bandwidth reuse. The same VC4 carries three different  
traffic sets simultaneously on different spans on the ring: one set from Node 3 to Node 1, one set from  
Node 1 to Node 2, and another set from Node 2 to Node 3.  
Figure 11-7  
MS-SPRing Bandwidth Reuse  
Node 0  
VC4#1  
VC4#1  
Node 3  
Node 1  
VC4#1  
VC4#1  
Node 2  
= Node 3 – Node 1 traffic  
= Node 1 – Node 2 traffic  
= Node 2 – Node 3 traffic  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.4 MS-SPRing Application Sample  
11.2.4 MS-SPRing Application Sample  
Figure 11-8 shows a sample two-fiber MS-SPRing implementation with five nodes. A regional  
long-distance network connects to other carriers at Node 0. Traffic is delivered to the service provider’s  
major hubs.  
•
•
•
Carrier 1 delivers six E-3s over two STM-1 spans to Node 0. Carrier 2 provides twelve E-3s directly.  
Node 0 receives the signals and delivers them around the ring to the appropriate node.  
The ring also brings 14 E-1s back from each remote site to Node 0. Intermediate nodes serve these  
shorter regional connections.  
The ONS 15454 SDH STM-1 card supports a total of four STM-1 ports so that two additional STM-1  
spans can be added at little cost.  
Figure 11-8  
Five-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing  
Carrier 1  
2 STM-1s  
56 local  
E-1s  
Carrier 2  
12 E-3s  
4 E-3s  
14 E-1s  
Node 0  
Node 1  
14 E-1s  
8 E-3s  
2 E-3s  
Node 4  
Node 2  
14 E-1s  
Node 3  
= Fiber 1  
= Fiber 2  
4 E-3s  
14 E-1s  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.4 MS-SPRing Application Sample  
Figure 11-9 shows the shelf assembly layout for Node 0, which has one free slot.  
Figure 11-9 Shelf Assembly Layout for Node 0 in Figure 11-8  
Lower Shelf  
Figure 11-10 shows the shelf assembly layout for the remaining sites in the ring. In this MS-SPRing  
configuration, an additional eight E-3s at Node IDs 1 and 3 can be activated. An additional four E-3s can  
be added at Node ID 4, and ten E-3s can be added at Node ID 2. Each site has free slots for future traffic  
needs.  
Figure 11-10  
Shelf Assembly Layout for Nodes 1 to 4 in Figure 11-8  
Lower Shelf  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.5 MS-SPRing Fiber Connections  
11.2.5 MS-SPRing Fiber Connections  
Plan your fiber connections and use the same plan for all MS-SPRing nodes. For example, make the east  
port the farthest slot to the right and the west port the farthest slot to the left. Plug fiber connected to an  
east port at one node into the west port on an adjacent node. Figure 11-11 shows fiber connections for a  
two-fiber MS-SPRing with trunk cards in Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east). Refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for fiber connection procedures.  
Note  
Always plug the transmit (Tx) connector of an STM-N card at one node into the receive (Rx)  
connector of an STM-N card at the adjacent node. Cards display an SF LED when Tx and Rx  
connections are mismatched.  
Figure 11-11  
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Two-Fiber MS-SPRing  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
West  
East  
West  
East  
Slot 5  
Slot 12  
Slot 5  
Slot 12  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
West  
East  
West  
East  
Slot 5  
Slot 12  
Slot 5  
Slot 12  
Node 4  
Node 3  
For four-fiber MS-SPRings, use the same east-west connection pattern for the working and protect  
fibers. Do not mix working and protect card connections. The MS-SPRing does not function if working  
and protect cards are interconnected. Figure 11-12 shows fiber connections for a four-fiber MS-SPRing.  
Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east) carry the working traffic. Slot 6 (west) and Slot 13 (east) carry the protect  
traffic.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.2.6 Two-Fiber MS-SPRing to Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Conversion  
Figure 11-12  
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Four-Fiber MS-SPRing  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
West  
East  
West  
East  
Slot Slot  
Slot Slot  
12 13  
Slot Slot  
Slot Slot  
12 13  
5
6
5
6
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
West  
East  
West  
East  
Slot Slot  
Slot Slot  
12 13  
Slot Slot  
Slot Slot  
12 13  
5
6
5
6
Node 4  
Node 3  
Working fibers  
11.2.6 Two-Fiber MS-SPRing to Four-Fiber MS-SPRing Conversion  
Two-fiber STM-16 or STM-64 MS-SPRings can be converted to four-fiber MS-SPRings. To convert the  
MS-SPRing, install two STM-16 or STM-64 cards at each two-fiber MS-SPRing node, then log into CTC  
and convert each node from two-fiber to four-fiber. The fibers that were divided into working and protect  
bandwidths for the two-fiber MS-SPRing are now fully allocated for working MS-SPRing traffic. Refer  
to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for MS-SPRing conversion procedures.  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection  
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) rings provide duplicate fiber paths in the network. Working  
traffic flows in one direction and protection traffic flows in the opposite direction. If a problem occurs  
in the working traffic path, the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction.  
With SNCP ring networks, switching occurs at the end of the path and is triggered by defects or alarms  
along the path.  
The network can be divided into a number of interconnected subnetworks. Within each subnetwork,  
protection is provided at the path level and the automatic protection switching between two paths is  
provided at the subnetwork boundaries. The node at the end of the path and the intermediate nodes in  
the path select the best traffic signal. The virtual container is not terminated at the intermediate node;  
instead, it compares the quality of the signal on the two incoming ports and selects the better signal.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection  
CTC automates ring configuration. SNCP ring network traffic is defined within the ONS 15454 SDH on  
a circuit-by-circuit basis. If an extended SNCP ring mesh network circuit is not defined within a 1+1 or  
MS-SPRing line protection scheme and path protection is available and specified, CTC uses an SNCP  
ring as the default protection mechanism.  
An SNCP ring circuit requires two DCC-provisioned optical spans per node. SNCP ring circuits can be  
created across these spans until their bandwidth is consumed.  
The span bandwidth consumed by an SNCP ring circuit is two times the circuit bandwidth because the  
circuit is duplicated. The cross-connection bandwidth consumed by an SNCP ring circuit is three times  
the circuit bandwidth at the source and destination nodes only. The cross-connection bandwidth  
consumed by an intermediate node has a factor of one.  
The SNCP ring circuit limit is the sum of the optical bandwidth containing 84 section data  
communication channels (SDCCs) or 28 line data communication channels (LDCCs), divided by two.  
The spans can be of any bandwidth from STM-1 to STM-64.  
Figure 11-13 shows a basic SNCP ring configuration. If Node A sends a signal to Node C, the working  
signal travels on the working traffic path through Node B.  
Figure 11-13  
Basic Four-Node SNCP Ring  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node A  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node D  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node B  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node C  
= Fiber 1  
= Fiber 2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection  
The same signal is also sent on the protect traffic path through Node D. If a fiber break occurs  
(Figure 11-14), Node C switches its active receiver to the protect signal coming through Node D.  
Figure 11-14  
SNCP Ring with a Fiber Break  
Source  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node A  
Span 4  
Span 1  
Span 5  
Span 8  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node D  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node B  
Span 6  
Span 7  
Span 2  
Span 3  
Destination  
Fiber  
break  
= Fiber 1  
= Fiber 2  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node C  
Because each traffic path is transported around the entire ring, SNCP rings are best suited for networks  
where traffic concentrates at one or two locations and is not widely distributed. SNCP ring capacity is  
equal to its bit rate. Services can originate and terminate on the same SNCP ring, or they can be passed  
to an adjacent access or interoffice ring for transport to the service-terminating node.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection  
Figure 11-15 shows a common SNCP ring application. STM-1 path circuits provide remote switch  
connectivity to a host V5.x switch. In the example, each remote switch requires eight E-1s to return to  
the host switch. Figure 11-16 on page 11-17 and Figure 11-17 on page 11-17 show the shelf layout for  
each node in the example.  
Figure 11-15  
STM-1 SNCP Ring  
V5.x  
Switch  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node A  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node D  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node B  
8 E-1s  
8 E-1s  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node C  
= Fiber 1  
= Fiber 2  
8 E-1s  
Node A has four E1-14 cards to provide 42 active E-1 ports. The other sites only require two E1-14 cards  
to carry the eight E-1s to and from the remote switch. You can use the other half of each ONS 15454 SDH  
shelf assembly to provide support for a second or third ring to other existing or planned remote sites.  
In this sample STM-1 SNCP ring, Node A contains four E1-14 cards and two STM-1 cards. Six free slots  
are available, which you can provision with cards or leave empty.  
Note  
Fill unused card slots with a blank faceplate (Cisco P/N 15454E-BLANK). The blank faceplate ensures  
proper airflow when operating the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Figure 11-16 shows the shelf setup for this sample configuration.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.3 Subnetwork Connection Protection  
Figure 11-16  
Card Setup of Node A in the STM-1 SNCP Ring Example  
Lower Shelf  
In Figure 11-15 on page 11-16, Nodes B through D each contain two E1-14 cards and two STM-1 cards.  
Eight free slots are available that you can provision with other cards or leave empty. Figure 11-17 shows  
the shelf assembly setup for this sample configuration.  
Figure 11-17  
Card Setup of Nodes B-D in the STM-1 SNCP Ring Example  
Lower Shelf  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4 Dual Ring Interconnect  
11.4 Dual Ring Interconnect  
Dual ring interconnect (DRI) topology provides an extra level of path protection for circuits on  
interconnected rings. DRI allows users to interconnect MS-SPRings, SNCPs, or an SNCP with an  
MS-SPRing, with additional protection provided at the transition nodes. In a DRI topology, ring  
interconnections occur at two or four nodes.  
The drop-and-continue DRI method is used for all ONS 15454 SDH DRIs. In drop-and-continue DRI, a  
primary node drops the traffic to the connected ring and routes traffic to a secondary node within the  
same ring. The secondary node also routes the traffic to the connected ring; that is, the traffic is dropped  
at two different interconnection nodes to eliminate single points of failure. To route circuits on DRI, you  
must choose the Dual Ring Interconnect option during circuit provisioning. Dual transmit is not  
supported.  
Two DRI topologies can be implemented on the ONS 15454 SDH:  
•
A traditional DRI requires two pairs of nodes to interconnect two networks. Each pair of  
user-defined primary and secondary nodes drops traffic over a pair of interconnection links to the  
other network.  
•
An integrated DRI requires one pair of nodes to interconnect two networks. The two interconnected  
nodes replace the interconnection ring.  
For DRI topologies, a hold-off timer sets the amount of time before a selector switch occurs. It reduces  
the likelihood of multiple switches, such as:  
•
•
Both a service selector and a path selector  
Both a line switch and a path switch of a service selector  
For example, if a SNCP DRI service selector switch does not restore traffic, then the path selector  
switches after the hold-off time. The SNCP DRI hold-off timer default is 100 ms. You can change this  
setting in the SNCP Selectors tab of the Edit Circuits window. For MS-SPRing DRI, if line switching  
does not restore traffic, then the service selector switches. The hold-off time delays the recovery  
provided by the service selector. The MS-SPRing DRI default hold-off time is 100 ms and cannot be  
changed.  
11.4.1 MS-SPRing DRI  
Unlike MS-SPRing automatic protection switching (APS) protocol, MS-SPRing DRI is a path-level  
protection protocol at the circuit level. Drop-and-continue MS-SPRing DRI requires a service selector  
in the primary node for each circuit routing to the other ring. Service selectors monitor signal conditions  
from dual feed sources and select the one that has the best signal quality. Same-side routing drops the  
traffic at primary nodes set up on the same side of the connected rings, and opposite-side routing drops  
the traffic at primary nodes set up on the opposite sides of the connected rings. For MS-SPRing DRI,  
primary and secondary nodes cannot be the circuit source or destination.  
Note  
A DRI circuit cannot be created if an intermediate node exists on the interconnecting link. However, an  
intermediate node can be added on the interconnecting link after the DRI circuit is created.  
DRI protection circuits act as protection channel access (PCA) circuits. In CTC, you set up DRI  
protection circuits by selecting the PCA option when setting up primary and secondary nodes during DRI  
circuit creation.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.1 MS-SPRing DRI  
Figure 11-18 shows ONS 15454 SDHs in a traditional MS-SPRing DRI topology with same-side  
routing. In Ring 1, Nodes 3 and 4 are the interconnect nodes, and in Ring 2, Nodes 8 and 9 are the  
interconnect nodes. Duplicate signals are sent between Node 4 (Ring 1) and Node 9 (Ring 2), and  
between Node 3 (Ring 1) and Node 8 (Ring 2). The primary nodes (Nodes 4 and 9) are on the same side,  
and the secondary nodes (Nodes 3 and 8) provide an alternative route. In Ring 1, traffic at Node 4 is  
dropped (to Node 9) and continued (to Node 10). Similarly, at Node 9, traffic is dropped (to Node 4) and  
continued (to Node 5).  
Figure 11-18  
ONS 15454 SDH Traditional MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect (Same-Side Routing)  
Node 1  
Node 5  
Node 2  
MS-SPRing  
Ring 1  
Primary  
Node  
Secondary  
Node  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 9  
Node 8  
Primary  
Node  
Secondary  
Node  
MS-SPRing  
Ring 2  
Node 10  
Node 7  
Node 6  
Drop and Continue  
Service Selector  
Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge  
Secondary Path  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.1 MS-SPRing DRI  
Figure 11-19 shows ONS 15454 SDHs in a traditional MS-SPRing DRI topology with opposite-side  
routing. In Ring 1, Nodes 3 and 4 are the interconnect nodes, and in Ring 2, Nodes 8 and 9 are the  
interconnect nodes. Duplicate signals are sent from Node 4 (Ring 1) to Node 8 (Ring 2), and between  
Node 3 (Ring 1) and Node 9 (Ring 2). In Ring 1, traffic at Node 4 is dropped (to Node 9) and continued  
(to Node 8). Similarly, at Node 8, traffic is dropped (to Node 3) and continued (to Node 4).  
Figure 11-19  
ONS 15454 SDH Traditional MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect (Opposite-Side  
Routing)  
Node 1  
Node 5  
Node 2  
MS-SPRing  
Ring 1  
Primary  
Node  
Secondary  
Node  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 9  
Node 8  
Secondary  
Node  
Primary  
Node  
MS-SPRing  
Ring 2  
Node 10  
Node 7  
Node 6  
Drop and Continue  
Service Selector  
Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge  
Secondary Path  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.1 MS-SPRing DRI  
Figure 11-20 shows ONS 15454 SDHs in an integrated MS-SPRing DRI topology. The same  
drop-and-continue traffic routing occurs at two nodes, rather than four. This is achieved by installing an  
additional STM-N trunk at the two interconnect nodes. Nodes 3 and 8 are the interconnect nodes.  
Figure 11-20  
ONS 15454 SDH Integrated MS-SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect  
Node 1  
Node 2  
MS-SPRing 1  
Node 4  
Primary  
Node 3  
Node 8  
Secondary  
Node 5  
MS-SPRing 2  
Node 7  
Node 6  
Service Selector  
Primary Path (working)  
Secondary Path (protection)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.2 SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect  
11.4.2 SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect  
The SNCP dual ring interconnect topology (SNCP DRI) provides an extra level of path protection  
between interconnected SNCP rings. In DRIs, traffic is dropped and continued at the interconnecting  
nodes to eliminate single points of failure. Two DRI topologies can be implemented on the  
ONS 15454 SDH. The traditional DRI uses four ONS 15454 SDHs at the interconnect nodes, while the  
integrated DRI uses two nodes.  
Figure 11-21 shows ONS 15454 SDHs in a traditional DRI topology. In Ring 1, Nodes 4 and 5 are the  
interconnect nodes, and in Ring 2, Nodes 6 and 7 are the interconnect nodes. Duplicate signals are sent  
from Node 4 (Ring 1) to Node 6 (Ring 2), and between Node 5 (Ring 1) and Node 7 (Ring 2). In Ring  
1, traffic at Node 4 is dropped (to Node 6) and continued (to Node 5). Similarly, at Node 5, traffic is  
dropped (to Node 7) and continued (to Node 4).  
To route circuits on the DRI, you must choose the DRI option during circuit provisioning. Circuits with  
the DRI option enabled are routed on the DRI path.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.2 SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect  
Figure 11-21  
ONS 15454 Traditional SDH Dual Ring Interconnect  
E1/E3/DS3I/GigE  
Node #1  
SNCP  
Node #3  
Node #2  
Ring 1  
Node #4  
Node #5  
Duplicate  
Signals  
Node #6  
Node #7  
Pass-through  
Node  
SNCP  
Ring 2  
E1/E3/DS3I/GigE  
Bridge  
Path Selector  
Primary Path - Primary  
Primary Path - Secondary  
Return Path - Primary  
Return Path - Secondary  
Figure 11-22 shows ONS 15454 SDHs in an integrated DRI topology. The same drop and continue traffic  
routing occurs at two nodes, rather than four. This is achieved by installing an additional STM-N trunk  
at the two interconnect nodes.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.2 SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect  
Figure 11-22  
ONS 15454 SDH Integrated Dual Ring Interconnect  
E1/E3/DS3I/GigE  
ONS 15454 SDH  
SNCP #1  
Duplicate  
Signals  
ONS 15454 SDH DRI  
Node 1 of 2 supporting  
two-rings with integrated  
high-order and low-order  
path grooming  
Cross  
Connect  
Cross  
Connect  
ONS 15454 SDH  
SNCP #2  
Pass-through  
Node  
E1/E3/DS3I/GigE  
Bridge  
Path Selector  
Primary Path - Primary  
Primary Path - Secondary  
Return Path - Primary  
Return Path - Secondary  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.4.3 SNCP/MS-SPRing DRI Handoff Configurations  
11.4.3 SNCP/MS-SPRing DRI Handoff Configurations  
SNCPs and MS-SPRings can also be interconnected. In SNCP/MS-SPRing DRI handoff configurations,  
primary and secondary nodes can be the circuit source or destination, which is useful when non-DCC  
optical interconnecting links are present. Figure 11-23 shows an example of an SNCP to MS-SPRing  
traditional DRI handoff.  
Figure 11-23  
ONS 15454 SDH SNCP to MS-SPRing Traditional DRI Handoff  
Node 5  
Node 2  
Node 1  
SNCP  
Node 4  
Node 3  
Node 6  
Node 7  
MS-SPRing  
Node 9  
Node 10  
Node 8  
Path Selector  
Bridge  
Primary Path (working)  
Secondary Path (protection)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.5 Subtending Rings  
Figure 11-24 shows an example of an SNCP to MS-SPRing integrated DRI handoff.  
Figure 11-24 ONS 15454 SDH SNCP to MS-SPRing Integrated DRI Handoff  
Node 5  
Node 2  
Node 1  
SNCP  
Node 4  
Node 3  
MS-SPRing  
Node 7  
Node 8  
Node 6  
Path Selector  
Bridge  
11.5 Subtending Rings  
The ONS 15454 SDH supports up to 84 SDH regenerator SDCCs or 28 LDCCs with TCC2/TCC2P  
cards. See Table 11-1 on page 11-1 for ring and regenerator SDCC and LDCC information.  
Subtending rings reduce the number of nodes and cards required and reduce external shelf-to-shelf  
cabling. Figure 11-25 shows an ONS 15454 SDH with multiple subtending rings.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.5 Subtending Rings  
Figure 11-25  
ONS 15454 SDH with Multiple Subtending Rings  
SNCP  
SNCP  
SNCP  
or MS-SPRing  
SNCP  
SNCP  
or  
MS-SPRing  
Figure 11-26 shows an SNCP ring subtending from an MS-SPRing. In this example, Node 3 is the only  
node serving both the MS-SPRing and SNCP ring. STM-N cards in Slots 5 and 12 serve the MS-SPRing,  
and STM-N cards in Slots 6 and 13 serve the SNCP ring.  
Figure 11-26  
SNCP Ring Subtending from an MS-SPRing  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Slot 5  
Slot 6  
Slot 13  
Slot 12  
SNCP  
Slot 13 Slot 12  
MS-SPRing  
Slot 6  
Slot 5  
Node 3  
Slot 5  
Slot 12  
Node 2  
The ONS 15454 SDH can support five MS-SPRings on the same node. This allows you to deploy an  
ONS 15454 SDH in applications requiring SDH Digital Cross-connect Systems (DCSs) or multiple SDH  
add/drop multiplexers (ADMs).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.6 Linear ADM Configurations  
Figure 11-27 shows two MS-SPRings shared by one ONS 15454 SDH. Ring 1 runs on Nodes 1, 2, 3, and  
4. Ring 2 runs on Nodes 4, 5, 6, and 7. Two MS-SPRing, Ring 1 and Ring 2, are provisioned on Node 4.  
Ring 1 uses cards in Slots 5 and 12, and Ring 2 uses cards in Slots 6 and 13.  
Note  
Nodes in different MS-SPRings can have the same or different node IDs.  
Figure 11-27  
MS-SPRing Subtending from an MS-SPRing  
Node 1  
Node 5  
Slot 5  
West  
Slot 12  
East  
Slot 6  
West  
East  
Slot 13  
Slot 12  
East  
Slot 5  
West  
Slot 13  
East  
Slot 6  
West  
MS-SPRing 1  
MS-SPRing 2  
Node 2  
Node 6  
Slot 5  
West  
Slot 12  
East  
Slot 6  
West  
Slot 13  
East  
Node 4  
Slot 12  
East  
Slot 5  
West  
Slot 13  
East  
Slot 6  
West  
Node 3  
Node 7  
After subtending two MS-SPRings, you can route circuits from nodes in one ring to nodes in the second  
ring. For example, in Figure 11-27 you can route a circuit from Node 1 to Node 7. The circuit would  
normally travel from Node 1 to Node 4 to Node 7. If fiber breaks occur, for example between Nodes 1  
and 4 and Nodes 4 and 7, traffic is rerouted around each ring: in this example, Nodes 2 and 3 in Ring 1  
and Nodes 5 and 6 in Ring 2.  
11.6 Linear ADM Configurations  
You can configure ONS 15454 SDHs as a line of add/drop multiplexers (ADMs) by configuring one set  
of STM-N cards as the working path and a second set as the protect path. Unlike rings, linear  
(point-to-point) ADMs require that the STM-N cards at each node be in 1+1 protection to ensure that a  
break to the working line is automatically routed to the protect line.  
Figure 11-28 shows three ONS 15454 SDH nodes in a linear ADM configuration. Working traffic flows  
from Node 1/Slot 5 to Node 2/Slot 5, and from Node 2/Slot 12 to Node 3/Slot 12. You create the protect  
path by placing Slot 6 in 1+1 protection with Slot 5 at Nodes 1 and 2, and placing Slot 12 in  
1+1 protection with Slot 13 at Nodes 2 and 3.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.7 Extended SNCP Mesh Networks  
Figure 11-28  
Linear (Point-to-Point) ADM Configuration  
Slot 5 to Slot 5  
Slot 6 to Slot 6  
Slot 12 to Slot 12  
Slot 13 to Slot 13  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Protect Path  
Working Path  
11.7 Extended SNCP Mesh Networks  
In addition to single MS-SPRings, SNCP rings, and ADMs, you can extend ONS 15454 SDH traffic  
protection by creating extended SNCP mesh networks. Extended SNCP rings include multiple  
ONS 15454 SDH topologies and extend the protection provided by a single SNCP ring to the meshed  
architecture of several interconnecting rings.  
In an extended SNCP ring, circuits travel diverse paths through a network of single or multiple meshed  
rings. When you create circuits, you can provision CTC to automatically route circuits across the  
Extended SNCP ring, or you can manually route them. You can also choose levels of circuit protection.  
For example, if you choose full protection, CTC creates an alternate route for the circuit in addition to  
the main route. The second route follows a unique path through the network between the source and  
destination and sets up a second set of cross-connections.  
For example, in Figure 11-29, a circuit is created from Node 3 to Node 9. CTC determines that the  
shortest route between the two nodes passes through Node 8 and Node 7, shown by the dotted line, and  
automatically creates cross-connections at Nodes, 3, 8, 7, and 9 to provide the primary circuit path.  
If full protection is selected, CTC creates a second unique route between Nodes 3 and 9 which, in this  
example, passes through Nodes 2, 1, and 11. Cross-connections are automatically created at Nodes 3, 2,  
1, 11, and 9, shown by the dashed line. If a failure occurs on the primary path, traffic switches to the  
second circuit path. In this example, Node 9 switches from the traffic coming in from Node 7 to the  
traffic coming in from Node 11 and service resumes. The switch occurs within 50 ms.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.7 Extended SNCP Mesh Networks  
Figure 11-29  
Extended SNCP Mesh Network  
Source  
Node  
Node 3  
Node 5  
Node 2  
Node 4  
Node 1  
Node 10  
Node 8  
Node 6  
Node 7  
Protect traffic  
Node 9  
Node 11  
Destination  
Node  
= Primary path  
= Secondary path  
Extended SNCP rings also allow spans with different SDH speeds to be mixed together in “virtual rings.”  
Figure 11-30 shows Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in a standard STM-16 ring. Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 link to the  
backbone ring through STM-4 fiber. The “virtual ring” formed by Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 uses both STM-16  
and STM-4 cards.  
Figure 11-30  
Extended SNCP Virtual Ring  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 5  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 1  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 4  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 8  
STM-4  
STM-4  
STM-16 SNCP  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 6  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 2  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 3  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Node 7  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.8 Four Node Configurations  
11.8 Four Node Configurations  
You can link multiple ONS 15454 SDHs using their STM-N cards (that is, create a fiber-optic bus) to  
accommodate more access traffic than a single ONS 15454 SDH can support. Refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for more information. You can link nodes with STM-4 or  
STM-16 fiber spans as you would link any other two network nodes. The nodes can be grouped in one  
facility to aggregate more local traffic. Each shelf assembly is recognized as a separate node in the  
ONS 15454 SDH software interface and traffic is mapped using CTC cross-connect options.  
11.9 STM-N Speed Upgrades  
A span is the optical fiber connection between two ONS 15454 SDH nodes. In a span (optical speed)  
upgrade, the transmission rate of a span is upgraded from a lower to a higher STM-N signal but all other  
span configuration attributes remain unchanged. With multiple nodes, a span upgrade is a coordinated  
series of upgrades on all nodes in the ring or protection group. You can perform in-service span upgrades  
for the following ONS 15454 SDH cards:  
•
•
•
Single-port STM-4 to STM-16  
Single-port STM-4 to STM-64  
STM-16 to STM-64  
You can also perform in-service card upgrades for the following ONS15454 cards:  
•
•
Four-port STM-1 to eight-port STM-1  
Single-port STM-4 to four-port STM-4  
Note  
Since the four-port STM-1 to eight-port STM-1 cards and the single-port STM-4 to four-port STM-4  
cards are the same speed, they are not considered span upgrades.  
To perform a span upgrade, the higher-rate optical card must replace the lower-rate card in the same slot.  
If the upgrade is conducted on spans residing in an MS-SPRing, all spans in the ring must be upgraded.  
The protection configuration of the original lower-rate optical card (two-fiber MS-SPRing, four-fiber  
MS-SPRing, SNCP ring, and 1+1) is retained for the higher-rate STM-N card.  
When performing span upgrades on a large number of nodes, we recommend that you upgrade all spans  
in a ring consecutively and in the same maintenance window. Until all spans are upgraded, mismatched  
card types are present.  
We recommend using the Span Upgrade Wizard to perform span upgrades. Although you can also use  
the manual span upgrade procedures, the manual procedures are mainly provided as error recovery for  
the wizard. The Span Upgrade Wizard and the Manual Span Upgrade procedures require at least two  
technicians (one at each end of the span) who can communicate with each other during the upgrade.  
Upgrading a span is non-service affecting and causes no more than three switches, each of which is less  
than 50 ms in duration.  
Note  
Span upgrades do not upgrade SDH topologies, for example, a 1+1 group to a two-fiber MS-SPRing.  
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide for topology upgrade procedures.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 11 SDH Topologies and Upgrades  
11.9.1 Span Upgrade Wizard  
11.9.1 Span Upgrade Wizard  
The Span Upgrade Wizard automates all steps in the manual span upgrade procedure (MS-SPRing,  
SNCP ring, and 1+1). The wizard can upgrade both lines on one side of a four-fiber MS-SPRing or both  
lines of a 1+1 group; the wizard upgrades SNCP rings and two-fiber MS-SPRings one line at a time. The  
Span Upgrade Wizard requires that spans have DCCs enabled.  
The Span Upgrade Wizard provides no way to back out of an upgrade. In the case of an error, you must  
exit the wizard and initiate the manual procedure to either continue with the upgrade or back out of it.  
To continue with the manual procedure, examine the standing conditions and alarms to identify the stage  
in which the wizard failure occurred.  
11.9.2 Manual Span Upgrades  
Manual Span Upgrades are mainly provided as error recovery for the Span Upgrade Wizard, but they can  
be used to perform span upgrades. Downgrading can be performed to back out of a span upgrade. The  
procedure for downgrading is the same as upgrading except that you choose a lower-rate card type. You  
cannot downgrade if circuits exist on the VCs that will be removed (the higher VCs).  
Procedures for manual span upgrades can be found in the “Upgrade Cards and Spans” chapter in the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide. Five manual span upgrade options are available:  
•
•
•
•
•
Upgrade on a two-fiber MS-SPRing  
Upgrade on a four-fiber MS-SPRing  
Upgrade on an SNCP ring  
Upgrade on a 1+1 protection group  
Upgrade on an unprotected span  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
11-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C H A P T E R  
12  
CTC Network Connectivity  
This chapter provides nine scenarios showing Cisco ONS 15454 SDH nodes in common IP network  
configurations as well as information about provisionable patchcords, the routing table, external  
firewalls, and open gateway network element (GNE) networks. The chapter does not provide a  
comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures. For IP set up instructions, refer  
to the “Turn Up Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
12.1 IP Networking Overview, page 12-1  
12.2 IP Addressing Scenarios, page 12-2  
12.3 Provisionable Patchcords, page 12-21  
12.4 Routing Table, page 12-23  
12.5 External Firewalls, page 12-25  
12.6 Open GNE, page 12-27  
Note  
To connect ONS 15454 SDH nodes to an IP network, you must work with a LAN administrator or other  
individual at your site who has IP networking training and experience.  
12.1 IP Networking Overview  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes can be connected in many different ways within an IP environment:  
•
•
They can be connected to LANs through direct connections or a router.  
IP subnetting can create ONS 15454 SDH login node groups that allow you to provision non-data  
communications channel (DCC) connected nodes in a network.  
•
Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals. For example,  
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 SDH to serve  
as a gateway for ONS 15454 SDH nodes that are not connected to the LAN.  
•
•
Static routes can be created to enable connections among multiple Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)  
sessions with ONS 15454 SDH nodes that reside on the same subnet with multiple CTC sessions.  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes can be connected to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) networks so  
ONS 15454 SDH network information is automatically communicated across multiple LANs and  
WANs.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2 IP Addressing Scenarios  
•
The ONS 15454 SDH proxy server can control the visibility and accessibility between CTC  
computers and ONS 15454 SDH element nodes.  
12.2 IP Addressing Scenarios  
ONS 15454 SDH IP addressing generally has eight common scenarios or configurations. Use the  
scenarios as building blocks for more complex network configurations. Table 12-1 provides a general  
list of items to check when setting up ONS 15454 SDH nodes in IP networks.  
Table 12-1  
General ONS 15454 SDH IP Troubleshooting Checklist  
Item  
What to check  
Link integrity  
Verify that link integrity exists between:  
•
•
CTC computer and network hub/switch  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes (MIC-C/T/P wire-wrap pins or RJ-45 port) and  
network hub/switch  
•
Router ports and hub/switch ports  
ONS 15454 SDH  
hub/switch ports  
If connectivity problems occur, set the hub or switch port that is connected to  
the ONS 15454 SDH to 10 Mbps half-duplex.  
Ping  
Ping the node to test connections between computers and ONS 15454 SDH  
nodes.  
IP addresses/subnet  
masks  
Verify that ONS 15454 SDH IP addresses and subnet masks are set up  
correctly.  
Optical connectivity Verify that ONS 15454 SDH optical trunk (span) ports are in service and that  
a DCC is enabled on each trunk port.  
Note  
The ONS 15454 secure mode option is available when TCC2/TCC2P cards are installed. Secure mode  
allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node, one for the MIC-C/T/P LAN port and one for the  
TCC2/TCC2P TCP/IP port. Secure mode IP addressing is described in the “12.2.9 Scenario 9: IP  
Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled” section on page 12-19. IP addresses shown in the other  
scenarios assume secure mode is not enabled or, if enabled, the IP addresses shown in the examples apply  
to the MIC-C/T/P LAN port.  
12.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes on Same Subnet  
Scenario 1 shows a basic ONS 15454 SDH LAN configuration (Figure 12-1). The ONS 15454 SDH  
nodes and CTC computer reside on the same subnet. All ONS 15454 SDH nodes connect to LAN A and  
all ONS 15454 SDH nodes have DCC connections.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Connected to a Router  
Figure 12-1  
Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = N/A  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN A  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.1.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.1.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
IP Address 192.168.1.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
12.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Connected to a Router  
In Scenario 2 the CTC computer resides on a subnet (192.168.1.0) and attaches to LAN A (Figure 12-2).  
The ONS 15454 SDH nodes reside on a different subnet (192.168.2.0) and attach to LAN B. A router  
connects LAN A to LAN B. The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A (192.168.1.1), and the  
IP address of router interface B is set to LAN B (192.168.2.1).  
On the CTC computer, the default gateway is set to router interface A. If the LAN uses Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically. In the  
example shown in Figure 12-2, a DHCP server is not available.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 SDH Gateway  
Figure 12-2  
Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Connected to Router  
LAN A  
Int "A"  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1  
Host Routes = N/A  
Int "B" Router  
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1  
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN B  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.2.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes = N/A  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.2.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.2.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes = N/A  
12.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 SDH Gateway  
ARP matches higher-level IP addresses to the physical addresses of the destination host. It uses a lookup  
table (called an ARP cache) to perform the translation. When the address is not found in the ARP cache,  
a broadcast is sent out on the network with a special format called the ARP request. If one of the  
machines on the network recognizes its own IP address in the request, it sends an ARP reply back to the  
requesting host. The reply contains the physical hardware address of the receiving host. The requesting  
host stores this address in its ARP cache so that all subsequent datagrams (packets) to this destination  
IP address can be translated to a physical address.  
Proxy ARP enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 SDH to respond to the ARP request for  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes that are not connected to the LAN. (ONS 15454 SDH proxy ARP requires no  
user configuration.) The DCC-connected ONS 15454 SDH nodes must reside on the same subnet. When  
a LAN device sends an ARP request to an ONS 15454 SDH that is not connected to the LAN, the  
gateway ONS 15454 SDH returns its MAC address to the LAN device. The LAN device then sends the  
datagram for the remote ONS 15454 SDH to the MAC address of the proxy ONS 15454 SDH. The proxy  
ONS 15454 SDH uses its routing table to forward the datagram to the non-LAN ONS 15454 SDH.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 SDH Gateway  
Scenario 3 is similar to Scenario 1, but only one ONS 15454 SDH (#1) connects to the LAN  
(Figure 12-3). Two ONS 15454 SDH nodes (#2 and #3) connect to ONS 15454 SDH #1 through the SDH  
DCC. Because all three nodes are on the same subnet, proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 SDH #1 to serve  
as a gateway for ONS 15454 SDH #2 and #3.  
Note  
This scenario assumes all CTC connections are to ONS 15454 SDH #1. If you connect a laptop to  
ONS 15454 SDH #2 or #3, network partitioning occurs; neither the laptop or the CTC computer can see  
all nodes. If you want laptops to connect directly to end network elements, you need to create static  
routes (see Scenario 5) or enable the ONS 15454 SDH proxy server (see Scenario 7).  
Figure 12-3  
Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = N/A  
LAN A  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.1.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.1.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
IP Address 192.168.1.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
You can also use proxy ARP to communicate with hosts attached to the craft Ethernet ports of  
DCC-connected nodes (Figure 12-4). The node with an attached host must have a static route to the host.  
Static routes are propagated to all DCC peers using OSPF. The existing proxy ARP node is the gateway  
for additional hosts. Each node examines its routing table for routes to hosts that are not connected to  
the DCC network but are within the subnet. The existing proxy server replies to ARP requests for these  
additional hosts with the node MAC address. The existence of the host route in the routing table ensures  
that the IP packets addressed to the additional hosts are routed properly. Other than establishing a static  
route between a node and an additional host, no provisioning is necessary. The following restrictions  
apply:  
•
•
Only one node acts as the proxy ARP server for any given additional host.  
A node cannot be the proxy ARP server for a host connected to its Ethernet port.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer  
In Figure 12-4, ONS 15454 SDH #1 announces to ONS 15454 SDH #2 and #3 that it can reach the CTC  
host. Similarly, ONS 15454 SDH #3 announces that it can reach the ONS 152xx. The ONS 152xx is  
shown as an example; any network element can be set up as an additional host.  
Figure 12-4  
Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = N/A  
LAN A  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.1.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.100  
Mask 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop 192.168.1.30  
ONS 152xx  
SDH RING  
IP Address 192.168.1.31  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.1.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.1.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.31  
Mask 255.255.255.255  
Next Hop 192.168.1.30  
12.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer  
Scenario 4 is similar to Scenario 3, but Nodes 2 and 3 reside on different subnets, 192.168.2.0 and  
192.168.3.0, respectively (Figure 12-5). Node 1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192.168.1.0. Proxy  
ARP is not used because the network includes different subnets. In order for the CTC computer to  
communicate with Nodes 2 and 3, Node 1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC computer.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs  
Figure 12-5  
Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.10  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN A  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.1.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.2.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
IP Address 192.168.3.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
12.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs  
Static routes are used for two purposes:  
•
To connect ONS 15454 SDH nodes to CTC sessions on one subnet that are connected by a router to  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes residing on another subnet. (These static routes are not needed if OSPF is  
enabled.) Scenario 6 shows an OSPF example.  
•
To enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454 SDH nodes residing on the same subnet.  
In Figure 12-6, one CTC residing on subnet 192.168.1.0 connects to a router through interface A. (The  
router is not set up with OSPF.) ONS 15454 SDH nodes residing on different subnets are connected  
through Node 1 to the router through interface B. Because Nodes 2 and 3 are on different subnets, proxy  
ARP does not enable Node 1 as a gateway. To connect to CTC computers on LAN A, a static route is  
created on Node 1.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs  
Figure 12-6  
Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination  
Static Routes:  
Destination = 192.168.0.0 Destination = 192.168.4.0  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1  
LAN A  
Int "A"  
Int "B"  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN B  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.2.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes  
Destination 192.168.1.0  
Mask 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop 192.168.2.1  
Cost = 2  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.3.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.4.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
The destination and subnet mask entries control access to the ONS 15454 SDH nodes:  
•
•
•
If a single CTC computer is connected to a router, enter the complete CTC “host route” IP address  
as the destination with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.  
If CTC computers on a subnet are connected to a router, enter the destination subnet (in this example,  
192.168.1.0) and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.  
If all CTC computers are connected to a router, enter a destination of 0.0.0.0 and a subnet mask of  
0.0.0.0. Figure 12-7 shows an example.  
The IP address of router interface B is entered as the next hop, and the cost (number of hops from source  
to destination) is 2.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF  
Figure 12-7  
Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations  
Router #2:  
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-A = 192.168.1.10  
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-C = 192.168.5.1  
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Static Routes:  
Destination = 192.168.0.0 Destination = 192.168.4.0  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop = 192.168.1.1 Next Hop = 192.168.5.1  
LAN A  
Router #1  
IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1  
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Int "A"  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1  
Host Routes = N/A  
Destination = 192.168.0.0 Destination = 192.168.4.0  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Next Hop = 192.168.2.10 Next Hop = 192.168.5.1  
Int "B"  
LAN B  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.2.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes  
Destination 0.0.0.0  
Mask 0.0.0.0  
Next Hop 192.168.2.1  
Cost = 2  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.2.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.2.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
12.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF  
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link state Internet routing protocol. Link state protocols use a “hello  
protocol” to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their  
neighbors. Link state protocols advertise their directly connected networks and their active links. Each  
link state router captures the link state “advertisements” and puts them together to create a topology of  
the entire network or area. From this database, the router calculates a routing table by constructing a  
shortest path tree. Routes are continuously recalculated to capture ongoing topology changes.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes use the OSPF protocol in internal ONS 15454 SDH networks for node discovery,  
circuit routing, and node management. You can enable OSPF on the ONS 15454 SDH nodes so that the  
ONS 15454 SDH topology is sent to OSPF routers on a LAN. Advertising the ONS 15454 SDH network  
topology to LAN routers eliminates the need to enter static routes for ONS 15454 SDH subnetworks  
manually.  
OSPF divides networks into smaller regions, called areas. An area is a collection of networked end  
systems, routers, and transmission facilities organized by traffic patterns. Each OSPF area has a unique  
ID number, known as the area ID. Every OSPF network has one backbone area called “area 0.” All other  
OSPF areas must connect to area 0.  
When you enable an ONS 15454 SDH OSPF topology for advertising to an OSPF network, you must  
assign an OSPF area ID to the ONS 15454 SDH network. Coordinate the area ID number assignment  
with your LAN administrator. All DCC-connected ONS 15454 SDH nodes should be assigned the same  
OSPF area ID.  
Figure 12-8 shows a network enabled for OSPF.  
Figure 12-8  
Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled  
Router  
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1  
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
LAN A  
Int "A"  
CTC Workstation  
Int "B"  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN B  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.2.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes = N/A  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.3.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.4.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
Figure 12-9 shows the same network as Figure 12-8 on page 12-10without OSPF. Static routes must be  
manually added to the router for CTC computers on LAN A to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 because  
these nodes reside on different subnets.  
Figure 12-9  
Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled  
Router  
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1  
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.3.20 Next Hop 192.168.2.10  
Destination 192.168.4.30 Next Hop 192.168.2.10  
LAN A  
Int "A"  
Int "B"  
CTC Workstation  
IP Address 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1  
Host Routes = N/A  
LAN B  
ONS 15454 SDH #1  
IP Address 192.168.2.10  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = 192.168.2.1  
Static Routes  
Destination = 192.168.1.100  
Mask = 255.255.255.255  
Next Hop = 192.168.2.1  
Cost = 2  
SDH RING  
ONS 15454 SDH #2  
IP Address 192.168.3.20  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
ONS 15454 SDH #3  
IP Address 192.168.4.30  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
Default Router = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
Static Routes = N/A  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
The ONS 15454 SDH proxy server is a set of functions that allows you to network ONS 15454 SDH  
nodes in environments where visibility and accessibility between ONS 15454 SDH nodes and CTC  
computers must be restricted. For example, you can set up a network so that field technicians and  
network operating center (NOC) personnel can access the same ONS 15454 SDH nodes while preventing  
the field technicians from accessing the NOC LAN. To do this, one ONS 15454 SDH is provisioned as  
a gateway network element (GNE) and the other ONS 15454 SDH nodes are provisioned as external  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
network elements (ENEs). The GNE tunnels connections between CTC computers and ENE  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes, providing management capability while preventing access for non-ONS 15454  
SDH management purposes.  
The ONS 15454 SDH proxy server performs the following tasks:  
•
Isolates DCC IP traffic from Ethernet (craft port) traffic and accepts packets based on filtering rules.  
The filtering rules (see Table 12-3 on page 12-16 and Table 12-4 on page 12-17) depend on whether  
the packet arrives at the ONS 15454 SDH DCC or TCC2/TCC2P Ethernet interface.  
•
•
Processes SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) and NTP (Network Time Protocol) requests.  
ENEs can derive time-of-day from an SNTP/NTP LAN server through the GNE ONS 15454 SDH.  
Processes SNMPv1 traps. The GNE ONS 15454 SDH receives SNMPv1 traps from the ENE  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes and forwards them to all provisioned SNMPv1 trap destinations.  
The ONS 15454 SDH proxy server is provisioned using the Enable proxy server on port check box on  
the Provisioning > Network > General tab (Figure 12-10). If checked, the ONS 15454 SDH serves as a  
proxy for connections between CTC clients and ONS 15454 SDHs that are DCC-connected to the proxy  
ONS 15454 SDH. The CTC client establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy  
node. The CTC client can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs.  
If not selected, the node does not proxy for any CTC clients, although any established proxy connections  
continue until the CTC client exits. In addition, you can set the proxy server as an ENE or a GNE:  
Note  
If you launch CTC against a node through a NAT (Network Address Translation) or PAT (Port  
Address Translation) router and that node does not have proxy enabled, your CTC session starts  
and initially appears to be fine. However CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and  
reconnects every two minutes. If the proxy is accidentally disabled, it is still possible to enable  
the proxy during a reconnect cycle and recover your ability to manage the node, even through a  
NAT/PAT firewall.  
•
External Network Element (ENE)—If set as an ENE, the ONS 15454 SDH neither installs nor  
advertises default or static routes. CTC computers can communicate with the ONS 15454 SDH using  
the TCC2/TCC2P craft port, but they cannot communicate directly with any other DCC-connected  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic from being routed  
between the DCC and the LAN port. The ONS 15454 SDH can communicate with machines  
connected to the LAN port or connected through the DCC. However, the DCC-connected machines  
cannot communicate with the LAN-connected machines, and the LAN-connected machines cannot  
communicate with the DCC-connected machines. A CTC client using the LAN to connect to the  
firewall-enabled node can use the proxy capability to manage the DCC-connected nodes that would  
otherwise be unreachable. A CTC client connected to a DCC-connected node can only manage other  
DCC-connected nodes and the firewall itself.  
•
•
Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If set as a GNE, the CTC computer is visible to other  
DCC-connected nodes and firewall is enabled.  
Proxy-only—If Proxy-only is selected, CTC cannot communicate with any other DCC-connected  
ONS 15454 SDHs and firewall is not enabled.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
Figure 12-10  
Proxy Server Gateway Settings  
Figure 12-11 shows an ONS 15454 SDH proxy server implementation. A GNE ONS 15454 SDH is  
connected to a central office LAN and to ENE ONS 15454 SDH nodes. The central office LAN is  
connected to a NOC LAN, which has CTC computers. The NOC CTC computer and craft technicians  
must be able to access the ONS 15454 SDH ENEs. However, the craft technicians must be prevented  
from accessing or seeing the NOC or central office LANs.  
In the example, the ONS 15454 SDH GNE is assigned an IP address within the central office LAN and  
is physically connected to the LAN through its LAN port. ONS 15454 SDH ENEs are assigned IP  
addresses that are outside the central office LAN and given private network IP addresses. If the  
ONS 15454 SDH ENEs are collocated, the craft LAN ports could be connected to a hub. However, the  
hub should have no other network connections.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
Figure 12-11  
Scenario 7: SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
GNE  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
10.10.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
10.10.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
10.10.10.200/24  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Table 12-2 shows recommended settings for ONS 15454 SDH GNEs and ENEs in the configuration  
shown in Figure 12-11.  
Table 12-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Gateway and Element NE Settings  
Setting  
ONS 15454 SDH Gateway NE ONS 15454 SDH Element NE  
Craft Access Only  
Enable Proxy  
Enable Firewall  
OSPF  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
SNTP Server (if used) SNTP server IP address  
SNMP (if used) SNMPv1 trap destinations  
Set to ONS 15454 SDH GNE IP address  
Set SNMPv1 trap destinations to  
ONS 15454 SDH GNE, port 391  
Figure 12-12 shows the same proxy server implementation with ONS 15454 SDH ENEs on different  
subnets. In the example, ONS 15454 SDH GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in  
Table 12-2.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
Figure 12-12  
Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
GNE  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.200/24  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server  
Figure 12-13 shows the implementation with ONS 15454 SDH ENEs in multiple rings. In the example,  
ONS 15454 SDH GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in Table 12-2 on page 12-14.  
Figure 12-13  
Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SDH Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
GNE  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
GNE  
10.10.10.200/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.60.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
192.168.10.200/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ONS 15454 SDH  
ENE  
ENE  
192.168.80.250/24  
192.168.70.200/24  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Table 12-3 shows the rules the ONS 15454 SDH follows to filter packets when Enable Firewall is  
enabled.  
Table 12-3  
Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules  
Packets Arriving At: Are Accepted if the IP Destination Address is:  
TCC2/TCC2P  
Ethernet interface  
•
•
•
The ONS 15454 SDH itself  
The ONS 15454 SDH node’s subnet broadcast address  
Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network (reserved network used for standard  
multicast messages)  
•
•
•
•
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.255  
DCC interface  
The ONS 15454 SDH itself  
Any destination connected through another DCC interface  
Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet  
If the packet is addressed to the ONS 15454 SDH, additional rules shown in Table 12-4 apply. Rejected  
packets are silently discarded.  
Table 12-4  
Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to ONS 15454 SDH  
Packets Arriving At  
Accepts  
Rejects  
TCC2/TCC2P  
Ethernet interface  
•
All UDP packets except those in  
the Rejected column  
•
•
•
•
UDP packets addressed to the  
SNMP trap relay port (391)  
DCC interface  
•
•
All UDP packets  
TCP packets addressed to the  
Telnet port  
All TCP packets except those in  
the Rejected column  
TCP packets addressed to the  
proxy server port  
•
•
OSPF packets  
ICMP packets  
All packets other than UDP, TCP,  
OSPF, and ICMP.  
If you implement the proxy server, keep the following rules in mind:  
•
All DCC-connected ONS 15454 SDH nodes on the same Ethernet segment must have the same  
Craft Access Only setting. Mixed values produce unpredictable results, and might leave some nodes  
unreachable through the shared Ethernet segment.  
•
All DCC-connected ONS 15454 SDH nodes on the same Ethernet segment must have the same  
Enable Firewall setting. Mixed values produce unpredictable results. Some nodes might become  
unreachable.  
•
•
If you check Enable Firewall, always check Enable Proxy. If Enable Proxy is not checked, CTC  
cannot see nodes on the DCC side of the ONS 15454 SDH.  
If Craft Access Only is checked, check Enable Proxy. If Enable Proxy is not checked, CTC cannot  
see nodes on the DCC side of the ONS 15454 SDH.  
If nodes become unreachable in cases 1, 2, and 3, you can correct the setting by performing one of the  
following:  
•
Disconnect the craft computer from the unreachable ONS 15454 SDH. Connect to the  
ONS 15454 SDH through another ONS 15454 SDH in the network that has a DCC connection to the  
unreachable ONS 15454 SDH.  
•
Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the unreachable ONS 15454 SDH. Connect a CTC computer  
directly to the ONS 15454 SDH.  
12.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet  
The ONS 15454 SDH provides GNE load balancing, which allows CTC to reach ENEs over multiple  
GNEs without the ENEs being advertised over OSPF. This feature allows a network to quickly recover  
from the loss of GNE, even if the GNE is on a different subnet. If a GNE fails, all connections through  
that GNE fail. CTC disconnects from the failed GNE and from all ENEs for which the GNE was a proxy,  
and then reconnects through the remaining GNEs. GNE load balancing reduces the dependency on the  
launch GNE and DCC bandwidth, both of which enhance CTC performance. Figure 12-14 shows a  
network with dual GNEs on the same subnet.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet  
Figure 12-14  
Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.10.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.10.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.10.10.200/24  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled  
Figure 12-15 shows a network with dual GNEs on different subnets.  
Figure 12-15  
Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
Interface 0/2  
10.20.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
10.20.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
10.20.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
192.168.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
192.168.10.200/24  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
12.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled  
TCC2/TCC2P cards provide a secure mode option allowing you to provision two IP addresses for the  
ONS 15454. One IP address is provisioned for the ONS 15454 SDH MIC-C/T/P LAN port. The other IP  
address is provisioned for the TCC2/TCC2P TCP/IP craft port. The two IP addresses provide an  
additional layer of separation between the craft access port and the ONS 15454 SDH LAN. If secure  
mode is enabled, the IP addresses provisioned for the TCC2/TCC2P TCP/IP ports must follow general  
IP addressing guidelines. In addition, TCC2/TCC2P IP addresses must reside on a different subnet from  
the ONS 15454 SDH MIC-C/T/P port and ONS 15454 SDH default router IP addresses.  
The IP address assigned to the MIC-C/T/P LAN port becomes a private address, which is used to connect  
the ONS 15454 SDH GNE to an OSS (Operations Support System) through a central office LAN or  
private enterprise network. In secure mode, the MIC-C/T/P LAN IP address is not displayed on the CTC  
node view or to a technician directly connected to the node by default. This default can be changed to  
allow the MIC-C/T/P IP address to be displayed on CTC only by a Superuser.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled  
Figure 12-16 shows an example of ONS 15454 SDH nodes on the same subnet with secure mode  
enabled.In the example, TCC2P port addresses are on a different subnet from the node MIC-C/T/P IP  
addresses.  
Note  
Secure mode is not available if TCC2 cards are installed, or if only one TCC2P card is installed.  
Figure 12-16  
Scenario 9: ONS 15454 SDH GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode  
Enabled  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Gateway NE  
MIC-C/T/P - 10.10.10.100/24  
TCC2P - 176.20.20.40/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.150/24 - MIC-C/T/P  
176.20.20.10/24 - TCC2P  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
MIC-C/T/P - 10.10.10.250/24  
TCC2P - 176.20.20.30/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.200/24 - MIC-C/T/P  
176.20.20.20/24 - TCC2P  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.3 Provisionable Patchcords  
Figure 12-17 shows an example of ONS 15454 nodes connected to a router with secure mode enabled.  
In the example, TCC2P port addresses are on a different subnet from the node MIC-C/T/P IP addresses.  
Figure 12-17  
Scenario 9: ONS 15454 SDH GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode  
Enabled  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Gateway NE  
MIC-C/T/P - 10.10.10.100/24  
TCC2P - 176.20.20.40/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
192.168.10.150/24 - MIC-C/T/P  
176.20.20.10/24 - TCC2P  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
MIC-C/T/P - 192.168.10.250/24  
TCC2P - 176.20.20.30/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
192.168.10.200/24 - MIC-C/T/P  
176.20.20.20/24 - TCC2P  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
12.3 Provisionable Patchcords  
A provisionable patchcord is a user-provisioned link that is advertised by OSPF throughout the network.  
Provisionable patchcords, also called virtual links, are needed in the following situations:  
•
An optical port is connected to a transponder or muxponder client port provisioned in transparent  
mode.  
•
•
An optical ITU port is connected to a DWDM optical channel card.  
Two transponder or muxponder trunk ports are connected to a DWDM optical channel card and the  
generic control channel (GCC) is carried transparently through the ring.  
•
Transponder or muxponder client and trunk ports are in a regenerator group, the cards are in  
transparent mode, and DCC/GCC termination is not available.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.3 Provisionable Patchcords  
Provisionable patchcords are required on both ends of a physical link. The provisioning at each end  
includes a local patchcord ID, slot/port information, remote IP address, and remote patchcord ID.  
Patchcords appear as dashed lines in CTC network view.  
Table 12-5 lists the supported card combinations for client and trunk ports in a provisionable patchcord.  
Table 12-5  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Client/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords  
Client Cards  
MXP_2.5G_10E  
/
TXP_MR_10E  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
TXP(P)_MR_  
2.5G  
32MUX-O 32-WSS/  
32DMX-O 32-DMX  
Trunk Cards  
ADxC  
4MD  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
TXP(P)_MR_2.5G  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
MXP_2.5G_10E/  
TXP_MR_10E  
MXP(P)_MR_2.5G  
OC-192  
—
—
—
Yes  
—
—
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
Yes  
Yes  
—
OC-48  
—
—
—
—
OC-192 ITU  
OC-48 ITU  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
—
—
Note  
If the OCSM card is installed in Slot 8, provisionable patchcords from OC-N ports to the following cards  
are not supported on the same node: MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP(P)_MR_2.5G,  
MXP_2.5G_10E, TXP_MR_10E, 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32-WSS, or 32-DMX.  
Table 12-6 lists the supported card combinations for client-to-client ports in a patchcord.  
Table 12-6  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Client/Client Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
MXP_2.5G_10E/  
TXP(P)_MR_2.5G TXP_MR_10E  
Client Cards  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
Yes  
—
Yes  
TXP(P)_MR_2.5G  
—
Yes  
—
—
MXP_2.5G_10E/  
TXP_MR_10E  
Yes  
Yes  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.4 Routing Table  
Table 12-7 lists the supported card combinations for trunk-to-trunk ports in a patchcord.  
Table 12-7  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Trunk/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
MXP_2.5G_10E/  
TXP(P)_MR_2.5G TXP_MR_10E  
Trunk Cards  
MXP_2.5G_10G/  
TXP_MR_10G  
Yes  
—
Yes  
TXP(P)_MR_2.5G  
—
Yes  
—
—
MXP_2.5G_10E/  
TXP_MR_10E  
Yes  
Yes  
Optical ports have the following requirements when used in a provisionable patchcord:  
•
•
•
An optical port connected to transponder/muxponder port or add/drop multiplexer or  
multiplexer/demultiplexer port requires an SDCC/LDCC termination.  
If the optical port is the protection port in a 1+1 group, the working port must have an SDCC/LDCC  
termination provisioned.  
If the remote end of a patchcord is Y-cable protected or is an add/drop multiplexer or  
multiplexer/demultiplexer port, an optical port requires two patchcords.  
Transponder and muxponder ports have the following requirements when used in a provisionable  
patchcord:  
•
Two patchcords are required when a transponder/muxponder port is connected to an add/drop  
multiplexer or multiplexer/demultiplexer port. CTC automatically prompts the user to set up the  
second patchcord.  
•
•
If a patchcord is on a client port in a regenerator group, the other end of the patchcord must be on  
the same node and on a port within the same regenerator group.  
A patchcord is allowed on a client port only if the card is in transparent mode.  
DWDM cards support provisionable patchcords only on optical channel ports. Each DWDM optical  
channel port can have only one provisionable patchcord.  
Note  
For TXP, MXP, and DWDM card information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and  
Operations Guide.  
12.4 Routing Table  
ONS 15454 SDH routing information is displayed on the Maintenance > Routing Table tabs. The routing  
table provides the following information:  
•
•
•
•
Destination—Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.  
Mask—Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.  
Gateway—Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.  
Usage—Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.4 Routing Table  
•
Interface—Shows the ONS 15454 SDH interface used to access the destination. Values are:  
–
motfcc0—The ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet interface, that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC2/TCC2P  
card and the LAN connection on the MIC-C/T/P FMEC  
–
–
pdcc0—An SDCC interface, that is, an STM-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination  
lo0—A loopback interface  
Table 12-8 shows sample routing entries for an ONS 15454 SDH.  
Table 12-8 Sample Routing Table Entries  
Entry Destination  
Mask  
Gateway  
Interface  
motfcc0  
motfcc0  
lo0  
1
2
3
4
5
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
172.20.214.1  
172.20.214.92  
172.20.214.0  
172.20.214.92  
172.20.214.93  
172.20.214.94  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1  
255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0  
pdcc0  
255.255.255.255 172.20.214.93  
pdcc0  
Entry 1 shows the following:  
•
Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on  
this routing table are mapped to the default route entry.  
•
•
Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route.  
Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in  
this routing table or is not on the node’s local subnet are sent to this gateway.  
•
Interface (motfcc0) indicates that the ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet interface is used to reach the  
gateway.  
Entry 2 shows the following:  
•
•
Destination (172.20.214.0) is the destination network IP address.  
Mask (255.255.255.0) is a 24-bit mask, meaning all addresses within the 172.20.214.0 subnet can  
be a destination.  
•
•
Gateway (172.20.214.92) is the gateway address. All outbound traffic belonging to this network is  
sent to this gateway.  
Interface (motfcc0) indicates that the ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet interface is used to reach the  
gateway.  
Entry 3 shows the following:  
•
•
•
Destination (172.20.214.92) is the destination host IP address.  
Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.92 address is a destination.  
Gateway (127.0.0.1) is a loopback address. The host directs network traffic to itself using this  
address.  
•
Interface (lo0) indicates that the local loopback interface is used to reach the gateway.  
Entry 4 shows the following:  
•
•
Destination (172.20.214.93) is the destination host IP address.  
Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.93 address is a destination.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.5 External Firewalls  
•
•
Gateway (0.0.0.0) means the destination host is directly attached to the node.  
Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a SDH SDCC interface is used to reach the destination host.  
Entry 5 shows a DCC-connected node that is accessible through a node that is not directly connected:  
•
•
•
Destination (172.20.214.94) is the destination host IP address.  
Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32-bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.94 address is a destination.  
Gateway (172.20.214.93) indicates that the destination host is accessed through a node with IP  
address 172.20.214.93.  
•
Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a SDH SDCC interface is used to reach the gateway.  
12.5 External Firewalls  
This section provides sample access control lists for external firewalls. Table 12-9 lists the ports that are  
used by the TCC2/TCC2P card.  
Table 12-9  
Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P  
Port  
0
Function  
Action1  
D
Never used  
20  
FTP  
D
21  
FTP control  
D
22  
SSH  
D
23  
Telnet  
D
80  
HTTP  
D
111  
SUNRPC  
NA  
D
161  
SNMP traps destinations  
SNMP traps destinations  
rlogin  
162  
D
513  
D
683  
CORBA IIOP  
Proxy server (socks)  
I/O card Telnet  
DCC processor on active TCC2/TCC2P  
TL1  
OK  
D
1080  
2001-2017  
2018  
2361  
3082  
3083  
5001  
5002  
7200  
9100  
9401  
9999  
D
D
D
Raw TL1  
D
TL1  
D
BLSR server port  
BLSR client port  
SNMP alarm input port  
EQM port  
D
D
D
D
TCC boot port  
Flash manager  
D
D
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.5 External Firewalls  
Table 12-9  
Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P (continued)  
Port  
Function  
Action1  
10240-12287 Proxy client  
D
57790  
Default TCC listener port  
OK  
1. D = deny, NA = not applicable, OK = do not deny  
The following access control list (ACL) example shows a firewall configuration when the proxy server  
gateway setting is not enabled. In the example, the CTC workstation's address is 192.168.10.10. and the  
ONS 15454 SDH address is 10.10.10.100 The firewall is attached to the GNE CTC, so inbound is CTC  
to the GNE and outbound is from the GNE to CTC. The CTC Common Object Request Broker  
Architecture (CORBA) Standard constant is 683 and the TCC CORBA Default TCC Fixed (57790).  
access-list 100 remark *** Inbound ACL, CTC -> NE ***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 any host 10.10.10.100 eq www  
access-list 100 remark *** allows initial contact with ONS 15454 SDH using http (port 80)  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 683 host 10.10.10.100 eq 57790  
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with ONS 15454 SDH GNE (port 57790)  
***  
access-list 101 remark *** Outbound ACL, NE -> CTC ***  
access-list 101 remark  
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 any host 192.168.10.10 eq 683  
access-list 101 remark *** allows alarms etc., from ONS 15454 SDH (random port) to the CTC  
workstation (port 683) ***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 host 192.168.10.10 established  
access-list 101 remark *** allows ACKs from ONS 15454 SDH GNE to CTC ***  
The following ACL example shows a firewall configuration when the proxy server gateway setting is  
enabled. As with the first example, the CTC workstation address is 192.168.10.10 and the  
ONS 15454 SDH address is 10.10.10.100. The firewall is attached to the GNE CTC, so inbound is CTC  
to the GNE and outbound is from the GNE to CTC. CTC CORBA Standard constant (683) and TCC  
CORBA Default TCC Fixed (57790).  
access-list 100 remark *** Inbound ACL, CTC -> NE ***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 any host 10.10.10.100 eq www  
access-list 100 remark *** allows initial contact with the 15454 SDH using http (port 80)  
***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 683 host 10.10.10.100 eq 57790  
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with the 15454 SDH GNE (port 57790)  
***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 683 host 10.10.10.100 eq 1080  
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with the 15454 SDH GNE proxy server  
(port 1080) ***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 683 host 10.10.10.100 range 10240 10495  
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with the 15454 SDH ENEs (ports 10240 -  
10495) via the GNE proxy server  
***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 established  
access-list 100 remark *** allows ACKs from CTC to the 15454 SDH GNE ***  
access-list 101 remark *** Outbound ACL, NE -> CTC ***  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.6 Open GNE  
access-list 101 remark  
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 any host 192.168.10.10 eq 683  
access-list 101 remark *** allows alarms and other communications from the 15454 SDH  
(random port) to the CTC workstation  
(port 683) ***  
access-list 100 remark  
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 host 192.168.10.10 established  
access-list 101 remark *** allows ACKs from the 15454 SDH GNE to CTC ***  
12.6 Open GNE  
The ONS 15454 SDH can communicate with non-ONS nodes that do not support point-to-point protocol  
(PPP) vendor extensions or OSPF type 10 opaque link-state advertisements (LSA), both of which are  
necessary for automatic node and link discovery. An open GNE configuration allows the DCC-based  
network to function as an IP network for non-ONS nodes.  
To configure an open GNE network, you can provision SDCC, LDCC, and GCC terminations to include  
a far-end, non-ONS node using either the default IP address of 0.0.0.0 or a specified IP address. You  
provision a far-end, non-ONS node by checking the “Far End is Foreign” check box during SDCC,  
LDCC, and GCC creation. The default 0.0.0.0 IP address allows the far-end, non-ONS node to provide  
the IP address; if you set an IP address other than 0.0.0.0, a link is established only if the far-end node  
identifies itself with that IP address, providing an extra level of security.  
By default, the proxy server only allows connections to discovered ONS peers and the firewall blocks  
all IP traffic between the DCC network and LAN. You can, however, provision proxy tunnels to allow  
up to 12 additional destinations for SOCKS version 5 connections to non-ONS nodes. You can also  
provision firewall tunnels to allow up to 12 additional destinations for direct IP connectivity between the  
DCC network and LAN. Proxy and firewall tunnels include both a source and destination subnet. The  
connection must originate within the source subnet and terminate within the destination subnet before  
either the SOCKS connection or IP packet flow is allowed.  
To set up proxy and firewall subnets in CTC, use the Provisioning > Network > Proxy and Firewalls  
subtabs. The availability of proxy and/or firewall tunnels depends on the network access settings of the  
node:  
•
•
•
If the node is configured with the proxy server enabled in GNE or ENE mode, you must set up a  
proxy tunnel and/or a firewall tunnel.  
If the node is configured with the proxy server enabled in proxy-only mode, you can set up proxy  
tunnels. Firewall tunnels are not allowed.  
If the node is configured with the proxy server disabled, neither proxy tunnels or firewall tunnels  
are allowed.  
Figure 12-18 shows an example of a foreign node connected to the DCC network. Proxy and firewall  
tunnels are useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC  
and the foreign node.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.6 Open GNE  
Figure 12-18  
Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Gateway NE  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.200/24  
Non-ONS node  
Foreign NE  
130.94.122.199/28  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.6 Open GNE  
Figure 12-19 shows a remote node connected to an ENE Ethernet port. Proxy and firewall tunnels are  
useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC and foreign  
node. This configuration also requires a firewall tunnel on the ENE.  
Figure 12-19  
Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port  
Remote CTC  
10.10.20.10  
10.10.20.0/24  
Interface 0/0  
10.10.20.1  
Router A  
Interface 0/1  
10.10.10.1  
10.10.10.0/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
Gateway NE  
10.10.10.100/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.150/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.250/24  
ONS 15454 SDH  
External NE  
10.10.10.200/24  
Non-ONS node  
Foreign NE  
130.94.122.199/28  
Ethernet  
SDH  
Local/Craft CTC  
192.168.20.20  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 12 CTC Network Connectivity  
12.6 Open GNE  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
12-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
13  
Alarm Monitoring and Management  
This chapter explains how to manage alarms with Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). To troubleshoot  
specific alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide. Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
13.1 Overview, page 13-1  
13.2 Documenting Existing Provisioning, page 13-1  
13.3 Viewing Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Slot, or Port, page 13-2  
13.4 Viewing Alarms, page 13-3  
13.5 Alarm Severities, page 13-10  
13.6 Alarm Profiles, page 13-10  
13.7 Suppressing Alarms, page 13-14  
13.8 Provisioning External Alarms and Controls, page 13-15  
13.9 Audit Trail, page 13-16  
13.1 Overview  
CTC detects and reports SDH alarms generated by the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH and the larger SDH  
network. You can use CTC to monitor and manage alarms at the card, node, or network level. Default  
alarm severities conform to the ITU-T G.783 standard, but you can set alarm severities in customized  
alarm profiles or suppress CTC alarm reporting. For a detailed description of the standard ITU-T  
categories employed by Optical Networking System (ONS) nodes, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Troubleshooting Guide.  
Note  
ONS 15454 SDH alarms can also be monitored and managed through a network management system  
(NMS).  
13.2 Documenting Existing Provisioning  
You can use the File > Print or File > Export options to print or export CTC provisioning information  
for record keeping or troubleshooting. The functions can be performed in card, node, or network views.  
The File > Print function sends the data to a local or network printer. File > Export exports the data to a  
file where it can be imported into other computer applications, such as spreadsheets and database  
management programs.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.3 Viewing Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Slot, or Port  
Whether you choose to print or export data, you can choose from the following options:  
•
Entire frame—Prints or exports the entire CTC window including the graphical view of the card,  
node, or network. This option is available for all windows.  
•
Tabbed view—Prints or exports the lower half of the CTC window containing tabs and data. The  
printout includes the selected tab (on top) and the data shown in the tab window. For example, if you  
print the History window tabbed view, you print only history items appearing in the window. This  
option is available for all windows.  
•
Table Contents—Prints CTC data in table format without graphical representations of shelves,  
cards, or tabs. This option applies to all windows except:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Provisioning > General > General and Power Monitor windows  
Provisioning > Network > General and RIP windows  
Provisioning > Security > Policy, Access, and Legal Disclaimer windows  
Provisioning > SNMP window  
Provisioning > Timing window  
Provisioning > UCP > Node window  
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning window  
Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Cards window  
Maintenance > Database window  
Maintenance > Diagnostic window  
Maintenance > Protection window  
Maintenance > Timing > Source window  
The Table Contents option prints all the data contained in a table with the same column headings.  
For example, if you print the History window Table Contents view, you print all data included in the  
table whether or not items appear in the window.  
The above windows are not available for Export.  
13.3 Viewing Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Slot, or Port  
You can view node, slot, or port-level alarm counts and summaries using the buttons on the  
ONS 15454 SDH LCD panel. The Slot and Port buttons toggle between display types; the Slot button  
toggles between node display and slot display, and the Port button toggles between slot and port views.  
Pressing the Status button after you choose the display mode changes the display from alarm count to  
alarm summary.  
The ONS 15454 SDH has a one-button update for some commonly viewed alarm counts. If you press  
the Slot button once and then wait eight seconds, the display automatically changes from a slot alarm  
count to a slot alarm summary. If you press the Port button to toggle to port-level display, you can use  
the Port button to toggle to a specific slot and to view each port’s port-level alarm count. Figure 13-1  
shows the LCD panel layout.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4 Viewing Alarms  
Figure 13-1  
Shelf LCD Panel  
Slot  
Status  
Port  
8/18/03  
04.06-002L-10  
24˚C  
FAN FAIL CRIT  
MAJ  
MIN  
13.4 Viewing Alarms  
In the card-, node-, or network-level CTC view, click the Alarms tab to display the alarms for that card,  
node, or network. The Alarms window shows alarms in conformance with ITU-T G.783. This means that  
if a network problem causes two alarms, such as loss of frame (LOF) and loss of signal (LOS), CTC only  
shows the LOS alarm in this window because it supersedes the LOF and replaces it.  
The Path Width column in the Alarms and Conditions tabs expands upon alarmed object information  
contained in the access identifier string (such as “VC4-6-1-6”) by giving the number of VC-4s contained  
in the alarmed path. For example, the Path Width will tell you whether a Critical alarm applies to a VC-4  
(where the column will show 1) or a VC-12 (where the column will show 3). If the path contains a  
smaller circuit size than VC-4, the column is empty.  
Table 13-1 lists the column headings and the information recorded in each column.  
Table 13-1  
Alarms Column Descriptions  
Column  
Information Recorded  
New  
Indicates a new alarm. To change this status, click either the Synchronize button or the  
Delete Cleared Alarms button.  
Date  
Date and time of the alarm.  
Node  
Object  
Eqpt Type  
Slot  
Node where the alarm occurred (appears only in network view).  
The object for an HPmon or LPmon alarm or condition.  
Card type in this slot.  
Slot where the alarm occurred (appears only in network and node view).  
Port  
Port where the alarm is raised. For HPTerm and LPTerm, the port refers to the upstream  
card it is partnered with.  
Path Width Indicates how many VC-4s are contained in an alarmed path. (For any non-VC-4 object,  
such as a VC-3, the column is blank.) This information complements the alarm object  
notation, which is explained in Table 13-3.  
Sev  
Severity level: CR (Critical), MJ (Major), MN (Minor), NA (Not Alarmed), NR  
(Not Reported).  
ST  
Status: R (raised), C (clear).  
SA  
When checked, indicates a service-affecting alarm.  
Cond  
The error message/alarm name. These names are alphabetically defined in the “Alarm  
Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.  
Description Description of the alarm.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4 Viewing Alarms  
Table 13-1  
Alarms Column Descriptions (continued)  
Column  
Information Recorded  
Num  
Num (number) is the quantity of alarm messages received, and is incremented  
automatically as alarms occur to display the current total of received error messages.  
Ref  
Ref (reference) is a unique identification number assigned to each alarm to reference a  
specific alarm message that is displayed.  
Table 13-2 lists the color codes for alarm and condition severities. The inherited (I) and unset (U)  
severities are only listed in the network view Provisioning > Alarm Profiles tab. They are not currently  
implemented.  
Table 13-2  
Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities  
Color  
Description  
Red  
Raised Critical (CR) alarm  
Raised Major (MJ) alarm  
Raised Minor (MN) alarm  
Orange  
Yellow  
Magenta (pink) Raised Not Alarmed (NA) condition  
Blue  
Raised Not Reported (NR) condition  
Cleared (C) alarm or condition  
White  
Note  
Major and Minor alarms may appear yellow in CTC under certain circumstances. This is not due to a  
CTC problem but to a workstation memory and color utilization problem. For example, a workstation  
might run out of colors if many color-intensive applications are running. When using Netscape, you can  
limit the number of colors used by launching it from the command line with either the -install option or  
the -ncols 32 option.  
In network view, CTC identifies STM and VC alarm objects based upon the object IDs. Table 13-3 lists  
the object numbering schemes for the MON (such as HPMon and LPMon) and TERM (such as HPTerm  
and LPTerm) objects.  
Table 13-3  
Release 4.0 and Later Port-Based Alarm Numbering Scheme  
STM and VC Alarm Numbering  
MON object VC4-<slot>-<port>-<VC_within_port>  
For example, VC4-6-1-6  
Port=1  
Port=1  
TERM object VC4-<slot>-<VC_within_slot>  
For example, VC4-6-6  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone  
13.4.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone  
By default, alarms and conditions are displayed with the time stamp of the CTC workstation where you  
are viewing them. But you can set the node to report alarms (and conditions) using the time zone where  
the node is located by clicking Edit > Preferences, and clicking the Display Events Using Each Node’s  
Timezone check box.  
13.4.2 Controlling Alarm Display  
You can control the display of the alarms shown on the Alarms window. Table 13-4 shows the actions  
you can perform in the Alarms window.  
Table 13-4  
Alarm Display  
Button/Check Box/Tool  
Action  
Filter button  
Allows you to change the display on the Alarms window to show only  
alarms that meet a certain severity level, occur in a specified time frame,  
and/or reflect specific conditions. For example, you can set the filter so that  
only Critical alarms display on the window.  
If you enable the Filter feature by clicking the Filter button in one CTC  
view, such as node view, it is enabled in the other views as well (card view  
and network view).  
Synchronize button  
Updates the alarm display. Although CTC displays alarms in real time, the  
Synchronize button allows you to verify the alarm display. This is  
particularly useful during provisioning or troubleshooting.  
Delete Cleared Alarms  
button  
Deletes alarms that have been cleared.  
AutoDelete Cleared  
Alarms check box  
If checked, CTC automatically deletes cleared alarms.  
Filter tool  
Enables or disables alarm filtering in the card, node, or network view. When  
enabled or disabled, this state applies to other views for that node and for  
all other nodes in the network. For example, if the Filter tool is enabled in  
the node (default login) view Alarms window, the network view Alarms  
window and card view Alarms window also have the tool enabled. All other  
nodes in the network also have the tool enabled.  
13.4.3 Filtering Alarms  
The alarm display can be filtered to prevent display of alarms with certain severities or alarms that  
occurred between certain dates. You can set the filtering parameters by clicking the Filter button at the  
bottom-left of the Alarms window. You can turn the filter on or off by clicking the Filter tool at the  
bottom-right of the window. CTC retains your filter activation setting. For example, if you turn the filter  
on and then log out, CTC keeps the filter active the next time your user ID is activated.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits  
13.4.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits  
A user can view which ONS 15454 SDH circuits are affected by a specific alarm by positioning the  
cursor over the alarm in the Alarm window and right-clicking. A shortcut menu is displayed  
(Figure 13-2).  
Figure 13-2  
Select Affected Circuits Option  
05.00-003J-08.02  
When the user selects the Select Affected Circuits option, the Circuits window opens to show the circuits  
that are affected by the alarm (Figure 13-3).  
Figure 13-3  
Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits  
05.00-003J-08.02  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4.5 Conditions Tab  
13.4.5 Conditions Tab  
The Conditions window displays retrieved fault conditions. A condition is a fault or status detected by  
ONS 15454 SDH hardware or software. When a condition occurs and continues for a minimum period,  
CTC raises a condition, which is a flag showing that this particular condition currently exists on the  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
The Conditions window shows all conditions that occur, including those that are superseded. For  
instance, if a network problem causes two alarms, such as LOF and LOS, CTC shows both the LOF and  
LOS conditions in this window (even though LOS supersedes LOF). Having all conditions visible can  
be helpful when troubleshooting the ONS 15454 SDH. If you want to retrieve conditions that obey a  
root-cause hierarchy (that is, LOS supersedes and replaces LOF), you can exclude the same root causes  
by checking a check box in the window.  
Fault conditions include reported alarms and Not Reported or Not Alarmed conditions. Refer to the  
trouble notifications information in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for more  
information about alarm and condition classifications.  
13.4.6 Controlling the Conditions Display  
You can control the display of the conditions on the Conditions window. Table 13-5 shows the actions  
you can perform in the window.  
Table 13-5  
Conditions Display  
Button  
Action  
Retrieve  
Retrieves the current set of all existing fault conditions, as maintained by  
the alarm manager, from the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Filter  
Allows you to change the Conditions window display to only show the  
conditions that meet a certain severity level or occur in a specified time. For  
example, you can set the filter so that only Critical conditions display on the  
window.  
Note  
There is a Filter button on the lower-right of the window that allows  
you to enable or disable the filter feature.  
Exclude Same Root  
Cause  
Retrieves conditions that obey a root-cause hierarchy (for example, LOS  
supersedes and replaces LOF).  
13.4.6.1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions  
The current set of all existing conditions maintained by the alarm manager can be seen when you click  
the Retrieve button. The set of conditions retrieved is relative to the view. For example, if you click the  
button while displaying the node view, node-specific conditions are displayed. If you click the button  
while displaying the network view, all conditions for the network (including ONS 15454 SDH nodes and  
other connected nodes) are displayed, and the card view shows only card-specific conditions.  
You can also set a node to display conditions using the time zone where the node is located, rather than  
the time zone of the PC where they are being viewed. See the “13.4.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s  
Time Zone” section on page 13-5 for more information.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4.7 Viewing History  
13.4.6.2 Conditions Column Descriptions  
Table 13-6 lists the Conditions window column headings and the information recorded in each column.  
Table 13-6  
Conditions Column Description  
Column  
New  
Information Recorded  
Indicates a new condition.  
Date  
Date and time of the condition.  
Object  
Eqpt Type  
Slot  
The object for an HPmon or LPmon.  
Card type in this slot.  
Slot where the condition occurred (appears only in network and node view).  
Port  
Port where the alarm is raised. For HPTerm and LPTerm, the port refers to the upstream  
card it is partnered with.  
Sev1  
Severity level: CR (Critical), MJ (Major), MN (Minor), NA (Not Alarmed), NR  
(Not Reported).  
SA1  
Indicates a service-affecting alarm (when checked).  
Cond  
The error message/alarm name; these names are alphabetically defined in the “Alarm  
Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.  
Description Description of the condition.  
Node  
Node where the alarm occurred (appears only in network view).  
1. All alarms, their severities, and service-affecting statuses are also displayed in the Condition tab unless you choose to filter  
the alarm from the display using the Filter button.  
13.4.6.3 Filtering Conditions  
The condition display can be filtered to prevent display of conditions (including alarms) with certain  
severities or that occurred between certain dates. You can set the filtering parameters by clicking the  
Filter button at the bottom-left of the Conditions window. You can turn the filter on or off by clicking  
the Filter tool at the bottom-right of the window. CTC retains your filter activation setting. For example,  
if you turn the filter on and then log out, CTC keeps the filter active the next time you log in.  
13.4.7 Viewing History  
The History window displays historic alarm or condition data for the node or for your login session. You  
can chose to display only alarm history, only events, or both by checking check boxes in the History >  
Node window. You can view network-level alarm and condition history, such as for circuits, at that level.  
At the node level, you can see all port (facility), card, STS, and system-level history entries. For example,  
protection-switching events or performance-monitoring threshold crossings appear here. If you  
double-click a card, you can view all port, card, and STS alarm or condition history that directly affects  
the card.  
The ONS 15454 SDH can store up to 640 Critical alarm messages, 640 Major alarm messages, 640  
Minor alarm messages, and 640 condition messages. When any of these limits is reached, the  
ONS 15454 SDH discards the oldest events in that category.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.4.7 Viewing History  
Note  
In the Preference dialog General tab, the Maximum History Entries value only applies to the Session  
window.  
Different views of CTC display the following kinds of history:  
•
•
•
The History > Session window is shown in network view, node view, and card view. It shows alarms  
and conditions that occurred during the current user CTC session.  
The History > Node window is only shown in node view. It shows the alarms and conditions that  
occurred on the node since CTC software was operated on the node.  
The History > Card window is only shown in card view. It shows the alarms and conditions that  
occurred on the card since CTC software was installed on the node.  
Tip  
Double-click an alarm in the History window to display the corresponding view. For example,  
double-clicking a card alarm takes you to card view. In network view, double-clicking a node alarm takes  
you to node view.  
If you check the History window Alarms check box, you display the node history of alarms. If you check  
the Events check box, you display the node history of Not Alarmed and transient events (conditions). If  
you check both check boxes, you retrieve node history for both.  
13.4.7.1 History Column Descriptions  
Table 13-7 lists the History window column headings and the information recorded in each column.  
Table 13-7  
History Column Description  
Column  
Information Recorded  
Num  
An incrementing count of alarm or condition messages. (The column is hidden by  
default; to view it, right-click a column and choose Show Column > Num.)  
Ref  
The reference number assigned to the alarm or condition. (The column is hidden by  
default; to view it, right-click a column and choose Show Column > Ref.)  
Date  
Object  
Sev  
Date and time of the condition.  
Identifier for the condition object. For an LPMon or HPMon, the object.  
Severity level: Critical (CR), Major (MJ), Minor (MN), Not Alarmed (NA),  
Not Reported (NR).  
Eqpt Type  
ST  
Card type in this slot (only displays in network view and node view).  
Status: raised (R), cleared (C), or transient (T).  
Description Description of the condition.  
Port  
Port where the alarm is raised. For HPTerm and LPTerm, the port refers to the upstream  
card it is partnered with.  
Cond  
Slot  
SA  
Condition name.  
Slot where the condition occurred (only displays in network view and node view).  
Indicates a service-affecting alarm (when checked).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.5 Alarm Severities  
13.4.7.2 Retrieving and Displaying Alarm and Condition History  
You can retrieve and view the history of alarms and conditions, as well as transients (passing  
notifications of processes as they occur) in the CTC history window. The information in this window is  
specific to the view where it is shown (that is, network history in the network view, node history in the  
node view, and card history in the card view).  
The node and card history views are each divided into two tabs. In node view, when you click the  
Retrieve button, you can see the history of alarms, conditions, and transients that have occurred on the  
node in the History > Node window, and the history of alarms, conditions, and transients that have  
occurred on the node during your login session in the History > Session window. In the card-view history  
window, after you retrieve the card history, you can see the history of alarms, conditions, and transients  
on the card in the History > Card window, or a history of alarms, conditions, and transients that have  
occurred during your login session in the History > Session window. You can also filter the severities  
and occurrence period in these history windows.  
13.5 Alarm Severities  
ONS 15454 SDH alarm severities follow the ITU-T G.783 standard, so a condition might be Alarmed  
(at a severity of Critical [CR], Major [MJ], or Minor [MN]), Not Alarmed (NA) or Not Reported (NR).  
These severities are reported in the CTC software Alarms, Conditions, and History windows at all levels:  
network, shelf, and card.  
ONS equipment provides a standard profile named Default listing all alarms and conditions with severity  
settings based on ITU-T G.783 and other standards, but users can create their own profiles with different  
settings for some or all conditions and apply these wherever desired. (See the “13.6 Alarm Profiles”  
section on page 13-10.) For example, in a custom alarm profile, the default severity of a carrier loss  
(CARLOSS) alarm on an Ethernet port could be changed from Major to Critical. The profile allows  
setting to Not Reported or Not Alarmed, as well as the three alarmed severities.  
Critical and Major severities are only used for service-affecting alarms. If a condition is set as Critical  
or Major by profile, it will raise as Minor alarm in the following situations:  
•
•
In a protection group, if the alarm is on a standby entity (side not carrying traffic)  
If the alarmed entity has no traffic provisioned on it, so no service is lost  
Because of this possibility of being raised at two different levels, the alarm profile pane shows Critical  
as CR / MN and Major as MJ / MN.  
13.6 Alarm Profiles  
The alarm profiles feature allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles  
for individual ONS 15454 SDH ports, cards, or nodes. A created alarm profile can be applied to any node  
on the network. Alarm profiles can be saved to a file and imported elsewhere in the network, but the  
profile must be stored locally on a node before it can be applied to the node, its cards, or its cards’ ports.  
CTC can store up to ten active alarm profiles at any time to apply to the node. Custom profiles can take  
eight of these active profile positions. Two other profiles, Default profile and Inherited profile, are  
reserved by the NE, and cannot be edited.The reserved Default profile contains ITU-T G.783 severities.  
The reserved Inherited profile allows port alarm severities to be governed by the card-level severities, or  
card alarm severities to be determined by the node-level severities.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.6.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles  
If one or more alarm profiles have been stored as files from elsewhere in the network onto the local PC  
or server hard drive where CTC resides, you can utilize as many profiles as you can physically store by  
deleting and replacing them locally in CTC so that only eight are active at any given time.  
13.6.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles  
Alarm profiles are created in the network view using the Provisioning > Alarm Profiles tabs. A default  
alarm profile following ITU-T G.783 is preprovisioned for every alarm. After loading the default profile  
or another profile on the node, you can use the Clone feature to create custom profiles. After the new  
profile is created, the Alarm Profiles window shows the original profile—frequently Default—and the  
new profile.  
Note  
Note  
Note  
Tip  
The alarm profile list contains a master list of alarms that is used for a mixed node network. Some of  
these alarms might not be used in all ONS nodes.  
The Default alarm profile list contains alarm and condition severities that correspond when applicable  
to default values established in ITU-T G.783.  
All default or user-defined severity settings that are Critical (CR) or Major (MJ) are demoted to Minor  
(MN) in non-service-affecting situations.  
To see the full list of profiles including those available for loading or cloning, click the Available button.  
You must load a profile before you can clone it.  
Note  
Up to ten profiles, including the two reserved profiles—Inherited and Default—can be stored in CTC.  
Wherever it is applied, the Default alarm profile sets severities to standard ITU-T G.783 settings. The  
Inherited profile sets alarm severity to inherited (I) so that alarms inherit, or copy, severities from the  
next-highest level. For example, a card with an Inherited alarm profile copies the severities used by the  
node housing the card. If you choose the Inherited profile from the network view, the severities at the  
lower levels (node and card) be copied from this selection.  
You do not have to apply a single severity profile to the node-, card-, and port-level alarms. Different  
profiles can be applied at different levels. You could use the inherited or default profile on a node and  
on all cards and ports, but apply a custom profile that downgrades an alarm on one particular card. For  
example, you might choose to downgrade an STM-N unequipped path alarm (HP-UNEQ) from Critical  
(CR) to Not Alarmed (NA) on an optical card because this alarm raises and then clears every time you  
create a circuit. HP-UNEQ alarms for the card with the custom profile would not display on the Alarms  
tab. (But they would still be recorded in the Conditions and History tabs.)  
When you modify severities in an alarm profile, the following rules apply:  
•
All Critical (CR) or Major (MJ) default or user-defined severity settings are demoted to Minor (MN)  
in Non-Service-Affecting (NSA) situations.  
•
Default severities are used for all alarms and conditions until you create a new profile and apply it.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.6.2 Alarm Profile Buttons  
13.6.2 Alarm Profile Buttons  
The Alarm Profiles window displays six buttons at the bottom. Table 13-8 lists and describes each of the  
alarm profile buttons and their functions.  
Table 13-8  
Alarm Profile Buttons  
Button  
New  
Description  
Adds a new alarm profile.  
Load  
Loads a profile to a node or a file.  
Saves profiles on a node (or nodes) or in a file.  
Deletes profiles from a node.  
Store  
Delete  
Compare  
Displays differences between alarm profiles (for example, individual alarms that  
are not configured equivalently between profiles).  
Available  
Usage  
Displays all profiles available on each node.  
Displays all entities (nodes and alarm subjects) present in the network and which  
profiles contain the alarm. Can be printed.  
13.6.3 Alarm Profile Editing  
Table 13-9 lists and describes the five profile-editing options available when you right-click an alarm  
item in the profile column (such as Default).  
Table 13-9  
Alarm Profile Editing Options  
Button  
Store  
Description  
Saves a profile in a node or in a file.  
Changes a profile name.  
Rename  
Clone  
Creates a profile that contains the same alarm severity settings as the profile  
being cloned.  
Reset  
Restores a profile to its previous state or to the original state (if it has not yet  
been applied).  
Remove  
Removes a profile from the table editor.  
13.6.4 Alarm Severity Options  
To change or assign alarm severity, left-click the alarm severity you want to change in the alarm profile  
column. Seven severity levels appear for the alarm:  
•
•
•
•
•
Not Reported (NR)  
Not Alarmed (NA)  
Minor (MN)  
Major (MJ)  
Critical (CR)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.6.5 Row Display Options  
•
•
Use Default  
Transient (T)  
Transient and Use Default severity alarms only appear in alarm profiles. They do not appear when you  
view alarms, history, or conditions.  
13.6.5 Row Display Options  
In the network view, the Alarm Profiles window displays the following check boxes at the bottom of the  
window:  
•
Only show service-affecting severities—If unchecked, the editor shows severities in the format  
<sev1>/<sev2> where <sev1> is a service-affecting severity and <sev2> is not service-affecting. If  
checked, the editor only shows <sev1> alarms.  
•
•
Hide reference values—Highlights alarms with nondefault severities by clearing alarm cells with  
default severities.  
Hide identical rows—Hides rows of alarms that contain the same severity for each profile.  
13.6.6 Applying Alarm Profiles  
In CTC node view, the Alarm Behavior window displays alarm profiles for the node. In card view, the  
Alarm Behavior window displays the alarm profiles for the selected card. Alarm profiles form a  
hierarchy. A node-level alarm profile applies to all cards in the node except cards that have their own  
profiles. A card-level alarm profile applies to all ports on the card except ports that have their own  
profiles.  
At the node level, you can apply profile changes on a card-by-card basis or set a profile for the entire  
node. At the card-level view, you can apply profile changes on a port-by-port basis or set alarm profiles  
for all ports on that card. Figure 13-4 shows the OPT-BST card view of an alarm profile.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.7 Suppressing Alarms  
Figure 13-4  
Card View Port Alarm Profile for an OPT-BST Card  
13.7 Suppressing Alarms  
ONS 15454 SDH nodes have an alarm suppression option that clears raised alarm messages for the node,  
chassis, one or more slots (cards), or one or more ports. After they are cleared, these alarms change  
appearance from their normal severity color to white and they can be cleared from the display by clicking  
Synchronize. Alarm suppression itself raises an alarm called AS-CMD that is shown in applicable  
Alarms windows. Node-level suppression is shown in the node view Alarms window, and card or  
port-level suppression is shown in all views. The AS-CMD alarm itself is not cleared by the suppress  
command. Each instance of this alarm indicates its object separately in the Object column.  
A suppression command applied at a higher level does not supersede a command applied at a lower level.  
For example, applying a node-level alarm suppression command makes all raised alarms for the node  
appear to be cleared, but it does not cancel card-level or port-level suppression. Each of these conditions  
can exist independently and must be cleared independently.  
Suppression causes the entity alarm to behave like a Not Reported event. This means that the alarms,  
having been suppressed from view in the Alarms window, are now only shown in the Conditions window.  
The suppressed alarms are displayed with their usual visual characteristics (service-affecting status and  
color-coding) in the window. The alarms still appear in the History window.  
Note  
Use alarm suppression with caution. If multiple CTC sessions are open, suppressing the alarms in one  
session suppresses the alarms in all other open sessions.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.8 Provisioning External Alarms and Controls  
13.8 Provisioning External Alarms and Controls  
External alarm inputs can be provisioned on the Alarm Interface Controller-International (AIC-I) card  
for external sensors such as an open door and flood sensors, temperature sensors, and other  
environmental conditions. External control outputs on this card allow you to drive external visual or  
audible devices such as bells and lights. They can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and  
fans.  
You provision external alarms in the AIC-I card view Provisioning > Card > External Alarms tab.  
Provision controls in the AIC-I card view Provisioning > Card > External Controls tab. Up to 16 external  
alarm inputs and 4 external controls are available with the AIC-I card.  
13.8.1 External Alarm Input  
You can provision each alarm input separately. Provisionable characteristics of external alarm inputs  
include:  
•
•
•
Alarm type, from a list of possibilities in a drop-down list  
Alarm severity (CR, MJ, MN, NA, and NR)  
Alarm-trigger setting (open or closed): Open means that the normal condition is no current flowing  
through the contact, and the alarm is generated when current does flow; closed means that normal  
condition is to have current flowing through the contact, and the alarm is generated with current  
stops flowing.  
•
•
Virtual wire associated with the alarm  
CTC alarm log description (up to 63 characters)  
Note  
Note  
If you provision an external alarm to raise upon an open contact before you physically connect  
to the ONS equipment, the alarm will raise until you do create the physical connection.  
When you provision an external alarm, the alarm object is ENV-IN-nn. The variable nn refers to  
the external alarm’s number, regardless of the name you assign.  
13.8.2 External Control Output  
You can provision each alarm output separately. Provisionable characteristics of alarm outputs include:  
Control type  
Trigger type (alarm or virtual wire)  
•
•
•
•
Description for CTC display  
Closure setting (manually or by trigger). If you provision the output closure to be triggered, the  
following characteristics can be used as triggers:  
–
Local NE alarm severity—A chosen alarm severity (for example, Major) and any  
higher-severity alarm (in this case, Critical) causes output closure.  
–
Remote NE alarm severity—Similar to local NE alarm severity trigger setting, but applies to  
remote alarms.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.9 Audit Trail  
–
Virtual wire entities—You can provision an alarm that is input to a virtual wire to trigger an  
external control output.  
13.9 Audit Trail  
The ONS 15454 SDH maintains an audit trail log that resides on the TCC2/TCC2P. This record shows  
who has accessed the system and what operations were performed during a given time period. The log  
includes authorized Cisco logins and logouts using the operating system command line interface, Cisco  
Transport Controller (CTC), and TL1; the log also includes FTP actions, circuit creation/deletion, and  
user/system generated actions.  
Event monitoring is also recorded in the audit log. An event is defined as the change in status of an  
element within the network. External events, internal events, attribute changes, and software  
upload/download activities are recorded in the audit trail.  
Audit trails are useful for maintaining security, recovering lost transactions and enforcing accountability.  
Accountability is the ability to trace user activities by associating a process or action with a specific user.  
To view the audit trail log, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide. to view the audit trail  
record. Any management interface (CTC, CTM, TL1) can access the audit trail logs.  
The audit trail is stored in persistent memory and is not corrupted by processor switches, resets or  
upgrades. However, if the TCC2/TCC2Ps are removed, the audit trail log is lost.  
13.9.1 Audit Trail Log Entries  
Audit trail records capture the following activities:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User—Name of the user performing the action  
Host—Host from where the activity is logged  
Device ID—IP address of the device involved in the activity  
Application—Name of the application involved in the activity  
Task—Name of the task involved in the activity (View a dialog, apply configuration and so on)  
Connection Mode—Telnet, Console, SNMP  
Category—Type of change; Hardware, Software, Configuration  
Status—Status of the user action (Read, Initial, Successful, Timeout, Failed)  
Time—Time of change  
Message Type—Denotes if the event is Success/Failure type  
Message Details—A description of the change  
13.9.2 Audit Trail Capacities  
The system is able to store 640 log entries.When this limit is reached, the oldest entries are overwritten  
with new events.  
When the log server is 80 percent full, an AUD-LOG-LOW condition is raised and logged (by way of  
CORBA/CTC).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.9.2 Audit Trail Capacities  
When the log server reaches a maximum capacity of 640 entries and begins overwriting records that were  
not archived, an AUD-LOG-LOSS condition is raised and logged. This event indicates that audit trail  
records have been lost. Until the user off-loads the file, this event occurs once regardless of the amount  
of entries that are overwritten by the system. To export the audit trail log, refer to the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 13 Alarm Monitoring and Management  
13.9.2 Audit Trail Capacities  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
13-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
C H A P T E R  
14  
Ethernet Operation  
The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH integrates Ethernet into an SDH time-division multiplexing (TDM)  
platform. The ONS 15454 SDH supports E-Series, G-Series, and ML-Series Ethernet cards. This chapter  
covers the operation of the E-Series and G-Series Ethernet cards. For information on the ML-Series  
cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET/SDH ML-Series Multilayer Ethernet Card Software Feature  
and Configuration Guide. For Ethernet card specifications, see Chapter 5, “Ethernet Cards.” For  
Ethernet circuit procedures, refer to the “Create Circuits and Low-Order Tunnels” chapter of the  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Chapter topics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
14.1 G-Series Application, page 14-1  
14.2 G-Series Gigabit Ethernet Transponder Mode, page 14-5  
14.3 E-Series Application, page 14-10  
14.4 G-Series Circuit Configurations, page 14-19  
14.5 E-Series Circuit Configurations, page 14-20  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds, page 14-23  
14.1 G-Series Application  
The G-Series cards (G1000-4/G1K-4) reliably transport Ethernet and IP data across an SDH backbone.  
The G-Series cards map up to four Gigabit Ethernet interfaces onto an SDH transport network and  
provide scalable and provisionable transport bandwidth at signal levels up to VC4-16C per card. The  
G-Series cards provide line rate forwarding for all Ethernet frames (unicast, multicast, and broadcast)  
and can be configured to support Jumbo frames (defined as a maximum of 10,000 bytes). The G-Series  
cards incorporate features optimized for carrier-class applications such as:  
•
High Availability (including hitless [< 50 ms] performance under software upgrades and all types of  
SONET/SDH equipment protection switches)  
•
•
•
Hitless reprovisioning  
Support of Gigabit Ethernet traffic at full line rate  
Serviceability options including enhanced port states, terminal and facility loopback, and J1 path  
trace  
•
•
SDH-style alarm support  
Ethernet performance monitoring (PM) and remote monitoring (RMON) functions  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.1.1 G1K-4 and G1000-4 Comparison  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
The G-Series cards allow an Ethernet private line service to be provisioned and managed very much like  
a traditional SDH or SONET line. G-Series card applications include providing carrier-grade transparent  
LAN services (TLS), 100 Mbps Ethernet private line services (when combined with an external 100-Mb  
Ethernet switch with Gigabit uplinks), and high-availability transport.  
The card maps a single Ethernet port to a single STM circuit. You can independently map the four ports  
on the G-Series card to any combination of VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, and VC4-16C  
circuit sizes, provided the sum of the circuit sizes that terminate on a card do not exceed VC4-16C.  
To support a Gigabit Ethernet port at full line rate, an STM circuit with a capacity greater or equal to  
1 Gbps (bidirectional 2 Gbps) is needed. A VC4-8c is the minimum circuit size that can support a  
Gigabit Ethernet port at full line rate. The G-Series card supports a maximum of two ports at full line  
rate.  
The G-Series transmits and monitors the SDH J1 Path Trace byte in the same manner as  
ONS 15454 SDH STM-N cards. For more information, see the “10.9 Path Trace” section on page 10-15.  
Note  
G-Series encapsulation is standard high-level data link control (HDLC) framing over SONET/SDH as  
described in RFC 1622 and RFC 2615 with the point-to-point protocol (PPP) field set to the value  
specified in RFC 1841.  
14.1.1 G1K-4 and G1000-4 Comparison  
The G1K-4 and the G1000-4 cards constitute the ONS 15454 SDH G-Series and are hardware  
equivalents. Software releases prior to R4.0 identify both the G1000-4 and the G1K-4 as G1000-4 cards  
when they are physically installed. Software R4.0 and later identify G1K-4 cards correctly (that is, as  
GIK-4 cards) when they are physically installed.  
14.1.2 G-Series Example  
Figure 14-1 shows an example of a G-Series application. In this example, data traffic from the Gigabit  
Ethernet port of a high-end router travels across the ONS 15454 SDH point-to-point circuit to the Gigabit  
Ethernet port of another high-end router.  
Figure 14-1  
Data Traffic on a G-Series Point-to-Point Circuit  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
VC4-N  
SDH  
Gig-E  
Gig-E  
802.3x pause frames sent  
to throttle down source  
802.3x pause frames sent  
to throttle down source  
The G-Series card carries any Layer 3 protocol that can be encapsulated and transported over Gigabit  
Ethernet, such as IP or IPX. The data is transmitted on the Gigabit Ethernet fiber into a standard Gigabit  
Interface Converter (GBIC) on a G-Series card. The G-Series card transparently maps Ethernet frames  
into the SDH payload by multiplexing the payload onto an SDH STM-N card. When the SDH payload  
reaches the destination node, the process is reversed and the data is transmitted from the standard Cisco  
GBIC in the destination G-Series card onto the Gigabit Ethernet fiber.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.1.3 IEEE 802.3z Flow Control and Frame Buffering  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
The G-Series card discards certain types of erroneous Ethernet frames rather than transport them over  
SDH. Erroneous Ethernet frames include corrupted frames with cyclic redundancy checking (CRC)  
errors and under-sized frames that do not conform to the minimum 64-byte length Ethernet standard. The  
G-Series card forwards valid frames unmodified over the SDH network. Information in the headers is  
not affected by the encapsulation and transport. For example, packets with formats that include IEEE  
802.1Q information will travel through the process unaffected.  
14.1.3 IEEE 802.3z Flow Control and Frame Buffering  
The G-Series supports IEEE 802.3z flow control and frame buffering to reduce data traffic congestion.  
To prevent over-subscription, 512 KB of buffer memory is available for the receive and transmit channels  
on each port. When the buffer memory on the Ethernet port nears capacity, the ONS 15454 SDH uses  
IEEE 802.3z flow control to transmit a pause frame to the source at the opposite end of the Gigabit  
Ethernet connection.  
The pause frame instructs the source to stop sending packets for a specific period of time. The sending  
station waits the requested time before sending more data. Figure 14-1 on page 14-2 illustrates pause  
frames being sent and received by ONS 15454 SDHs and attached switches.  
The G-Series card proposes symmetric flow control when auto negotiating flow control with attached  
Ethernet devices. Symmetric flow control allows the G-Series to respond to pause frames sent from  
external devices and to send pause frames to external devices. Prior to Software R4.0, flow control on  
the G-Series card was asymmetric, meaning the card sent pause frames and discarded received pause  
frames.  
This flow-control mechanism matches the sending and receiving device throughput to that of the  
bandwidth of the STM circuit. For example, a router might transmit to the Gigabit Ethernet port on the  
G-Series card. This particular data rate may occasionally exceed 622 Mbps, but the ONS 15454 SDH  
circuit assigned to the G-Series port might be only VC4-4c (622.08 Mbps). In this example, the  
ONS 15454 SDH sends out a pause frame and requests that the router delay its transmission for a certain  
period of time. With flow control and a substantial per-port buffering capability, a private line service  
provisioned at less than full line rate capacity (VC4-8c) is efficient because frame loss can be controlled  
to a large extent.  
The G-Series has flow control threshold provisioning, which allows a user to select one of three  
watermark (buffer size) settings: default, low latency or custom. Default is the best setting for general  
use and was the only setting available prior to Software R4.1. Low latency is good for sub-rate  
applications, such as VoIP. For attached devices with insufficient buffering, best effort traffic or long  
access line lengths, set the G-Series card to a higher latency.  
The custom setting allows you to specify an exact buffer size threshold for Flow Ctrl Lo and Flow Ctrl  
Hi. The flow control high setting is the watermark for sending the “Pause On” frame to the attached  
Ethernet device; this frame signals the device to temporarily stop transmitting. The flow control low  
setting is the watermark for sending the “Pause Off” frame, which signals the device to resume  
transmitting.  
Note  
Note  
External Ethernet devices with auto-negotiation configured to interoperate with G-Series cards running  
releases prior to R4.0 do not need to change auto-negotiation settings when interoperating with G-Series  
cards running R4.0 and later.  
With a G-Series card, you can only enable flow control on a port if auto negotiation is enabled on the  
device attached to that port.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.1.4 Ethernet Link Integrity Support  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.1.4 Ethernet Link Integrity Support  
The G-Series supports end-to-end Ethernet link integrity (Figure 14-2). This capability is integral to  
providing an Ethernet private line service and correct operation of Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols on the  
attached Ethernet devices. End-to-end Ethernet link integrity essentially means that if any part of the  
end-to-end path fails, the entire path fails. Failure of the entire path is ensured by turning off the transmit  
lasers at each end of the path. The attached Ethernet devices recognize the disabled transmit laser as a  
loss of carrier and consequently as an inactive link.  
Figure 14-2  
End-to-End Ethernet Link Integrity Support  
A
B
C
D
E
G1000-4 port  
G1000-4 port  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
VC4-N  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Tx  
SDH  
Note  
Some network devices can be configured to ignore a loss- of-carrier condition. If a device configured to  
ignore a loss-of-carrier condition attaches to a G-Series card at one end, alternative techniques (such as  
use of Layer 2 or Layer 3 keep-alive messages) are required to route traffic around failures. The response  
time of such alternate techniques is typically much longer than techniques that use link state as  
indications of an error condition.  
As shown in Figure 14-2, a failure at any point of the path causes the G-Series card at each end to disable  
its Tx transmit laser, which causes the devices at both ends to detect a link down. If one of the Ethernet  
ports is administratively disabled or set in loopback mode, the port is considered a “failure” for the  
purposes of end-to-end link integrity because the end-to-end Ethernet path is unavailable. The port  
“failure” also disables both ends of the path.  
14.1.5 Gigabit EtherChannel/IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation  
The end-to-end Ethernet link integrity feature can be used in combination with Gigabit EtherChannel  
capability on attached devices. The combination provides an Ethernet traffic restoration scheme that has  
a faster response time than alternate techniques such as spanning tree rerouting, yet is more bandwidth  
efficient because spare bandwidth does not need to be reserved.  
The G-Series supports all forms of link aggregation technologies including Gigabit EtherChannel  
(GEC), which is a Cisco proprietary standard, and the IEEE 802.3ad standard. The end-to-end link  
integrity feature of the G-Series allows a circuit to emulate an Ethernet link. This allows all types of  
Layer 2 and Layer 3 rerouting to work correctly with the G-Series. Figure 14-3 illustrates G-Series GEC  
support.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.2 G-Series Gigabit Ethernet Transponder Mode  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-3  
G-Series Gigabit EtherChannel (GEC) Support  
SDH  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
Although the G-Series card does not actively run GEC, it supports the end-to-end GEC functionality of  
attached Ethernet devices. If two Ethernet devices running GEC connect through G-Series cards to an  
ONS 15454 SDH network, the ONS 15454 SDH side network is transparent to the EtherChannel devices.  
The EtherChannel devices operate as if they are directly connected to each other. Any combination of  
G-Series parallel circuit sizes can be used to support GEC throughput.  
GEC provides line-level active redundancy and protection (1:1) for attached Ethernet equipment. It can  
also bundle parallel G-Series data links together to provide more aggregated bandwidth. STP operates  
as if the bundled links are one link and permits GEC to utilize these multiple parallel paths. Without  
GEC, STP permits only a single non blocked path. GEC can also provide G-Series card-level protection  
or redundancy because it can support a group of ports on different cards (or different nodes) so that if  
one port or card has a failure, traffic is rerouted over the other port or card.  
14.2 G-Series Gigabit Ethernet Transponder Mode  
The G-Series card can be configured as a transponder. Transponder mode can be used with any G-Series  
supported GBIC (SX, LX, ZX, coarse wavelength division multiplexing [CWDM], or dense wavelength  
division multiplexing [DWDM]). Figure 14-4 shows a card-level overview of a transponder mode  
application.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.2 G-Series Gigabit Ethernet Transponder Mode  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-4  
Card Level Overview of G-Series One Port Transponder Mode Application  
G1K  
FAIL  
ACT  
RX  
1
Gigabit Ethernet over CWDM or  
DWDM GBICs' TX wavelengths  
Conventional Gigabit  
Ethernet signals  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
Server/switch/router  
DWDM filter  
RX  
2
Conventional LX or ZX GBICs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
3
CWDM or DWDM GBICs  
TX  
ACT/LINK  
RX  
4
TX  
ACT/LINK  
A G-Series card configured as a transponder operates quite differently than a G-Series card configured  
for SDH. In an SDH configuration, the G-Series card receives and transmits Gigabit Ethernet traffic from  
the Ethernet ports and GBICs on the front of the card. This Ethernet traffic is multiplexed on and off the  
SDH network through the cross-connect card and the OC-N card (Figure 14-5).  
Figure 14-5  
G-Series in Default SDH Mode  
t Ethernet 1  
t Ethernet 2  
t Ethernet 3  
t Ethernet 4  
STS-N(c)  
Ethernet  
TDM  
Cross-Connect  
Card  
Optical Card  
G-Series Card  
GBICs  
GBIC  
ONS Node  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.2.1 Two-Port Bidirectional Transponder  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
In transponder mode, the G-Series Ethernet traffic never comes into contact with the cross-connect card  
or the SDH network, but stays internal to the G-Series card and is routed back to a GBIC on that card  
(Figure 14-6).  
Figure 14-6  
G-Series Card in Transponder Mode (Two-Port Bidirectional)  
xWDM Lambda1  
xWDM Lambda 2  
Ethernet  
TDM  
Cross-Connect  
Card  
Optical Card  
G-Series Card  
ONS Node  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
GBIC Standard SX, LX, ZX  
GBIC CWDM or DWDM  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
A G-Series card can either be configured for transponding mode or as the SDH default. Once any port  
is provisioned in transponding mode, the card is in transponding mode and no SDH circuits can be  
configured until every port on the card goes back to SDH mode. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Procedure Guide for instructions on how to provision G-Series ports for transponder mode.  
All SDH circuits must be deleted before a G-Series card can be configured in transponding mode. An  
ONS 15454 SDH can host the card in any of the twelve traffic slots on the ONS 15454 SDH and supports  
a maximum of 24 bidirectional or 48 unidirectional lambdas.  
A G-Series card configured as a transponder can be in one of three modes:  
•
•
•
Two-port bidirectional transponding mode  
One-port bidirectional transponding mode  
Two-port unidirectional transponding mode  
14.2.1 Two-Port Bidirectional Transponder  
Two-port bidirectional transponder mode maps the transmitted and received Ethernet frames of one  
G-Series card port into the transmit and receive of another port (Figure 14-6). Transponder bidirectional  
port mapping can be between any two ports on the same card.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.2.2 One-Port Bidirectional Transponder  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.2.2 One-Port Bidirectional Transponder  
One-port bidirectional transponder mode maps the Ethernet frames received at a port out the transmitter  
of the same port (Figure 14-7). This mode is similar to two-port bidirectional transponder mode except  
that a port is mapped only to itself instead of to another port. Although the data path of the one port  
bidirectional transponder mode is identical to that of a facility loopback, the transponding mode is not a  
maintenance mode and does not suppress non-SDH alarms, such as loss of carrier (CARLOSS).  
This mode can be used for intermediate DWDM signal regeneration and to take advantage of the wide  
band capability of the CWDM and DWDM GBICs, which allows the node to receive on multiple  
wavelengths but transmit on a fixed wavelength.  
Figure 14-7  
One-Port Bidirectional Transponding Mode  
WDM Lambda 1  
WDM Lambda 2  
WDM Lambda 3  
WDM Lambda 4  
Ethernet  
TDM  
Cross-Connect  
Card  
Optical Card  
G-Series Card  
ONS Node  
Note:  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
GBIC Standard SX, LX, ZX  
GBIC CWDM or DWDM  
This configuration can be used when the client  
terminal's optical signal is single-mode, 1310 nm,  
1550 nm, or 15xx.xx nm.  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
14.2.3 Two-Port Unidirectional Transponder  
Ethernet frames received at one port’s receiver will be transmitted out the transmitter of another port.  
This mode is similar to two-port bidirectional transponder mode except only one direction is used  
(Figure 14-8). One port must be provisioned as unidirectional transmit only and the other port must be  
provisioned as unidirectional receive. The port configured as unidirectional transmit ignores any missing  
signals on the receive port, so the receive port fiber does not need not be connected. The port configured  
as unidirectional receive does not turn on the transmit laser so the transmit port fiber does not need to be  
connected.  
This mode can be used when only one direction needs to be transmitted over CWDM/DWDM, for  
example certain video-on-demand (VoD) applications.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.2.4 G-Series Transponder Mode Characteristics  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-8  
Two-Port Unidirectional Transponder  
X
WDM Lambda 1  
WDM Lambda 2  
X
X
X
Ethernet  
TDM  
Cross-Connect  
Card  
Optical Card  
G-Series Card  
ONS Node  
Note:  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
GBIC Standard SX, LX, ZX  
This configuration must be used when the client  
terminal's optical signal is multimode, 850 nm.  
Tx Port  
Rx Port  
GBIC CWDM or DWDM  
Unused Port  
X
14.2.4 G-Series Transponder Mode Characteristics  
The operation of a G-Series card in transponder mode differs from a G-Series card in SDH mode in  
several ways:  
•
•
•
A G-Series card set to transponder mode will not show up in the CTC list of provisionable cards  
when the user is provisioning an SDH circuit.  
G-Series cards set to transponder mode do not require cross-connect cards (for example, the  
XC10G), but do require TCC2 cards.  
G-Series ports configured as transponders do not respond to flow control pause frames and pass the  
pause frames transparently through the card. In SDH mode, ports can respond to pause frames and  
do not pass the pause frames through the card.  
•
•
All SDH-related alarms are suppressed when a card is set in transponding mode.  
There are no slot number or cross-connect restrictions for G1000-4 or G1K-4 cards in transponder  
mode.  
•
•
•
Facility and terminal loopbacks are not fully supported in unidirectional transponding mode but are  
supported in both bidirectional transponding modes.  
Ethernet autonegotiation is not supported and cannot be provisioned in unidirectional transponding  
mode. Autonegotiation is supported in both bidirectional transponding modes.  
No end-to-end link integrity function is available in transponding mode.  
Note  
In normal SDH mode the G-Series cards support an end-to-end link integrity function. This function  
causes an Ethernet or SDH failure to disable and turn the transmitting laser off the corresponding  
mapped Ethernet port. In transponder mode, the loss of signal on an Ethernet port has no impact on the  
transmit signal of the corresponding mapped port.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3 E-Series Application  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
The operation of a G-Series card in transponder mode is also similar to the operation of a G-Series card  
in SDH mode:  
•
•
•
•
G-Series Ethernet statistics are available for ports in both modes.  
Ethernet port level alarms and conditions are available for ports in both modes.  
Jumbo frame and non-jumbo frame operation is the same in both modes.  
Collection, reporting and threshold crossing conditions for all existing counters and performance  
monitoring (PM) parameters are the same in both modes.  
•
SNMP and RMON support is the same in both modes.  
14.3 E-Series Application  
The E-Series cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, whereas the G-Series card is a straight mapper card.  
E-Series cards in multicard Etherswitch Group or single-card EtherSwitch support virtual local area  
networks (VLANs), IEEE 802.1Q, STP, and IEEE 802.1D. The E-Series card in port-mapped mode  
configures the E-Series card to be a mapper card and disables the Layer 2 functions. An ONS 15454 SDH  
holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, and you can insert Ethernet cards in any multipurpose slot.  
14.3.1 E-Series Modes  
An E-Series card operates in one of three modes: Multicard EtherSwitch Group, Single-card  
EtherSwitch, or Port-mapped. Within an ONS 15454 SDH containing multiple E-Series cards, each  
E-Series card can operate in any of the three separate modes. At the Ethernet card view in CTC, click  
the Provisioning > Ether Card tabs to reveal the card modes.  
Note  
Port-mapped mode eliminates issues inherent in other E-Series modes and detailed in the field notice,  
“E-Series Ethernet Line Card Packet Forwarding Limitations.”  
14.3.1.1 E-Series Multicard EtherSwitch Group  
Multicard EtherSwitch Group provisions two or more Ethernet cards to act as a single Layer 2 switch.  
It supports one VC4-3c circuit, two VC4-2c circuits, or six VC4 circuits. Each multicard switch may  
connect up to a total of VC4-3c in SDH circuits. When provisioned as an add or drop node of a shared  
packet ring circuit, the effective bandwidth doubles, supporting VC4-3c in each direction of the ring.  
Figure 14-9 illustrates a multicard EtherSwitch configuration.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.1 E-Series Modes  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-9  
Multicard EtherSwitch Configuration  
ONS Node  
VLAN A  
Ethernet card 1  
Ethernet card 2  
Router  
Router  
Router  
ONS Node  
ONS Node  
Shared packet ring  
Ethernet card 3  
Ethernet card 4  
Router  
ONS Node  
Caution  
Whenever you terminate two VC4-2c multicard EtherSwitch circuits on an Ethernet card and later delete  
the first circuit, also delete the remaining VC4-2c circuit before you provision an VC4 circuit to the card.  
If you attempt to create an VC4 circuit after only deleting the first VC4-2c circuit, the VC4 circuit will  
not work, but no alarms will indicate this condition. To avoid this situation, delete the second VC4-2c  
before creating an VC4 circuit.  
14.3.1.2 E-Series Single-Card EtherSwitch  
Single-card EtherSwitch allows each Ethernet card to remain a single switching entity within the  
ONS 15454 SDH shelf. This option allows VC4-4c worth of bandwidth between two Ethernet circuit  
endpoints. Figure 14-10 illustrates a single-card EtherSwitch configuration.  
Figure 14-10  
Single-Card EtherSwitch Configuration  
Ethernet card 1  
Ethernet card 2  
Router  
Router  
Router  
VLAN A  
VLAN B  
ONS Node  
ONS Node  
Ethernet card 3  
Ethernet card 4  
Router  
14.3.1.3 Port-Mapped (Linear Mapper)  
Port-mapped mode, also referred to as linear mapper, configures the E-Series card to map a specific  
E-Series Ethernet port to one of the card’s specific STM circuits (Figure 14-11). Port-mapped mode  
ensures Layer 1 transport has low latency for unicast, multicast, and mixed traffic. Ethernet and Fast  
Ethernet on the E100T-G card operate at line-rate speed. Gigabit Ethernet transport is not line rate  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.2 E-Series IEEE 802.3z Flow Control  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
because the E1000-2-G has a maximum bandwidth of VC4-4c. Ethernet frame sizes up to 1522 bytes are  
also supported, which allows transport of IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames. The larger maximum frame size  
of Q-in-Q frames (802.1Q in 802.1Q wrapped frames) are not supported.  
Figure 14-11  
E-Series Mapping Ethernet Ports To SDH STM Circuits  
SONET/SDH  
ONS Node  
ONS Node  
1:1 Ethernet port to STS/VC circuit mapping  
Port-mapped mode disables Layer 2 functions supported by the E-Series in single-card and multicard  
mode, including STP, VLANs, and MAC address learning. It significantly reduces the service-affecting  
time for cross-connect and TCC2 card switches.  
Port-mapped mode does not support VLANs in the same manner as multicard and single-card mode. The  
ports of E-Series cards in multicard and single-card mode can join specific VLANs. E-Series cards in  
port-mapped mode do not have this Layer 2 capability and only transparently transport external VLANs  
over the mapped connection between ports. An E-Series card in port-mapped mode does not inspect the  
tag of the transported VLAN, so a VLAN range of 1 through 4096 can be transported in port-mapped  
mode.  
Port-mapped mode does not inspect or validate the Ethernet frame header. The Ethernet CRC is  
validated, and any frame with an invalid Ethernet CRC is discarded.  
Port-mapped mode also allows the creation of STM-N circuits between any two E-Series cards; it does  
not allow an E-Series cards to connect to the ML-Series or G-Series cards.  
14.3.2 E-Series IEEE 802.3z Flow Control  
The E100T-G card in any mode and the E1000-G card in port-mapped mode support IEEE 802.3z  
symmetrical flow control and propose symmetric flow control when auto-negotiating with attached  
Ethernet devices. For flow control to operate, both the E-Series port and the attached Ethernet device  
must be set to auto negotiation (AUTO) mode. The attached Ethernet device may also need to have flow  
control enabled. The flow-control mechanism allows the E-Series to respond to pause frames sent from  
external devices and to send pause frames to external devices.  
Flow control matches the sending and receiving device throughput to that of the bandwidth of the  
STM-N circuit. For example, a router might transmit to the Gigabit Ethernet port on the E-Series card  
in port-mapped mode. The data rate transmitted by the router can occasionally exceed 622 Mbps, but the  
ONS 15454 SDH circuit assigned to the E-Series port in port-mapped mode is a maximum of VC4-4c  
(622.08 Mbps). In this scenario, the ONS 15454 SDH sends out a pause frame and requests that the  
router delay its transmission for a certain period of time.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.3 E-Series VLAN Support  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Note  
To enable flow control between an E-Series in port-mapped mode and a SmartBits test set, manually set  
bit 5 of the MII register to 0 on the SmartBits test set. To enable flow control between an E-Series in  
port-mapped mode and an Ixia test set, select Enable the flow control in the Properties menu of the  
attached Ixia port.  
14.3.3 E-Series VLAN Support  
Users can provision up to 509 VLANs per network with the CTC software. Specific sets of ports define  
the broadcast domain for the ONS 15454 SDH. The definition of VLAN ports includes all Ethernet and  
packet-switched SDH port types. All VLAN IP address discovery, flooding, and forwarding is limited to  
these ports.  
The ONS 15454 SDH IEEE 802.1Q-based VLAN mechanism provides logical isolation of subscriber  
LAN traffic over a common SDH transport infrastructure. Each subscriber has an Ethernet port at each  
site, and each subscriber is assigned to a VLAN. Although the subscriber’s VLAN data flows over shared  
circuits, the service appears to the subscriber as a private data transport.  
Note  
Port-mapped mode does not support VLANs.  
The number of VLANs used by circuits and the total number of VLANs available for use appears in CTC  
on the VLAN counter.  
14.3.4 E-Series Q-Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q)  
E-Series cards in single-card and multicard mode support IEEE 802.1Q. IEEE 802.1Q allows the same  
physical port to host multiple IEEE 802.1Q VLANs. Each IEEE 802.1Q VLAN represents a different  
logical network. E-Series cards in port-mapped mode transport IEEE 802.1Q tags (Q-tags), but do not  
remove or add these tags.  
The ONS 15454 SDH works with Ethernet devices that support IEEE 802.1Q and those that do not  
support IEEE 802.1Q. If a device attached to an ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet port does not support  
IEEE 802.1Q, the ONS 15454 SDH uses Q-tags internally only. The ONS 15454 SDH associates these  
Q-tags with specific ports.  
With Ethernet devices that do not support IEEE 802.1Q, the ONS 15454 SDH takes non-tagged Ethernet  
frames that enter the ONS network and uses a Q-tag to assign the packet to the VLAN associated with  
the ONS network’s ingress port. The receiving ONS node removes the Q-tag when the frame leaves the  
ONS network (to prevent older Ethernet equipment from incorrectly identifying the IEEE 8021.Q packet  
as an illegal frame). The ingress and egress ports on the ONS network must be set to Untag for the  
removal to occur. Untag is the default setting for ONS ports. Example 1 in Figure 14-12 illustrates Q-tag  
use only within an ONS network.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.4 E-Series Q-Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q)  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-12  
Q-Tag Moving through VLAN  
Data Flow  
No tag  
Q-tag  
No tag  
Example 1.  
The ONS node uses a  
The receiving ONS node  
removes the Q-tag  
Q-tag internally to deliver  
the frame to a specific VLAN.  
and forwards the frame  
to the specific VLAN.  
Q-tag  
Q-tag  
Q-tag  
Example 2.  
The receiving ONS node  
receives a frame with a  
Q-tag and passes it on.  
The ONS node receives  
a frame with a Q-tag  
and passes it on.  
The ONS 15454 SDH uses the Q-tag attached by the external Ethernet devices that support IEEE 802.1Q.  
Packets enter the ONS network with an existing Q-tag; the ONS 15454 SDH uses this same Q-tag to  
forward the packet within the ONS network and leaves the Q-tag attached when the packet leaves the  
ONS network. The entry and egress ports on the ONS network must be set to Tagged for this process to  
occur. Example 2 in Figure 14-12 illustrates the handling of packets that both enter and exit the ONS  
network with a Q-tag.  
For more information about setting ports to Tagged and Untag, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Procedure Guide.  
Caution  
ONS 15454 SDHs propagate VLANs whenever a node appears on the network view of another node,  
regardless of whether the nodes are in the same SDH network or connect through DCC. For example, if  
two ONS 15454 SDHs without DCC connectivity belong to the same login node group, VLANs  
propagate between the two ONS 15454 SDHs. VLAN propagation happens even though the  
ONS 15454 SDHs do not belong to the same SDH ring.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.5 E-Series Priority Queuing (IEEE 802.1Q)  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.3.5 E-Series Priority Queuing (IEEE 802.1Q)  
Networks without priority queuing handle all packets on a FIFO basis. Priority queuing reduces the  
impact of network congestion by mapping Ethernet traffic to different priority levels. The ONS 15454  
SDH supports priority queuing. The ONS 15454 SDH maps the eight priorities specified in IEEE 802.1Q  
to two queues, low priority and high priority number (Table 14-1).  
Table 14-1  
Priority Queuing  
User Priority  
0,1,2,3  
Queue  
Low  
Allocated Bandwidth  
30%  
70%  
4,5,6,7  
High  
Q-tags carry priority queuing information through the network (Figure 14-13).  
Figure 14-13  
Priority Queuing Process  
Data Flow  
Priority tag  
removed  
Priority  
No priority  
ONS node maps a frame  
with port-based priority using  
a Q-tag.  
The receiving ONS node  
removes the Q-tag and  
forwards the frame.  
Same  
priority  
Priority  
Priority  
ONS node uses a Q-tag to  
map a frame with priority and  
forwards it on.  
The receiving ONS node  
receives the frame with a  
Q-tag and forwards it.  
The ONS 15454 SDH uses a “leaky bucket” algorithm to establish a weighted priority (not a strict  
priority). A weighted priority gives high-priority packets greater access to bandwidth, but does not  
totally preempt low-priority packets. During periods of network congestion, roughly 70 percent of  
bandwidth goes to the high-priority queue and the remaining 30 percent goes to the low-priority queue.  
A network that is too congested will drop packets.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.6 E-Series Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1D)  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Note  
Note  
IEEE 802.1Q was formerly IEEE 802.1P.  
E-Series cards in port-mapped mode and G-Series cards do not support priority queing (IEEE 8021.Q).  
14.3.6 E-Series Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1D)  
The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH operates Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) according to IEEE 802.1D when an  
Ethernet card is installed. The E-Series card supports common STPs on a per circuit basis up to a total  
of eight STP instances. It does not support per-VLAN STP. In single-card mode, STP can be disabled or  
enabled on a per circuit basis during circuit creation. Disabling STP will preserve the number of  
available STP instances.  
STP operates over all packet-switched ports including Ethernet and STM-N ports. On Ethernet ports,  
STP is enabled by default but can be disabled. A user can also disable or enable STP on a  
circuit-by-circuit basis on unstitched Ethernet cards in a point-to-point configuration. However, turning  
off STP protection on a circuit-by-circuit basis means that the ONS 15454 SDH system is not protecting  
the Ethernet traffic on this circuit, and the Ethernet traffic must be protected by another mechanism in  
the Ethernet network. On STM-N interface ports, the ONS 15454 SDH activates STP by default, and STP  
cannot be disabled.  
The Ethernet card can enable STP on the Ethernet ports to create redundant paths to the attached Ethernet  
equipment. STP connects cards so that both equipment and facilities are protected against failure.  
STP detects and eliminates network loops. When STP detects multiple paths between any two network  
hosts, STP blocks ports until only one path exists between any two network hosts (Figure 14-14). The  
single path eliminates possible bridge loops. This is crucial for shared packet rings, which naturally  
include a loop.  
Figure 14-14  
An STP Blocked Path  
Primary path (forwarding)  
Redundant path (blocked)  
To remove loops, STP defines a tree that spans all the switches in an extended network. STP forces  
certain redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. If one network segment in the STP becomes  
unreachable, the STP algorithm reconfigures the STP topology and reactivates the blocked path to  
reestablish the link. STP operation is transparent to end stations, which do not discriminate between  
connections to a single LAN segment or to a switched LAN with multiple segments. The  
ONS 15454 SDH supports one STP instance per circuit and a maximum of eight STP instances per  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
The Circuit window shows forwarding spans and blocked spans on the spanning tree map (Figure 14-15).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.6 E-Series Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1D)  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-15  
Spanning Tree Map on the Circuit Window  
Note  
Caution  
Note  
Green represents forwarding spans and purple represents blocked (protect) spans. If you have a packet  
ring configuration, at least one span should be purple.  
Multiple circuits with STP protection enabled will incur blocking if the circuits traverse a common card  
and use the same VLAN.  
E-Series port-mapped mode does not support STP (IEEE 8021.D).  
14.3.6.1 E-Series Multi-Instance Spanning Tree and VLANs  
The ONS 15454 SDH can operate multiple instances of STP to support VLANs in a looped topology.  
You can dedicate separate circuits across the SDH ring for different VLAN groups. Each circuit runs its  
own STP to maintain VLAN connectivity in a multiring environment.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.3.6 E-Series Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1D)  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.3.6.2 Spanning Tree on a Circuit-by-Circuit Basis  
You can also disable or enable STP on a circuit-by-circuit basis on single-card EtherSwitch E-Series  
cards in a point-to-point configuration. This feature allows customers to mix spanning tree protected  
circuits with unprotected circuits on the same card. It also allows two single-card EtherSwitch E-Series  
cards on the same node to form an intranode circuit.  
14.3.6.3 E-Series Spanning Tree Parameters  
Default STP parameters are appropriate for most situations (Table 14-2). Contact the Cisco Technical  
Assistance Center (Cisco TAC) before you change the default STP parameters.  
Table 14-2  
Spanning Tree Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
BridgeID  
ONS 15454 SDH unique identifier that transmits the configuration bridge protocol  
data unit (BPDU); the bridge ID is a combination of the bridge priority and the  
ONS 15454 SDH MAC address  
TopoAge  
Amount of time in seconds since the last topology change  
TopoChanges  
Number of times the STP topology has been changed since the node booted up  
DesignatedRoot STP’s designated root for a particular STP instance  
RootCost  
RootPort  
MaxAge  
Total path cost to the designated root  
Port used to reach the root  
Maximum time that received-protocol information is retained before it is  
discarded  
HelloTime  
Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration BPDUs by a  
bridge that is the spanning tree root or is attempting to become the spanning tree  
root  
HoldTime  
Minimum time period, in seconds, that elapses during the transmission of  
configuration information on a given port  
ForwardDelay  
Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state  
14.3.6.4 E-Series Spanning Tree Configuration  
To view the spanning tree configuration, at the node view click the Provisioning > Etherbridge >  
Spanning Trees tabs. (Table 14-3).  
Table 14-3  
Spanning Tree Configuration  
Column  
Default Value Value Range  
Priority  
32768  
0 to 65535  
Bridge max age  
Bridge Hello Time  
20 seconds  
2 seconds  
6 to 40 seconds  
1 to 10 seconds  
4 to 30 seconds  
Bridge Forward Delay 15 seconds  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.4 G-Series Circuit Configurations  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.4 G-Series Circuit Configurations  
This section explains G-Series point-to-point circuits and manual cross-connects. Ethernet manual  
cross-connects allow you to cross connect individual Ethernet circuits to an STM-N channel on the  
ONS 15454 SDH optical interface and also to bridge non-ONS SDH network segments.  
14.4.1 G-Series Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits  
G-Series cards support point-to-point circuit configurations (Figure 14-16). Provisionable circuit sizes  
are VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, and VC4-16C. Each Ethernet port maps to a unique  
STM-N circuit of the G-Series card.  
Figure 14-16  
G-Series Point-to-Point Circuit  
ONS Node  
Gigabit Ethernet  
ONS Node  
Gigabit Ethernet  
Point-to-Point Circuit  
The G-Series supports any combination of up to four circuits from the list of valid circuit sizes; however,  
the circuit sizes can add up to no more than VC4-16.  
Because of hardware constraints, the card imposes an additional restriction on the combinations of  
circuits that can be dropped onto a G-Series card. These restrictions are transparently enforced by the  
ONS 15454 SDH, and you do not need to keep track of restricted circuit combinations.  
When a single VC4-8c terminates on a card, the remaining circuits on that card can be another single  
VC4-8c or any combination of circuits of VC4-4c size or less that add up to no more than VC4-4c (that  
is, a total of 12 VC4s on the card).  
If VC4-8c circuits are not being dropped on the card, the full VC4-16 bandwidth can be used with no  
restrictions (for example, using either a single VC4-16C or 4 VC4-4c circuits).  
Note  
The VC4-8c restriction only applies when a single VC4-8c circuit is dropped; therefore, you can easily  
minimize the impact of this restriction. Group the VC4-8c circuits together on a card separate from  
circuits of other sizes. The grouped circuits can be dropped on other G-Series cards on the  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
Caution  
G-Series cards do not connect with E-series cards.  
14.4.2 G-Series Manual Cross-Connects  
ONS 15454 SDHs require end-to-end CTC visibility between nodes for normal provisioning of Ethernet  
circuits. When other vendors’ equipment sits between ONS 15454 SDHs, open system interconnection  
(OSI)/Transient Addressing for Related Processes (TARP)-based equipment does not allow tunneling of  
the ONS 15454 SDH TCP/IP-based DCC. To circumvent inconsistent DCCs, the Ethernet circuit must  
be manually cross connected to an STM channel using the non-ONS network. Manual cross-connects  
allows an Ethernet circuit to run from ONS node to ONS node while utilizing the non-ONS network  
(Figure 14-17).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.5 E-Series Circuit Configurations  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Note  
In this chapter, “cross-connect” and “circuit” have the following meanings: Cross-connect refers to the  
connections that occur within a single ONS 15454 SDH to allow a circuit to enter and exit an  
ONS 15454 SDH. Circuit refers to the series of connections from a traffic source (where traffic enters  
the ONS 15454 SDH network) to the drop or destination (where traffic exits an ONS 15454 SDH  
network).  
Figure 14-17  
G-Series Manual Cross-Connects  
Non-ONS  
Network  
ONS Node  
ONS Node  
SONET/SDH  
Ethernet  
14.5 E-Series Circuit Configurations  
Ethernet circuits can link ONS nodes through point-to-point (straight), shared packet ring, or hub-and-  
spoke configurations. Two nodes usually connect with a point-to-point configuration. More than two  
nodes usually connect with a shared packet ring configuration or a hub-and-spoke configuration.  
Ethernet manual cross-connects allow you to cross connect individual Ethernet circuits to an STM  
channel on the ONS 15454 SDH optical interface and also to bridge non-ONS SDH network segments.  
For circuit configuration procedures, refer to the “Create Circuits and Low-Order Tunnels” chapter of  
the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
Note  
Note  
Before making Ethernet connections, choose an VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, or VC4-4c circuit size.  
To make an VC4-4c Ethernet circuit, Ethernet cards must be configured in single-card EtherSwitch or  
port-mapped mode. Multicard mode does not support VC4-4c Ethernet circuits.  
14.5.1 Port-Mapped Mode and Single-card EtherSwitch Circuit Scenarios  
Four scenarios exist for provisioning maximum single-card EtherSwitch bandwidth:  
1. VC4-4c  
2. VC4-2c + VC4-2c  
3. VC4-2c + VC4 + VC4  
4. VC4 + VC4 + VC4 + VC4  
Note  
When configuring Scenario 3, the VC4-2c must be provisioned before either of the VC4 circuits.When  
configuring Scenarios 3 and 4, the STM 6c must be provisioned before the smaller STM circuits.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.5.2 E-Series Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.5.2 E-Series Point-to-Point Ethernet Circuits  
The ONS 15454 SDH can set up a point-to-point (straight) Ethernet circuit as single-card, port-mapped  
or multicard circuit. Multicard EtherSwitch limits bandwidth to VC4-3c between two Ethernet circuit  
points, but allows adding nodes and cards and making a shared packet ring (Figure 14-18).  
Figure 14-18  
Multicard EtherSwitch Point-to-Point Circuit  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#1  
192.168.1.25  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test 1  
192.168.1.50  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test 1  
Slot 4, port 1  
Slot 15, port 1  
192.168.1.100  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test 1  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#2  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#3  
192.168.1.75  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test 1  
Slot 5, port 1  
Slot 17, port 1  
SDH  
Ethernet  
Figure 14-19 shows a single-card EtherSwitch. Port-mapped mode allows a full VC4-4c of bandwidth  
between two Ethernet circuit endpoints.  
Figure 14-19  
Single-Card EtherSwitch or Port-Mapped Point-to-Point Circuit  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#1  
192.168.1.25  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
Slot 4  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#2  
ONS 15454 SDH  
#3  
192.168.1.50  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
Slot 15  
Note  
A Port-mapped point-to-point circuit does not contain a VLAN.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.5.3 E-Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuits  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
14.5.3 E-Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuits  
A shared packet ring allows nodes other than the source and destination nodes to access an Ethernet STM  
circuit. The E-Series card ports on the additional nodes can share the circuit’s VLAN and bandwidth.  
Figure 14-20 illustrates a shared packet ring. Your network architecture may differ from the example.  
Figure 14-20  
Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuit  
Backbone router  
Access router  
Access router  
SDH Ring  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
Access router  
Access router  
ONS 15454  
SDH  
SDH  
Ethernet  
Access router  
Access router  
14.5.4 E-Series Hub-and-Spoke Ethernet Circuit Provisioning  
The hub-and-spoke configuration connects point-to-point circuits (the spokes) to an aggregation point  
(the hub). In many cases, the hub links to a high-speed connection and the spokes are Ethernet cards.  
Figure 14-21 illustrates a hub-and-spoke ring. Your network architecture may differ from the example.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.5.5 E-Series Ethernet Manual Cross-Connects  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Figure 14-21  
Hub-and-Spoke Ethernet Circuit  
192.168.1.75  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
192.168.1.125  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
192.168.1.100  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
ONS 15454  
SDH #1  
192.168.1.25  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
ONS 15454  
SDH #2  
ONS 15454 192.168.1.50  
255.255.255.0  
VLAN test  
SDH #3  
14.5.5 E-Series Ethernet Manual Cross-Connects  
ONS 15454 SDHs require end-to-end CTC visibility between nodes for normal provisioning of Ethernet  
circuits. When other vendors’ equipment sits between ONS 15454 SDHs, OSI/TARP-based equipment  
does not allow tunneling of the ONS 15454 SDH TCP/IP-based DCC. To circumvent inconsistent DCC,  
the Ethernet circuit must be manually cross connected to an STM channel using the non-ONS network.  
The manual cross-connect allows an Ethernet circuit to run from ONS node to ONS node utilizing the  
non-ONS network.  
Note  
In this chapter, “cross-connect” and “circuit” have the following meanings: Cross-connect refers to the  
connections that occur within a single ONS 15454 SDH to allow a circuit to enter and exit an  
ONS 15454 SDH. Circuit refers to the series of connections from a traffic source (where traffic enters  
the ONS 15454 SDH network) to the drop or destination (where traffic exits an ONS 15454 SDH  
network).  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds  
The ONS 15454 SDH features remote monitoring (RMON) that allows network operators to monitor the  
health of the network with a network management system (NMS).  
One of the ONS 15454 SDH’s RMON MIBs is the Alarm group, which contains the alarmTable. An  
NMS uses the alarmTable to find the alarm-causing thresholds for network performance. The thresholds  
apply to the current 15-minute interval and the current 24-hour interval. RMON monitors several  
variables, such as Ethernet collisions, and triggers an event when the variable crosses a threshold during  
that time interval. For example, if a threshold is set at 1000 collisions and 1001 collisions occur during  
the 15-minute interval, an event triggers. CTC allows you to provision these thresholds for Ethernet  
statistics.  
Table 14-4 defines the variables you can provision in CTC. For example, to set the collision threshold,  
choose etherStatsCollisions from the Variable menu.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Table 14-4  
Ethernet Threshold Variables (MIBs)  
Variable  
Definition  
iflnOctets  
Total number of octets received on the interface, including  
framing octets  
iflnUcastPkts  
Total number of unicast packets delivered to an appropriate  
protocol  
ifInMulticastPkts  
ifInBroadcastPkts  
Number of multicast frames received error free (not supported by  
E-Series)  
Number of packets, delivered by this sublayer to a higher  
(sub)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this  
sublayer (not supported by E-Series)  
ifInDiscards  
iflnErrors  
Number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded  
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being  
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol (not supported by  
E-Series)  
Number of inbound packets discarded because they contain  
errors  
ifOutOctets  
Total number of transmitted octets, including framing packets  
ifOutUcastPkts  
Total number of unicast packets requested to transmit to a single  
address  
ifOutMulticastPkts  
ifOutBroadcastPkts  
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free (not supported  
by E-Series)  
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at  
this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent (not  
supported by E-Series)  
ifOutDiscards  
Number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded  
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being  
transmitted (not supported by E-Series)  
dot3statsAlignmentErrors  
Number of frames with an alignment error, that is, the length is  
not an integral number of octets and the frame cannot pass the  
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) test  
dot3StatsFCSErrors  
Number of frames with framecheck errors, that is, there is an  
integral number of octets, but an incorrect FCS  
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames  
dot3StatsMutlipleCollisionFrame  
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions  
dot3StatsExcessiveCollision  
dot3StatsLateCollision  
Number of successfully transmitted frames that had exactly one  
collision  
Number of successfully transmitted frames that had multiple  
collisions  
Number of times the first transmission was delayed because the  
medium was busy  
Number of frames where transmissions failed because of  
excessive collisions  
Number of times that a collision was detected later than 64 octets  
into the transmission (also added into collision count)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Table 14-4  
Ethernet Threshold Variables (MIBs) (continued)  
Variable  
Definition  
dot3StatsFrameTooLong  
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors  
dot3StatsSQETestErrors  
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum  
size permitted  
Number of transmission errors on a particular interface that are  
not otherwise counted (not supported by E-Series)  
Number of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is  
generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface (not  
supported by E-Series)  
etherStatsJabbers  
Total number of Octets of data (including bad packets) received  
on the network  
etherStatsUndersizePkts  
etherStatsFragments  
Number of packets received with a length less than 64 octets  
Total number of packets that are not an integral number of octets  
or have a bad FCS, and that are less than 64 octets long  
etherStatsOversizePkts  
etherStatsOctets  
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518  
octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and  
were otherwise well formed  
Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)  
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including  
FCS octets)  
etherStatsPkts64Octets  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 64 octets in length  
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets  
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets  
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets  
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets  
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets  
etherStatsJabbers  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 65 to 172 octets in length  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 128 to 255 octets in length  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 256 to 511 octets in length  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 512 to 1023 octets in length  
Total number of packets received (including error packets) that  
were 1024 to 1518 octets in length  
Total number of packets longer than 1518 octets that were not an  
integral number of octets or had a bad FCS  
etherStatsCollisions  
Best estimate of the total number of collisions on this segment  
etherStatsCollisionFrames  
Best estimate of the total number of frame collisions on this  
segment  
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors  
Total number of packets with a length between 64 and 1518  
octets, inclusive, that had a bad FCS or were not an integral  
number of octets in length  
receivePauseFrames  
transmitPauseFrames  
Number of received 802.x pause frames (not supported by  
E-Series)  
Number of transmitted 802.x pause frames (not supported by  
E-Series)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14 Ethernet Operation  
14.6 Remote Monitoring Specification Alarm Thresholds  
REVIEW DRAFT—CISCO CONFIDENTIAL  
Table 14-4  
Ethernet Threshold Variables (MIBs) (continued)  
Variable  
Definition  
receivePktsDroppedInternalCongest Number of received frames dropped because of frame buffer  
ion overflow and other reasons (not supported by E-Series)  
transmitPktsDroppedInternalConge Number of frames dropped in the transmit direction because of  
stion  
frame buffer overflow and other reasons (not supported by  
E-Series)  
txTotalPkts  
rxTotalPkts  
Total number of transmit packets (not supported by E-Series)  
Total number of receive packets (not supported by E-Series)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
14-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A P P E N D I X  
A
Hardware Specifications  
This appendix contains hardware and software specifications for the ONS 15454 SDH.  
A.1 Shelf Specifications  
This section provides specifications for shelf bandwidth; a list of topologies; Cisco Transport Controller  
(CTC) specifications; LAN, TL1, modem, alarm, and electrical interface assembly (EIA) interface  
specifications; database, timing, power, and environmental specifications; and shelf dimensions.  
A.1.1 Bandwidth  
The ONS 15454 SDH has the following bandwidth specifications:  
•
•
•
•
60 Gbps per shelf  
Total bandwidth: 180 Gbps per rack (assuming there are 3 shelves)  
Data plane bandwidth: 120 Gbps per rack (assuming there are 3 shelves)  
SDH plane bandwidth: 60 Gbps per rack (assuming there are 3 shelves)  
A.1.2 Configurations  
The ONS 15454 SDH can be configured as follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital cross-connect  
Terminal mode  
Linear add-drop multiplexer (ADM)  
Two-fiber multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing)  
Four-fiber MS-SPRing  
Multiring interconnection  
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)  
Extended SNCP  
Virtual rings  
Hybrid SDH network topology  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller  
•
•
Regenerator mode  
Wavelength multiplexer  
A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller  
CTC, the ONS 15454 SDH craft interface software, has the following specifications:  
10BaseT  
TCC2/TCC2P access: RJ-45 connector  
Front Mount Electrical Connection (FMEC) access: LAN connector on MIC-C/T/P faceplate  
•
•
•
A.1.4 External LAN Interface  
The ONS 15454 SDH external LAN interface has the following specifications:  
10BaseT Ethernet  
FMEC access: LAN connector on MIC-C/T/P faceplate  
•
•
A.1.5 Alarm Interface  
The ONS 15454 SDH alarm interface has the following specifications:  
•
•
•
•
•
Visual: Critical, Major, Minor, Remote  
Audible: Critical, Major, Minor, Remote  
Alarm inputs: Common 32-VDC output for all alarm-inputs, closed contact limited to 2 mA  
Control outputs: Open contact maximum 60 VDC, closed contact maximum 100 mA  
FMEC access: 62-Pin DB connector on the MIC-A/P faceplate  
A.1.6 Database Storage  
The ONS 15454 SDH has the following database storage specifications:  
•
Nonvolatile memory: 128 MB, 3.0 V flash memory  
A.1.7 Timing Interface  
The ONS 15454 SDH timing interface has the following specifications:  
•
•
•
2 coaxial inputs  
2 coaxial outputs  
FMEC access: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors on the MIC-C/T/P faceplate  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.1.8 System Timing  
A.1.8 System Timing  
The ONS 15454 SDH has the following system timing specifications:  
•
•
•
•
Stratum 3E, per ITU-T G.813  
Free running accuracy: +/– 4.6 ppm  
Holdover stability: 3.7 exp –7/day, including temperature (< 255 slips in first 24 hours)  
Reference: External building integrated timing supply (BITS), line, internal  
A.1.9 System Power  
The ONS 15454 SDH has the following power specifications:  
•
•
•
Input voltage: –48 VDC  
Power consumption: Configuration dependent, 53 W for fan tray; 650 W (maximum draw w/cards)  
Power requirements:  
–
–
Nominal: –48 VDC  
Tolerance limits: –40.5 to –57.0 VDC  
•
•
Power terminals: 3WK3 Combo-D power cable connector (MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P faceplates)  
Fusing: 100 A fuse panel; minimum 30 A fuse per shelf  
A.1.10 System Environmental Specifications  
The ONS 15454 SDH has the following environmental specifications:  
•
•
Operating temperature: 0 to +40 degrees Celsius (32 to 104 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
A.1.11 Dimensions  
The ONS 15454 SDH shelf assembly has the following dimensions:  
•
•
•
•
Height: 616.5 mm (24.27 in.)  
Width: 535 mm (17 in.) without mounting ears attached  
Depth: 280 mm (11.02 in.)  
Weight: 26 kg empty (57.3 lb)  
A.2 SFP Specifications  
Table A-1 lists the specifications for the available Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs).  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.3 General Card Specifications  
Table A-1  
SFP Specifications  
Transmitter Output  
Power Min/Max (dBm) Min/Max (dBm)  
Receiver Input Power  
SFP  
Interface  
15454-SFP-LC-SX/  
15454E-SFP-LC-SX  
Gigabit Ethernet (GE)  
–9.5 to –4  
–9.5 to –3  
–17 to 0  
15454-SFP-LC-LX/  
15454E-SFP-LC-LX  
GE  
–19 to –3  
15454-SFP3-1-IR=  
15454E-SFP-L.1.1=  
15454-SFP12-4-IR=  
15454E-SFP-L.4.1=  
15454-SFP-OC48-IR=  
OC-3  
–15 to –8  
–15 to –8  
–15 to –8  
–15 to –8  
–5 to +0  
–23 to –8  
–34 to –10  
–28 to –7  
–28 to –8  
–18 to +0  
STM-1  
OC-12, D1 Video  
STM-4, D1 Video  
OC-48, DV6000  
(C-Cor)  
ONS-SE-2G-S1=  
OC-48, STM-16  
–10 to –3  
–5 to +0  
–18 to –3  
–18 to +0  
15454E-SFP-L.16.1=  
STM-16, DV6000  
(C-Cor)  
15454-SFP-200/  
15454E-SFP-200  
Enterprise System  
Connection (ESCON)  
–8 to –4  
–28 to –3  
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX=/ Fibre Channel (FC)  
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S= (1 and 2 Gbps), fiber  
connectivity (FICON),  
–10 to –3.5  
–17 to 0 (1FC and 1GE)  
–15 to 0 (2FC)  
GE  
15454-SFP-GE+-LX=/  
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX= 2 Gbps), FICON, GE,  
high definition  
Fibre Channel (1 and  
–9.5 to –3.0  
–20 to –3 (1FC, 1GE, and  
2FC)  
television (HDTV)  
A.3 General Card Specifications  
This section provides power consumption and temperature ranges for all ONS 15454 SDH cards.  
A.3.1 Power Consumption  
Table A-2 provides power consumption information for the ONS 15454 SDH cards.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.3.1 Power Consumption  
Table A-2  
Individual Card Power Requirements  
Card Type  
Card Name  
Watts  
Ampheres  
BTU/Hr  
Control Cards  
TCC2  
26.00  
0.54  
88.8  
(0.43 A at –60 V)  
TCC2P  
27.00  
78.60  
81.30  
81.30  
8.00  
0.56  
92.2  
268.4  
277.6  
277.6  
27.3  
181.0  
81.9  
130.1  
150.2  
102.4  
202.8  
0.0  
XC10G  
1.64  
XC-VXL-10G  
1.69  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
1.69  
AIC-I  
0.17  
Fan Tray –48 VDC  
E1-N-14  
53.00  
24.00  
38.10  
44.00  
30.00  
59.40  
0.00  
1.10  
Electrical Cards  
Optical Cards  
April 2008  
0.50  
E1-42  
0.79  
E3-12  
0.92  
DS3i-N-12  
0.63  
STM1E-12  
1.24  
FMEC-E1  
0.00  
FMEC-DS1/E1  
0.00  
0.00  
0.0  
FMEC E1-120NP  
FMEC E1-120PROA  
FMEC E1-120PROB  
E1-75/120  
0.00  
0.00  
0.0  
–0.1  
via E1-42  
via E1-42  
0.00  
—
–0.1  
—
0.00  
0.0  
FMEC-E3/DS3  
0.00  
0.00  
0.0  
FMEC STM1E 1:1  
MIC-A/P  
–8.8  
via STM1E-12  
via TCC2/TCC2P  
via TCC2/TCC2P  
0.40  
—
–0.13  
–0.38  
19.20  
23.00  
9.28  
—
MIC-C/T/P  
—
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC3IR/STM1SH 1310-8  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550  
OC12 LR/STM4 SH 1310-4  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
65.6  
78.5  
31.7  
31.7  
31.7  
121.6  
127.0  
127.0  
106.5  
143.4  
150.2  
246.5  
157.1  
0.48  
0.19  
9.28  
0.19  
9.28  
0.19  
35.60  
37.20  
37.20  
31.20  
42.00  
44.00  
72.20  
0.74  
0.78  
0.78  
0.65  
0.88  
0.92  
1.50  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx 46.00  
0.96  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.3.2 Temperature Ranges  
Table A-2  
Individual Card Power Requirements (continued)  
Card Type  
Card Name  
E100T-G  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
Watts  
65.00  
53.50  
Ampheres  
BTU/Hr  
221.93  
182.67  
215.11  
Ethernet Cards  
1.35  
1.11  
63.00 (including Gigabit 1.31  
Interface Converters  
[GBICs])  
G1K-4  
63.00 (including GBICs) 1.31  
215.11  
181.0  
ML100T-12  
53.00  
1.10  
1.02  
1.25  
ML1000-2  
49.00 (including SFPs)  
60  
167.3  
Storage Access  
Networking  
FC_MR-4 (Fibre Channel)  
212.00  
A.3.2 Temperature Ranges  
Table A-3 provides temperature ranges and product names for ONS 15454 SDH cards.  
Note  
The I-Temp symbol is displayed on the faceplate of an I-Temp compliant card. A card without this  
symbol is C-Temp compliant.  
Table A-3  
Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names  
C-Temp Product Name  
I-Temp Product Name  
(0 to +55 degrees Celsius, (–40 to +65 degrees  
32 to 131 degrees  
Fahrenheit)  
Celsius, –40 to 149  
degrees Fahrenheit)  
Card Type  
Card Name  
TCC2  
Control Cards  
—
15454-TCC2  
TCC2P  
—
15454-TCC2P  
XC-VXL-10G  
XC-VXL-2.5G  
XC10G  
15454E-XC-VXL10G  
15454E-XC-VXL-2.5G  
15454-XC-10G  
—
—
—
—
AIC-I  
15454-AIC-I  
Electrical  
E1-N-14  
15454E-E1N-14  
15454E-1-42  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E1-42  
E3-12  
15454E-3-12  
DS3i-N-12  
STM1E-12  
FMEC-E1  
FMEC-DS1/E1  
FMEC E1-120NP  
15454E-DS3i-N-12  
15454E-STM1E-12  
15454E-FMEC-E1  
15454E-FMEC-DS1/E1  
15454E-FMEC  
E1-120NP  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                           
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.3.2 Temperature Ranges  
Table A-3  
Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names (continued)  
C-Temp Product Name  
I-Temp Product Name  
(0 to +55 degrees Celsius, (–40 to +65 degrees  
32 to 131 degrees  
Fahrenheit)  
Celsius, –40 to 149  
degrees Fahrenheit)  
Card Type  
Card Name  
FMEC E1-120PROA  
15454E-FMEC  
E1-120PROA  
—
FMEC E1-120PROB  
15454E-FMEC  
E1-120PROB  
—
E1-75/120  
15454E-E1-75/120  
—
—
—
FMEC-E3/DS3  
FMEC STM1E 1:1  
15454E-FMEC-E3/DS3  
15454E-FMEC STM1E  
1:1  
MIC-A/P  
15454E-MIC-A/P  
15454E-MIC-C/T/P  
15454E-S1.1-4  
15454E-S1.1-8  
15454E-S4.1-1  
15454E-L4.1-1  
15454E-L4.2-1  
15454E-L4.1-4  
15454E-S16.1-1  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MIC-C/T/P  
Optical  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310  
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550  
OC12 LR/STM4 SH 1310-4  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 15454E-S16.2-1  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz 15454E-EL16HXXXX  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
15454E-I65.1  
15454E-S64.2  
15454E-L64.2.1  
15454E-64-LXX.X  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU  
15xx.xx  
Ethernet  
E100T-G  
E1000-2-G  
G1000-4  
15454-E100T-G  
15454-E1000-2-G  
15454-G1000-4  
15454-G1K-4  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
G1K-4  
ML100T-12  
ML1000-2  
FC_MR-4  
15454-ML100T-12  
15454-ML1000-2  
15454-FC_MR-4  
Storage Access  
Networking  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.4 Common Control Card Specifications  
A.4 Common Control Card Specifications  
This section provides specifications for the common control cards.  
For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance  
Information document.  
A.4.1 TCC2 Card Specifications  
The TCC2 card has the following specifications:  
•
CTC software  
–
–
–
Interface: EIA/TIA-232 (local craft access, on TCC2 faceplate)  
Interface: 10BaseT LAN (on TCC2 faceplate)  
Interface: 10BaseT LAN (via backplane, access on the MIC-A/P card)  
•
Synchronization  
–
–
–
–
Stratum 3, per ITU-T G.812  
Free running access: Accuracy +/- 4.6 ppm  
Holdover stability: 3.7 * 10 exp – 7 per day including temperature (< 255 slips in first 24 hours)  
Reference: External BITS, line, internal  
•
Supply voltage monitoring  
–
–
Both supply voltage inputs are monitored  
Normal operation:  
–40.5 to –56.7 V (in –48 VDC systems)  
–50.0 to –72.0 V (in –60 VDC systems)  
Undervoltage: Major alarm  
–
–
Overvoltage: Major alarm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –40 to +65 degrees Celsius (–40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 26.00 W, 0.54 A at –48 V, 0.43 A at –60 V, 88.8 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb)  
A.4.2 TCC2P Card Specifications  
The TCC2P card has the following specifications:  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.4.3 XC10G Card Specifications  
•
•
CTC software  
–
–
–
Interface: EIA/TIA-232 (local craft access, on TCC2P faceplate)  
Interface: 10BaseT LAN (on TCC2P faceplate)  
Interface: 10BaseT LAN (via backplane, access on the MIC-A/P card)  
Synchronization  
–
–
–
–
Stratum 3, per ITU-T G.812  
Free running access: Accuracy +/- 4.6 ppm  
Holdover stability: 3.7 * 10 exp – 7 per day including temperature (< 255 slips in first 24 hours)  
Reference: External BITS, line, internal  
•
Supply voltage monitoring  
–
–
Both supply voltage inputs are monitored  
Normal operation:  
–40.5 to –56.7 V (in –48 VDC systems)  
–50.0 to –72.0 V (in –60 VDC systems)  
Undervoltage: Major alarm  
–
–
Overvoltage: Major alarm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –40 to +65 degrees Celsius (–40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 26.00 W, 0.54 A at –48 V, 0.43 A at –60 V, 88.8 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb)  
A.4.3 XC10G Card Specifications  
The XC10G card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 85%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 78.60 W, 1.64 A at –48 V, 268.4 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.4.4 XC-VXL-10G Card Specifications  
–
–
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.5 lb)  
A.4.4 XC-VXL-10G Card Specifications  
The XC-VXL-10G card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 85%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 81.30 W, 1.69 A at –48 V, 277.6 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.5 lb)  
A.4.5 XC-VXL-2.5G Card Specifications  
The XC-VXL-2.5G card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 85%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 81.30 W, 1.69 A at –48 V, 277.6 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight, not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.5 lb)  
A.4.6 AIC-I Specifications  
The AIC-I card has the following specifications:  
Alarm inputs  
Number of inputs: 16  
•
–
–
–
Opto-coupler isolated  
Label customer provisionable  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.4.6 AIC-I Specifications  
–
–
–
–
Severity customer provisionable  
Common 32-V output for all alarm-inputs  
Each input limited to 2 mA  
Termination via MIC-A/P  
•
Alarm outputs  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Number of outputs: 4 (user configurable as inputs)  
Switched by opto-MOS (metal oxide semiconductor)  
Triggered by definable alarm condition  
Maximum allowed open circuit voltage: 60 VDC  
Maximum allowed closed circuit current: 100 mA  
Termination via MIC-A/P  
•
EOW/LOW  
–
–
ITU-T G.711, ITU-T G.712, Telcordia GR-253-CORE  
A-law, mu-law  
Note  
Due to the nature of mixed coding, in a mixed-mode configuration (A-law/mu-law) the  
orderwire is not ITU-T G.712 compliant.  
–
–
Orderwire party line  
Dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling  
•
•
User data channel (UDC)  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 64 kbps, codirectional  
ITU-T G.703  
Input/output impedance: 120 ohms  
Termination: RJ-11 connectors  
Generic communications channel (GCC)  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 576 kbps  
EIA/TIA-485/V11  
Input/output impedance: 120 ohms  
Termination: RJ-45 connectors  
•
•
ACC connection for additional alarm interfaces  
For future use  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –40 to +65 degrees Celsius (–40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 8.00 W, 0.17 A, 27.3 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
–
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5 Electrical Card and FMEC Specifications  
–
–
–
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Card weight: 1.8 lb (0.82 kg)  
A.5 Electrical Card and FMEC Specifications  
This section provides specifications for the electrical and FMEC cards.  
For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance  
Information document.  
A.5.1 E1-N-14 Card Specifications  
The E1-N-14 card has the following specifications:  
• E1-N-14 input  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Frame format: Unframed, ITU-T G.704 framed  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Via FMEC-E1 (for 75 ohms unbalanced) or FMEC-DS1/E1 (for 120 ohms  
balanced)  
–
–
Input impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced or 120 ohms balanced  
Cable loss: 0 to 6 dB at 1024 kHz (for cable length, see the specification of the cable that you  
are using)  
–
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
•
E1-N-14 output  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Frame format: Unframed, ITU-T G.704 framed  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Via FMEC-E1 (for 75 ohms unbalanced) or FMEC-DS1/E1 (for 120 ohms  
balanced)  
–
–
–
–
–
Output impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced or 120 ohms balanced  
Alarm indication signal (AIS): ITU-T G.704 compliant  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15  
Pulse amplitude: 2.37 V +/– 5% zero-peak at 75 ohms; 3 V +/–5% zero-peak at 120 ohms  
Loopback modes: terminal and facility  
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Overvoltage protection: As in ITU-T G.703 Annex B  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 24.00 W, 0.50 A at –48 V, 81.9 BTU/hr  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.2 E1-42 Card Specifications  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.8 kg (1.9 lb)  
A.5.2 E1-42 Card Specifications  
The E1-42 card has the following specifications:  
• E1-42 input  
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Frame format: Unframed, ITU-T G.704 framed  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Via FMEC E1-120NP, FMEC E1-120PROA, or FMEC E1-120PROB  
Input impedance: 120 ohms balanced (75 ohms unbalanced with additional E1-75/120)  
Cable loss: 0 to 6 dB at 1024 kHz (for cable length, see the specification of the cable that you  
are using)  
–
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
•
E1-42 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Frame format: Unframed, ITU-T G.704 framed  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Via FMEC E1-120NP, FMEC E1-120PROA, or FMEC E1-120PROB  
Output impedance: 120 ohms balanced (75 ohms unbalanced with additional E1-75/120)  
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15  
Pulse amplitude: 3 V +/– 5% zero-peak at 120 ohms; 2.37 V +/–5% zero-peak at 75 ohms  
Loopback modes: terminal and facility  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Overvoltage protection: As in ITU-T G.703 Annex B  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 38.10 W, 0.79 A at –48 V, 130.1 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.3 E3-12 Card Specifications  
–
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.8 kg (1.9 lb)  
–
A.5.3 E3-12 Card Specifications  
The E3-12 card has the following specifications:  
• E3-12 input  
Bit rate: 34.368 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
–
–
–
–
–
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 12 dB at 17184 kHz (for cable length, see the specification of the cable that  
you are using)  
–
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
•
E3-12 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 34.368 Mbps +/– 20 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
Power level: –1.8 to +5.7 dBm  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 17  
Pulse amplitude: 0.36 to 0.85 V peak-to-peak  
Loopback modes: terminal and facility  
•
•
E3-12 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors in the FMEC-E3/DS3 card  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
–
Overvoltage protection: As in ITU-T G.703 Annex B  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 38.20 W, 0.80 A at –48 V, 130.4 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.7 kg (1.7 lb)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.4 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications  
A.5.4 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications  
The DS3i-N-12 card has the following specifications:  
• DS3i-N-12 input  
Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Frame format: ITU-T G.704, ITU-T G.752/DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Line code: B3ZS  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/– 5%  
Cable loss:  
Maximum 137 m (450 ft): 734A, RG59, 728A  
Maximum 24 m (79 ft): RG179  
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
–
•
DS3i-N-12 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm  
Frame format: ITU-T G.704, ITU-T G.752/DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988  
Line code: B3ZS  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
Power level: –1.8 to +5.7 dBm (The power level is for a signal of all ones and is measured at a  
center frequency of 22.368 MHz (3 +/– 1 kHz) bandwidth.)  
–
–
–
–
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 14/ANSI T1.102-1988, Figure 8  
Pulse amplitude: 0.36 to 0.85 V peak-to-peak  
Loopback modes: terminal and facility  
Line build out: 0 to 69 m (0 to 225 ft); 69 to 137 m (226 to 450 ft)  
•
•
DS3i-N-12 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors via the FMEC-E3/DS3 card  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
–
Overvoltage protection: As in ITU-T G.703 Annex B  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 26.80 W, 0.56 A at –48 V, 91.5 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.5 STM1E-12 Card Specifications  
–
Weight not including clam shell: 0.8 kg (1.9 lb)  
A.5.5 STM1E-12 Card Specifications  
The STM1E-12 card has the following specifications:  
• STM1E-12 input  
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps +/–5 ppm for STM-1  
or 139.264 Mbps +/–15 ppm for E-4  
Line code: Coded mark inversion (CMI)  
E-4 (can be framed or unframed)  
–
–
–
–
–
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 12.7 dB at 78 MHz (for cable length, see the specification of the cable that  
you are using)  
–
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
•
STM1E-12 output  
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps +/–5 ppm for STM-1  
or 139.264 Mbps +/–15 ppm for E-4  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Line code: CMI  
E-4 can be framed or unframed  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 18 and 19 for E-4, Figure 22 and 23 for STM-1  
Pulse amplitude: 1 V +/– 0.1 V peak-to-peak  
Loopback modes: terminal and facility  
•
•
STM1E-12 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors in the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
–
Overvoltage protection: As in ITU-T G.703 Annex B  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 59.40 W, 1.24 A at –48 V, 202.8 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.7 kg (1.7 lb)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.6 BLANK Card  
A.5.6 BLANK Card  
The BLANK card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: Not applicable  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.2 kg (0.4 lb)  
A.5.7 FMEC-E1 Specifications  
The FMEC-E1 card has the following specifications:  
• FMEC-E1 input  
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
–
–
–
–
–
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz  
•
FMEC-E1 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
•
•
FMEC-E1 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.00 W, 0.00 A at –48 V, 0.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.8 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Specifications  
–
–
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
A.5.8 FMEC-DS1/E1 Card Specifications  
The FMEC-DS1/E1 card has the following specifications:  
• FMEC-DS1/E1 input  
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
–
–
–
–
–
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz  
•
FMEC-DS1/E1 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Output impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
•
•
FMEC-DS1/E1 electrical interface  
Connectors: 37-pin DB connectors  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.00 W, 0.00 A at –48 V, 0.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.6 lb)  
A.5.9 FMEC E1-120NP Card Specifications  
The FMEC E1-120NP card has the following specifications:  
FMEC E1-120NP input  
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
•
–
–
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.10 FMEC E1-120PROA Card Specifications  
–
–
–
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz  
•
FMEC E1-120NP output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
•
•
FMEC E1-120NP electrical interface  
Connectors: Molex 96-pin LFH connectors (21 ports per connector)  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.00 W, 0.00 A at –48 V, 0.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
A.5.10 FMEC E1-120PROA Card Specifications  
The FMEC E1-120PROA card has the following specifications:  
•
FMEC E1-120PROA input  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz  
•
FMEC E1-120PROA output  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.11 FMEC E1-120PROB Card Specifications  
–
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
•
•
FMEC E1-120PROA electrical interface  
–
Connectors: Molex 96-pin LFH connectors (21 ports per connector)  
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.1 W (provided by the E1-42 card), 0.34 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
A.5.11 FMEC E1-120PROB Card Specifications  
The FMEC E1-120PROB card has the following specifications:  
•
FMEC E1-120PROB input  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 6 dB at 1024 kHz  
•
FMEC E1-120PROB output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Balanced twisted-pair cable  
Input impedance: 120 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 15 and Table 7  
•
•
FMEC E1-120PROB electrical interface  
Connectors: Molex 96-pin LFH connectors (21 ports per connector)  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.1 W (provided by the E1-42 card), 0.34 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
–
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.12 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Specifications  
–
–
–
–
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
A.5.12 E1-75/120 Impedance Conversion Panel Specifications  
The FMEC E1-75/120 impedance conversion panel has the following specifications:  
•
•
•
E1-75/120 input  
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
E1-75/120 output  
–
–
Bit rate: 2.048 Mbps +/–50 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
E1-75/120 electrical interface  
–
Connectors:  
1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors on 75-ohm side  
Molex 96-pin LFH connectors on 120-ohm side  
Impedance tolerance: +/–5%  
–
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: Not applicable; the E1-75/120 is a passive device.  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 75 mm (2.95 in.)  
Width: 535 mm (21.06 in.)  
Depth: 221 mm (8.7 in.)  
Weight: 2.15 kg (4.74 lb)  
A.5.13 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card Specifications  
The FMEC-E3/DS3 card has the following specifications:  
FMEC-E3/DS3 input (for E3 signals)  
Bit rate: 34.368 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
•
–
–
–
–
–
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 12 dB at 17184 kHz  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.13 FMEC-E3/DS3 Card Specifications  
•
FMEC-E3/DS3 output (for E3 signals)  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 34.368 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: HDB-3  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 17  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Figure 17 and Table 9  
•
FMEC-E3/DS3 Input (for DS3 signals)  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm  
Line code: B3ZS  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss:  
Maximum 137 m (450 ft): 734A, RG59, 728A  
Max 24 m (79 ft): RG179  
•
FMEC-E3/DS3 output (for DS3 signals)  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: B3ZS  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant  
Power level: ITU-T G.703, Table 6; –1.8 to +5.7 dBm  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Table 6 and Figure 14; ANSI T1.102-1988, Figure 8  
Pulse amplitude: ITU-T G.703, Table 6; 0.36 to 0.85 V peak-to-peak  
Line build out: 0 to 68.58 m (0 to 225 ft.); 68.88 to 137.16 m (226 to 450 ft.)  
•
•
FMEC-E3/DS3 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.00 W, 0.00 A at –48 V, 0.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.14 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card Specifications  
A.5.14 FMEC STM1E 1:1 Card Specifications  
The FMEC STM1E 1:1 card has the following specifications:  
•
•
•
FMEC STM1E 1:1 input  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: CMI  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 12.7 dB at 78 MHz  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 E4 input  
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 139.264 Mbps +/–15 ppm  
Line code: CMI  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Cable loss: Up to 12.7 dB at 78 MHz  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: CMI  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 18 and 19 for E-4, Figure 22 and 23 for STM-1  
Pulse amplitude: 1 V +/– 0.1 V peak-to-peak  
•
FMEC STM1E E4 output  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 139.264 Mbps +/–20 ppm  
Line code: CMI  
Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable  
Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5%  
Pulse shape: ITU-T G.703, Figure 18 and 19 for E-4, Figure 22 and 23 for STM-1  
Pulse amplitude: 1 V +/– 0.1 V peak-to-peak  
•
•
FMEC STM1E 1:1 electrical interface  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connectors  
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 8.8 W (provided by the STM1E-12 card), 30.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.15 FMEC-BLANK Card Specifications  
–
–
–
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.3 kg (0.7 lb)  
A.5.15 FMEC-BLANK Card Specifications  
The FMEC-BLANK card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: Not applicable  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.2 kg (0.4 lb)  
A.5.16 MIC-A/P Card Specifications  
The MIC-A/P card has the following specifications:  
•
Power supply input BATTERY B  
System supply voltage:  
–
Nominal –48 VDC  
Tolerance limits: –40.5 to –57.0 VDC  
Connector: 3WK3 Combo-D power cable connector  
–
•
•
•
•
Alarm outputs  
–
–
–
Voltage (open contact): Maximum 60 VDC  
Current (closed contact): Maximum 250 mA  
Connector: 62-pin DB connector (common for inputs/outputs)  
Alarm inputs  
–
–
–
Voltage (open contact): Maximum 60 VDC  
Current (closed contact): Maximum 2 mA  
Connector: 62-pin DB connector (common for inputs/outputs)  
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.13 W (provided by +5 V from the TCC2/TCC2P card), 0.44 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
–
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.5.17 MIC-C/T/P Card Specifications  
–
–
–
–
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.2 kg (0.5 lb)  
A.5.17 MIC-C/T/P Card Specifications  
The MIC-C/T/P card has the following specifications:  
•
Power supply input BATTERY A  
System supply voltage:  
–
Nominal –48 VDC  
Tolerance limits: –40.5 to –57.0 VDC  
Connector: 3WK3 Combo-D power cable connector  
–
•
Timing connector  
–
–
–
Frequency: 2.048 MHz +/–10 ppm  
Signal level: 0.75 to 1.5 V  
Impedance: 75 ohms +/–5% (switchable by jumper to high impedance > 3 kohms)  
Note  
120 ohms balanced impedance is possible with external matching cable.  
–
–
Cable attenuation: Up to 6 dB at 2 MHz  
Connectors: 1.0/2.3 miniature coax connector  
•
System management serial port:  
–
–
–
System management serial port craft interface  
Modem port (for future use)  
Connectors: 8-pin RJ-45  
•
•
System management LAN port connectors:  
–
–
Signal: IEEE 802.3 10BaseT  
Connectors: 8-pin RJ-45  
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 0.38 W (provided by +5 V from the TCC2/TCC2P card), 1.37 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 182 mm (7.165 in.)  
Width: 32 mm (1.25 in.)  
Depth: 92 mm (3.62 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 98 mm (3.87 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6 Optical Card Specifications  
–
Weight not including clam shell: 0.2 kg (0.5 lb)  
A.6 Optical Card Specifications  
This section provides specifications for the optical cards.  
For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance  
Information document.  
A.6.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card Specifications  
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled non-return to zero (NRZ)  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connector: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: –8 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –15 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1261 to 1360 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Fabry Perot laser  
Extinction ratio: 8.2 dB  
Dispersion ratio: 96 ps/nm  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 13 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1261 to 1360 nm  
Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.823 compliant  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 19.20 W, 0.40 A at –48 V, 65.56 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card Specifications  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.4 kg (1.0 lb)  
A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card Specifications  
The OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 155.52 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connector: LC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: –8 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –15 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1293 to 1334 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Fabry Perot laser  
Extinction ratio: 8.2 dB  
Dispersion tolerance: 96 ps/nm  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 13 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1274 to 1356 nm  
Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.823 compliant  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 23.00 W, 0.48 A at –48 V, 78.5 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications  
–
–
–
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.4 kg (1.0 lb)  
A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 622.08 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: –8 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –15 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1274 to 1356 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Fabry Perot laser  
Extinction ratio: 8.2 dB  
Dispersion tolerance: 96 ps/nm  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 13 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1274 to 1356 nm  
Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.823 compliant  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 10.90 W, 0.23 A at –48 V, 37.2 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications  
–
Weight not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.4 lb)  
A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 622.08 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: +2 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –3 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1280 to 1335 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Distributed feedback (DFB) laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 25 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1280 to 1335 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 9.28 W, 0.19 A at –48 V, 31.7 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.4 lb)  
A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications  
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card has the following specifications:  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Specifications  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 622.08 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: +2 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –3 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1480 to 1580 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1550 nm  
Transmitter: DFB laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 25 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1480 to 1580 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 9.28 W, 0.19 A at –48 V, 31.7 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.6 kg (1.4 lb)  
A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card Specifications  
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
Bit rate: 622.08 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.7 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications  
–
Chromatic dispersion allowance: 74 ps/nm for the spectral range of 1274 to1356 nm;  
46 ps/nm for the spectral range of 1293 to1334 nm  
–
–
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connector: SC  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: –8 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –15 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1293 to 1334 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Fabry Perot laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Minimum receiver level: –30 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 15 dB  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1274 to 1356 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 28 W, 0.58 A at –48 V, 95.6 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.4 kg (1.0 lb)  
A.6.7 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications  
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2488.320 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.8 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: 0 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –5 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1280 to 1350 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: DFB laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: 0 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Minimum receiver level: –18 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Receiver: InGaAs InP photodetector  
Link loss budget: 13 dB minimum  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1280 to 1350 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 37.20 W, 0.78 A at –48 V, 127.0 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.9 kg (2.2 lb)  
A.6.8 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications  
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2488.320 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum transmitter output power: +3 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –2 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1520 to 1580 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1550 nm  
Transmitter: DFB laser  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.9 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Receiver: InGaAs avalanche photo diode (APD) photodetector  
Link loss budget: 26 dB minimum, with 1 dB dispersion penalty  
Receiver input wavelength range: 1520 to 1580 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
–
Eye safety compliance: Class 1 (EN60825)  
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 37.20 W, 0.78 A at –48 V, 127.0 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 0.9 kg (2.2 lb)  
A.6.9 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications  
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards have the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 2488.320 Mbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.692, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, ITU-T G.958  
•
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: 0 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –2 dBm  
Center wavelength: +/– 0.25 nm  
Transmitter: DFB laser  
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 10  
Receiver: InGaAs APD photodetector  
Link loss budget: 26 dB minimum, with 1 dB dispersion penalty  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.10 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications  
–
Receiver input wavelength range: 1520 to 1580 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +45 degrees Celsius (+23 to +113 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 31.20 W, 0.65 A at –48 V, 106.5 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)  
•
Currently available wavelengths and versions of the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card:  
ITU grid blue band (2 * 100 GHz spacing):  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1530.33 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1530.33 (DWDM)  
1531.90 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1531.90 (DWDM)  
1533.47 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1533.47 (DWDM)  
1535.04 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1535.04 (DWDM)  
1536.61 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1536.61 (DWDM)  
1538.19 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1538.19 (DWDM)  
1539.77 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1539.77 (DWDM)  
1541.35 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1541.35 (DWDM)  
1542.94 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1542.94 (DWDM)  
ITU grid red band (2 * 100 GHz spacing):  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1547.72 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1547.72 (DWDM)  
1549.32 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1549.32 (DWDM)  
1550.92 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1550.92 (DWDM)  
1552.52 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1552.52 (DWDM)  
1554.13 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1554.13 (DWDM)  
1555.75 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1555.75 (DWDM)  
1557.36 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1557.36 (DWDM)  
1558.98 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1558.98 (DWDM)  
1560.61 +/– 0.25 nm, STM-16HS-LH 1560.61 (DWDM)  
A.6.10 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications  
The OC 192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbps  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.11 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode  
Maximum chromatic dispersion allowance: 6.6 ps/nm  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, ITU-T G.691  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: –1 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –6 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1290 to 1330 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1310 nm  
Transmitter: Directly modulated laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –1 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –11 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: PIN diode  
Link loss budget: 5 dB minimum, plus 1 dB dispersion penalty  
at BER = 1 * 10 exp – 12 including dispersion  
–
Receiver input wavelength range: 1290 to 1330 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 47.00 W, 0.98 A at –48 V, 160.5 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 1.3 kg (3.1 lb)  
A.6.11 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications  
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Maximum chromatic dispersion allowance: 800 ps/nm  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.12 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications  
–
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Note  
You must use a 3 to 15 dB fiber attenuator (5 dB recommended) when working with the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card. Using fiber loopbacks can cause irreparable damage to the  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card.  
–
–
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: +2 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: –1 dBm  
Center wavelength: 1530 to 1565 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1550 nm  
Transmitter: Cooled EA (european accreditation) modulated laser  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –1 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –14 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: Positive-intrinsic-negative (PIN) diode  
Link loss budget: 13 dB minimum, plus 2 dB dispersion penalty  
at BER = 1 * 10 exp – 12 including dispersion  
–
Receiver input wavelength range: 1530 to 1565 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 50.00 W, 1.04 A at –48 V, 170.7 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 1.3 kg (3.1 lb)  
A.6.12 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.12 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications  
–
–
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Maximum chromatic dispersion allowance: 1360 ps/nm  
Caution  
You must use a 20 dB fiber attenuator (19 to 24 dB) when working with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550  
card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with these cards.  
–
–
–
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
Maximum transmitter output power:  
+10 dBm (15454E-OC192LR1550);  
+7 dBm (15454E-L64.2.1)  
–
Minimum transmitter output power:  
+7 dBm (15454E-OC192LR1550);  
+4 dBm (15454E-L64.2.1)  
–
–
–
Center wavelength: 1530 to 1565 nm  
Nominal wavelength: 1550 nm  
Transmitter: Lithium Niobate (LN) external modulator transmitter  
•
Receiver  
–
Maximum receiver level:  
–10 dBm (15454E-OC192LR1550);  
–7 dBm (15454E-L64.2.1)  
–
Minimum receiver level:  
–19 dBm (15454-OC192LR1550);  
–24 dBm from 1530 to 1565 nm  
–20 dBm from 1290 to 1330 nm (15454E-L64.2.1)  
–
–
Receiver: APD/TIA  
Link loss budget: 24 dB minimum, with no dispersion or 22 dB optical path loss at  
BER = 1 * 10 exp – 12 including dispersion  
–
Receiver input wavelength range: 1545 to 1555 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 72.20 W, 1.50 A, 246.52 BTU/hr (15454E-OC192LR1550);  
52.00 W, 1.08 A at –48 V, 177.6 BTU/hr (15454E-L64.2.1)  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.6.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Specifications  
–
Weight not including clam shell: 1.3 kg (3.1 lb)  
A.6.13 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Specifications  
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card has the following specifications:  
•
Line  
–
–
–
–
Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbps  
Code: Scrambled NRZ  
Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode  
Maximum chromatic dispersion allowance:  
In deployments with dispersion compensating unit (DCU): +/– 1000 ps/nm, with optical  
signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) of 19 dB (0.5 nm resolution bandwidth (RBW))  
In deployments without DCU: +/– 1200 ps/nm, with ONSR of 23 dB (0.5 nm RBW)  
Loopback modes: Terminal and facility  
–
Note  
You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card. Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to this card.  
–
–
Connectors: SC  
Compliance: ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957  
•
Transmitter  
–
–
–
–
–
Maximum transmitter output power: +6 dBm  
Minimum transmitter output power: +3 dBm  
Center wavelength: See wavelength plan  
Center wavelength accuracy: +/– 0.040 nm  
Transmitter: LN external modulator transmitter  
•
Receiver  
–
–
–
–
Maximum receiver level: –9 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Minimum receiver level: –22 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12  
Receiver: APD  
Link loss budget: 25 dB minimum, plus 2 dB dispersion penalty  
at BER = 1 * 10 exp – 12 including dispersion  
–
Receiver input wavelength range: 1529 to 1565 nm  
•
•
Environmental  
–
–
–
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 52.00 W, 1.08 A at –48 V, 177.6 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 1.3 kg (3.1 lb)  
•
Currently available wavelengths and versions of OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card:  
ITU grid blue band:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1534.25 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1534.25  
1535.04 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1535.04  
1535.82 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1535.82  
1536.61 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1536.61  
1538.19 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1538.19  
1538.98 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1538.98  
1539.77 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1539.77  
1540.56 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1540.56  
ITU grid red band:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1550.12 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1550.12  
1550.92 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1550.92  
1551.72 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1551.72  
1552.52 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1552.52  
1554.13 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1554.13  
1554.94 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1554.94  
1555.75 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1555.75  
1556.55 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1556.55  
A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications  
This section includes specifications for the Ethernet cards.  
For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance  
Information document.  
A.7.1 E100T-G Card Specifications  
The E100T-G card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
–
–
Operating temperature:  
C-Temp (15454-E100T-G): 0 to +55 degrees Celsius (32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.7.2 E1000-2-G Card Specifications  
–
Power consumption: 65 W, 1.35 A, 221.93 BTU/hr  
•
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Card weight: 2.3 lb (1.0 kg)  
Compliance  
–
ONS 15454 SDH cards, when installed in a system, comply with these safety standards:  
UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950, EN 60950, IEC 60950  
A.7.2 E1000-2-G Card Specifications  
The E1000-2-G card has the following specifications:  
•
•
•
Environmental  
–
Operating temperature:  
C-Temp (15454-E1000-2-G): 0 to +55 degrees Celsius (32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
–
–
Power consumption: 53.50 W, 1.11 A, 182.67 BTU/hr  
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Card weight: 2.1 lb (0.9 kg)  
Compliance  
–
ONS 15454 SDH cards, when installed in a system, comply with these safety standards:  
UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950, EN 60950, IEC 60950  
–
Eye Safety Compliance: Class I (21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11) and Class 1M  
(IEC 60825-1 2001-01) laser products  
A.7.3 G1000-4 Card Specifications  
The G1000-4 card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
–
Operating temperature:  
C-Temp (15454-G1000-4): 0 to +55 degrees Celsius (32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
–
–
Power consumption: 63.00 W, 1.31 A, 215.11 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
–
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.7.4 G1K-4 Card Specifications  
–
–
–
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Card weight: 2.1 lb (0.9 kg)  
A.7.4 G1K-4 Card Specifications  
The G1K-4 card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 63.00 W, 1.31 A at –48 V, 215.1 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 2.1 lb (0.9 kg)  
•
Compliance. ONS 15454 SDH optical cards, when installed in a system, comply with these  
standards:  
–
Safety: IEC 60950, EN 60950, UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, TS 001, AS/NZS 3260,  
IEC 60825-1, IEC 60825-2, 21 CFR 1040-10, and 21 CFR 1040.11  
–
Class 1 laser product  
A.7.5 ML100T-12 Card Specifications  
The ML100T-12 card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 53.00 W, 1.10 A at –48 V, 181.0 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 2.3 lb (1.0 kg)  
•
Compliance. ONS 15454 SDH cards, when installed in a system, comply with these standards:  
–
Safety: IEC 60950, EN 60950, UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, TS 001, and AS/NZS 3260  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A Hardware Specifications  
A.7.6 ML1000-2 Card Specifications  
A.7.6 ML1000-2 Card Specifications  
The ML1000-2 card has the following specifications:  
•
Environmental  
Operating temperature: –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (+23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
–
–
–
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
Power consumption: 49.00 W, 1.02 A at –48 V, 167.3 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Depth with backplane connector: 235 mm (9.250 in.)  
Weight not including clam shell: 2.1 lb (0.9 kg)  
•
Compliance. ONS 15454 SDH optical cards, when installed in a system, comply with these  
standards:  
–
Safety: IEC 60950, EN 60950, UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, TS 001, AS/NZS 3260,  
IEC 60825-1, IEC 60825-2, 21 CFR 1040-10, and 21 CFR 1040.11  
–
Class 1 laser product  
A.8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications  
This section provides specifications for the FC_MR-4 (Fibre Channel) card.  
For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance  
Information document.  
A.8.1 FC_MR-4 Card Specifications  
•
Environmental  
–
Operating temperature  
C-Temp (15454-E100T): –5 to +55 degrees Celsius (23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit)  
Operating humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing  
–
–
Power consumption: 60 W, 1.35 A, 221.93 BTU/hr  
•
Dimensions  
–
–
–
–
Height: 321.3 mm (12.650 in.)  
Width: 18.2 mm (0.716 in.)  
Depth: 228.6 mm (9.000 in.)  
Card weight: 1.17 kg (2.59 lb)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
A-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A P P E N D I X  
B
Administrative and Service States  
This appendix describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH cards, ports,  
and cross-connects. For circuit state information, see Chapter 10, “Circuits and Tunnels.” Software  
Release 5.0 states are based on the generic state model defined in Telcordia GR-1093-CORE, Issue 2 and  
ITU-T X.731.  
B.1 Service States  
Service states include a Primary State (PST), a Primary State Qualifier (PSTQ), and one or more  
Secondary States (SST). Table B-1 lists the service state PSTs and PSTQs supported by the  
ONS 15454 SDH.  
Table B-1  
ONS 15454 SDH Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers  
Primary State, Primary  
State Qualifier  
Definition  
Unlocked-enabled  
Unlocked-disabled  
Locked-disabled  
The entity is fully operational and will perform as provisioned.  
The entity is not operational because of an autonomous event.  
The entity is not operational because of an autonomous event and has also  
been manually removed from service.  
Locked-enabled  
The entity has been manually removed from service.  
Table B-2 defines the SSTs supported by the ONS 15454 SDH.  
Table B-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Secondary States  
Secondary State  
Definition  
automaticInService  
The entity is delayed before transitioning to the Unlocked-enabled service  
state. The transition to Unlocked-enabled state depends on correction of  
conditions, or on a soak timer. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is  
carried. Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are reported, can  
be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND  
command.  
disabled  
The entity was manually removed from service and does not provide its  
provisioned functions. All services are disrupted; the entity is unable to carry  
traffic.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Appendix B Administrative and Service States  
B.2 Administrative States  
Table B-2  
ONS 15454 SDH Secondary States (continued)  
Secondary State  
Definition  
loopback  
The entity is in loopback mode.  
mismatchOfEquipment An improper card is installed, a cross-connect card does not support an  
installed card, or an incompatible backplane is installed. For example, an  
installed card is not compatible with the card preprovisioning or the slot. This  
SST applies only to cards.  
maintenance  
The entity has been manually removed from service for a maintenance activity  
but still performs its provisioned functions. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but  
traffic is carried. Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are  
reported, can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1  
RTRV-COND command.  
outOfGroup  
The virtual concatenation (VCAT) member cross-connect is not used to carry  
VCAT group traffic. This state is used to put a member circuit out of the group  
and to stop sending traffic. Locked-enabled,outOfGroup only applies to the  
cross-connects on an end node where VCAT resides. The cross-connects on  
intermediate nodes are in the Locked-enabled,maintenance service state.  
softwareDownload  
unassigned  
The card is involved in a software download. This SST applies only to cards.  
The card is not provisioned in the database. This SST applies only to cards.  
notInstalled  
The card is not physically present (that is, an empty slot). This SST applies  
only to cards.  
B.2 Administrative States  
Administrative states are used to manage service states. Administrative states consist of a PST and an  
SST. Table B-3 lists the administrative states supported by the ONS 15454 SDH. See Table B-2 for SST  
definitions.  
Note  
A change in the administrative state of an entity does not change the service state of supporting or  
supported entities.  
Table B-3  
ONS 15454 SDH Administrative States  
Administrative State (PST,SST)  
Unlocked  
Definition  
Puts the entity in service.  
Unlocked,automaticInservice  
Locked,disabled  
Puts the entity in automatic in-service.  
Removes the entity from service and disables it.  
Removes the entity from service for maintenance.  
Locked,maintenance  
Locked,outOfGroup  
(VCAT circuits only.) Removes a VCAT member cross-connect  
from service and from the group of members.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Appendix B Administrative and Service States  
B.3 Service State Transitions  
B.3 Service State Transitions  
This section describes the transition from one service state to the next for cards, ports, and  
cross-connects. A service state transition is based on the action performed on the entity.  
B.3.1 Card Service State Transitions  
Table B-4 lists card service state transitions.  
Table B-4  
ONS 15454 SDH Card Service State Transitions  
Current Service State  
Action  
Next Service State  
Unlocked-enabled  
Change the administrative state Locked-enabled,maintenance  
to Locked,maintenance.  
Delete the card.  
Pull the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned  
Unlocked-disabled,notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,softwareDownload  
Reset the card.  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService and Pull the card.  
mismatchOfEquipment  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
notInstalled  
Delete the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned if the card is  
valid  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment &  
unassigned if the card is invalid  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
softwareDownload  
Restart completed.  
Pull the card.  
Unlocked-enabled  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
notInstalled  
Insert a valid card.  
Insert an invalid card.  
Delete the card.  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
softwareDownload  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
mismatchOfEquipment  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment Pull the card.  
Delete the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned if the card is  
valid  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment &  
unassigned if the card is invalid  
Change the administrative state Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
to Locked,maintenance.  
Restart completed.  
Pull the card.  
notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,softwareDownload  
Unlocked-enabled  
Unlocked-disabled,notInstalled  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B Administrative and Service States  
B.3.1 Card Service State Transitions  
Table B-4  
ONS 15454 SDH Card Service State Transitions (continued)  
Current Service State  
Action  
Next Service State  
Unlocked-disabled,notInstalled  
Insert a valid card.  
Insert an invalid card.  
Delete the card.  
Unlocked-disabled,softwareDownload  
Unlocked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled  
Change the administrative state Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
to Locked,maintenance. notInstalled  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment & Change the administrative state Unlocked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment  
maintenance  
to Unlocked.  
Pull the card.  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
notInstalled  
Delete the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned if the card is  
valid  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment &  
unassigned if the card is invalid  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment & Pull the card.  
unassigned  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment  
Locked-enabled,maintenance  
Provision the card.  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
softwareDownload  
Restart completed.  
Pull the card.  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
notInstalled  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
notInstalled  
Change the administrative state Unlocked-disabled,notInstalled  
to Unlocked.  
Insert a valid card.  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
softwareDownload  
Insert an invalid card.  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment &  
maintenance  
Delete the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled  
Unlocked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment  
Unlocked-disabled,softwareDownload  
Unlocked-disabled,softwareDownload  
Locked-disabled,unassigned  
Pull the card.  
Provision an invalid card.  
Provision a valid card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned & notInstalled Insert a valid card.  
Insert an invalid card.  
Locked-disabled,mismatchOfEquipment &  
unassigned  
Preprovision a card.  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService &  
notInstalled  
Locked-enabled,maintenance  
Change the administrative state Unlocked-enabled  
to Unlocked.  
Delete the card.  
Pull the card.  
Locked-disabled,unassigned  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
notInstalled  
Reset the card.  
Locked-disabled,maintenance &  
softwareDownloadunassigned  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Administrative and Service States  
B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions  
B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions  
Table B-5 lists the port and cross-connect service state transitions. Port states do not impact  
cross-connect states with one exception. A cross-connect in the Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService  
service state cannot transition autonomously into the Unlocked-enabled service state until the parent port  
is Unlocked-enabled.  
The following ports do not support all of the service states listed in Table B-5:  
•
•
E-Series Ethernet ports do not support service states; these ports are either enabled or disabled.  
FC_MR-4 ports support the Unlocked-enabled; Locked-enabled,disabled; and  
Locked-enabled,maintenance service states; they do not support the  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService service state.  
Table B-5  
ONS 15454 SDH Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions  
Current Service State  
Action  
Next Service State  
Unlocked-enabled  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance  
the Locked,maintenance  
administrative state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,disabled  
the Locked,disabled  
Locked-enabled,disabled & outOfGroup for a  
VCAT cross-connect  
administrative state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService1  
the  
Unlocked,automaticInService  
administrative state.  
Put the VCAT cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance & outOfGroup  
the Locked,outOfGroup  
administrative state.  
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-enabled  
the Unlocked administrative  
state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance  
the Locked,maintenance  
administrative state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,disabled  
the Locked,disabled.  
Locked-enabled,disabled & outOfGroup for a  
VCAT cross-connect  
Put the VCAT cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance and  
the Locked,outOfGroup  
administrative state.  
outOfGroup  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B Administrative and Service States  
B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions  
Table B-5  
ONS 15454 SDH Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions (continued)  
Current Service State  
Action  
Next Service State  
Locked-enabled,disabled  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-enabled  
the Unlocked administrative  
state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService  
the  
Unlocked,automaticInService  
administrative state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance  
the Locked,maintenance.  
Put the VCAT cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance & outOfGroup  
the Locked,outOfGroup  
administrative state.  
Locked-enabled,loopback & maintenance Release the loopback.  
Locked-enabled,maintenance  
Note  
While in  
Locked-enabled,  
loopback &  
maintenance, both CTC  
and TL1 allow a  
cross-connect to be  
deleted, which also  
removes the loopback.  
This applies only to the  
cross-connect, not the  
ports.  
Locked-enabled,maintenance  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-enabled  
the Unlocked administrative  
state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService  
the  
Unlocked,automaticInService  
administrative state.  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,disabled  
the Locked,disabled.  
Locked-enabled,disabled & outOfGroup for a  
VCAT cross-connect  
Put the port or cross-connect in Locked-enabled,loopback & maintenance  
loopback.  
Put the VCAT cross-connect in Locked-enabled,maintenance & outOfGroup  
the Locked,outOfGroup  
administrative state.  
1. For a VCAT member, an Unlocked-enabled to Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService transition will not occur with a Loss of Multiframe (LOM) or  
Sequence Mismatch (SQM) condition on the member.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A P P E N D I X  
C
Network Element Defaults  
This appendix describes the factory-configured (default) network element (NE) settings for the Cisco  
ONS 15454 SDH. It includes descriptions of card, node, and CTC default settings. To import, export, or  
edit the settings, refer to the “Maintain the Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure  
Guide. Cards supported by this platform that are not listed in this appendix are not supported by  
factory-configured NE default settings.  
To change card settings individually (that is, without changing the defaults), refer to the “Change Card  
Settings” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide. To change node settings, refer to the  
“Change Node Settings” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide.  
C.1 Network Element Defaults Description  
The NE defaults are pre-installed on each Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TCC2 or TCC2P card. They also ship  
as a file called 15454SDH-defaults.txt on the CTC software CD in the event you want to import the  
defaults onto existing TCC2 cards. The NE defaults include card-level, CTC, and node-level defaults.  
Changes made manually using the “Change Card Settings” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH  
Procedure Guide override default settings. If you use the Defaults Editor or import a new defaults file,  
the default changes do not change the settings for cards that are currently installed or slots that are  
pre-provisioned for cards.  
Changes made manually to most node-level default settings (either when you initially turn up a node or  
change node settings later) override the current settings, whether default or provisioned. If you change  
the default settings, using either the Defaults Editor or by importing a new defaults file, the new defaults  
take effect immediately for all settings except those relating to protection (SNCP, MS-SPRing, Linear,  
etc.).  
Note  
Changing the IIOP listener port in the NE defaults requires a reboot of the node in order for the  
default change to occur. Use caution when changing this default setting.  
C.2 Card Default Settings  
The tables in this section list the default settings for each card. Cisco provides settings that are  
pre-provisioned for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH optical and electrical cards, including:  
•
Soak Time (all cards) is the length of time that elapses between an AINS port receiving a valid signal  
and when it automatically changes to in-service status.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2 Card Default Settings  
•
Line Coding (E1-42 cards) defines the E-1 transmission coding type that is used.  
•
Line Length (DS3i) defines the distance (in feet) from the FMEC connection to the next termination  
point.  
•
•
Line Type (E1, E1-42, and DS3i cards) defines the type of framing used.  
Port State (all cards) sets the port to one of the four available states (IS, OOS, OOS_MT, or  
OOS_AINS), depending on whether you need ports in or out of service.  
•
•
•
SF BER Level (STM-N, TXP, and MXP cards) defines the signal fail bit error rate.  
SD BER Level (STM-N, TXP, and MXP cards) defines the signal degrade bit error rate.  
Enable Sync Messages (STM-N and MXP cards) enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),  
which allow the node to choose the best timing source.  
•
•
•
PJ VC4 Mon (STM-N cards) sets the VC4 that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no  
VC4 is monitored.  
VC4 IPPM Enabled (STM-N cards) enables intermediate-path performance monitoring on a node  
for transparent monitoring of a channel that does not terminate on that node.  
Send Do Not Use (STM-N, TXP, and MXP cards) sends a DUS message on the S1 byte when  
enabled.  
•
•
•
Far End Inhibit Loopback (DS3i card) enables DS3i cards to inhibit loopbacks on the far end.  
Payload Type (TXP and MXP cards) defines the type of client signal.  
Termination Mode (TXP and MXP cards) defines the type of termination (line, section, or  
transparent).  
•
•
•
ALS Mode (TXP and MXP cards) sets the automatic laser shutdown feature to one of four available  
states (disabled, auto restart, manual restart, manual restart for test).  
ALS Recovery Interval (TXP and MXP cards) sets the automatic laser shutdown recovery time  
interval.  
ALS Recovery Pulse Width (TXP and MXP cards) set the automatic laser shutdown recovery pulse  
signal width.  
•
•
FEC (TXP and MXP cards) enables or disables the FEC monitoring on the optical transport network.  
G.709 OTN (TXP and MXP cards) enables or disables the G.709 monitoring on the optical transport  
network.  
•
•
•
•
FEC Thresholds (TXP and MXP cards) set the performance monitoring parameters for gathering  
FEC performance data and detecting problems early.  
Optical Thresholds (TXP and MXP cards) set the performance monitoring parameters for gathering  
physical optics performance data and detecting problems early.  
OTN Thresholds (TXP and MXP cards) set the performance monitoring parameters for gathering  
OTN trunk-side performance data and detecting problems early.  
PM Threshold Settings (all cards) set the performance monitoring parameters for gathering  
performance data and detecting problems early.  
Note  
For more information about the performance monitoring parameters, refer to the “Performance  
Monitoring” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.1 E1 Card Default Settings  
C.2.1 E1 Card Default Settings  
Table C-1 lists the E1 Card default settings.  
Table C-1  
E1 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
E1.config.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
E1.config.LineType  
E1_MF  
E1.config.SDBER  
1e-007  
E1.config.SFBER  
0.0001  
E1.config.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.LOSS  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS  
E1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1388700  
900  
65  
0
900  
10  
90  
648  
0
900  
133315200  
86400  
900  
100  
0
86400  
287100  
450000  
900  
0
0
0
900  
0
900  
0
27561600  
450000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
287100  
450000  
900  
0
0
0
0
9
9
65  
10  
10  
90  
90  
648  
100  
10  
900  
900  
27561600  
43200000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.2 E1-42 Card Default Settings  
Table C-1  
Default Name  
E1 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
539100  
1800000  
900  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.UAS  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.BBE  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.EB  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.ES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.SES  
E1.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.UAS  
15  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
18  
65  
10  
900  
10  
900  
150  
180  
648  
100  
10  
51753600  
172800000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
15  
539100  
1800000  
900  
18  
65  
10  
900  
10  
900  
150  
180  
648  
100  
10  
51753600  
172800000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.2 E1-42 Card Default Settings  
Table C-2 lists the E1-42 card default settings.  
Table C-2  
E1-42 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
E1_42.config.AINSSoakTime  
E1_42.config.LineCoding  
0.33333333333  
HDB3  
E1_42.config.LineType  
E1_MF  
E1_42.config.SDBER  
1e-007  
E1_42.config.SFBER  
0.0001  
E1_42.config.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.LOSS  
9
0
0
0
1388700  
900  
65  
0
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.2 E1-42 Card Default Settings  
Table C-2  
E1-42 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.BBE  
10  
90  
648  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
133315200  
86400  
900  
100  
0
86400  
287100  
450000  
900  
0
0
0
900  
0
900  
0
27561600  
450000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
287100  
450000  
900  
0
0
0
0
9
9
65  
10  
10  
90  
90  
648  
100  
10  
15  
18  
65  
10  
10  
150  
180  
648  
100  
10  
15  
900  
900  
27561600  
43200000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
539100  
1800000  
900  
900  
900  
51753600  
172800000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
539100  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.3 E3 Card Default Settings  
Table C-2  
Default Name  
E1-42 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
1800000  
900  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.UAS  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.BBE  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.EB  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.ES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.SES  
E1_42.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.UAS  
18  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65  
10  
900  
10  
900  
150  
180  
648  
100  
10  
51753600  
172800000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.3 E3 Card Default Settings  
Table C-3 lists the E3 card default settings.  
Table C-3  
E3 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
E3.config.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
E3.config.SDBER  
1e-007  
E3.config.SFBER  
0.0001  
E3.config.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.LOSS  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS  
E3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.EB  
387  
25  
10  
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
38700  
900  
900  
900  
3865  
250  
10  
40  
20  
3
3715200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
900  
900  
10  
200  
7
900  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
10  
25  
15  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.3 E3 Card Default Settings  
Table C-3  
E3 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.ES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.UAS  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.BBE  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.EB  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.ES  
12  
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
900  
10  
250  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
25  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
250  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
15  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
150  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
15  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
150  
125  
100  
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.4 FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-3  
Default Name  
E3 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
86400  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.SES  
E3.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.UAS  
7
0
0
10  
86400  
C.2.4 FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-4 lists the FC_MR-4 (fibre channel) card default settings.  
Table C-4  
FC-MR Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
FC-MR.config.card.Mode  
Fibre Channel/FICON Enhanced  
FC-MR.config.port.distanceExtension.AutoadjustGFPBuf TRUE  
ferThreshold  
FC-MR.config.port.distanceExtension.AutoDetect  
FC-MR.config.port.distanceExtension.Enabled  
FC-MR.config.port.distanceExtension.NumCredits  
FC-MR.config.port.distanceExtension.NumGFPBuffers  
TRUE  
TRUE  
32  
2
256  
16  
FC-MR.config.port.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.IngressI TRUE  
dleFiltering  
FC-MR.config.port.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.MaxFra 2148  
meSize  
FC-MR.config.port.LinkRecovery  
FC-MR.config.port.MediaType  
FC-MR.config.port.State  
FALSE  
Undefined  
locked, disabled  
C.2.5 DS3I Card Default Settings  
Table C-5 lists the DS3I card default settings.  
Table C-5  
DS3I Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
DS3I.config.AINSSoakTime  
DS3I.config.FeInhibitLpbk  
DS3I.config.LineLength  
DS3I.config.LineType  
0.33333333333  
FALSE  
0 - 225 ft  
C BIT  
DS3I.config.SDBER  
1e-007  
DS3I.config.SFBER  
0.0001  
DS3I.config.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
382  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.CV  
0
287100  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.5 DS3I Card Default Settings  
Table C-5  
DS3I Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.SAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.1day.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.LOSS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV  
25  
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
900  
4
900  
10  
3820  
250  
8
900  
27561600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
287100  
900  
40  
10  
382  
25  
4
900  
10  
3820  
250  
40  
10  
387  
25  
10  
4
900  
27561600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
38700  
900  
900  
900  
3865  
250  
10  
40  
10  
382  
25  
2
3715200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
900  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.AISS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.SAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.AISS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.CV  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.SAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.SES  
287100  
900  
900  
4
900  
10  
10  
3820  
250  
8
900  
86400  
27561600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
40  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.5 DS3I Card Default Settings  
Table C-5  
Default Name  
DS3I Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
86400  
DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.farend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vc4.nearend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.15min.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.farend.1day.UAS  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.15min.UAS  
10  
25  
15  
12  
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
250  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
25  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
250  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
15  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
150  
125  
100  
7
900  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
15  
15  
12  
3
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
900  
10  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.6 Data Card Default Settings  
Table C-5  
DS3I Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.BBE  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.EB  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.ES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.SES  
DS3I.pmthresholds.vclo.nearend.1day.UAS  
150  
125  
100  
7
0
0
0
0
0
86400  
10  
86400  
C.2.6 Data Card Default Settings  
Table C-6 lists the G1000-4, ML100T-12, and ML1000-2 card default settings.  
Table C-6  
Data Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
G1000.config.AINSSoakTime  
G1000.config.State  
0.33333333333  
locked, disabled  
HDLC  
ML1000.config.card.Mode  
ML100T.config.card.Mode  
HDLC  
C.2.7 STM1 Card Default Settings  
Table C-7 lists the STM1 card default settings.  
Table C-7  
STM1 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM1.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STM1.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM1.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
STM1.config.line.SDBER  
STU  
0.33333333333  
0
0
1
1e-007  
FALSE  
FALSE  
0.0001  
STM1.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM1.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
STM1.config.line.SFBER  
STM1.config.line.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
STM1.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
STM1.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TRUE  
FALSE  
1312  
1312  
87  
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.7 STM1 Card Default Settings  
Table C-7  
Default Name  
STM1 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
86400  
10  
86400  
1312  
1312  
87  
137700  
137700  
900  
1
600  
300  
1
900  
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
5
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
57600  
600  
4
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
13305600  
900  
15  
12  
3
900  
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
7
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
14400000  
60  
60  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.8 STM1-8 Card Default Settings  
Table C-7  
STM1 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
100  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100  
900  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
125  
100  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
9600  
5760  
5760  
7
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
138600  
138600  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
86400  
C.2.8 STM1-8 Card Default Settings  
Table C-8 lists the STM1-8 card default settings.  
Table C-8  
STM1-8 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM1-8.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STM1-8.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM1-8.config.line.AlsMode  
STU  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.8 STM1-8 Card Default Settings  
Table C-8  
Default Name  
STM1-8 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM1-8.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
STM1-8.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
STM1-8.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
2
100  
60  
0
300  
1
0
STM1-8.config.line.SDBER  
1e-007  
STM1-8.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM1-8.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
FALSE  
FALSE  
STM1-8.config.line.SFBER  
0.0001  
STM1-8.config.line.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
STM1-8.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
FALSE  
1312  
1312  
87  
STM1-8.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
137700  
137700  
900  
10  
1312  
1312  
87  
1
600  
300  
1
900  
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
5
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
57600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2159100  
13305600  
600  
4
10  
25  
15  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.8 STM1-8 Card Default Settings  
Table C-8  
STM1-8 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
12  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
900  
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
7
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
14400000  
900  
60  
60  
100  
100  
60  
900  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
9600  
5760  
5760  
7
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
138600  
138600  
900  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.9 STM1E-12 Card Default Settings  
Table C-8  
Default Name  
STM1-8 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
100000  
100000  
5000  
Minimum  
Maximum  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1-8.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
0
0
0
0
5000  
86400  
C.2.9 STM1E-12 Card Default Settings  
Table C-9 lists the STM1E-12 card default settings.  
STM1E-12 Card Default Settings  
Default Value  
Table C-9  
Default Name  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM1E-12.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
STM1E-12.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
0
STM1E-12.config.line.SDBER  
1e-007  
STM1E-12.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
FALSE  
STM1E-12.config.line.SFBER  
0.0001  
STM1E-12.config.line.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
STM1E-12.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
FALSE  
1312  
1312  
87  
STM1E-12.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.stm1.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.stm1.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.stm1.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.stm1.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.stm1.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.stm1.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.stm1.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.stm1.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.stm1.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.stm1.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.e4.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.e4.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.e4.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.e4.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.e4.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.stm1.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.stm1.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
137700  
137700  
900  
10  
9
630  
65  
10  
900  
10  
900  
1312  
1312  
137700  
137700  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.9 STM1E-12 Card Default Settings  
Table C-9  
STM1E-12 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.stm1.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.stm1.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.stm1.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.e4.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.e4.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.e4.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.e4.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.e4.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.stm1.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.stm1.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.stm1.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.stm1.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.stm1.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
6300  
6300  
864  
100  
100  
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
3
900  
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
7
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
3
900  
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
7
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
138600  
138600  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.10 STM4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-9  
Default Name  
STM1E-12 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
500  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
STM1E-12.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
5000  
86400  
5000  
86400  
C.2.10 STM4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-10 lists the STM4 card default settings.  
Table C-10  
STM4 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM4.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STU  
STM4.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM4.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
0.33333333333  
0
0
4
STM4.config.line.SDBER  
1e-007  
STM4.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM4.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
STM4.config.line.SFBER  
FALSE  
FALSE  
0.0001  
STM4.config.line.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
STM4.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
FALSE  
5315  
5315  
87  
STM4.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
552600  
552600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
900  
4
10  
86400  
552600  
552600  
5315  
5315  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.10 STM4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-10  
STM4 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-W  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-W  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
600  
1
600  
300  
300  
1
900  
900  
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
5
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-W  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-W  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
57600  
5
57600  
600  
600  
4
86400  
86400  
86400  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
14400000  
900  
60  
60  
100  
100  
60  
900  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
9600  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.11 STM4-4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-10  
Default Name  
STM4 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
5760  
Minimum  
Maximum  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5760  
7
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
553500  
553500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
53136000  
53136000  
86400  
5000  
86400  
C.2.11 STM4-4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-11 lists the STM4-4 card default settings.  
Table C-11  
STM4-4 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
STM4-4.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STM4-4.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM4-4.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
STU  
0.33333333333  
0
0
4
STM4-4.config.line.SDBER  
1e-007  
STM4-4.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM4-4.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
STM4-4.config.line.SFBER  
FALSE  
FALSE  
0.0001  
STM4-4.config.line.State  
unlocked, automaticInService  
STM4-4.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
FALSE  
5315  
5315  
87  
STM4-4.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
552600  
552600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
53049600  
53049600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.11 STM4-4 Card Default Settings  
Table C-11  
STM4-4 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
864  
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
86400  
86400  
86400  
552600  
552600  
900  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-W  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-W  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-W  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-W  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
10  
5315  
5315  
87  
1
600  
1
600  
300  
300  
1
900  
900  
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
5
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
57600  
57600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
5
600  
600  
4
10  
25  
15  
12  
60  
691200000  
691200000  
14400000  
900  
60  
60  
100  
100  
60  
900  
691200000  
691200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.12 STM16 Card Default Settings  
Table C-11  
Default Name  
STM4-4 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
9600  
5760  
5760  
7
Minimum Maximum  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
553500  
553500  
900  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
53136000  
53136000  
86400  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM4-4.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
86400  
C.2.12 STM16 Card Default Settings  
Table C-12 lists the STM16 card default settings.  
Table C-12  
STM16 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
STU  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM16.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STM16.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM16.config.line.AlsMode  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
2
STM16.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
STM16.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
STM16.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
STM16.config.line.SDBER  
100  
60  
0
300  
16  
0
1e-007  
FALSE  
FALSE  
0.0001  
STM16.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM16.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
STM16.config.line.SFBER  
STM16.config.line.State  
unlocked,  
automaticInService  
STM16.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.12 STM16 Card Default Settings  
Table C-12  
STM16 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM16.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
FALSE  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-R  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-S  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-W  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-R  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-S  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-W  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-R  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-S  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-W  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-R  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-S  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-W  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
21260  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2212200  
2212200  
900  
21260  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
212600  
864  
4
10  
21260  
21260  
87  
1
600  
1
600  
1
600  
1
600  
300  
300  
300  
300  
1
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
5
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
57600  
57600  
57600  
57600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
5
5
5
600  
600  
600  
600  
4
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.12 STM16 Card Default Settings  
Table C-12  
Default Name  
STM16 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
10  
Minimum  
Maximum  
86400  
STM16.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
14400000  
900  
60  
60  
100  
100  
900  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
125  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
100  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
9600  
5760  
5760  
7
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
2151900  
2151900  
900  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
206582400  
206582400  
86400  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM16.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.13 STM64 Card Default Settings  
C.2.13 STM64 Card Default Settings  
Table C-13 lists the STM64 card default settings.  
Table C-13  
STM64 Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
STM64.config.line.AdminSSMIn  
STM64.config.line.AINSSoakTime  
STM64.config.line.AlsMode  
STU  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
2
STM64.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
STM64.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
STM64.config.line.PJVC4Mon#  
STM64.config.line.SDBER  
100  
60  
0
300  
64  
0
1e-007  
FALSE  
FALSE  
0.0001  
STM64.config.line.Send<FF>DoNotUse  
STM64.config.line.SendDoNotUse  
STM64.config.line.SFBER  
STM64.config.line.State  
unlocked,  
automaticInService  
STM64.config.line.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
FALSE  
85040  
85040  
87  
STM64.config.vc4.IPPMEnabled  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-R  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-S  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSC-W  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-R  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
4
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
10  
85040  
85040  
87  
1
600  
1
600  
1
600  
1
600  
300  
300  
900  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.13 STM64 Card Default Settings  
Table C-13  
Default Name  
STM64 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-S  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.PSD-W  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
300  
300  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
900  
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
5
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-R  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-S  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSC-W  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-R  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-S  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.PSD-W  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
57600  
5
57600  
5
57600  
5
57600  
600  
600  
600  
600  
4
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
STM64.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.15min.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PDET  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET  
10  
86400  
25  
2159100  
7200000  
900  
15  
12  
60  
7200000  
7200000  
14400000  
900  
60  
60  
100  
100  
60  
900  
7200000  
7200000  
900  
60  
3
10  
900  
250  
125  
100  
5760  
5760  
5760  
9600  
207273600  
691200000  
86400  
691200000  
691200000  
1382400000  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-13  
STM64 Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
9600  
Minimum  
Maximum  
86400  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.path.nearend.1day.UAS  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
STM64.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5760  
691200000  
691200000  
86400  
5760  
7
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
7967700  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
764899200  
764899200  
86400  
5000  
86400  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-14 lists the MXP_2.5G_10G card default settings.  
Table C-14  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
4
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.AlsMode  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.SDBER  
100  
60  
300  
STM16_PORT  
UNASSIGNED  
1e-007  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.SendDoNotUse  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.SFBER  
FALSE  
0.0001  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.client.TerminationMode  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Transparent  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
4
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-2_5G-10G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
100  
60  
300  
90  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-14  
Default Name  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
3
3
-21  
-8  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias 81  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
2
2
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower -20  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower -7  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias 85.5  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
2.5  
2.5  
-20.5  
-7.5  
90  
-7  
4
-25  
2
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias 81  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower -7.5  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighTxPower 3.5  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower -24.5  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
2.5  
85.5  
-7.3  
3.7  
-24.7  
2.3  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.BitErrorsCorrected 903330  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9033621811200  
4724697600  
867227693875200  
453570969600  
8850600  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.UncorrectableWords  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.UncorrectableWords  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
5
86719680  
480  
85040  
87  
900  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
10  
72  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-14  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
1
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
85040  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
500  
100000  
5000  
40  
900  
900  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
10  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
72  
500  
500  
100000  
5000  
40  
900  
900  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.14 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-14  
Default Name  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
5000  
Standard  
TRUE  
1e-007  
21260  
21260  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.otnLines.FEC  
0
86400  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
MXP-2_5G-10G.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
21260  
21260  
87  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
2212200  
2151900  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
85040  
85040  
212371200  
206582400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
8850600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-14  
MXP-2.5G-10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
85040  
85040  
87  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
8850600  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
849657600  
764899200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-15 lists the MXP_2.5G_10E card default settings.  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-15  
Default Name  
MXP-2.5G-10E Card Default Settings  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.AisSquelchMode  
Squelch  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.AlsMode  
Disabled  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
2
100  
100  
2000  
STM16_PORT  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
UNASSIGNED  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.SDBER  
1e-007  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.SendDoNotUse  
FALSE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.SFBER  
0.0001  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.SyncMsgIn  
TRUE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.client.TerminationMode  
Transparent  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Disabled  
100  
300  
90  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-2_5G-10E.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
200  
2000  
3
3
-21  
-8  
81  
2
2
-20  
-7  
85.5  
2.5  
2.5  
-20.5  
-7.5  
98  
-7  
8
-25  
1
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-15  
MXP-2.5G-10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
95  
-7.5  
7
-24.5  
2
96  
-7.3  
7
-24.7  
2
903330  
0
90336218112  
00  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.15min.UncorrectableWords  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
5
0
0
4724697600  
86719680  
86722769387  
5200  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.1day.UncorrectableWords  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
480  
0
0
45357096960  
0
903330  
90336218112  
00  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.UncorrectableWords  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
5
0
0
4724697600  
86719680  
86722769387  
5200  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.UncorrectableWords  
480  
0
45357096960  
0
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
85040  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
4
10  
85040  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.15 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-15  
Default Name  
MXP-2.5G-10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
3
Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.otnLines.AsynchSynchMapping  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.otnLines.FEC  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
850400  
864  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
40  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
ODU Multiplex  
Standard  
TRUE  
1e-007  
21260  
21260  
87  
86400  
86400  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
MXP-2_5G-10E.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212371200  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.16 MXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-15  
MXP-2.5G-10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
212600  
864  
Minimum  
Maximum  
212371200  
86400  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-2_5G-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
86400  
10  
86400  
21260  
21260  
87  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
2212200  
2151900  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
212371200  
206582400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.16 MXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-16 lists the MXP_MR_2.5G card default settings.  
Table C-16  
MXP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsMode  
Disabled  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
4
100  
60  
300  
UNASSIGNED  
UNASSIGNED  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.16 MXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-16  
Default Name  
MXP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.AutoadjustGFPBufferThr TRUE  
eshold  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.AutoDetect  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.Enabled  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.NumCredits  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.NumGFPBuffers  
TRUE  
TRUE  
32  
2
256  
16  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.MaxFrameSize 2148  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Disabled  
4
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SDBER  
100  
60  
300  
1e-007  
FALSE  
0.0001  
TRUE  
90  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SendDoNotUse  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SFBER  
MXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SyncMsgIn  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
3
3
-21  
-8  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBia 81  
s
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
2
2
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower -20  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower -7  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias 85.5  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
2.5  
2.5  
-20.5  
-7.5  
98  
-7  
30  
-25  
-40  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias 95  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.16 MXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-16  
MXP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower -7.5  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighTxPower 30  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower -24.5  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowTxPower -40  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias 96  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.EB  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.EB  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
-7.3  
30  
-24.7  
-40  
21260  
21260  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
2212200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
21260  
21260  
87  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
2212200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
2151900  
2151900  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
206582400  
206582400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.17 MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-16  
Default Name  
MXP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
5000  
Minimum Maximum  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
MXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
86400  
86400  
86400  
5000  
5000  
C.2.17 MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-17 lists the MXPP_MR_2.5G card default settings.  
MXPP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings  
Default Value  
Table C-17  
Default Name  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsMode  
Disabled  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
4
100  
60  
300  
UNASSIGNED  
UNASSIGNED  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.AutoadjustGFPB TRUE  
ufferThreshold  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.AutoDetect  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.Enabled  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.NumCredits  
TRUE  
TRUE  
32  
2
256  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.distanceExtension.NumGFPBuffers 16  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.fc.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.MaxFr 2148  
ameSize  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
4
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SDBER  
100  
60  
300  
1e-007  
0.0001  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SFBER  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias 90  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
3
3
-21  
-8  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighL 81  
aserBias  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.17 MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-17  
MXPP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Default Name  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighR 2  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighT  
xPower  
2
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowR -20  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowT -7  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLa 85.5  
serBias  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRx 2.5  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTx 2.5  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRx -20.5  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTx -7.5  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias 98  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
-7  
30  
-25  
-40  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighL 95  
aserBias  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighR -7.5  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighT 30  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowR -24.5  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowT -40  
xPower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLas 96  
erBias  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRx -7.3  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTx 30  
Power  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxP -24.7  
ower  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.17 MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-17  
Default Name  
MXPP-MR-2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxP -40  
ower  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
MXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
21260  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2212200  
2212200  
900  
21260  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
2212200  
212371200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
4
10  
21260  
21260  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
2212200  
212371200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2151900  
2151900  
900  
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
206582400  
206582400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-18 lists the TXP_MR_10E card default settings.  
Table C-18  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
0.333333333  
33  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.AisSquelchMode  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.AlsMode  
Squelch  
Disabled  
2
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
100  
100  
2000  
UNASSIGN  
ED  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
UNASSIGN  
ED  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.SDBER  
1e-007  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.SendDoNotUse  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.SFBER  
FALSE  
0.0001  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.SyncMsgIn  
TXP-MR-10E.config.client.TerminationMode  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
TRUE  
Transparent  
0.333333333  
33  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Disabled  
100  
300  
1e-007  
0.0001  
90  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.SDBER  
200  
2000  
TXP-MR-10E.config.trunk.SFBER  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
2
2
-17  
-9  
81  
1
1
-16  
-8  
85.5  
1.5  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-18  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
1.5  
-16.5  
-8.5  
98  
-7  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
8
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
-25  
1
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
95  
-7.5  
7
-24.5  
2
96  
-7.3  
7
-24.7  
2
903330  
0
903362181120  
0
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
5
0
0
4724697600  
86719680  
867227693875  
200  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.enhanced.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
480  
0
0
453570969600  
903330  
903362181120  
0
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
5
0
0
4724697600  
86719680  
867227693875  
200  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
480  
85040  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
453570969600  
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
849657600  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-18  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value Minimum  
Maximum  
6912  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.otnLines.AsynchSynchMapping  
40  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
85040  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
500  
100000  
5000  
40  
900  
900  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
10  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
72  
500  
500  
100000  
5000  
40  
900  
900  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
86400  
86400  
Synch  
Mapping  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.otnLines.FEC  
Standard  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.18 TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings  
Table C-18  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
TRUE  
1e-007  
85040  
85040  
87  
TXP-MR-10E.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
85040  
85040  
87  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
8850600  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
85040  
85040  
87  
849657600  
764899200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-18  
TXP_MR_10E Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value Minimum  
Maximum  
900  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10E.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
85040  
85040  
87  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
8850600  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
849657600  
764899200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19 lists the TXP_MR_10G card default settings.  
Table C-19  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.AlsMode  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
4
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.mrPortAssignment  
100  
100  
300  
UNASSIGNED  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.SDBER  
1e-007  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.SFBER  
0.0001  
TXP-MR-10G.config.client.TerminationMode  
Transparent  
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
0.33333333333  
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Disabled  
4
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.SDBER  
100  
1e-007  
0.0001  
90  
60  
300  
TXP-MR-10G.config.trunk.SFBER  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
2
2
-17  
-9  
81  
1
1
-16  
-8  
85.5  
1.5  
1.5  
-16.5  
-8.5  
90  
-7  
4
-25  
2
81  
-7.5  
3.5  
-24.5  
2.5  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
85.5  
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
-7.3  
3.7  
-24.7  
2.3  
903330  
0
9033621811  
200  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
5
0
0
4724697600  
86719680  
8672276938  
75200  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.fecthresholds.standard.1day.UncorrectableWords  
480  
0
4535709696  
00  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
85040  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
4
10  
85040  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
4
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
500  
900  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
100000  
5000  
40  
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.otnLines.FEC  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
Enable  
TRUE  
1e-007  
85040  
85040  
87  
86400  
86400  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
TXP-MR-10G.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
85040  
85040  
87  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.19 TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
4
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.client.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
86400  
86400  
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
8850600  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
85040  
85040  
87  
849657600  
764899200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
8850600  
900  
4
10  
85040  
85040  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
850400  
850400  
864  
849657600  
849657600  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
8850600  
7967700  
900  
500  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-19  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
500  
Minimum Maximum  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-10G.pmthresholds.trunk.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
849657600  
764899200  
86400  
5000  
86400  
5000  
86400  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20 lists the TXP_MR_2.5G card default settings.  
Table C-20  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsMode  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.SDBER  
40  
100  
60  
300  
UNASSIGNED  
UNASSIGNED  
1e-007  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.SFBER  
0.0001  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.client.TerminationMode  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Transparent  
0.33333333333  
Disabled  
40  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SDBER  
100  
1e-007  
0.0001  
90  
60  
300  
TXP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SFBER  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
3
3
-21  
-15  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias 81  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
2
2
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower -20  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
-7  
85.5  
2.5  
2.5  
-20.5  
-7.5  
98  
-7  
-25  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias 95  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower -7.5  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
-24.5  
96  
-7.3  
-24.7  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.15min.BitErrorsCorrecte 112500  
d
0
0
0
9033621811200  
4724697600  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.15min.UncorrectableWor  
ds  
1
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.1day.BitErrorsCorrected 10800000  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.1day.UncorrectableWords 96  
0
0
453570969600  
9033621811200  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.15min.BitErrorsCorr 90000  
ected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.15min.Uncorrectable  
Words  
1
0
0
0
4724697600  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.1day.BitErrorsCorrec 8640000  
ted  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.1day.Uncorrectable  
Words  
96  
453570969600  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
90000  
1
0
0
0
9033621811200  
4724697600  
8640000  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.1day.UncorrectableWords  
96  
0
0
453570969600  
9033621811200  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.15min.BitErrorsCorr 180900  
ected  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.15min.Uncorrectable  
Words  
1
0
4724697600  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.1day.BitErrorsCorrec 17366400  
ted  
0
0
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.1day.Uncorrectable  
Words  
96  
453570969600  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
180900  
1
0
0
0
9033621811200  
4724697600  
17366400  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
0
0
453570969600  
9033621811200  
4724697600  
15012  
1
1441152  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
0
0
453570969600  
9033621811200  
4724697600  
225837  
1
21680352  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
0
0
453570969600  
9033621811200  
4724697600  
56457  
1
5419872  
86722769387520  
0
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
96  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
453570969600  
8850600  
900  
21260  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
21260  
87  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
10  
Minimum  
Maximum  
72  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.FEC  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
864  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
40  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
Enable  
TRUE  
1e-007  
1312  
1312  
87  
86400  
86400  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
TXP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
13120  
13120  
864  
Minimum  
Maximum  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
86400  
10  
86400  
1312  
1312  
87  
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
138600  
138600  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
21260  
21260  
87  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
900  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
21260  
2212200  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.20 TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
21260  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
2212200  
900  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
2151900  
2151900  
900  
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
500  
900  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
5315  
5315  
87  
206582400  
206582400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
552600  
552600  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
552600  
552600  
900  
4
10  
5315  
5315  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
53049600  
53049600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-20  
Default Name  
TXP_MR_2.5G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
864  
Minimum  
Maximum  
86400  
86400  
86400  
553500  
553500  
900  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
500  
900  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
53136000  
53136000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21 lists the TXPP_MR_10G card default settings.  
Table C-21  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AINSSoakTime  
0.3333333333  
3
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsMode  
Disabled  
40  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmPortAssignment  
100  
60  
300  
UNASSIGNE  
D
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.ppmSlotAssignment  
UNASSIGNE  
D
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.SDBER  
1e-007  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.SFBER  
0.0001  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.client.TerminationMode  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AINSSoakTime  
Transparent  
0.3333333333  
3
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsMode  
Disabled  
40  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval  
100  
60  
300  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SDBER  
1e-007  
0.0001  
90  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.config.trunk.SFBER  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.HighTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.alarm.LowTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.HighTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.15min.LowTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.HighTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.client.warning.1day.LowTxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.alarm.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.15min.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighLaserBias  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.HighRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.opticalthresholds.trunk.warning.1day.LowRxPower  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
3
3
-21  
-15  
81  
2
2
-20  
-7  
85.5  
2.5  
2.5  
-20.5  
-7.5  
98  
-7  
-25  
95  
-7.5  
-24.5  
96  
-7.3  
-24.7  
112500  
0
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
1
0
0
4724697600  
10800000  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gethernet.1day.UncorrectableWords  
96  
0
0
0
4535709696  
00  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.15min.BitErrorsCorrected 90000  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.15min.UncorrectableWords 1  
9033621811  
200  
4724697600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
Default Value  
Minimum  
Maximum  
8640000  
0
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gfiberchannel.1day.UncorrectableWords 96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
90000  
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
1
0
0
4724697600  
8640000  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.1gficon.1day.UncorrectableWords  
96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.15min.BitErrorsCorrected 180900  
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.15min.UncorrectableWords 1  
0
0
4724697600  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
17366400  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gfiberchannel.1day.UncorrectableWords 96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
180900  
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
1
0
0
4724697600  
17366400  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.2gficon.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
15012  
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
1
0
0
4724697600  
1441152  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm1.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
225837  
9033621811  
200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
1
0
0
4724697600  
21680352  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm16.1day.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.15min.BitErrorsCorrected  
96  
0
0
4535709696  
00  
56457  
9033621811  
200  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
1
Minimum  
Maximum  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.15min.UncorrectableWords  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.1day.BitErrorsCorrected  
0
0
4724697600  
5419872  
8672276938  
75200  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.fecthresholds.stm4.1day.UncorrectableWords  
96  
0
4535709696  
00  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.pm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.farend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.ES  
21260  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8850600  
900  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
21260  
87  
10  
72  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
864  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
4
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
10  
10000  
500  
10  
72  
500  
500  
100000  
5000  
40  
900  
900  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
10000  
500  
86400  
86400  
8850600  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
Default Name  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
10  
Minimum  
Maximum  
72  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.FC  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.g709thresholds.sm.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.FEC  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
500  
900  
500  
900  
100000  
5000  
40  
849657600  
86400  
6912  
5000  
5000  
Enable  
TRUE  
1e-007  
1312  
1312  
87  
86400  
86400  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.G709OTN  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.otn.otnLines.SDBER  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
137700  
137700  
900  
4
10  
1312  
1312  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
138600  
138600  
900  
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
500  
900  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
21260  
21260  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm1.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm16.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
86400  
86400  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
900  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
21260  
21260  
87  
2212200  
2212200  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
212600  
212600  
864  
212371200  
212371200  
86400  
4
86400  
10  
86400  
10000  
10000  
500  
2151900  
2151900  
900  
500  
900  
500  
900  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
5315  
206582400  
206582400  
86400  
86400  
86400  
552600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.21 TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings  
Table C-21  
Default Name  
TXPP_MR_10G Card Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
5315  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
552600  
900  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.15min.UAS  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
TXPP-MR-2_5G.pmthresholds.stm4.rs.nearend.1day.UAS  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
552600  
552600  
900  
4
10  
5315  
5315  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
53150  
53150  
864  
53049600  
53049600  
86400  
86400  
86400  
553500  
553500  
900  
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
500  
900  
10000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
5000  
53136000  
53136000  
86400  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.22 OSCM Card Default Settings  
C.2.22 OSCM Card Default Settings  
Table C-22 lists the OSCM card default settings.  
Table C-22  
OSCM Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
1312  
1312  
87  
Minimum  
Maximum  
137700  
137700  
900  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
OSCM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
137700  
137700  
900  
4
10  
1312  
1312  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
138600  
138600  
900  
4
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
900  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.2.23 OSC-CSM Card Default Settings  
C.2.23 OSC-CSM Card Default Settings  
Table C-23 lists the OSC_CSM card default settings.  
Table C-23  
OSC-CSM Card Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.SES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.15min.UAS  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.SES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.farend.1day.UAS  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.SES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.15min.UAS  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.SES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.ms.nearend.1day.UAS  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.15min.SES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.BBE  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.EB  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.ES  
OSC_CSM.pmthresholds.rs.nearend.1day.SES  
1312  
1312  
87  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
137700  
137700  
900  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
137700  
137700  
900  
10  
1312  
1312  
87  
1
900  
3
900  
13120  
13120  
864  
4
13219200  
13219200  
86400  
86400  
86400  
138600  
138600  
900  
10  
10000  
10000  
500  
500  
100000  
100000  
5000  
5000  
900  
13305600  
13305600  
86400  
86400  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.3 Node Default Settings  
C.3 Node Default Settings  
Table C-24 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH node-level default settings for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH.  
Cisco provides the following types of settings preprovisioned for each Cisco ONS 15454 SDH node:  
•
SNCP settings determine whether SNCP circuits have SD BER and SF BER monitoring enabled, are  
revertive, and what the reversion time is.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Craft Access Only allows CTC connectivity to the node only through the craft access port.  
CTC IP Display Suppression prevents display of node IP addresses in CTC.  
Defaults Description lists the current defaults file on the node.  
Enable Firewall enables or disables the use of a firewall for accessing the node.  
Enable Proxy enables or disables the use of a proxy server with the node.  
IIOP Listener Port sets the IIOP listener port number.  
LCD IP Setting sets the node LCD screen to display the node IP address and use the buttons on the  
LCD panel, only display the IP address, or suppress display of the IP address.  
•
Login Warning Message warns users at the login screen about the possible legal or contractual  
ramifications of accessing equipment, systems, or networks without authorization.  
•
•
•
•
•
NTP SNTP Server sets the IP address of the NTP SNTP server to be used with the node.  
Time Zone sets the time zone where the node is located.  
Use DST enables or disables the use of Daylight Savings Time.  
Use NTP SNTP Server enables or disables the use of the specified NTP SNTP server with the node.  
LMSP protection settings determine whether or not LMSP-protected circuits have bidirectional  
switching, are revertive, and what the reversion time is.  
•
•
•
MS-SPRing Protection Settings determine whether MS-SPRing-protected circuits are revertive and  
what the reversion time is at both the ring and span levels.  
Y Cable Protection Settings determine whether Y-Cable protected circuits have bidirectional  
switching, are revertive, and what the reversion time is.  
Security Policy settings determine the failed logins before lockout, idle user timeout for each user  
level, lockout duration, manual unlock user level enabled, password reuse timeout and threshold,  
and single session per user for the node security.  
•
•
BITS Timing settings determine the AIS threshold, coding, and framing for BITS1 and BITS2  
timing.  
General Timing settings determine the mode (internal or external), quality of RES, revertive,  
reversion time, and SSM message set for node timing.  
Table C-24  
Node Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
1e-006  
0.0001  
1e-005  
0.001  
Minimum Maximum  
NODE.circuits.sncp.HO_SDBER  
NODE.circuits.sncp.HO_SFBER  
NODE.circuits.sncp.LO_SDBER  
NODE.circuits.sncp.LO_SFBER  
NODE.circuits.sncp.ReversionTime  
5
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.3 Node Default Settings  
Table C-24  
Default Name  
Node Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
Minimum Maximum  
NODE.circuits.sncp.Revertive  
NODE.circuits.State  
FALSE  
unlocked, automaticInService  
Factory Defaults  
57790  
NODE.general.DefaultsDescription  
NODE.general.IIOPListenerPort  
NODE.general.NtpSntpServer  
NODE.general.TimeZone  
0
65535  
0.0.0.0  
(GMT-08:00) Pacific Time (US  
& Canada), Tijuana  
NODE.general.UseDST  
TRUE  
NODE.network.general.AlarmMissingBackplaneLAN  
NODE.network.general.CtcIpDisplaySuppression  
NODE.network.general.GatewaySettings  
NODE.network.general.LcdIpSetting  
NODE.powerMonitor.EHIBATVG_48V  
NODE.powerMonitor.EHIBATVG_60V  
NODE.powerMonitor.ELWBATVG_48V  
NODE.powerMonitor.ELWBATVG_60V  
NODE.protection.lmsp.BidirectionalSwitching  
NODE.protection.lmsp.ReversionTime  
NODE.protection.lmsp.Revertive  
FALSE  
FALSE  
None  
Allow Configuration  
-56.5  
-72  
-40.5  
-50  
FALSE  
5
FALSE  
NODE.protection.msspr.RingReversionTime  
NODE.protection.msspr.RingRevertive  
NODE.protection.msspr.SpanReversionTime  
NODE.protection.msspr.SpanRevertive  
NODE.protection.splitter.ReversionTime  
NODE.protection.splitter.Revertive  
5
TRUE  
5
TRUE  
5
FALSE  
NODE.protection.ycable.ReversionTime  
NODE.protection.ycable.Revertive  
5
FALSE  
NODE.security.access.LANAccess  
Front & Backplane  
5
NODE.security.access.RestoreTimeout  
0
60  
NODE.security.dataComm.CtcBackplaneIpDisplaySuppressio TRUE  
n
NODE.security.dataComm.DefaultTCCEthernetIP  
NODE.security.dataComm.DefaultTCCEthernetIPNetmask  
NODE.security.dataComm.LcdBackplaneIpSetting  
NODE.security.dataComm.SecureModeLocked  
NODE.security.dataComm.SecureModeOn  
10.10.0.1  
24  
Display Only  
FALSE  
FALSE  
NODE.security.idleUserTimeout.Maintenance  
0.041666666667  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.3 Node Default Settings  
Table C-24  
Node Default Settings (continued)  
Default Name  
Default Value  
0.020833333333  
0
Minimum Maximum  
NODE.security.idleUserTimeout.Provisioning  
NODE.security.idleUserTimeout.Retrieve  
NODE.security.idleUserTimeout.Superuser  
NODE.security.legalDisclaimer.LoginWarningMessage  
0.010416666667  
<center><b>WARNING</b></c  
enter>This system is restricted to  
authorized users for business  
purposes.  
Unauthorized<p>access is a  
violation of the law. This service  
may be monitored for  
administrative<p>and security  
reasons. By proceeding, you  
consent to this monitoring.  
NODE.security.other.DisableInactiveUser  
FALSE  
NODE.security.other.InactiveDuration  
45  
20  
90  
NODE.security.other.PMClearingPrivilege  
Provisioning  
NODE.security.other.SingleSessionPerUser  
FALSE  
NODE.security.passwordAging.EnforcePasswordAging  
NODE.security.passwordAging.maintenance.AgingPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.maintenance.WarningPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.provisioning.AgingPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.provisioning.WarningPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.retrieve.AgingPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.retrieve.WarningPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.superuser.AgingPeriod  
NODE.security.passwordAging.superuser.WarningPeriod  
FALSE  
45  
5
20  
2
90  
20  
90  
20  
90  
20  
90  
20  
45  
5
20  
2
45  
5
20  
2
45  
5
20  
2
NODE.security.passwordChange.CannotChangeNewPassword FALSE  
NODE.security.passwordChange.CannotChangeNewPassword 20  
ForNDays  
20  
1
95  
10  
NODE.security.passwordChange.PreventReusingLastNPasswo 1  
rds  
NODE.security.passwordChange.RequirePasswordChangeOn FALSE  
FirstLoginToNewAccount  
NODE.security.shellAccess.EnableShellPassword  
NODE.security.shellAccess.SSH  
FALSE  
FALSE  
NODE.security.shellAccess.TelnetPort  
23  
23  
0
9999  
10  
NODE.security.userLockout.FailedLoginsBeforeLockout  
NODE.security.userLockout.LockoutDuration  
NODE.security.userLockout.ManualUnlockBySuperuser  
5
0.020833333333  
FALSE  
0
600  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.4 CTC Default Settings  
Table C-24  
Default Name  
Node Default Settings (continued)  
Default Value  
STU  
Minimum Maximum  
NODE.timing.bits-1.AdminSSMIn  
NODE.timing.bits-1.AISThreshold  
NODE.timing.bits-1.Coding  
G812L  
HDB3  
NODE.timing.bits-1.CodingOut  
NODE.timing.bits-1.FacilityType  
NODE.timing.bits-1.FacilityTypeOut  
NODE.timing.bits-1.Framing  
NODE.timing.bits-1.FramingOut  
NODE.timing.bits-1.Sa bit  
HDB3  
E1  
E1  
FAS+CAS+CRC  
FAS+CAS+CRC  
4
NODE.timing.bits-1.State  
unlocked  
unlocked  
STU  
NODE.timing.bits-1.StateOut  
NODE.timing.bits-2.AdminSSMIn  
NODE.timing.bits-2.AISThreshold  
NODE.timing.bits-2.Coding  
G812L  
HDB3  
NODE.timing.bits-2.CodingOut  
NODE.timing.bits-2.FacilityType  
NODE.timing.bits-2.FacilityTypeOut  
NODE.timing.bits-2.Framing  
NODE.timing.bits-2.FramingOut  
NODE.timing.bits-2.Sa bit  
HDB3  
E1  
E1  
FAS+CAS+CRC  
FAS+CAS+CRC  
4
NODE.timing.bits-2.State  
unlocked  
unlocked  
External  
NODE.timing.bits-2.StateOut  
NODE.timing.general.Mode  
C.4 CTC Default Settings  
Table C-25 lists the CTC-level default settings for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH. Cisco provides the  
following types of settings preprovisioned for CTC.  
•
•
Create circuits with the Auto route check box selected by default  
Create TL1-like circuits—instructs the node to create only cross-connects, allowing the resulting  
circuits to be in an upgradable state.  
•
Choose a default network map (which country)  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.4 CTC Default Settings  
Table C-25  
CTC Default Settings  
Default Name  
Default Value  
TRUE  
CTC.circuits.AutoRoute  
CTC.circuits.CreateLikeTL1  
CTC.network.Map  
FALSE  
United States  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C Network Element Defaults  
C.4 CTC Default Settings  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
C-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
specifications A-10  
Numerics  
temperature range A-6  
user data channel 2-20  
1+1 optical card protection  
creating linear ADMs 11-28  
description 7-4  
air filter  
description 1-14  
requirement 1-13  
1:1 electrical card protection 7-1  
1:N electrical card protection 7-2  
alarm profiles  
802.3ad link aggregation. See IEEE 802.3ad link  
aggregation  
description 13-10  
applying 13-13  
802.3z flow control. See IEEE 802.3z flow control  
comparing 13-12  
creating 13-11  
deleting 13-12  
A
editing 13-12  
access control list. See ACLs  
ACLs, example 12-26  
listing all 13-12  
listing by node 13-12  
loading 13-12  
add-drop multiplexer. See linear ADM  
ADM. See linear ADM  
modifying 13-11  
row display options 13-13  
saving 13-12  
administrative states B-2  
Advanced Timing Communications and Control Card. See  
TCC2  
severity options 13-12  
Advanced Timing Communications and Control Card Plus.  
See TCC2P  
alarms  
autodelete 13-5  
AIC-I card  
change default severities. See alarm profiles  
controlling display 13-5  
counts, viewing 13-2  
block diagram 2-17  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
description 2-16  
create profiles. See alarm profiles  
deleting cleared 13-5  
external alarms 2-18  
external controls 2-18  
faceplate 2-17  
displaying history 13-10  
filtering 13-5  
input/output (external) alarm contacts 2-18  
LEDs 2-17  
history 13-8  
monitoring and managing 13-1 to 13-17  
numbering scheme (port-based) 13-4  
pin connections 1-14  
orderwire 2-19  
power monitoring 2-20  
software compatibility 2-3  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
retrieving history 13-10  
RMON alarm thresholds 14-23  
severities 13-9, 13-10  
1:0 electrical. See card protection, unprotected  
electrical, description 7-1  
Ethernet (spanning tree) 14-17  
optical 7-4  
suppressing 13-14  
synchronizing 13-5  
unprotected 7-4  
table columns 13-3  
cards  
user-defined 2-18  
See also individual cards indexed by name  
colors onscreen 8-7  
viewing 13-3  
viewing by time zone 13-5  
audit trail 9-6, 13-16  
Ethernet 5-2  
installing 1-15  
automatic circuit routing 10-16  
automaticInService secondary service state B-1  
number of ports per 1-16  
optical (summary) 4-2 to 4-3  
physical description 1-15  
replacement 1-18  
B
replacing 11-12  
slot requirements 1-15  
card view, list of tabs 8-14  
circuits  
bandwidth  
allocation and routing 10-17  
cross-connect card 10-9  
four-fiber MS-SPRing capacity 11-9  
two-fiber MS-SPRing capacity 11-8  
BITS  
definition 14-20, 14-23  
attributes 10-1  
automatic routing 10-16  
constraint-based routing 10-22  
creating manual 10-12  
editing 10-7  
external node timing source 9-7  
interface specifications A-2  
BLANK card  
Ethernet 10-20  
description 3-14  
Ethernet manual cross-connect 14-19  
find circuits with alarms 13-6  
G1000-4 restrictions 14-19  
hub-and-spoke Ethernet circuit 14-22  
in network view (figure) 10-4  
manual Ethernet cross-connects 14-19, 14-23  
manual routing detail 10-18  
merge 10-24  
faceplate 3-15  
broadcast domains 14-13  
C
C2 byte 10-15  
cables  
CAT-5 (LAN) 1-11  
coaxial 1-8, 1-10  
DS-1 1-10  
monitor 10-12  
point-to-point Ethernet circuit 14-19, 14-21  
properties 10-2 to 10-4  
routing 1-11  
protection types 10-7  
card compatibility 2-2  
card protection  
reconfigure 10-25  
secondary circuit source for 10-2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
shared packet ring 10-21  
shared packet ring Ethernet circuit 14-22  
status 10-4  
types on cards 1-16  
corporate LAN 8-6  
cost 12-8  
types of 10-1  
craft connection 8-6  
cross-connect  
unidirectional 10-21  
unidirectional with multiple drops 10-12  
user-defined names for 10-1  
VCAT 10-22  
E-Series Ethernet 14-23  
See circuits  
See XC10G card  
See XC-VXL-10G card  
See XC-VXL-2.5G card  
CTC  
circuit states 10-5  
Cisco Transport Controller. See CTC  
CMS. See CTC  
coaxial. See cables  
alarms  
colors  
See also alarms  
alarm and condition severities 13-4  
and symbols on slots and cards 1-16  
cards 8-7, 8-8  
history 13-8  
profiles 13-10  
viewing 13-3  
nodes 8-12  
compatibility 1-18 to 1-21  
computer requirements 8-3  
export data 13-1  
print data 13-1  
on FMEC slots 1-8  
port states 10-8  
common control cards. See individual card names  
common fiber routing 10-23  
computer  
reverting to earlier load 8-15  
timing setup 9-7  
views  
connecting to ONS 15454 SDH using a craft  
connection 8-6  
description 8-6  
card view 8-13  
requirements 8-3  
software installed on 8-3  
conditions  
network. See network view  
node. See node view  
C-Temp ranges A-6  
column descriptions 13-8  
controlling display of 13-7  
displaying 13-7  
D
displaying history 13-10  
filtering 13-7, 13-8  
database  
retrieving 13-7  
about 8-15  
retrieving history 13-10  
tab 13-7  
revert 8-15  
storage specifications A-2  
version 8-1  
connected rings 11-26  
connecting the ONS 15454 SDH 8-5  
connectors  
data communications channel. See DCC  
datagrams 12-4  
DCC  
locations on card 1-16  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
defined 10-10  
software compatibility 3-4  
specifications A-15  
definition 10-10  
load balancing 10-10  
SDH 10-10  
temperature range A-6  
dual GNEs 12-17  
tunneling 10-10  
dual-ring interconnect. See DRI  
viewing connections 8-12  
DCC/GCC 2-7  
E
DCS 11-27  
destination  
E1000-2-G card  
host 12-4  
block diagram 5-5  
compatible GBICs 5-15  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-4  
routing table 12-23  
secondary sources and destinations 10-17  
DHCP 12-3  
digital cross connect systems. See DCS  
disabled secondary service state B-1  
documentation  
faceplate 5-5  
LEDs 5-6  
port status 5-6  
conventions 1-xxxi  
objectives 1-xxx  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-40  
E100T-G card  
organization 1-xxx to 1-xxxi  
related to this book 1-xxxi  
DRI  
block diagram 5-3  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-2  
description 11-18, 11-22  
integrated (figure) 11-24  
traditional (figure) 11-23  
drop  
faceplate 5-3  
LEDs 5-4  
port status 5-4  
creating multiple 10-12  
definition 14-20, 14-23  
drop port 10-15  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-39  
E1-42 card  
drop ports, service state requirements 10-6  
secondary sources and destinations 10-17  
DS3i-N-12 card  
description 3-6  
block diagram 3-7  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
faceplate 3-7  
block diagram 3-11  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
description 3-10  
LEDs 3-8  
port status 3-8  
EIA requirement 1-2  
faceplate 3-11  
software compatibility 3-4  
specifications A-13  
temperature range A-6  
E1-75/120 impedance conversion panel  
block diagram 3-27  
LEDs 3-12  
path trace 10-15  
port status 3-12  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
description 3-26  
enterprise LAN. See corporate LAN  
environmental alarms 13-15  
E-Series  
faceplate 3-26  
functionality 3-28  
mounting 3-27  
Ethernet cards 14-10  
E-Series Ethernet cards  
See also individual card names  
power requirements A-6, A-7  
Ethernet  
mounting in a rack 1-10  
physical description 1-9  
specifications A-21  
temperature range A-7  
E1-N-14 card  
See also cards indexed by name  
and SNCP 10-20  
block diagram 3-5  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
description 3-4  
applications 14-1 to 14-26  
cards 5-1 to A-42  
faceplate 3-5  
circuits 10-20  
LEDs 3-6  
hub-and-spoke 14-22  
manual cross-connects 14-19, 14-23  
port status 3-6  
software compatibility 3-4  
specifications A-12  
multicard and single-card EtherSwitch  
point-to-point 14-19, 14-21  
shared packed ring circuit 14-22  
collision monitoring (RMON) 14-23  
EtherSwitch 14-10 to 14-21  
flow control on E-Series 14-12  
flow control on G-Series 14-3  
frame buffering 14-3  
E3-12 card  
description 3-8  
block diagram 3-9  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
faceplate 3-9  
LEDs 3-10  
Gigabit EtherChannel 14-4  
Jumbo frames 14-1  
path trace 10-15  
port status 3-10  
link integrity 14-4  
software compatibility 3-4  
specifications A-14  
temperature range A-6  
priority queuing 14-15  
router aggregation 5-1, 14-1  
shared packet ring routing 10-19  
spanning tree protection 14-16  
threshold variables (MIBs) 14-24  
transponder mode for G-Series 14-5  
VLAN counter 14-13  
east port 11-12  
editing circuits 10-7  
electrical cards  
See also individual card names  
overview 3-2 to 3-3  
VLANs 14-13  
power requirements A-5  
temperature range A-6  
electrical codes 1-2  
EtherSwitch  
multicard 14-10  
single-card 14-11  
electrical interface assemblies. See EIA  
end network element. See proxy server  
ENE. See proxy server  
examples  
DCC tunnel 10-10  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
extended SNCP 11-29  
MS-SPRing bandwidth reuse 11-9  
MS-SPRing subtending MS-SPRing 11-28  
network timing 9-7  
firewalls  
external 12-25  
proxy server filtering rules 12-16, 12-17  
firewall tunnels  
optical card protection 7-4  
two-fiber MS-SPRing 11-10  
extended SNCP 11-29  
external alarms  
and proxy server in GNE or ENE mode 12-27  
for foreign terminations 12-28  
setting up 12-27  
flow control 14-3, 14-12  
FMEC  
description 2-18  
input 13-15  
connectors 1-8  
provisioning 13-15  
description 1-7  
external controls  
line rates 1-8  
description 2-18, 13-15  
output 13-15  
ports 1-8  
power requirements A-5  
symbol definitions 1-8  
FMEC-BLANK card  
description 3-29  
external switching commands 7-5  
external timing 9-7  
faceplate 3-30  
F
FMEC-DS1/E1 card  
block diagram 3-16  
connector pinout 3-17  
description 3-16  
fan-tray air filter. See air filter  
fan-tray assembly  
description 1-13  
faceplate 3-16  
fan failure 1-14  
specifications A-18  
temperature range A-6  
FMEC E1-120NP card  
block diagram 3-19  
connector pinout 3-19  
description 3-18  
fan speed 1-14  
FC_MR-4 card  
application 6-5  
block diagram 6-2  
compatible GBICs and SFPs 5-15  
cross-connect compatibility 6-3  
description 6-1  
faceplate 3-19  
specifications A-18  
temperature range A-6  
FMEC E1-120PROA card  
block diagram 3-21  
connector pinout 3-21  
description 3-21  
faceplate 6-2  
LEDs 6-2  
modes 6-3 to 6-5  
power requirement A-6  
specifications A-42  
temperature range A-7  
VCAT members 10-24  
fiber management 1-12  
filtering, rules for proxy server firewalls 12-16, 12-17  
faceplate 3-21  
specifications A-19  
temperature range A-7  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
FMEC E1-120PROB card  
block diagram 3-24  
connector pinout 3-24  
description 3-23  
compatibility 5-8  
compatible GBICs 5-15  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-7  
faceplate 3-24  
faceplate 5-7  
specifications A-20  
temperature range A-7  
FMEC-E1 card  
GBIC 5-7  
LEDs 5-8  
port status 5-8  
block diagram 3-16  
description 3-15  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-40  
faceplate 3-16  
G1K-4 card  
specifications A-17  
temperature range A-6  
FMEC-E3/DS3 card  
block diagram 3-28  
description 3-28  
block diagram 5-9  
compatible GBICs 5-15  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-8  
faceplate 5-9  
faceplate 3-28  
LEDs 5-10  
temperature range A-7  
FMEC STM1E 1:1 card  
block diagram 3-29  
description 3-29  
port status 5-10  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-41  
gateway  
faceplate 3-29  
default 12-3, 12-6  
on routing table 12-23  
Proxy ARP-enabled 12-4  
returning MAC address 12-4  
to non-LAN-connected nodes 12-1  
gateway network element. See proxy server  
GBIC  
specifications A-23  
foreign node connection (figure) 12-29  
four-fiber MS-SPRing. See MS-SPRing  
frame buffering 14-3  
front door  
equipment access 1-3  
label 1-6  
compatible cards 5-15  
CWDM and DWDM  
removing 1-5  
front mount electrical connection. See FMEC  
fuse and alarm panel 1-1  
description 5-16  
example 5-18  
placement 5-17  
supported wavelengths 5-17  
description 5-15  
G
figure 5-16  
G1000-4 card  
G1000-4 card 5-7  
block diagram 5-7  
circuit restrictions 14-19  
circuits 14-19  
used with Ethernet cards 5-14  
generic communication channel. See DCC/GCC  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
GNE. See proxy server  
subnetting 12-1  
GNE load balancing 12-17  
go-and-return SNCP routing 10-13  
grounding 1-14  
IP addressing scenarios  
CTC and nodes connected to router 12-3  
CTC and nodes on same subnet 12-2  
default gateway on CTC workstation 12-6  
dual GNEs on a subnet 12-17  
OSPF 12-9  
G-Series  
default SDH mode (diagram) 14-6  
in transponder mode (diagram) 14-7  
transponder mode characteristics 14-9  
G-Series Ethernet cards  
Proxy ARP and gateway 12-4  
proxy server 12-11 to 12-17  
secure mode enabled 12-19  
static routes connecting to LANs 12-7  
IP encapsulated tunnel 10-11  
IPX 14-2  
See also individual card names  
power requirements A-6, A-7  
H
I-Temp ranges A-6  
hold-off timer 11-18  
hop 12-8  
J
hub-and-spoke 14-22  
J1/J2 bytes 10-15  
J1/J2 path trace 10-15  
Java and CTC, overview 8-1  
JRE  
I
idle user timeout 9-5  
IEEE 802.1Q (priority queuing) 14-15  
IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation 14-4  
IEEE 802.3z flow control  
E-Series 14-12  
CTC requirements 8-3  
version requirements 8-5  
K
G-Series 14-3  
installation  
K byte 11-3  
coaxial cables 1-8, 1-10  
overview 1-1  
L
power supply 1-14  
Internet protocol. See IP  
interoperability  
LAN pin connections 1-14  
laser warning 1-6, 1-7  
Layer 2 switching 14-10  
LCD  
JRE compatibility 8-4  
software and hardware matrix 1-18 to 1-21  
IP  
description 1-13  
environments 12-1  
viewing alarm counts on 13-3  
linear ADM configuration 11-28  
linear mapper E-Series 14-11  
networking 12-1 to 12-25  
requirements 12-2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
line timing 9-7  
ML1000-2 card  
compatible SFPs 5-15  
link aggregation 14-4  
link integrity 14-4  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-12  
load balancing 10-10  
local craft pin connections 1-14  
Locked,disabled administrative state B-2  
Locked,maintenance administrative state B-2  
Locked,outOfGroup administrative state B-2  
Locked-disabled service state B-1  
Locked-enabled service state B-1  
login node groups 8-11  
faceplate 5-13  
LEDs 5-13  
port status 5-14  
slot compatibility 5-14  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-42  
ML100T-12 card  
loopbacks, card view indicator 8-9  
loopback secondary service state B-2  
cross-connect compatibility 2-4  
description 5-10  
faceplate 5-11  
LEDs 5-11  
M
port status 5-12  
slot compatibility 5-12  
software compatibility 5-2  
specifications A-41  
MAC address  
clear table 9-3  
proxy ARP 12-4  
ML-Series Ethernet cards  
See also individual card names  
power requirements A-6, A-7  
VCAT members 10-24  
monitor circuits 10-12  
MS-SPRing  
retrieve table 9-3  
maintenance secondary service state B-2  
managing fibers 1-12  
merge circuits 10-24  
MIB  
Ethernet 14-24  
bandwidth capacity 11-8  
connecting with SNCP 11-25  
DRI 11-18  
MIC-A/P card  
block diagram 3-30  
connector pinouts 3-31  
description 3-30  
DRI with opposite-side routing (figure) 11-20  
DRI with same-side routing (figure) 11-19  
fiber configuration example 11-12  
fiber connections 11-12  
faceplate 3-30  
specifications A-24  
MIC-C/T/P card  
five-node, two-fiber 11-10  
block diagram 3-33  
description 3-33  
four-fiber 11-6  
four-node, two-fiber (figure) 11-4  
four-node, two-fiber after line break (figure) 11-5  
increasing the traffic speed 11-31  
integrated DRI (figure) 11-21  
faceplate 3-33  
port status 3-34  
specifications A-25  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 8-3  
mismatchOfEquipment secondary service state B-2  
maximum node number 11-2  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
ring switching 11-8  
block diagram 4-19  
description 4-17  
span switching 11-7  
subtending from an MS-SPRing 11-28  
two-fiber description 11-2  
two-fiber ring example 11-10  
multicard EtherSwitch 14-10  
multicast 14-1  
faceplate 4-18  
LEDs 4-20  
port status 4-20  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-30  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card  
block diagram 4-11  
description 4-11  
multiple drops 10-12  
multiplex section-shared protection ring. See MS-SPRing  
faceplate 4-11  
N
LEDs 4-12  
port status 4-12  
Netscape 8-3  
software compatibility 4-3  
specifications A-28  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card  
block diagram 4-14  
description 4-12  
network element defaults  
node settings C-68  
networks  
building circuits 10-1  
IP networking 12-1 to 12-25  
SDH topologies 11-1 to 11-30  
timing example 9-7  
faceplate 4-13  
LEDs 4-14  
port status 4-15  
network view  
software compatibility 4-3  
specifications A-29  
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card  
block diagram (figure) 4-16  
description 4-15  
description 8-11  
CTC software versions (figure) 8-2  
login node groups 8-11  
node status (icon colors) 8-12  
node view  
faceplate (figure) 4-16  
LEDs 4-17  
description 8-7  
card colors 8-7  
port status 4-17  
creating users 9-1  
software compatibility 4-3  
specifications A-29  
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card  
block diagram 4-34  
description 4-32  
CTC software versions (figure) 8-2  
tabs list 8-10, 8-12  
viewing popup information 8-10  
notInstalled secondary service state B-2  
faceplate 4-33  
O
functionality 4-34  
LEDs 4-35  
OAM&P access 8-6  
port status 4-35  
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card  
software compatibility 4-4  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
specifications A-35  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card  
block diagram 4-36  
description 4-35  
faceplate 4-5  
LEDs 4-7  
port status 4-7  
software compatibility 4-3  
specifications A-26  
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards  
block diagram 4-28  
description 4-26  
faceplate 4-36, 4-37  
functionality 4-37  
LEDs 4-38  
port status 4-38  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-36  
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card  
block diagram 4-40  
description 4-39  
faceplate 4-27  
LEDs 4-29  
port status 4-29  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-33  
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card  
block diagram 4-22  
description 4-20  
faceplate 4-39  
functionality 4-40  
LEDs 4-41  
port status 4-41  
faceplate 4-21  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-38  
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card  
block diagram 4-31  
description 4-29  
LEDs 4-22  
port status 4-23  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-31  
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card  
block diagram 4-25  
description 4-23  
faceplate 4-30  
functionality 4-31  
LEDs 4-31  
faceplate 4-24  
port status 4-32  
LEDs 4-25  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-34  
OC3IR/STM1SH 1310-8 card  
block diagram 4-9  
description 4-7  
port status 4-26  
software compatibility 4-4  
specifications A-32  
open GNE 12-27  
Open Shortest Path First. See OSPF  
optical protection. See card protection  
orderwire  
faceplate 4-8  
LEDs 4-10  
port status 4-10  
description 2-19  
software compatibility 4-3  
specifications A-27  
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card  
block diagram 4-6  
description 4-4  
express 2-19  
local 2-19  
loop 2-20  
pin assignments 2-20  
OSPF  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
alternative to static routes 12-7  
definition 12-9 to 12-11  
trunk/trunk card combinations 12-23  
provisioning, documenting 13-1  
Proxy ARP  
enabled (figure) 12-10  
not enabled (figure) 12-11  
description 12-1  
outOfGroup secondary service state B-2  
enable an ONS 15454 SDH gateway 12-4  
use with static routes 12-5  
proxy server  
P
firewall filtering rules 12-16, 12-17  
gateway settings 12-13  
partial service state 10-6  
path signal label 10-15  
path trace 10-15  
GNE and ENE settings 12-14  
GNE and ENEs on different subnets (figure) 12-15  
GNE and ENEs on the same subnet (figure) 12-14  
provisioning 12-11 to 12-17  
with ENEs on multiple rings (figure) 12-16  
proxy tunnels  
PC. See computer  
PCM 2-19  
ping 12-2  
point-to-point. See Ethernet circuits  
popup data 8-10  
and proxy server in GNE or ENE mode 12-27  
for foreign terminations 12-28  
setting up 12-27  
port-mapped E-Series 14-11  
ports  
PST B-1  
card list 1-16  
PSTQ B-1  
drop 10-15  
line rate by card 1-16  
status 8-13  
Q
power monitoring 2-20  
power supply 1-14  
priority queuing 14-15  
protection, for circuits 10-7  
protection switching  
MS-SPRing span switching 11-7  
nonrevertive 7-4  
Q-tagging 14-13  
queuing 14-15  
R
rack size 1-2  
ring switching 11-8  
protocols  
reconfigure circuits 10-25  
revert 8-15  
IP 12-1  
rings  
Proxy ARP. See Proxy ARP  
spanning tree. See Spanning Tree Protocol  
SSM 9-8  
maximum per node 11-1  
subtended 11-26  
virtual 11-30  
provisionable patchcords  
client/client card combinations 12-22  
client/trunk card combinations 12-22  
description 12-21  
RJ-11 connector 2-20  
RJ-11 port 2-19, 2-20  
RJ-45 port 1-17, 2-21  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
RJ-45 port. See TCC2 card or TCC2P card  
RMON  
shortest path 11-2  
single-card EtherSwitch 14-11  
slots  
Ethernet alarm thresholds 14-23  
routing table 12-23  
card requirements 1-15  
FMEC symbols on 1-8  
physical description 1-15  
SNCP  
S
and Ethernet 10-20  
basic four-node ring (figure) 11-14  
circuit editing 10-12  
connecting with MS-SPRing 11-25  
description 11-13  
safety information 1-xxxii to ??  
SAN card. See FC_MR-4 card  
SDH  
K1, K2, and K3 bytes 11-3  
topologies 11-1  
DRI 11-22  
secondary sources 10-17  
secure mode, IP addressing 12-19  
secure shell 9-6  
go-and-return routing 10-13  
increasing the traffic speed 11-31  
ring with fiber break (figure) 11-15  
STM-1 ring (figure) 11-16  
switch protection paths 10-12  
virtual 10-18  
security  
idle user timeout 9-5  
requirements 9-1  
tasks per level 9-2, 9-4  
viewing 8-7  
with protected links 10-19  
soak time 10-6  
service states  
software  
card state transitions B-3  
overview B-1  
See also CTC  
card compatibility 2-2  
installation 8-1  
ports 8-8  
SFP  
revert 8-15  
description 5-18  
softwareDownload secondary service state B-2  
source 14-20, 14-23  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
configuration 14-18  
description 14-16  
figure 5-18, 5-19  
specifications A-3  
used with Ethernet cards 5-14  
shared packet ring 10-19, 10-21, 14-22  
shelf  
Gigabit EtherChannel 14-5  
multi-instance 14-17  
parameters 14-18  
bandwidth specifications A-1  
dimensions A-3  
environmental specifications A-3  
power specifications A-3  
specifications C-1  
shelf assembly  
span upgrades  
manual 11-32  
wizard 11-32  
SSH 9-6  
dimensions 1-3  
SSM 9-8  
four-node configuration 11-31  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
SST B-1  
ST3 clock 9-7  
state  
access to nodes 12-8  
destination host or network 12-23  
subnetwork connection protection rings. See SNCP  
subtending rings 11-26  
administrative B-2  
card state transitions B-3  
cross-connect state transitions B-5  
port state transitions B-5  
service B-1  
switching, revertive 7-3  
Sw-LCAS 6-4, 10-23  
synchronization status messaging. See SSM  
static routes 12-7  
T
STM1E-12 card  
description 3-13  
tabs  
block diagram 3-13  
overview 8-6  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
faceplate 3-13  
card view 8-14  
network view 8-12  
node view 8-10 to 8-11  
TCC2 card  
LEDs 3-14  
port status 3-14  
software compatibility 3-4  
specifications A-16  
card view 8-13  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
database backup 8-15  
description 2-4  
temperature range A-6  
STM-N cards  
See also individual card names  
in-service card upgrades 11-31  
in-service span upgrades 11-31  
path trace 10-15  
faceplate 2-5  
fan speed control 1-14  
functionality 2-6  
installed software 8-1  
LEDs 2-6  
power requirements A-5  
temperature range A-7  
timing 9-7  
network-level LEDs 2-10  
ports 12-25  
storage access networking. See FC_MR-4 card  
STP. See Spanning Tree Protocol  
string 10-15  
soft reset 8-15  
software compatibility 2-2  
software installation overview 8-3  
specifications A-8  
temperature range A-6  
TCC2P card  
subnet  
CTC and nodes on different subnets 12-3  
CTC and nodes on same subnet 12-2  
multiple subnets on the network 12-6  
using static routes 12-7  
with Proxy ARP 12-4, 12-5  
subnet mask  
card view 8-13  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
database backup 8-15  
description 2-7  
24-bit 12-24  
faceplate (figure) 2-8  
functionality 2-8  
32-bit 12-24  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
installed software 8-1  
LEDs 2-9  
U
unassigned secondary service state B-2  
unicast 14-1  
ports 12-25  
soft reset 8-15  
Unlocked,automaticInservice administrative state B-2  
Unlocked administrative state B-2  
Unlocked-disabled service state B-1  
Unlocked-enabled service state B-1  
user. See security  
software compatibility 2-2  
specifications A-8  
temperature range A-6  
third-party equipment 1-1, 10-10  
thresholds  
user data channel 2-20  
MIBs 14-23  
user-defined alarms  
timing  
See external alarms and controls  
BITS. See BITS  
alarm contact installation. See alarm pin fields  
(contacts)  
parameters 9-7  
pin connections 1-14  
report 9-7  
user setup 9-1  
specifications A-3  
TLS. See VLAN  
V
traffic  
VCAT, non-LCAS states 10-23  
views. See CTC  
monitoring 10-15  
routing 12-23  
virtual links 12-21  
traffic switching  
virtual local area network. See VLAN  
virtual rings 11-30  
multicard EtherSwitch 14-10  
single-card EtherSwitch 14-11  
transponder mode  
VLAN  
number supported 14-13  
spanning tree 14-17  
diagram 14-6  
for G-Series 14-5  
G-Series card characteristics 14-9  
one-port bidirectional 14-8  
two-port bidirectional 14-7  
two-port bidirectional G-Series card (diagram) 14-7  
two-port unidirectional 14-8  
tunnels  
W
WAN 12-1  
warning information 1-xxxii to ??  
west port 11-12  
workstation. See computer  
workstation requirements 8-3  
bidirectional low-order 10-21  
DCC 10-10  
IP encapsulated 10-11  
two-fiber MS-SPRing. See MS-SPRing  
X
XC10G card  
capacities 10-9  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
card view 8-13  
cross-connect compatibility 2-3  
cross-connect matrix 2-11  
described 10-9  
description 2-10  
faceplate 2-11  
LEDs 2-12  
overview 2-10  
software compatibility 2-3  
specifications A-9  
temperature range A-6  
XC-VXL-10G card  
card view 8-13  
cross-connect compatibililty 2-3  
cross-connect matrix 2-13  
described 10-10  
description 2-12  
faceplate 2-13  
LEDs 2-14  
software compatibility 2-3  
specifications A-10  
temperature ranges A-6  
XC-VXL-2.5G card  
card view 8-13  
cross-connect compatibililty 2-3  
cross-connect matrix 2-15  
described 10-10  
description 2-14  
faceplate 2-15  
LEDs 2-16  
software compatibility 2-3  
specifications A-10  
temperature ranges A-6  
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual, R5.0  
April 2008  
IN-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Concord Camera Digital Camera 4363z User Manual
Cooper Lighting Indoor Furnishings CAMBRIA 200 User Manual
Craftsman Trimmer 358791031 User Manual
Delkin Devices Indoor Fireplace EI 25 1 User Manual
DOD Musical Instrument VGS50 User Manual
Dymo Switch 40149 User Manual
Frigidaire Dishwasher 740 Series User Manual
Fundex Games Games Pick Up Sticks User Manual
GE Vacuum Cleaner 106585 User Manual
GE Washer 175D1807P283 User Manual